JP2020058934A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of defects as compared with a conventional game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game board in which a game using a game ball is played on the front side, a frame body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front, and a game ball supply unit that is provided on the rear side of the frame body and receives the game ball from the outside of the game machine to guide it to the downstream side. The game ball supply unit includes a ball storage unit that receives a game ball from the outside of the game machine, and a ball guiding unit for guiding the game ball stored in the ball storage unit to the downstream side and in which a discharge hole capable of dropping a foreign substance is formed. The ball guiding unit includes a visual recognition unit that makes the inner surface side of the ball guiding unit visible. The visual recognition unit is visible from the front of the game machine after the game board is detached.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, a gaming machine including a tank rail that guides a gaming ball from a ball tank to a downstream side has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball.

JP, 2013-215440, A (Drawing 2)

  By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, if foreign matter falling from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the gaming board arranged below the tank rail, electrical trouble occurs and the gaming machine malfunctions, causing malfunctions. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a problem as compared with the related art.

  The following are effective solutions for achieving the above object. The operation and the like will be described as needed. Further, for ease of understanding, configurations and the like corresponding to the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1, a game board in which a game using a game ball is played on the front side,
A frame body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front,
A game machine provided with a rear side of the frame main body, and including a game ball supply section for receiving a game ball from outside the game machine and guiding the game ball to a downstream side,
The game ball supply unit,
A ball storage unit that receives game balls from the outside of the gaming machine,
While guiding the game sphere stored in the sphere storage part to the downstream side, a ball guide part formed with a discharge hole capable of dropping foreign matter,
An opaque portion provided above the sphere guiding portion and formed of an opaque member,
The sphere guiding portion has a visual recognition portion that allows the inner surface side of the sphere guiding portion to be visually recognized,
After the game board is detached, the visually recognizable part is visible from the front of the game machine, and the opaque part is visually recognizable through the visually recognizable part.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects as compared with the related art.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door frame in the up-down direction center and was seen from above. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the door frame lower part unit at the center of the left-right direction, and was seen from the right. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which moved the 1st movable part of a door frame production | production apparatus to the raising end, (b) shows the state which moved the production | operation production part to the raising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view shown. FIG. 7A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 7B is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grill, the grille decoration frame, and the lattice decoration portion in FIG. (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of a door frame, (b) is an enlarged front view shown in the state which removed the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration part in (a). It is a top view of a door frame lower unit which shows the state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray of the door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ambient light area | region in a door frame. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the door frame effect display device and effect operation part in a door frame effect device, (b) is the decoration of the effect operation part by the effect image of a door frame effect display device. It is an explanatory view showing an example, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of a collaboration effect by the effect image of the door frame effect display device and the movable effect of the effect operation unit. It is a front view of the main body frame with the game board removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame in the state where the game board was removed from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the left front in the state where the game board was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is a rear cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. It is a rear view of a dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball drop prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 42 (a) as disassembled and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back at the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of FIG. 40 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a structure as a metal powder countermeasure. It is a structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and is a structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure with the game board removed. It is a front view of the main body frame with the game board attached. It is a front view of the main body frame with the game board removed. (A) is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed from the lower right front side, and (B) is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed of the modified example seen from the lower right front side. (A) When the game board is removed from the main body frame, the area where the upper decorative portion of the door frame is located corresponds to the position where the tank rail hangs down in the opening of the game board mounting portion when viewed from the front, and is indicated by the hatched portion. It is the figure shown, (B) is a figure which shows the side view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left side. (A) It is a top view which shows typically the tank rail seen from the upper part, (B) It is the front view which shows the tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine typically. (A) It is a top view which shows typically the tank rail seen from the upper part, (B) It is the front view which shows the tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine typically. (A) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover as seen from the front, and (B) is the inside of the second rail cover in a state in which the pachinko machine is tilted so that the side portion on which the ball guiding unit is provided is the lower surface FIG. It is a front view of the back side of the pachinko machine for explaining areas A and B. It is a division perspective view of a pachinko machine when a drawer connector is provided. It is a side view of a main body frame for explaining the position of the drawer connector when (A) the game board is not mounted and (B) when the game board is mounted. It is a front view of the back side of the pachinko machine when an external terminal plate is provided below the tank rail. It is a side view of the main body frame for explaining the position of the external terminal board when the game board is mounted. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the left front in the case of providing a projection part. It is a side view of a main body frame for explaining the position of the protrusion when (A) the game board is not mounted and (B) when the game board is mounted. It is a front view of a game board in which a game panel and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 67 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 6 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent. (A) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component member and a game panel as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area in which the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG. 77. 78A is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory different from FIG. 78 and the like, and FIG. 8B is an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory further different from FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows. FIG. 80A is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory, which is different from FIG. 80, and FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 82 is an enlarged view of a principal part, showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center accessory, which is different from FIGS. 80 and 81. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 1st production unit of a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the back 1st production unit of the back unit from the back. It is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the back first effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back second production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back second production unit of a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back 2nd production unit mainly for every structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back second production unit mainly for every composition and was seen from the back. It is a front view showing a drive mechanism in a back second effect unit. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the some rotary ornament in a back 2nd production unit. (E)-(g) is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the some rotary decorations in the back 2nd production unit which continues from FIG. It is a front view showing an arrangement of LEDs in the second rear effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back third production unit of a back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back third production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is a front view showing a drive mechanism and a decorative substrate in the back third effect unit in a state where the left horizontal ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which a plurality of rotary ornaments in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in a clockwise direction from a normal state. It is the front view which expands and shows the lower part of the game board in the state which moved the special rotation decoration body in the back second production unit to the specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decorative body and the lower vertical ring decorative body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring ornament, the lower vertical ring ornament, the left lateral ring ornament, and the right lateral ring ornament in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. It is the front view of the game board which shows one example of the production picture in the production display when trouble occurs in the back upper third production unit. It is the front view of the game board which shows one example of the shadow production which is executed during the luminous production in the back unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state where the game board faces the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. FIG. 2A is an enlarged view of a part of a region where an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a main control board, and FIG. 2B is a view of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board. FIG. 3A is a schematic view (a) of a surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which lead-type electronic components are replaced with SMD-type electronic components in a predetermined area, and lead-type electronic components are replaced with SMD-type electronic components. It is the schematic (b) which shows the surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the board | substrate which was reduced in size. It is a figure which shows the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. It is a perspective view of the main control board box of a main control unit. It is a figure (a) which shows the front surface (mounting surface) of a setting change board, and a figure (b) which shows the back surface (solder surface) of a setting change board, and a game in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board. It is a figure (c) which shows a lower part side view of a board. It is modification 1 (a) which shows the lower part left side view of the game board in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board, and is the game board in the state where the main control board box was attached to the game board. It is a modification 2 (b) which shows a lower part of the left side view. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 118. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of set value confirmation display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the pay-out control unit power-on processing of FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a sequel to the power-on control unit power-on processing subsequent to FIG. 125. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the special design and the special electric auditors product control processing which are executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit judging processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special winning opening opening and closing processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd entrance opening and closing processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and the normal electric auditors product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a behavior of a pachinko machine at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine during the setting change of the setting value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine during the confirmation display of the set value. 7 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of the set value. 9 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values. 8 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity during confirmation display of set values. It is a time chart which shows the command transmission timing at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. It is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the case where warning information is extended and performed after the end of a change permission state and a confirmation display state. It is a time chart which shows the case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. 9 is a time chart showing a modified example of the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while the setting value is being changed and the setting value is being confirmed and displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after turning on the power of the pachinko machine, Is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the variation pattern, It is a variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine is 500 times, It is a concrete example of the roulette effect as the suggested effect A2. It is a table showing a modification of the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a circuit diagram explaining an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which partially enlarged the power supply board. FIG. 172 is a view on arrow B in FIG. 172. This is silk printing (part 1) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. This is silk printing (part 2) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a figure which shows the specific electronic component among the some electronic components which have the same shape by the arrangement | positioning method. Examples (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation region is difficult to use, examples (1) and (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used, and examples in which the fusing confirmation region can be used (the 2) (e) and (f). These are examples (No. 1) (a) and (b) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used, and examples (No. 2) (c) and (d) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used. It is a figure which shows the fuse which is most easily blown out of three fuses by the arrangement method. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
An overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven by. The front frame is composed of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the left and right outer frame 10 and the right part 20 of the outer frame, which are separated from each other to the left and right, and the upper ends of the left part 10 of the outer frame and the right part 20 of the outer frame. An upper part 30, an outer frame lower part 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, an outer frame upper hinge part 50 attached to an upper left end of the outer frame upper part 30, An outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to a lower right side surface of the frame left portion 10 and an upper left end of the outer frame lower portion 40 is provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body frame The lower hinge portion 520 and the lower hinge portion 520 are rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

  The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 that visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, and a top plate 130 that stores the game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a. The lower plate 140 and the handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a are provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached by a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 such that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The main body frame 4 includes a game board mounting portion 301 that holds the game board 5 detachably from the front, a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 provided on the upper left side in front view, and a main body provided on the lower left side. The frame lower hinge portion 520, a ball launching device 540 provided on the right side below the game board mounting portion 301 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, the upper plate 130 and the lower plate. A payout device 580 for paying out the game ball B to 140, a locking unit 650 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are provided.

  In the body frame 4, a body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a body frame lower hinge portion 520 are attached to the outer frame 2 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 so as to be openable and closable, and a door (not shown) The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable via the frame upper hinge portion and the door frame lower hinge portion.

  The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame 4. Although not shown in the figure, the game board 5 is a general winning opening or a first starting opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. , A gate portion, a second starting opening, a special winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extends vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20. The outer frame upper part 30 which is connected, the outer frame lower part 40 which connects the lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, and the outer frame upper hinge attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper part 30. A portion 50, and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left portion 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower portion 40 are provided.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 may rotatably support the upper body frame hinge portion 510 and the lower body frame hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 coaxially by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[3. Door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically in a front view, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 stores a game window 201 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven is visibly closed from the front side, and a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a. The dish 130 and the handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper dish 130 into the game area 5a are provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and includes various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative portions are not plated with decoration at all, and some are decorated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter.

  In view of this, in the present embodiment, among various decorative parts, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are provided with metal door frames in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 described later via wiring (not shown). Electrically connected to the reinforcing unit (Various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring not shown, while the conductive member is directly made of metal. Some are also electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit). Thus, by transmitting the electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the board ground.

  Note that electromagnetic noise that has entered the decorative parts of all the front and back surfaces that have been subjected to decorative plating is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground described later It is transmitted to the frame earth substrate 559 through the line, and is transmitted from the frame earth substrate 559 to the island facility earth of the game hall through the island facility earth line and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame gland on the door frame side.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown) whose outer shape extends vertically in front view, and a portion from the lower end to a height of about 1/4 of the total height on the front surface of the door frame base unit. The door frame lower unit 100 provided, the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the upper side of the door frame lower unit 100 and on the front surface of the door frame base unit, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame 4, and The main frame lower hinge part 520 is provided with a door frame upper hinge part and a door frame lower hinge part (not shown) which are rotatably and detachably supported.

  The door frame base unit has a door frame base (not shown) having a game window 201 that is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and rear, and a rear side of the door frame base. The door frame main relay board (not shown) mounted near the right end of the rear view in the lower portion, the door frame sub relay board (not shown) mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board A handle rear relay substrate (not shown) mounted on the left side in rear view, a door frame relay substrate cover (not shown) covering the door frame main relay substrate and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate from the rear side, and a handle rear relay It is provided with a handle rear relay substrate cover (not shown) that covers the substrate from the rear side, and a cable cover (not shown) that covers the wiring cable (not shown).

  Further, the door frame base unit includes a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base, and a metal door frame upper hinge assembly attached to the door frame reinforcing unit. The solid body 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125, and a metal opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit are provided.

  The door frame reinforcing unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 127 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  In addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to give rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 through a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). Connected to each other. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 has a handle 111 that can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the game area 5a, a bulging portion 120 bulging forward, and a bulging portion 120. An upper plate 130 which is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 130 and stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 140 which is provided below the upper plate 130 and stores the game ball B, A door frame effect device 150 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion for presenting a predetermined effect to the player, and a game ball B in the upper plate 130 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 to the lower plate. To release the upper plate ball removal button 124, a ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and a door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126. Provided on the front surface of the display portion 185 and the bulging portion 120. It includes a lower front speaker 191, a being.

  The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a game window 201 having an inverted U-shaped inner periphery that allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 to be viewed from the front, and a transparent closing glass that closes the game window 201. 205, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided along the inner circumference of the game window 201, a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame A door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covering the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are provided. There is.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a ball feeding unit (not shown) for sending the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 67) controlled by the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 370.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the lower part of the door frame taken along the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 12A is a perspective view showing a state where the first movable part of the door frame effect device is moved to the rising end, and FIG. 12B is a state where the effect operation part is moved to the rising end from the state of FIG. It is a perspective view showing a state. FIG. 13A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 13B is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grill, the grille decoration frame, and the lattice decoration portion in FIG. 13A. .

  The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is also arranged below the game window 201 that visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 from the front side. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a handle unit 110 that can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the game area 5a, and above and to the left of the handle unit 110. A bulging portion 120 bulging forward with respect to the surface that closes the front surface of the body frame 4.

  Further, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B, and a center in the left-right direction below the upper plate 130. A lower plate 140 provided on the left side for storing the game balls B, and a door frame effect device provided on the device disposition part 123 on the upper surface of the bulging part 120 and capable of presenting a predetermined effect to the player. 150, a door frame sub-display portion 185 provided in the upper right corner in a front view, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided on the front surface of the bulging portion 120.

[3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 supports a handle 111 that a player can grab and rotate, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle 111 that is rotatable. And a handle base 113 that is provided. Further, the handle unit 110 is provided in the handle base 113, and the handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 67) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle 111 and that the player touches the handle 111. A handle touch sensor 115 for detecting, a handle return spring (not shown) for urging the handle 111 in the counterclockwise direction, and a one-shot button 116 that can be pressed by the player are provided.

  The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves rightward as it goes forward. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 111 of the handle unit 110, and can perform a rotating operation without feeling uncomfortable. Further, the handle unit 110 is configured such that the handle base 113 can be expanded and contracted in the extending direction of the rotation axis of the handle 111, and can be held at a desired expansion and contraction position. As a result, the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, so that the handle 111 can be operated at a position where the player can easily operate.

  The handle 111 is supported by the handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (four in this case) protrusions that are separated from each other in the circumferential direction and project from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 has a light-transmitting property, and can be illuminated and decorated in various colors by a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged in the rear.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. In accordance with the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 that changes due to the rotation operation of the handle 111, the driving force of the firing solenoid 331 in the ball launching device 540, which will be described later, changes, and the game ball with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111 and the like. When the player touches the handle 111 or the like, the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111 or the like changes. Therefore, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 111 or the like by the handle touch sensor, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is touching the handle 111. Detect. In the present embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is accepted, and the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. The drive of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled by and the game ball B can be hit.

  That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 without touching the handle 111, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 331 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 111 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  When the player presses the single-shot button 116 of the handle unit 110 while the handle 111 is rotating, the firing control unit 372 of the payout control board 370 stops the drive of the firing solenoid 331. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 111. Then, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 116, it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the one-shot button 116.

[3-1b. Bulge]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T-shape with a short axis extending vertically in a front view, and has a rear end side in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 in a plan view. It is formed in an isosceles trapezoidal shape in which the width becomes narrower toward the front with the entire width (see FIG. 10 and the like). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward slightly longer than half the length of the entire width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be located downward as it goes forward.

  The bulging portion 120 has a central portion that divides the entire width of the door frame 3 into three equal parts in the left-right direction and bulges forward over the entire height from the lower end of the door frame 3 to the upper surface. Of the door frame 3 bulges forward from about 1/3 of the total height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3. As a result, the bulging portion 120 has a T shape when viewed from the front. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker mounting opening 120a that is opened in a square shape at the lower center of the front surface. The lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment opening 120a.

  In addition, the bulging portion 120 has a vertically extending sound emitting slit 120b and a heat radiating slit on both left and right sides of a vertically extending portion (a portion where the speaker mounting opening 120a is open) in a T-shape when viewed from the front. 120c is provided. The sound emitting slit 120b is for emitting sound from a lower front speaker 191 described later to the outside. In addition, the heat dissipation slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first elevating drive motor 175b, the second elevating drive motor 182, the lower front speaker 191 and the like in the door frame effect device 150 described later to the outside.

  The bulging portion 120 includes a bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 provided on the upper end edge of the front surface, a bulging portion lower decoration portion 122 provided on the lower end edge of the front surface, and a rear end at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The device placement portion 123 provided so as to project from the side to the front side, the upper plate ball removal button 124 provided on the upper surface for discharging the game ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140, and the upper plate ball A ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided behind the pull-out button 124 are provided.

  The bulging part upper decoration part 121 and the bulging part lower decoration part 122 are translucent milky white and are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120 and is provided so as to decorate the upper edge of the front side of the upper plate 130 described below. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion decoration portion 121. The plurality of LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

  In the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121, the distance between the two rear ends that are separated in the left-right direction is such that the inside of the upper portion of the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame upper unit 200, which will be described later, is separated in the left-right direction. It matches the interval between the lower ends of the decorative portions 212. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is formed so as to match the upper inner decoration portion 212 when assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration together with the upper inner decoration portion 212. There is. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121, together with the upper inside decoration portion 212, constitutes a first ambient light area LA1 for performing light emission decoration around the game window 201.

  In addition, the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 decorates the upper side of the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 and also raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper plate 130. The bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is configured such that a part of the light from the LED 121a is irradiated into the upper plate 130 (inside the storage area 131), and the game stored in the storage area 131. It is possible to illuminate the sphere B with light to decorate it with light emission.

  The bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120. The bulging part lower decorative portion 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122a are arranged in a line in the extending direction of the bulging portion lower decorative portion 122. The plurality of LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

  The device placement portion 123 is formed in a shape such that the shape in plan view is a combination of a rectangle that is long in the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid whose bottom side is the front side of the rectangle. The width of the device placement portion 123 in the left-right direction on the rear end side is about ½ of the total width of the door frame 3. The device disposing portion 123 is open at the upper side of the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a container shape extending from the upper side to the inside of the bulging portion 120.

  The upper dish ball removal button 124 is provided on the right side of the upper dish 130 at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. By pressing the upper plate ball removing button 124 downward, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be discharged from the delivery port 136 to the lower plate 140. This upper plate ball removal button 124 releases the game ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140 only while it is being pressed, and when the pressing is released, it moves upward and returns to the original state, Discharge to the lower plate 140 is stopped.

  The outer bowl ball pulling button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper bowl pull-out button 124 has a light emitting decoration portion 124a that emits light by an LED arranged below. The light emitting decoration portion 124a is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the upper dish ball pull-out button 124. By illuminating the light emitting decoration portion 124a, it is possible to make the upper bowl ball-out button 124 emit light.

  The ball lending button 125 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 behind the upper dish ball removal button 124. The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 to the right of the ball lending button 125. The return button 126 has an outer shape of an equilateral triangle.

  The ball lending button 125 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes it to bring up a predetermined number of game balls B. It is supplied to the dish 130 and the game ball B is lent to the player. When the return button 126 is pressed, cash or a prepaid card inserted into a ball lending machine is deducted from the rented game ball B and returned. The remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display unit 185.

[3-1c. Plate]
The upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and has a storage region 131 in which the game ball B is stored. The storage area 131 is connected to the front area 131a on the front side of the apparatus placement section 123 (the area surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 15) and the side areas 131b on the left and right outer sides of the apparatus placement section 123 that are connected to each other. (A portion surrounded by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 15).

  The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end side toward the front front region 131a side. The side region 131b on the right side extends from the front region 131a on the front end side so that the width in the left-right direction becomes wider toward the rear partway, and then becomes narrower toward the rear end side in the front-rear direction. It is extended. The upper plate 130 (reservoir region 131) is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right outer sides of the device placement portion 123.

  The upper plate 130 includes a bottom wall 132 that forms a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 that rises upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall that rises upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 opening forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 opening forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and a delivery port 136. And an alignment section 137 that is provided in the vicinity of and aligns the game balls B toward the outlet 136.

  The bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 is inclined so as to decrease from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136. The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 stand substantially vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are mirror-finished. The upper plate 130 forms a storage region 131 by the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134. The depth of the upper plate 130 (the height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest portion (near the supply port 135).

  The supply port 135 is for supplying the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for delivering the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launching device 540 and the lower plate 140. The alignment portion 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 becomes lower toward the delivery port 136 near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device placement portion 123 that is a combination of the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in plan view. ing.

  Further, the upper plate 130 includes a stored light emitting decoration portion 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138a capable of emitting light toward the storage area 131. The plurality of LEDs 138a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, and above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132 to a height substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. It is provided. These LEDs 138a are full-color LEDs. By causing the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 to emit light, the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 or in the storage area 131 can be lightened and decorated.

  The upper plate 130 is provided with the bulging part upper decoration part 121 of the bulging part 120 on the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the front end side of the storage region 131 is raised by the bulging part top decoration part 121, and more The game ball B can be stored. Further, in the upper plate 130, a part of the light from the LED 121 a of the bulging part upper decoration part 121 is irradiated into the storage region 131, and the light from the bulging part top decoration part 121 is also used. The game ball B in the storage area 131 is illuminated and decorated.

  The upper plate 130 has a front region 131a on the front side of the device arrangement section 123 in which the door frame effect device 150 is disposed, and side regions 131b on both the left and right sides, and the door frame effect device 150 is formed by the front region 131a. Since the game balls B can be stored further forward, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, in the upper plate 130, the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend back and forth, so that in addition to the front region 131a, the game balls B stored in the side regions 131b are also included. , Can be easily seen from the player side.

  Therefore, since the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is easily visible, the player can be made aware of the storage amount of the game ball B, and thus the game ball B in the upper plate 130 as the game progresses. Even if the storage amount is consumed to reduce the storage amount, the player can easily recognize the decrease in the storage amount and the game ball B can be replenished in the upper plate 130. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper plate 130, to prevent a sudden interruption of the game, prevent discouragement of the player due to the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, since the player can easily see the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b, the player can gaze the line of sight below the game area 5a. By simply dropping it into the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B exists in the front area 131a, and the player does not need to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. It becomes possible to make the player concentrate on the game easily, entertain the game, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

  Furthermore, in the upper plate 130, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a, so that the game is performed. When the game ball B in the plate 130 is consumed, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (the front area 131a), and the player can easily recognize the consumption speed and the consumption amount of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to easily obtain the above-described effects.

  In addition, in the upper plate 130, a storage light emission decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131 is provided, and since the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game ball B, storage The game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be made to shine by the light from the light emitting decoration portion 138 and can be lightened and decorated, so that the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game balls B. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the stored amount of the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effect as the above. it can.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, etc. are formed in a mirror-like shape, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are the upper plate. Since it moves to the peripheral wall of 130, it can be made to the player the illusion that the game balls B are stored beyond the peripheral wall, and the upper plate 130 appears to store a large number of game balls B. be able to.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, since the alignment portion 137 is provided near the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from clogging in the vicinity of the delivery port 136. The game balls B stored in the plate 130 can be smoothly sent from the delivery port 136 to the ball launching device 540 and the lower plate 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the jamming of the game ball B, and it is possible to entertain the player with the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the upper plate 130, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the right side region 131b is visible from the front, the game ball B can be seen from the delivery port 136 which could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines. The state of being sent can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[3-1d. Lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 to the left of the central portion of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed in a shallow dish shape that opens upward. A space is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left side portion of the bulging portion 120) so that the player's hand can be inserted. The lower plate 140 has a front surface formed to have substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in a plan view.

  The lower plate 140 is formed at the lowest portion of the bottom wall, and can be opened and closed by the lower plate ball punching hole 141 (see FIG. 9) and by opening and closing the lower plate ball punching hole 141. There is a lower plate ball removal button 142 for discharging the game ball B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 67) for detecting that the lower plate 140 is full of the game ball B. are doing.

  The lower bowl 140 is supplied with the game balls B in the upper tray 130 by operating the upper bowl ball removal button 124. Further, the lower plate 140 is supplied with the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 in a state where the game balls B are filled in the upper plate 130. When the lower plate 140 is filled with the game balls B, the full plate detection sensor 143 detects that the lower plate 140 is full, and when the lower plate 140 is full, the payout device 580 plays the game ball B. Payment is temporarily stopped. After that, when the full tank in the lower plate 140 is eliminated (the full tank detection sensor 143 becomes non-detected), the temporary stop of the dispensing is released.

  The lower dish ball removal button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower dish 140 and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower dish ball removal button 142 is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal hole 141 is opened and the lower dish ball removal button 142 is held in a pressed state. When the lower dish ball removal button 142 is pushed further rearward in this state, the lower dish ball removal hole 141 is closed, and the lower dish ball removal button 142 moves forward and returns to the original state.

  The lower dish ball removal button 142 has a light emitting decoration portion 142a that emits light by an LED (not shown). The light emitting decoration portion 142a is arranged so as to surround both the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower dish ball removal button 142. By illuminating the light emitting decoration portion 142a, it is possible to make the lower dish ball removal button 142 emit light. For example, at the time of a "big hit" game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, the lower plate ball pull-out button 142 is illuminated by the light emitting decoration section 142a, so that the player's interest can be directed to the lower plate 140. By operating the lower plate ball removal button 142, the game ball B in the lower plate 140 can be discharged to a lower dollar box or the like, the lower plate 140 becomes full, and the payout of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. Can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall structure of door frame production device]
The door frame production device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement portion 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The door frame effect device 150 is a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device placement portion 123 that is open upward, and a door frame effect display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151. A lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152, a first movable portion 155 provided with an upper surface in front of the lower speaker unit 153 so as to be capable of moving up and down above the device cover 151, One operation part 160 is provided on the one movable part 155 so that it can be moved up and down, and the player can press the operation part 160, a first elevating mechanism 170 for elevating the first movable part 155, and a second elevating part for elevating the operation part 160. And a mechanism 180.

[3-1e-1. Device cover]
The device cover 151 is formed in a shape in which a planar view has the same shape as the device disposing portion 123 and is a combination of a quadrangle that is long in the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid whose front side is the base. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a that is large open in an isosceles trapezoidal shape in an isosceles trapezoidal portion, and an inclination that is bent and inclined so that the rear end side is upward near the center in the front-rear direction in a quadrangular portion. It has a surface portion 151b and a plurality of grill holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape in the vicinity of the front end of the rectangular portion. The device cover 151 is entirely inclined so that the front end side becomes low. The first movable portion 155 is inserted into the opening 151 a of the device cover 151.

  In the device cover 151, the upper end of the inclined surface portion 151b coincides with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. Further, the device cover 151 is inclined so that the front side of the inclined surface portion 151b becomes lower toward the front. As a result, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can be rolled forward and discharged into the upper plate 130.

[3-1e-2. Door frame effect display device]
In the door frame effect display device 152, the display screen for displaying the effect image is formed in a rectangle that is long in the left and right, and the length in the left and right direction is slightly shorter than 1/2 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in a slanted state so that the lower side is located forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is oriented near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. In the door frame effect display device 152, the upper side is located at a height near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, and the lower side is located at a height lower than the bottom surface of the front area 131a in the upper plate 130. Further, in the door frame effect display device 152, the upper side is located near the rear end of the door frame lower unit 100 (device cover 151), and the lower side is located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device having a screen ratio of 16: 9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 is attached to the pair of lower speakers 153a, the lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and the lower speaker base 153b. And a lower speaker decoration portion 153c that decorates the outer periphery and the space between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output sounds in the high frequency range.

  The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear side is located above the front side, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear side of the front surface vertically to the front side. It is shaped like a long container that is open to the left and right. Further, the lower speaker base 153b has circular mounting holes formed on the front surface thereof so as to be laterally separated from each other. The angle of inclination of the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b from the horizontal is smaller than the angle of inclination of the door frame effect display device 152 from the horizontal (see FIG. 11 and the like).

  The lower speaker decoration portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and has a plurality of annular portions arranged on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of lower speaker 153a. And an arcuate portion. The lower speaker decoration portion 153c has a light-transmitting property and can be light-embellished by causing an LED (not shown) mounted on the lower speaker decoration substrate to emit light.

  The lower speaker unit 153 is attached to the inside of the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a face forward through the attachment holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153a are directed near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located slightly lower than the vertical center of the door frame effect display device 152 and a lower end located slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. There is.

  Further, the lower speaker unit 153 has a front end located forward of the rear end of the opening 151a of the device cover 151 (slightly rearward from the performance operation unit 160), and a rear end of the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. It is located in the vicinity. The lower speaker unit 153 can be visually recognized through the transparent device cover 151. Further, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be satisfactorily radiated to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156.

  Further, in the lower speaker unit 153, the lower speaker decoration portion 153c is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the lower speaker decoration substrate (not shown), so that the lower speaker 153a and the speaker grill of the lower speaker 153a (the device cover 151 and the first movable portion main body). A light emitting decoration can be provided between the upper wall and the upper wall (156), and the player can see the light emitting decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First movable part]
The first movable portion 155 includes a container-like transparent first movable portion main body 156 that is open to the rear and the lower side, a first movable portion base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable portion main body 156, and a first movable portion base 157. A first movable portion cover 158 attached to the upper surface of one movable portion main body 156 and a first movable portion decoration substrate 159 attached to the inside of the side surface of the first movable portion main body 156 are provided (FIG. 11). And FIG. 12). The first movable portion 155 is arranged in the opening 151a of the device cover 151. The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first elevating mechanism 170 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and is also moved up and down by the first elevating mechanism 170.

  The shape of the first movable portion main body 156 in plan view is similar to the shape of the opening portion 151a of the device cover 151, and the first movable portion main body 156 has a combination of a rectangle that is long in the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid whose bottom side is the front side of the rectangle. It is formed in a shape. The first movable portion main body 156 is open at the rear and the lower side by an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid, and a side wall extending downward from a side of the upper wall excluding a rear side. It is formed in a container shape. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side becomes lower, and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction becomes higher.

  The first movable portion main body 156 has an opening 156a penetrating in the shape of a rectangle that is long in the left-right direction near the front end of the upper wall, and a plurality of grilles penetrating in a hexagonal shape in a portion of the upper wall excluding the opening 156a. It has a hole 156b and a plurality of through holes 156c which are arranged in the circumferential direction on the side wall and penetrate in a rectangular shape. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed in such a size that the LED 159a mounted on the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 faces the outside.

  The first movable portion base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape that is long in the left and right directions. The width of the first movable portion base 157 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the width of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156 in the front-rear direction. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 such that the front end thereof is substantially at the same position as the front end of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156 in the front-rear direction. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 in a horizontal state. The first movable portion base 157 has a pair of lifting sliders 172 of the first lifting mechanism 170 attached to the lower surface, and a second lifting base 181 of the second lifting mechanism 180 attached to the upper surface.

  The outer shape of the first movable portion cover 158 is the same as that of the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156, and is formed to have the same size. The first movable portion cover 158 includes a horizontally elongated rectangular opening frame portion 158a corresponding to the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156, and a plurality of louver portions 158b extending in the left-right direction and separated in the front-rear direction. ,have. The first movable portion cover 158 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 projects downward from the lower end of the louver portion 158b and is inserted into the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The effect operation part 160 is inserted into the frame of the opening frame part 158a.

  The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 extends at a constant width except for the left and right ends, and is formed in a triangular shape such that the left and right ends extend obliquely forward. . A plurality (five in this case) of louver portions 158b are provided at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored between the louver parts 158b. Incidentally, one game ball B is located between the first louver parts 158b from the front, two game balls B are located between the second louver parts 158b, and the third louver parts 158b are located between them. Three game balls B can be stored between each (see FIG. 15).

  A plurality of LEDs 159a are mounted on the front surface of the first movable portion decoration substrate 159. The plurality of LEDs 159a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156c of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable portion decoration substrate 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 so that the plurality of mounted LEDs 159a faces the outside from the through holes 156c of the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 is a full-color LED.

  When the LED 159a is caused to emit light in the state in which the first movable portion 155 is lowered (normal state), the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 separates the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 from the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156. Through the space, the upper portion of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be illuminated and decorated. Further, when the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 causes the LED 159a to emit light while the first movable portion 155 is raised, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 can be illuminated and decorated, and the interior of the storage region 131 and Light can be emitted forward (on the player side).

[3-1e-5. Production operation part]
The effect operation unit 160 is a so-called push button that is provided so as to be able to move up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155 and that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 160 is supported by the second elevating mechanism 180 so as to be elevatable, and is raised and lowered by the second elevating mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The effect operation unit 160 is a translucent pressing operation unit 161 having the letters “PUSH” formed on the upper surface, and an operation arranged below the pressing operation unit 161 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. Section decoration board 162, operation section movable base 163 on which pressing operation section 161 and operation section decoration board 162 are attached to the upper surface, and operation section movable base 163 are supported so that they can be moved up and down, and the lower surface is second elevating mechanism 180. The operating portion base 164 attached to the first movable portion 155 via the (second elevating base 181), the operating portion spring biasing the operating portion movable base 163 upward, and the biasing force of the operating portion spring. And a pressing detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 67) that detects the pressing operation portion 161 that has moved downward against the pressure.

  The pressing operation portion 161 is a rectangle that is long in the left and right, and the letters "PUSH" are formed on the upper surface in a relief shape. The outer peripheral shape of the pressing operation portion 161 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation portion decoration board 162 are full-color LEDs. The operation unit decoration board 162 has a first LED that emits light upward and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation unit decoration substrate 162. The operation portion decoration board 162 can cause the pressing operation portion 161 (character “PUSH”) to emit light by causing the first LED to emit light. Further, by causing the second LED to emit light, the peripheral wall of the operation portion movable base 163 can be lightened and decorated, and when the effect operation portion 160 is at the lower end, the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is opened. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a box shape that is long in the left and right and is open at the bottom. The operating portion movable base 163 is formed slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the pressing operating portion 161. A pressing operation portion 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation portion movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation portion decoration substrate 162. The operating portion base 164 is inserted into the operating portion movable base 163 from below.

  The operation portion base 164 has a box-shaped portion that is long enough to be inserted into the operation portion movable base 163 and has an open upper portion, and a box-shaped portion to the same position as the outer periphery of the operation portion movable base 163. And a flange-shaped portion projecting outward. The operation portion base 164 supports the operation portion movable base 163 so as to be able to move up and down within a predetermined range. The second lifting mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operation portion base 164.

  The upper end of the operation spring is in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation unit movable base 163, and the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation unit base 164. The pressing detection sensor 165 is attached inside the operation unit base 164, and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161 via the operation unit movable base 163. Detect.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 11, the first elevating mechanism 170 is attached inside the bulging portion 120, and is for elevating the first movable portion 155. The first elevating mechanism 170 includes a pair of elevating rails 171 that are attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and a pair of elevating elevators that are vertically guided by the pair of elevating rails 171. A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 connecting a pair of lift sliders 172, one end rotatably attached to the lift slider 172, and the other end rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120. A pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating drive mechanism 175 that rotates the pair of elevating arms 174, respectively, and a first elevating detection sensor 176 that detects the elevating position of the elevating slider 172 (first movable portion 155), Is equipped with.

  The pair of up-and-down rails 171 are separated from each other in the left-right direction at an interval longer than the length of the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161) in the left-right direction. The pair of lift rails 171 are attached inside the bulging portion 120 so as to extend vertically. An upper end of each of the pair of elevating sliders 172 is attached to the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155, and each lower end thereof is attached to the connecting portion 173.

  The pair of elevating arms 174 are attached to the corresponding elevating sliders 172 so that their front end sides are rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and are slidable in the longitudinal direction of the elevating arms 174. . Further, the pair of elevating arms 174 is attached at the rear end side to the bulging portion 120 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction. Each of the pair of lifting arms 174 has a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

  The first lifting drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of lifting arms 174. That is, a pair of the first elevating and lowering drive mechanism 175 is provided. The first elevating mechanism 170 rotates the pair of elevating arms 174 in a direction in which the front end sides of the pair of elevating arms 174 move upward by the first elevating drive mechanism 175, respectively, so that the tip ends of the pair of elevating arms 174. The first movable part 155 (effect operation part 160) can be moved up and down via the pair of elevating sliders 172 attached respectively.

  The first elevating drive mechanism 175 will be described in detail. The first elevating drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and revolves around an axis extending in the left-right direction. It has the pin 175a and the 1st raising / lowering drive motor 175b which revolves the 1st raising / lowering pin 175a. More specifically, the first elevating and lowering drive mechanism 175 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120, and has a flat plate-shaped drive base 175c extending in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and extends in the left-right direction on the drive base 175c. A spur gear-shaped lifting gear 175d in which the first lifting pin 175a is mounted at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft is rotatably mounted around the shaft, and is engaged with the lifting gear 175d. And a drive gear 175e attached to the rotary shaft of one lift drive motor 175b.

  In the present embodiment, two first elevating drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and drive gears 175e attached to the rotary shafts of the respective first elevating drive motors 175b are attached to the elevating gear 175d. They are in mesh with each other. That is, one elevating gear 175d is rotated by the two first elevating drive motors 175b.

  When the drive gears 175e attached to the respective rotary shafts of the two first lift drive motors 175b are rotated in the same direction, the first lift drive mechanism 175 causes the drive gears 175e to mesh with each other. As the 175d rotates, the first lifting pin 175a revolves around the axis of the lifting gear 175d. When the first elevating pin 175a revolves, the first elevating pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, so that the elevating arm 174 moves toward the rear end side. It will rotate (rotate) around. As a result, the front end side of the elevating arm 174 moves in the vertical direction, so that the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down via the elevating slider 172 to which the front end side of the elevating arm 174 is attached.

  The first lift detection sensor 176 is in a detection state when the pair of lift sliders 172 is located at the downward movement end (falling end). That is, the first lift detection sensor 176 detects that the first movable portion 155 is located at the lower end via the lift slider 172.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 of the first movable part 155, and supports the operation part base 164 of the performance operation part 160 so that it can be moved up and down. A second lifting drive motor 182 mounted on the second lifting base 181; and a second lifting pin 183 mounted on the rotation shaft of the second lifting drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft. An elevating and lowering transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction into which the second elevating pin 183 is slidably inserted and having an upper portion attached to the operation section base 164, and a second elevating base 181 (production operation section 160). A second lift detection sensor 180a for detecting the lift of the.

  The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 has a direction in which the operation portion base 164 is perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 161 (the direction in which the inclined axis extends so as to be positioned forward as it extends upward). ) Is supported so that it can be raised and lowered.

  When the second lifting / lowering drive motor 182 revolves the second lifting / lowering pin 183, the second lifting / lowering mechanism 180 causes the second lifting / lowering pin 183 to slide in the slit 184a of the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 and move the inner surface of the slit 184a up and down. Then, the lifting / lowering transmission piece 184 moves vertically. Since the operation section base 164 of the effect operation section 160 is attached to the up-and-down transmission piece 184, the effect operation section 160 can be moved up and down via the up-and-down transmission piece 184.

  In the second elevating mechanism 180, the second elevating pin 183 is located near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction in a state where the elevating transmission piece 184 (effect operation unit 160) is located at the lower end. There is. That is, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. When raising the raising / lowering transmission piece 184 from this state, the second raising / lowering drive motor 182 revolves the second raising / lowering pin 183 so as to have a forward movement vector. As a result, the second elevating pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, the second elevating pin 183 presses the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, and the elevating transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

  When the second elevating pin 183 further revolves and the line connecting the center of the second elevating pin 183 and the revolution center passes the central axis of the slit 184a, the second elevating pin 183 moves upwards on the inner surface of the slit 184a. It slides rearward in the slit 184a while pressing to. When the second elevating pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second elevating drive motor 182 is stopped, and the revolution of the second elevating pin 183 is stopped. In this state, the second lifting pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the lifting transmission piece 184 is located at the rising end.

  When the force for moving the up-and-down transmission piece 184 acts by pressing the production operation section 160 or the like in a state where the up-and-down transmission piece 184 (production operation section 160) is located at the rising end, Since the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, no force in the front-rear direction acts on the second elevating pin 183. Therefore, since the second lifting pin 183 does not revolve, the lifting transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

  Further, when the production operation unit 160 is pressed while the elevation transmission piece 184 is located at the rising end, the player located in front of the production operation unit 160 operates it, so the production operation unit 160 is operated. On the other hand, in addition to the downward movement vector, the backward movement vector acts. On the other hand, in the state of the rising end, since the second elevating pin 183 is located at the rear end of the slit 184a, even if a backward movement vector acts on the second elevating pin 183 via the slit 184a, The second elevating pin 183 contacts the rear end of the slit 184a to prevent the second elevating pin 183 from revolving, the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward, and the performance operating unit 160 is moved to the upper end position. Can be maintained.

  The second lift detection sensor 180a is in the detection state when the second lift base 181 is located at the downward movement end (falling end). That is, the second elevating / lowering detection sensor 180a detects that the effect operation unit 160 is located at the lower end via the second elevating / lowering base 181.

[3-1f. Door frame sub-display section]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150 and behind the upper bowl ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is provided in an inclined state such that the lower end side is located forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display portion 185 is arranged at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 project.

  The door frame sub-display unit 185 includes a frame-shaped sub-display unit decoration frame 186 that light-emits the outer periphery of three square 7-segment LEDs, and a door-frame rendering device 150 that covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decoration frame 186. And a transparent sub-display section cover 187 that is inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface section 151b of the device cover 151 in FIG.

[3-1 g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 has a lower front speaker 191 mounted behind the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120 and a plurality of grill holes penetrating the speaker mounting opening 120a. A lower front speaker grill 192 for closing the door, a horizontal lattice-shaped grille decoration frame 193 arranged in front of the lower front speaker grille 192 and attached to the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and each lattice in the grille decoration frame 193. Each of the lattice decoration parts 194 is provided with a rod-shaped lattice decoration part 194 arranged on the rear side of each of the parts, and a lattice decoration LED 195 provided on both ends of each lattice decoration part 194 to light-emit the lattice decoration part 194.

  The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs sounds in the low frequency range. The lower front speaker grill 192 is attached inside the bulging portion 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is punched metal.

  The grille decoration frame 193 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grille decorative frame 193 connects a rectangular frame portion along the inner circumference of the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120 and a plurality of vertically arranged two sides extending vertically of the frame portion so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. And a lattice part of. The grid portion extending to the left and right of the grille decoration frame 193 extends with a constant width in a portion (general portion) excluding both end portions in the left-right direction, and both end portions in the left-right direction are slanted downward toward the end portion. It is formed into a trapezoidal shape that spreads over a certain width and then extends with a constant width.

  The lattice decoration portion 194 has a light-transmitting property and is formed in a columnar shape that is long in the left and right directions. Both ends in the left-right direction of the lattice decoration portion 194 are located on the rear side of the trapezoidal portion of the grill portion in the grille decoration frame 193, and the remaining portions are located below the general portion of the lattice portion. Thereby, the lattice decoration portion 194 can visually recognize a portion excluding both ends from the front. The plurality of lattice decorations 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grill 192. The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full-color LED.

  The lower front speaker unit 190 can output a sound in the low frequency range (low frequency) of the sounds to be output by the lower front speaker 191. Since the lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, sound pressure is applied to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Can be made. Further, the lower front speaker unit 190 can cause the lattice decoration portion 194 to emit light by appropriately emitting the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195, and at the same time, through the lattice decoration portion 194, inside the grille decoration frame 193 (lower front speaker). The front side of the grill 192) can be illuminated.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly described. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown), and cooperates with the locking unit 650 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame. It is used for opening and closing lock with 4. The cylinder lock 127 is a cylindrical cylinder body made of metal (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 128 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a keyhole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the lock member and rotates together with the rotation of the regular metal key.

  The cylinder body of the cylinder lock 127 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the metal transmission cylinder 654 of the metal locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, it is possible to transmit the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 128) to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate the rotation. When the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are in contact with each other in the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 and the locking unit 650 are electrically connected.

  It should be noted that the cylinder lock 127 is made of a regular metal by a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. The key is inserted into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction or counterclockwise direction, respectively, corresponding direction). When a regular metal key is inserted into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall uses the regular metal key to generate electromagnetic noise caused by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Will be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various substrates (for example, a substrate having a power supply line and a substrate ground line) are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent intrusion of electromagnetic noise.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10 and 14. FIG. 14A is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and FIG. 14B is an enlarged front view showing the state in which the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration portion are removed in FIG. The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 is a game window 201 in which the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 is visible from the front. And a door frame upper unit base 202 formed in an inverted U shape with an inner periphery that is a game window 201 having a vertically long outer periphery in a front view and opened downward, and is provided on the door frame upper unit base 202. The door frame upper unit base 202 is provided with a transparent closing glass 205 that closes the inner periphery (game window 201) of the inverted U shape.

  Further, the door frame upper unit 200, the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210, which is provided in a strip shape along the inner periphery of the inverted U-shape of the game window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the door frame upper unit. A door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided on the front surface of the base 202 outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame covering the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 The upper outer edge decoration unit 230 and the upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 are provided.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 has a flat plate shape and is formed in a gate shape opened downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer circumference is vertically long when viewed from the front, and is formed in an inverted U shape whose inner circumference is opened downward. The inner peripheral size of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed to be larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged rearward.

[3-2b. Closed glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . The closing glass 205 is provided in the game area 5a so that the game ball B does not drop forward from the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. It is for closing the front side of. The closing glass 205 is a transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Decoration unit in the upper part of the door frame]
The door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width, and extends forward along the wall-shaped upper inner base 211, and along the upper inner base 211. A semi-cylindrical upper inner decoration portion 212 that extends and is provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper portion that is provided behind the upper inner decoration portion 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. And a decorative substrate 213.

  The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U shape when viewed from the front. At the front end of the upper inner base 211, a pair of straight U-shaped portions extending vertically extends vertically, and a portion of the inverted U-shaped half-arc extending in a semi-circular shape goes upward. It is curved so as to project forward. The upper inner base 211 is opaque. The distance between the lower ends of the upper inner bases 211 in the left-right direction is the same as the distance between the rear ends of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame lower unit 100, which are separated from each other on the left and right sides of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121.

  The upper interior decoration portion 212 is translucent milky white and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper inner decoration substrate 213 is attached to the upper inner base 211, and a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface are arranged in line along the upper inner decoration portion 212. The LEDs 213a of the upper interior decoration substrate 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper interior decoration substrate 213, the upper interior decoration part 212 can be illuminated.

  The door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is formed such that the lower end of the upper interior decoration portion 212 is aligned with the rear end of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 when assembled to the door frame 3. Therefore, the upper interior decoration portion 212 and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 form one continuous decoration.

  The upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 are the first ambient light area LA1 for light-emitting decoration around the game window 201 (enclosed by a dashed line in FIG. 16). Part of the body). Further, since the upper interior decoration portion 212 is formed in a milky white color, it is possible to reduce the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a and radiate the light outward, and thus the game window surrounded by the upper interior decoration portion 212. The inside of 201 can be prevented from being difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2d. Door frame upper outside decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and protrudes forward and has a plurality of protruding bases 221 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. , An upper outer crown decoration portion 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221, an upper outer valley decoration portion 223 arranged between the protruding bases 221, and a rear portion of the upper outer crown decoration portion 222, respectively. The upper outer valley LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 arranged behind the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 are provided.

  The protruding base 221 is formed into an isosceles triangle in a side view. The protruding base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to the vicinity of the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202, and is formed to extend outward from the upper inner base 211. The front end of the projecting base 221 projects forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211.

  The plurality of upper outer decoration portions 222 are formed in a columnar shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The outer diameter of the cylinder of the upper outer decoration portion 222 is formed to be about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the upper inner decoration portion 212. The upper outer decoration portion 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the left-right length of the protruding base 221 provided. The upper outer decorative portion 222 has translucency.

  The upper outer valley decoration portion 223 includes a portion (vertical surface portion) extending between the protruding bases 221 in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a lower surface or an upper surface of the protruding base 221 from an upper side or a lower side of the portion. And a portion (oblique surface portion) obliquely extending to the vicinity of the front end of the protruding base 221 along the. The upper outer valley decoration portion 223 has a mirror-like plating layer on the surface (front surface). In addition, the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 has a square opening formed in a portion extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 arranged rearward faces the front. ing.

  The top outer LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a full-color LED with high brightness.

  The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can cause the upper outer decoration portion 222 to emit light by appropriately causing the upper outer LED 224 to emit light. In addition, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can appropriately light the upper outer valley LED 225 to lighten the upper outer valley decoration portion 223, and at the same time, can vertically separate the upper outer decoration portion 222. You can shine brightly between each other.

  The upper outer decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 are the second ambient light area LA2 (FIG. 16) that performs light emission decoration around the game window 201 outside the first ambient light area LA1. The area surrounded by the chain double-dashed line). In addition, the front ends of the upper outer crown decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 are located rearward of the front ends of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and the upper outer crown decorative portion 222 and the upper outer portion. Even if the valley decoration portion 223 is decorated with light emission, it is possible to prevent the inside of the game window 201 from being difficult to see due to glare, and it is possible to visually recognize the game area 5a from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged along the outer peripheral edges (left and right sides, and upper side) of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the outer periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202. A door frame upper cover 232 that is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inside decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outside decoration unit 220, and an opaque decoration portion 233 provided on both left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame upper cover 232 connects a pair of side walls extending forward from portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202, and connects the upper sides of the pair of side walls to each other near the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is composed of an upper wall that extends forward from the part and a front wall that connects the front side of the pair of side walls and the front side of the upper wall, and is formed in a box shape with the rear side and the lower side open. Has been done. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparent.

  The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the upper inner decoration portion 212 so that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212. More specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to a height near the upper end of a portion of the game window 201 that extends linearly in an inverted U shape, and from there, the door frame upper unit base 202 It is curved and extends in an arc shape so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state. Further, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved upward in a circular arc shape so that they approach each other.

  The door frame upper cover 232 has a pair of speaker mounting openings 232a formed in the upper left and right corners of the front wall, to which the grille decorative frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 and the like are mounted.

  The opaque decoration portion 233 is provided on the outer surface of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. The opaque decorative portion 233 has a slit 233a extending in the front-rear direction at the same height as the protruding base 221 of the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 is exposed to the outside through the slit 233a of the opaque decoration portion 233.

  The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 so as to be visible from the front by the door frame upper cover 232. Further, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 appropriately emits light from the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 to thereby cause the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (the side wall and the upper wall, respectively). The front end) and can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has the opaque decoration portions 233 on both the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent irradiation from being given to another player sitting in front of another pachinko machine arranged adjacent to the machine 1.

  The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 (the front edge outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) is a third ambient light area LA3 (around the game window 201) that emits light outside the second ambient light area LA2. In FIG. 16, a portion surrounded by a broken line) is configured. Further, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are arranged on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light, the inside of the game window 201 remains. It is possible to prevent it from being difficult to see due to glare, and it is possible to visually recognize the game area 5a in a good state from the front through the game window 201.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 closes the upper speakers 241 that are respectively mounted near the left and right corners of the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the speaker mounting openings 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of the respective upper speakers 241. An upper speaker grill (not shown), a horizontal grid-shaped grille decoration frame 243 arranged in front of the upper speaker grille and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same as each grid portion in the grille decoration frame 243. A rod-shaped lattice decoration portion 244 arranged behind the upper speaker grille at intervals, and a lattice decoration LED 245 provided at the outer end of each lattice decoration portion 244 in the left-right direction to illuminate the lattice decoration portion. 14).

  Each of the upper speakers 241 is obliquely attached to the door frame upper unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached to the rear side of the adjacent upper outer decoration portion 222 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs sound in the entire range of bass to treble. The upper speaker grill is attached to the inside of the door frame upper cover 232 (the rear surface of the front wall). The upper speaker grill is punched metal.

  The grille decoration frame 243 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The grille decoration frame 243 is arranged such that the frame part having a shape along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 and the two sides extending vertically of the frame part are connected to each other and vertically separated from each other. And a plurality of lattice portions. The lattice part extending to the left and right of the grille decoration frame 243 has a constant width at a part (general part) excluding the end part on the outer side in the left-right direction of the door frame 3, and the end part on the outer side in the left-right direction. Is formed in a trapezoidal shape that extends obliquely downward toward the end and then extends with a constant width.

  The lattice decoration portion 244 has a light-transmitting property and is formed in a columnar shape that is long in the left and right directions. The lattice decoration portion 244 can be viewed from the front through the upper speaker grill. The lattice decoration LED 245 is a full-color LED.

  The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can cause the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245 to emit light as appropriate so that the lattice decoration portion 244 can be illuminated and decorated, and the grill decoration frame 243 (the upper speaker grill's The rear surface side) can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the upper speaker unit 240, the upper outer decoration portion 222 arranged in the upper speaker grill (grill decoration frame 243) is located in front of the upper speaker 241 in the front view. That is, between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grill, the lattice decoration portion 244 capable of light emission decoration and the upper outer decoration portion 222 are arranged. As a result, when the upper outer decoration portion 222 and the lattice decoration portion 244 are light-emitted, it is possible to show the player the effect that the inner side of the speaker grill is light-emitted, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the overall configuration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state where game balls are stored in the upper tray of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing the ambient light area in the door frame. The door frame 3 allows most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be visible from the front through the game window 201 in a state where the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed. be able to. Further, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

  As shown in FIG. 16 and the like, in the door frame 3, the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 and the upper inner decoration portion 212 are connected in a ring shape, and the upper plate 130, the door frame rendering device 150, and A game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, the upper inner decorative portion 212, and the (first ambient light area LA1). Further, the outside of the upper inner decoration portion 212 is surrounded by the upper outer crown decoration portion 222, the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 (second ambient light area LA2), and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third ambient light area LA3). There is. That is, the game window 201 is triple-circumscribed by the three peripheral light areas LA1, the second peripheral light area LA2, and the third peripheral light area LA3.

  The door frame 3 is formed so that the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 surrounds the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 of the bulging portion 120. It circulates along the front edge and is delivered to the outside (the lower plate 140 or the ball launching device 540) from the delivery port 136.

  In the normal state of the door frame 3, the first movable part 155 and the effect operation part 160 of the door frame effect device 150 are respectively located at the downward moving end (downward end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is located slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is located slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable unit body 156.

  The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 over the entire length at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130. By this bulging portion upper decoration portion 121, the upper end of the wall for storing the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is raised. The upper end on the front side (on the front region 131a side) of the bulging part upper decoration part 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (first movable part 155) in the normal state. As a result, when the upper plate 130 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B overflow to the door frame effect device 150 side, and the upper plate 130 is full of the game balls B for the player. It is possible to make it easier to recognize, and to prevent the game ball B from spilling forward from the upper plate 130.

  In the door frame 3, in the right corner on the right side of the upper plate 130 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are collected. The surface on which the upper plate ball withdrawal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, and also forward. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the bottom. As a result, when the game ball B is placed on the surface on which the upper dish ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided, the game ball B is formed by the surface and the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121. Can roll to the side of the upper plate 130 and be discharged into the upper plate 130.

  Further, in the door frame 3, since the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 (that is, the inner surface of the upper plate 130) forming the upper plate 130 are formed into a mirror surface, The game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are transferred to the inner surface of the upper plate 130, so that the image of the game balls B reflected in the upper plate 130 makes an illusion that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. In addition, the volume of the upper plate 130 can be made to appear large.

  In the upper frame 130 of the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 first rolls forward in the left side region 131b, and then enters the front region 131a to enter the front region 131a. Roll inside to the right. Then, after entering the right side region 131b from the right end of the front region 131a and rolling rearward in the right side region 131b, the flow of the game ball B is sent out from the outlet 136 to the outside. Can be shown (see FIG. 15). At this time, since the game ball B flows in the front area 131a closer to the player than the door frame effect device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be visually recognized well, and the inside of the upper plate 130 can be visually recognized. It is possible to easily confirm the storage amount of the game ball B in.

  Further, in the door frame 3, since the outlet 136 is provided at the rear end of the right side region 131b where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper plate 130, the outlet 136 can be visually recognized from the player side. it can. As a result, it is possible to show the player how the game ball B is sent from the delivery port 136 (upper plate 130) to the ball launching device 540, which could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines.

  The door frame 3 can visually recognize the pair of lower speakers 153a through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156, and visually recognize the door frame effect display device 152 behind the lower speaker 153a. be able to. In the door frame 3, the upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 is close to the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. As a result, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are brought close to each other, so that the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 form one screen. Can be displayed.

  In the door frame effect display device 152 that is arranged behind the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 has its lower side positioned below the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160, and its upper side in the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160. The door frame effect display device 152 is higher than the effect operation unit 160. Thereby, compared with the case where the entire door frame effect display device 152 is made lower than the effect operation unit 160, even if the door frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation unit 160, the door frame effect display device from the player side. 152 can be made easy to see. Further, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the amount of bulging forward of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed, and thus the bulging portion 120 squeezes the player. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling, to entertain the game in a comfortable state for the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 is diagonally arranged behind the effect operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (the range between the two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is near the effect operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the player looks at the door frame effect display device 152 from the player side, the effect operation unit 160 is visible near the lower outer edge of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying an effect image that decorates the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation unit 160 can be decorated by the effect image, and the effect operation unit can be changed by changing the effect image. The decoration of 160 can be variously changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

  Furthermore, since the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 can be seen in the vicinity of the effect operation part 160, the door frame 3 does not need to display the image of the effect operation part 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, but the effect operation part is displayed. Since it is possible to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 160 by displaying an image of an arrow or a hand pointing to 160, it becomes possible to immediately direct the player's line of sight to the effect operation unit 160. The operation timing of the effect operation unit 160 can be made less likely to be delayed, and the player's participation-type effect of operating the effect operation unit 160 can be enjoyed by the player to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes the lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240 so that the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are in the normal state (on the player side). It's hard to see from.

[3-4. Countermeasures against electromagnetic noise from door frames]
Next, measures against noise of the door frame 3 will be briefly described. As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame base unit (not shown), which has a rectangular frame-like outer shape when viewed from the front and which extends vertically. As described above, this door frame base unit is formed with a quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape in a front view and has a game window 201 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the door frame, and a metal opening / closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit. As described above, the door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground, in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to provide rigidity, and through the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the main body frame. 4 is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 provided in FIG. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame gland on the door frame side. The frame grounding board 559 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic wave noises generated at various places and grounding (earthing) to the island facility of the game hall. Electrically connected to ground.

  As described above, various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 include those that are not entirely plated with decoration, and those that are entirely plated with decorative plating. The decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back sides are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit via the door frame reinforcing unit and wiring (not shown) or a metal conducting plate (not shown). There is. Therefore, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion that has been subjected to decorative plating, the static electricity charged to the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit through the decorative portion, The door frame reinforcing unit is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through a door frame metal ground wire (not shown), a frame ground substrate 559, and an island facility ground wire (not shown) so as to be removed.

  In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 come into contact with each other to generate electric power. When the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 while the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 by an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall, for example, A person in charge of the game hall, such as a store clerk, or a person who possesses a setting key described later (a limited person who can confirm the current set value in addition to changing the set value) When the lock unit 650 in 4 is touched, the static electricity charged in the staff such as a clerk in the game hall or the person who possesses the setting key described later is electrostatically discharged to cause an electromagnetic noise, which causes a clerk such as the clerk in the game hall and the setting key described later. Possess From the person through the locking unit 650 to the door frame reinforcing unit, and from the door frame reinforcing unit to the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island facility ground line (not shown) It is designed to be removed by being guided to earth.

[3-5. Luminous effect of door frame]
Next, the light emission effect by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 includes the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like, and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 and the upper inner decoration portion 212 (first ambient light) formed in a milky white columnar shape. It is surrounded by the area LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decoration portion 212 are arranged in a line in the extending direction. Accordingly, by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a to emit light, the surroundings of the game window 201 and the like can be illuminated and decorated. At this time, if the plurality of LEDs 121a and 213a are sequentially caused to emit light, the player can be made to see a light emission effect in which light is rotated around the game window 201.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes the upper outer decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 (second ambient light area LA2) arranged outside the upper inner decoration portion 212, the upper outer LED 224 is provided. By illuminating and illuminating the upper outer-valley decoration portion 222 and the upper outer-valley decoration portion 223 with the upper outer-valley LED 225, the outer side of the first ambient light area LA1 can be luminescent-decorated, and the outer side of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that causes the player to perform light-emitting decoration.

  Since the plurality of upper outer decoration portions 222 are arranged at intervals in the up-down direction, by sequentially emitting light from one side in the up-down direction, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect like a level meter. . For example, when a chance comes, the expected value for the game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or can be shown to the player as a sound meter that matches the output music.

  Further, since the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 is formed in a mirror surface shape, by making the upper outer valley LED 225 emit light, the space between the upper outer valley decorative portions 222 is made to shine stronger than the upper inner decorative portion 212. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

  Since this door frame 3 is provided with a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in an outer edge row of the door frame upper unit base 202, by making these upper outer edge LEDs 231 emit light, it can be seen in the conventional pachinko machines 1. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the outer edge (third ambient light area LA3) of the door frame 3 which did not exist emits light.

  And, since the door frame 3 has a triple surrounding light area of the first surrounding light area LA1, the second surrounding light area LA2, and the third surrounding light area LA3 on the outside of the game window 201, the respective surrounding light areas are provided. By appropriately emitting light in the surrounding light area, various effects such as a light emitting effect that revolves around the game window 201, a light emitting effect that moves from the outside to the game window 201, a light emitting effect that moves from the game window 201 to the outside, etc. It is possible to show the player various luminous effects.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lattice decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the lattice decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 194) of the grill decoration frame 193 and the grill. The grid portion (lattice decoration portion 244) of the decoration frame 243 can be light-emitted and decorated, and the player can create a luminous effect that makes the grill decoration frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. Can be shown to.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decoration portion 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decoration portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, the plurality of upper outer top LEDs 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 ( By causing the upper outer LED 224 and the upper outer LED 225 located behind the upper speaker grill) to emit light, between the pair of lower speakers 153a and the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156, the upper speaker 241 and A space between the upper speaker grille and the speaker grille can be decorated with light emission, and the space between the speaker and the speaker grille can be decorated with light emission, which makes it possible to show the player a light emission effect that cannot be seen with conventional pachinko machines.

  Further, in the door frame 3, since the plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light emission decoration portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the plurality of LEDs 138a are caused to emit light, so that the upper plate 130 and the inside of the upper plate 130 are stored. The game ball B being played can be decorated with light emission. For example, while the game balls B are not stored in the upper plate 130, the LEDs 138a are caused to emit light, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed into a mirror surface, so that the entire upper plate 130 is dazzling. An interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be shown to the player who is able to show the luminous effect that is decorated with light emission, and the upper plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 shines brightly to the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play. Can be strongly attracted.

  Since the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided above the bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 and more than half the outer diameter of the game ball B, a plurality of the game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. LED 138a of the light is emitted, the light is irradiated to the upper half side of the game ball B, and will be reflected upward, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 has a glittering luminescent effect. Can be shown to others.

  When the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is light-emitted, part of the light is also radiated into the upper plate 130. Therefore, the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 also causes the light inside the upper plate 130 and the upper plate 130. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the stored game balls B are light-emitting decorated.

  Further, since the door frame 3 includes the light emitting decoration portion 124a that surrounds the upper dish ball removal button 124 and the light emitting decoration portion 142a that surrounds the lower dish ball removal button 142, By illuminating the light-emitting decoration portion 124a of the dish-ball removal button 124 and the light-emitting decoration portion 142a of the lower dish-ball removal button 142, the upper dish-ball removal button 124 and the lower dish-ball removal button 142 can be illuminated. Therefore, when a lot of game balls B are paid out, such as during a "big hit" game, the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142 are illuminated to decorate the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that prompts the player to operate the upper dish ball removal button 124 and the lower dish ball removal button 142 so as to prevent the tank from becoming full.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can show various luminous effects to the player, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored.

[3-6. Door frame production device production]
Next, an effect of the door frame effect device 150 of the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation unit in the door frame effect device, and FIG. 17B is the effect operation unit based on the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is an explanatory view showing an example of decoration, and (c) is an explanatory view showing an example of collaboration effect by an effect image of a door frame effect display device and a movable effect of an effect operation part.

  In the door frame effect device 150, in a normal state, the first movable part 155 and the effect operation part 160 are located at the lower moving ends (lowering ends), respectively. In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is located slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is located slightly above the upper surface of the first movable unit body 156 through the opening 156a of the first movable unit body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation unit 161 of the effect operation unit 160 can be pressed.

  In a normal state, when the first LED of the operation portion decoration board 162 is caused to emit light, the player can see the light emission effect in which the upper surface of the press operation portion 161 is light emission decorated. Further, in a normal state, when the second LED of the operation portion decoration substrate 162 is made to emit light, a light emitting effect in which the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 that surrounds the outside of the pressing operation portion 161 emits light is played. Can be shown to others. By these light emitting effects, the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 161, and the player's participation-type effect of operating the pressing operation unit 161 by urging the player to press the pressing operation unit 161. Can be made easier to participate in.

  Further, in a normal state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 are made to emit light, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the first movable portion main body 156 are connected via the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156. The space between can be decorated with light emission. That is, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is decorated with light emission.

  In this normal state, when a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is radiated to the player side through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. The player can be made to hear the acoustic effect in which the sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation section 160 (press operation section 161). Thereby, the sound from the lower speaker 153a can attract the interest of the player to the pressing operation unit 161, and prompts the player to press the pressing operation unit 161 to operate the pressing operation unit 161. It is possible to facilitate participation in the player participation type production.

  Further, in a normal state, the door frame effect device 150 can visually recognize the door frame effect display device 152 from the player side through the device cover 151, and is displayed on the door frame effect display device 152. The effect image can entertain the player (see FIG. 17A, etc.).

  In a normal state, the door frame production device 150 revolves the first elevating pins 175a by the four first elevating drive motors 175b of the first elevating mechanism 170, thereby causing the pair of elevating arms 174 and the elevating sliders 172 to intervene. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the first movable portion 155 moves to the upward movement end (upward end) together with the effect operation unit 160. As a result, the first movable part 155 pops out together with the effect operation part 160, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be strongly urged to press the pressing operation part 161. At the same time, by raising the first movable portion 155, it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game.

  In the state where the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side, as shown in FIG. In this state, if the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 are caused to emit light, the player can see the light emission effect in which the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 is light-emitted. Therefore, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 is light-emitting decorated, the effect that the first movable portion 155 rises from the light is played. It can be shown to the player and can give a strong impact to the player.

  When the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 are caused to emit light while the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the light is emitted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130. Since the light is emitted, the player can show the player a light emitting effect that makes the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 glitter by the plurality of LEDs 159a, and the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In addition, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first elevating drive motors 175b, the first movable portion 155 is vibrated by repeatedly rotating the first elevating drive motor 175b forward and backward. Can be made. As a result, when the player touches the first movable portion 155 or the effect operation portion 160 while the first movable portion 155 is vibrating, the vibration can surprise the player. Also, by vibrating the first movable portion 155 at the timing of pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), the operation feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter. Can entertain.

  Further, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the lower end to the raised end side, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 moves upward, and thus the plurality of grill holes 156b. The volume of the space between the pair of lower speakers 153a increases. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grill hole 156b changes, the natural vibration of the relevant part changes, and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes. It is possible to let the player hear the acoustic effect in which the timbre of the sound radiated to the player side changes through the grill hole 156b.

  In addition, from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the upper part of the first movable part 155 is the door frame effect display device 152. Appears to cover the bottom of the display screen. As a result, when the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable portion 155, and thus the first image is given to the player. The rising of the movable portion 155 can be noticed, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  At this time, on the door frame effect display device 152, for example, an effect image in which the first movable portion 155 is lifted by a predetermined character, an effect image in which the predetermined character is lifted by the rise of the first movable portion 155, and the like. By displaying, the collaboration effect by the movable effect of the first movable portion 155 and the effect image can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly enjoyed.

  In addition, when the door frame effect device 150 revolves the second elevating pin 183 by the second elevating drive motor 182 of the second elevating mechanism 180 in a normal state, the effect operation unit 160 moves upward via the elevating transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving to the moving end (raising end) of. As a result, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 of the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of being protruded upward more than the upper surface of the first movable unit 155, and thus the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit 161. As a result, the player can be strongly urged to press the pressing operation portion 161 and the pressing operation portion 161 moves upward, which makes the player think that something good may be done. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game.

  In the state where the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 12B, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 below the pressing operation unit 161 is exposed to the outside. In this state, when the second LED of the operation portion decoration substrate 162 is caused to emit light, the player can see the light emission effect in which the peripheral wall of the operation portion movable base 163 is light emission decorated. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the effect operation unit 160 is illuminated and decorated, the effect operation unit 160 rises from the light. Can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, since the effect operating unit 160 can be moved up and down by the second elevating drive motor 182, the effect operating unit 160 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the second elevating drive motor 182 forward and backward. . As a result, when the player touches the effect operation unit 160 while the effect operation unit 160 is vibrating, the vibration can surprise the player. Further, when the production operation unit 160 is vibrated at the timing when the production operation unit 160 (the push operation unit 161) is pressed, the operational feeling of the push operation can be changed by making it heavy or light, and the player can be changed. Can entertain.

  In addition, when the player who is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the effect operation unit 160 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper part of the effect operation unit 160 displays the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152. Seems to cover the bottom of the. Accordingly, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the rising end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation unit 160, so that the effect operation unit 160 is displayed to the player. Can be noticed, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  At this time, on the door frame effect display device 152, for example, an effect image that decorates the area around the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17B), and an effect that the effect operation unit 160 is lifted by a predetermined character. By displaying an image, an effect image in which a predetermined character is lifted by raising the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17C), etc., a collaboration effect by the movable effect of the effect operation unit 160 and the effect image. Can be shown to the player, which can greatly entertain the player.

  The effect operation unit 160 can move the first movable unit 155 to the rising end when the first movable unit 155 is at the lower end, and can also move the first movable unit 155 when the first movable unit 155 is at the upper end (FIG. 12B). State). For example, by moving the first movable portion 155 from the descending end to the ascending end and then moving the effect operating portion 160 from the descending end to the ascending end, the player produces a movable effect in which the effect operating portion 160 ascends in two steps. Can be shown to. As a result, the effect operation unit 160 rises in two steps, so when the player operates the effect operation unit 160, it is strongly suggested that the "big hit" game is started (the special lottery result is "big hit"). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation for the game, and to entertain the player participation type effect by causing the player to operate the effect operation unit 160.

  In this way, the door frame effect device 150 can present the player with various effects such as the light emission effect, the movable effect, the image effect, the player participation type effect, and the sound effect as described above. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to present the player with a variety of effects, which can make the player less likely to get tired and also entertain the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a in which the game is played. The front area 131a on the front side of the device placement section 123 and the side areas 131b on both the left and right sides provide the upper plate 130 having the storage area 131 of the game ball B surrounding the device placement section 123, so that the front By the region 131a, the game balls B are stored in front of the door frame effect device 150, so that the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. Further, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend back and forth, in addition to the front region 131a, the game balls B stored in the side region 131b are also from the player side. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize.

  Therefore, since the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is easily visible, the player can be made aware of the storage amount of the game ball B, and thus the game ball B in the upper plate 130 as the game progresses. Even if the storage amount is consumed to reduce the storage amount, the player can easily recognize the decrease in the storage amount and the game ball B can be replenished in the upper plate 130. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper plate 130, to prevent a sudden interruption of the game, prevent discouragement of the player due to the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the game ball B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, the player makes a line of sight downward from the game area 5a to produce a door frame. By simply dropping it into the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B exists in the front area 131a, and the player does not need to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. It becomes possible to make the player concentrate on the game easily, entertain the game, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front region 131a is fed from the supply port 135. Since it will be provided on the way to the outlet 136, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage region 131 will be sent out of the storage region 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front region 131a. , When the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is consumed by playing a game, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (the front area 131a), and the consumption speed and consumption amount of the game ball B to the player. Can be easily recognized, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the side regions 131b on both the left and right sides of the device disposing portion 123 and the outlet port 136 is arranged on the right side, there is a space between the supply port 135 and the outlet port 136 in the left-right direction. Since it can be increased, the storage area 131 is also naturally increased in the left-right direction, so that the storage amount of the game balls B in the upper plate 130 can be increased. Therefore, since a large amount of game balls B can be stored in the upper plate 130, the player can play the game without worrying about the storage amount of the game balls B, and the player can concentrate on the game. It is possible to entertain the game further, and the player immediately recognizes whether or not the game ball B exists in the front area 131a only by dropping the line of sight from the game area 5a to the door frame effect device 150 below. The player does not need to carefully check the presence / absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130, and it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game easily, which makes the game entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a storage light emitting decoration portion 138 for irradiating light into the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 is provided above the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper plate 130 and above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the storage area is provided. Since the light from the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is irradiated to a portion above the half of the game ball B stored in 131, the light from the stored light emission decoration portion 138 is emitted by the game ball B. Can be reflected upwards. Therefore, it is possible to make the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 shine with glitter by the light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138, and to make the game balls B light-emitting decoration for the player. At the same time, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130, and the stored amount of the game balls B in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to obtain the same effect as the above. Can play.

  Further, since the stored light emission decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, by causing the LED 138a of the stored light emission decoration portion 138 to emit light, the rear peripheral wall 133 facing the front of the upper plate 130 emits light. It is possible to show the player a luminous decoration that cannot be seen in conventional pachinko machines, to surprise the player, and to direct the player's interest to the upper plate 130 (storage area 131), It is possible to allow the player to confirm the storage amount of the game balls B, and to surely achieve the above-described operational effects. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed into a mirror surface, the light from the accumulated light emitting decoration portion 138 or the light from the accumulated light emission decoration portion 138 reflected on the game ball B is emitted from the upper plate 130. By reflecting on the inner surface, it is possible to further enhance the glittering feeling in the storage region 131 by the stored light emitting decoration portion 138, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the arrangement part 137 is provided near the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 and be stored in the upper plate 130. The playing game ball B can be smoothly sent to the ball launching device 540 and the lower plate 140 from the delivery port 136. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the jamming of the game ball B, and it is possible to entertain the player with the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the side area 131b of the upper plate 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is delivered from the delivery port 136 which cannot be seen by the conventional pachinko machines. The state can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored is provided on the front side of the device placement unit 123, the game balls B are provided on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the device placement unit 123. Even if the player mounts and rolls forward, the game ball B will fall into the front area 131a, and the game ball B can be prevented from dropping forward from the bulging portion 120.

  Moreover, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, and the like of the upper plate 130 are formed in a mirror surface, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 are the upper plate 130. Since it moves to the peripheral wall of the player, it can be made to the player the illusion that the game balls B are stored beyond the peripheral wall, and the upper plate 130 looks as if many game balls B are stored. You can

  Further, since the storage light emission decoration portion 138 for irradiating light into the storage area 131 is provided, the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 or the light from the storage light emission decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is By reflecting on the inner surface of the plate 130, the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 due to the storage light emission decoration portion 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device disposing portion 123 of the bulging part 120, the player can be entertained by the effect produced by the door frame effect device 150, and a decrease in interest in the player's game is suppressed. Can be made.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, as the storage area 131 in which the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is stored, the front area 131a in front of the device placement portion 123 (door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front region in front of the device placement part 123 and one side region on the left side of the device placement part 123 are shown. It may be configured with a back region behind the device placement portion 123. Alternatively, a front region 131a in front of the device placement part 123, two side regions 131b on both left and right sides of the device placement part 123, and a back region behind the device placement part 123 (the device placement part 123 is (Provided in an island shape in the upper plate 130). The back area of the storage area 131 may have a tunnel shape in which the game ball B cannot be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the inner plate 130 is shown to have a mirror-like inner surface, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner plate 130 may have a non-mirror-like inner surface.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150, a certain number of game balls B are provided on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 by the plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is inclined so that the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 is lowered toward the upper plate 130. It is also possible to roll the game ball B placed on the upper plate 130 so that the game ball B is not stored on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (does not continue loading).

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 18 to 39. The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side (the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3). , For discharging the game ball B used for the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall structure of main frame]
As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. Main body frame upper hinge portion 510, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame base unit 500. Of the main frame lower hinge portion 520, which is attached to the lower end on the left side in front view, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. I have it.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is formed of a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, and a lower front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 that is mounted to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an inverted L that is mounted along the upper side and the left side of the main frame base unit 500 in front view. A character-shaped payout base unit 550, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side (the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140), and a main body frame base A power supply board 630 provided with a power switch 630a that is attached to the lower side surface of the unit 500 as viewed from the rear and can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 and a plurality of slits 641 are formed which cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to a main body frame base 501 described later and penetrate the front and back and extend vertically. A back cover 640 and a metal locking unit 650 that is mounted on the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and locks the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. I have it.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501, which will be described later, moves to the front and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 for restricting are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501, which will be described later, of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The illegal insertion of tools into the inside (game board 5) is prevented.

  The main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 is recessed rearward in a range of a height of about 3/4 from the upper end downward in a front view, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. It has a mounting portion 301. The ball launching device 540 is mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position below the game board mounting portion 301.

  Further, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 has a door frame opening for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4a is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 has a main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. It is installed. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4b is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  The door frame opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b open the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 due to the input of an electric signal by the opening / closing operation by the locking unit 650. The opening of the body frame 4 is not detected, but the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are detected independently of the opening / closing operation by the locking unit 650. ing. Further, the door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is provided so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the cylinder lock 127. The door frame opening switch 4a is arranged at a position below the cylinder insertion opening to be inserted, and on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached, below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. A body frame opening switch 4b is arranged on the rear surface. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise enters the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame opening switch 4a and the main body frame opening switch 4b are not affected by this electromagnetic noise.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, and the main body frame base 501 is formed with a game board attachment portion 301 into which the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. Has been done.

  The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front and extending to the left in the front view in a groove shape that is opened upward, and a first rail cover attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. 554, a second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a ball stopper attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553. The material 557, the external terminal plate 558 arranged above the tank rail 553 and attached to the payout base 551, and the substrate housing formed on the payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal plate 558 (the front of the pachinko machine 1). And a frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the portion 551aa. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the side of the game hall and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame grounding board 559 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall.

  The dispensing base 551 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-back portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b having a substantially same width and extending downwardly, and a right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in front view which is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extending downwardly. , A back plate upper part 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a substantially constant rightward direction from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. The back plate left part 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left back plate part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate part 551b, and the left plate part 551b. From the front of the bottom side to the right Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and the inside of the L shape. It should be noted that an eaves portion 551da that projects rearward is formed in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d at a portion spaced apart from the lower side by a predetermined length.

  As for the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same width as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is located above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  The dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recessed portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is delivered to that portion. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

  The payout unit 560 is guided by a ball guiding unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and one guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, which is attached to the speaker unit 620a below the game board mounting portion 501c, and to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Of the base unit 620b, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the right side of the power supply unit 620c in front view, and a left side of the power supply unit 620c in front view. And an attached interface unit 620e.

  The base unit 620b includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface.

  The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. , Are provided.

  The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in a front view in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control housed in the payout control board box 632. And a substrate 633. The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632 and is configured as a caulking case. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The payout control board 633 can be housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. As described above, since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of the polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side or the back surface side of the dispensing control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized modification is performed, or unauthorized) Whether the IC is mounted or not) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the payout control board box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the payout control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the payout control board box 632. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the payout control board box 632 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrent against the illegal act on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

  Further, the payout control board 633 is provided with an RLED clear button 633z having a pressing operation section having a plurality of functions in addition to an error LED display (not shown) for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, a lead type is used as the RWM clear button 633z, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from the opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where the payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632. Can be pressed.

  The RWM clear button 633z is provided in the RAM included in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor included in the payout control board 633, and in the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor included in the main control board that controls the game content (progress of the game). The function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the built-in RAM, the function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set values, and the error LED display It also has a function as an error canceling switch for canceling the error. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change function related to the game specification (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching the set value) is separate from the main control board for controlling the game content (progress of the game). It is mounted on a payout control board 633 which is a board. In addition, the separate board may not be the payout control board 633, the board not housed in the board case, the board housed in the board case, and the board housed in the board case configured as a caulking case. Can be considered. However, the setting change function (the function as a setting switch button for selecting and changing the set value) is an important function as a gaming machine, so it is desirable that the security is high, and the board case is better than the board that is not stored in the board case. The substrate stored is higher in security, and the substrate having higher security is a substrate stored in a substrate case configured as a caulking case. Since the payout control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. A main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents (progress of the game) is attached to a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 as described later, while the payout control board 633 is a main body. The attachment to the frame 4 also contributes to the improvement of security.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in front view of the power supply unit 620c, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the back side of the interface board 635. Interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 as described above.

  The interface board 635 is connected to one end of a connection cable from the body frame 4 side. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board that controls the game content (progress of the game), a peripheral control board that controls the progress of the production, and the like. It is connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the interface board 635 in a front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

  The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted and attached from the front into the game board attachment portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The right side of the back cover 640 in front view is attached to the right end of the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side in front view is the back cover attachment portion of the dispensing base 551. 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper tank full ball path unit 600 are rotatably supported and attached. A lock screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and at a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, and the lock screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment portion 601a to be attached to the back cover attachment portion 601a. The cover 640 is fixed. The back cover 640 can rotate about 180 degrees from a closed state that covers the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state that opens the rear side of the game board 5.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface thereof is substantially the same as the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on the surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat dissipation slits 641 that penetrate the front and back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. The slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a main control board box, which will be described later, attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

  By the way, in the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, metal powder is peeled off and dropped from the game ball B due to abrasion such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres to the inside of the tank rail 553 in which the game ball B rolls in the downstream direction, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is hindered. Thereby, it becomes difficult to smoothly supply the game ball B toward the downstream side, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is formed. Can be removed from the tank rail 553. With this, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B naturally drops from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa, whereby the metal powder can be removed from the tank rail 553. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the inside of the tank rail 553 due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling in 553 falls outside the tank rail 553 through the cutout portion 553aa. Powder can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall, and the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B attached inside the tank rail 553. The metal powder can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553 by performing the work of removing the.

  In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in rows in the back of the island facility of the game hall, and the game balls B discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and again by the ball lifting device of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is supplied to the ball tank 552, the temperature inside the island facility of the game hall is extremely higher than the room temperature inside the game hall. Therefore, in the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, various substrates provided in the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. In order to radiate the heat generated from the light emitting means such as the outside of the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the plurality of heat dissipation slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction are formed. Further, since the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B dropped through the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 enters the back surface side of the game board 5. Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, it is possible to prevent this metal powder from entering the back surface side of the game board 5.

  Also, inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting to various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are hung from the upper part, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 are specified. Accordingly, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the back of the island facility in the game hall, this unconnected wiring provides various boards on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching such light emitting means may cause a short circuit (short circuit) and damage (may cause fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, in many cases, the back cover 640 is bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wiring, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641 so that the game board 5 is Since it is difficult to invade toward the back surface side, it is possible to prevent a short circuit.

  Of the various substrates provided on the game board 5, the substrates near the back cover 640 (excluding relay substrates such as the panel relay substrate 1410 described later) are molded with non-conductive resin that forms the substrate box. Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring is intruded into the back surface side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the cover body, the substrate covered with the cover body is not affected at all. . Since a relay board such as a panel relay board 1410 described later is a board that relays one board and another board, it is an assembly of various connectors and has a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the various connectors. It is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which the various connectors facing the back cover 640 are mounted but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board opposite to the surface facing the back cover 640. , The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board can be soldered by inserting pin terminals of various connectors, and can be soldered in a predetermined color (for example, green, yellow, red, blue, black). Etc.) and the wiring pattern is covered with a resist of a predetermined color and is not exposed. In other words, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back surface side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and contacts the relay board, the relay board is not affected at all.

  In this way, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 can protect the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5. Function, and by covering the rear side of the game board 5, various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and a plurality of heat generated from light emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps The heat radiation function that can be released to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B dropped through the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is the back surface of the game board 5. Metal powder invasion suppression function that can suppress invasion to the side, and various boards, various motors and various solenoids provided on the game board 5 with unconnected wiring hung from inside the island facility in the game hall Electrical driving source such as de, has a protective wall function that can prevent touching the light emitting means such as various LED and various lamps.

  The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 39. 39A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 650 includes a metal unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of metal door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and a unit. A plurality of metal outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a metal transmission cylinder for vertically moving the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653. 654, a metal lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a metal lock spring 655 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward. And an unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front is attached to the left side surface when viewed from the front of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is open on the right side in a front view, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

  In the locking unit 650 assembled to the body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and keeps the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the cylinder lock 130 of the front end of the door frame 3 rotates. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the key hole 132 is transmitted and rotated. Further, in the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two). The outer frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, when a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of locking units 650 are transmitted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, so that the outer frame 2 is disengaged from the main body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hook member 25 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

  The metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity and also functions as a main body frame metal ground, and via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown), It is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559 described above. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). A description will be given later that the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity.

[4-3. Measures against electromagnetic noise on the main frame]
Next, measures against noise of the main body frame 4 will be briefly described. As described above, the main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 and a main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. The inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 mounted along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side, and the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side (the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140). A payout unit 560 for payout, a power supply board 630 including a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, a board unit 620 including a payout control board 633, and the like are provided.

  As described above, the main body frame base unit 500 includes the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, which is formed of a metal extruded material and is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 and imparting rigidity, and also functions as a main body frame metal ground. Is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame earth substrate 559 provided in the main body frame 4. That is, in the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal serves as a frame ground on the main body frame side. Further, in the ball tank 552, a metal plate (not shown) arranged over the entire bottom portion thereof is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground substrate 559 through a ball tank ground wire (not shown). The ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above through an interface ground wire (not shown). The ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above through a power supply ground wire (not shown). The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  In this way, as a measure against the noise of the main body frame 4, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 is the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. , A ball tank 552, an interface board 635 in the board unit 620, various corresponding ground wires (not shown) from the power board 630 in the board unit 620, a frame ground board 559, and an island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is designed to be removed by being guided to earth.

[4-4. Frame earth board]
Next, the frame ground substrate 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame earth substrate 559 is capable of temporarily collecting the electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (ground), and has a plurality of earth terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) is electrically connected as an interface ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 through an interface ground wire (not shown). The second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) is to be electrically connected to the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown) as the island equipment ground, and the third ground. As the ball tank ground terminal, one end of a ball tank ground wire (not shown) is attached to a metal plate (not shown) arranged on the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 by a metal screw (not shown) as a ball tank ground terminal. The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected. The base terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) serves as a main body frame metal ground terminal of the main body frame metal ground wire (not shown) on the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 by a metal screw (not shown). One end is attached and the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The fifth ground terminal (power supply ground terminal) serves as a power supply ground and serves as a power supply in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) is electrically connected to a ground connection terminal provided on the substrate 630 via a power source ground wire (not shown). Do not attach one end of the door frame metal ground wire (not shown) to the metal door frame reinforcement unit of the door frame base unit with a metal screw (not shown). Rutotomoni, the other end of the door frame metal ground wire is intended to be electrically connected.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), and the other end of the first resistor serves as a power ground. 5th ground terminal (power supply ground terminal), a second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as island equipment ground, and a first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as interface ground, respectively, and are electrically connected to the main body. The fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the frame metal ground and the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of the second resistor (not shown). At the same time, the other end of the second resistor is a fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as a power ground, and a second ground terminal (island ground end) as an island ground. ), And it is electrically connected to the first ground terminal (interface earth terminal) as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohm (Ω) and 2 watt (W) are adopted as the first resistance and the second resistance.

  Electromagnetic noise flowing through the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as the interface ground, the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground, and the island equipment ground of the game hall through the island equipment ground wire. Electromagnetic noise flowing to the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as the ball tank ground is guided to the ground and is sent through the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire. Then, the electromagnetic noise that is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed and flows to the fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as the body frame metal ground is the second ground terminal (island island) as the island facility ground. Equipment ground terminal), through the island equipment ground wire, it is guided to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall and is removed. The electromagnetic noise flowing through the source terminal (power supply ground terminal) is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) and the island facility ground wire as island facility ground, and is removed. Electromagnetic noise flowing through the 6th ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground is transmitted through the 2nd ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) and the island facility ground wire as the island facility ground to the game hall. It is designed to be removed by being guided to the ground of the island facility.

  By the way, the ball tank 552, the payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the ball 552 is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of accumulating the game balls B, the payout unit 560, and the periphery thereof is accumulated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame earth substrate 559 is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity is likely to be accumulated, and as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated, the ball tank 552 and the payout are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the vicinity of the unit 560 and the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 made of metal in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4, in the frame earth substrate 559, a third earth terminal (sphere tank earth) as a sphere tank earth is formed. Terminal) and a fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as a body frame metal ground, respectively, through the first resistance and the second resistance, electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed to be attenuated and a high voltage instantaneous The electric discharge from the second earth terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground through the island equipment ground wire. And so that it can lead to ground Le island equipment. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity is likely to be accumulated is used as a frame ground called a frame ground from the frame ground substrate 559 through the ball tank 552 and the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530. By leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to provide rigidity, and also functions as a main body frame metal ground.

  Further, as described above, various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3 may have decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity. The decorative portion provided with the decorative plating is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 and the door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown) or a metal conductive plate (not shown). Has been done. Therefore, for example, when the player touches the decorative portion having the decorative plating, the static electricity charged to the player is electrostatically discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit through the decorative portion. In addition, the staff such as a clerk in the game hall or a person who possesses the setting key described later (a limited person who can confirm the current set value in addition to changing the set value) When the lock unit 650 in the frame 4 is touched, as described above, the static electricity charged in the staff such as the clerk in the game hall or the person who possesses the setting key to be described later is electrostatically discharged and the staff such as the clerk in the game hall as electromagnetic noise. Also, it is transmitted from a person who possesses a setting key, which will be described later, to the door frame reinforcing unit through the locking unit 650.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground is provided on the frame ground substrate 559 with respect to the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3. Through the second resistor, the electromagnetic noise is gradually flowed and attenuated to suppress the high-voltage instantaneous discharge, and the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground is connected through the island equipment ground wire. It is possible to lead to the ground of the island facility in the game hall. In other words, a person who has a decorative part with decorative plating, a player, a clerk such as a clerk in a technical hall, or a person who possesses a setting key to be described later (in addition to changing the setting value, checking the current setting value that has been set). Electromagnetic noise from a limited number of people who can do such things as the frame ground called frame ground through the door frame reinforcement unit from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall A person who has an operator such as a plated decorative part, a player, a store clerk in a technical hall, or a person who has a setting key described later (in addition to changing the setting value, confirming the current setting value that is set). It is possible to remove electromagnetic noise from a limited number of people) by flowing it to the ground of the island facility in the game hall.

[4-5. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. 40A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. FIG. 41 is an enlarged view showing an upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front side of (a). FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 42 (a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a region where game balls overflowing from a ball tank flow in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 47 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can be detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the body frame lower hinge portion 520 and the hinge can be rotated. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 which is attached so as to be able to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped payout which is attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and a groove attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 that extends in the left direction, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail that is separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail. A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. , Are provided.

  The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a plan view extending in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that its left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion side of the left side wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Is formed over the entire length.

  The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward after extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis line that extends leftward from the right end in the plan view. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .

  In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction between the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in a front view in a portion where the upper side is closed (in the present embodiment, approximately Three rectangular notches 553aa each having a length of 30 mm are formed at a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Due to the rectangular cutout 553aa, the thickness of the rear wall (in this embodiment, about 2.5 mm) is added to the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a from the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a toward the front, about 7 mm, A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a (in the present embodiment, upward) from the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a. , About 2.5 mm), and a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a lateral length of about 30 mm is formed, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rails 553 are separated from the game balls B by the abrasion such as the game balls B colliding with each other, rubbing against each other, and falling. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is blocked, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game balls to the game balls B by the payout device 580.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding part 553a by naturally falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the cutout part 553aa, The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. By doing so, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to cause the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the metal powder.

  Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged so that a plurality of the game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can arrange the plurality of gaming balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes a line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated from the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b on the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Therefore, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the abutting bulging portion 553b. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is less likely to be dispersed, the game ball B inside is constantly pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball clogging) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows inside. By dispersing the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be played, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball clogging) can be made difficult to occur.

  Further, the tank rail 553 is molded of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the operational effect.

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m that extends and rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. The ball tank 552 is inclined so that the side (left side) farther away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower, and the surface overflows from the ball tank 552. A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the both outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow portion 551j on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open. The outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear side and the upper side of the plurality of electric wire connecting terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. And a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. Overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate shape from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, to a rear side. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The outer ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both outer sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape, and extend outside the game ball B in the left-right direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the right-hand side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left-right direction of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right-side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a lower rear end. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (the weir 552i side) of the rear end side in a front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the left-right direction.

  When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made less likely to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction such that the rear end thereof moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When discharged, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 has a narrow width. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide area.

  In addition, the portion that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this part, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the gaming balls B can be stacked on the upper side on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b in front view. Approximately 1/9 of the total length, extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of approximately 1/2 of the overall length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

  In the ball tank 552, in plan view, a right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape, and a straight line connecting the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate therethrough in the vertical direction. In addition, the ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange that extends laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the heights of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely to the left and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction are positioned behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )are doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height becomes lower stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after it extends to a nearby position).

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by the operation of the lever and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. Can be flown to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface 501m, and at the same time it can be flowed from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the inside of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 45). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a further increase in the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 46, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem in which the game ball B spilled on the outside of the body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other strongly in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is set higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is more than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also higher, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. It is possible to make the flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and it is possible to make the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the bypass passage 552g in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and biting due to the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of the jamming of the game balls B. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that the game rails B line up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the plurality of game balls B are arranged to be aligned with each other in the width direction, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in the width direction toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b because the game balls B match. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that have been stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through a site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rails 553 can guide the plurality of gaming balls B to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

  Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Also, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a problem such as short circuit or disconnection of electric wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the or the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 45) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 45, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and a problem occurs when the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game surface balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

  Further, while the ball tank 552 is made of an electric conductor (in this example, it is made of a conductive synthetic resin), the tank rail 553 is insulated from the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. It is composed of a body (in this example, it is molded of non-conductive synthetic resin). In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 falls from the cutout portion 553aa. Further, it is attached to the peripheral control board box having the same polarity as the tank rail 553. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B does not adhere to the ball tank 552, moves to the tank rail 553, adheres to the tank rail 553, and stays in the tank rail 553, and further adheres to the tank rail 553. When the metal powder of the playing ball B is dropped from the cutout portion 553aa, it adheres to the peripheral control board box having the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (for example, the upper surface of the peripheral board box).

[4-6. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in plural in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of the cross section taken along the line CC of FIG. 40 (a), and shows an outline of the configuration of measures against metal powder.

  As described above, the peripheral control unit in which the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the cutouts 553aa formed in plural in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is arranged below the tank rail 553. If it adheres to 1500, it may cause an electrical trouble and cause a malfunction or malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with peripheral control ICs, ICs such as ROM and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described below is provided with ICs such as peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the spacing of various connectors narrows as the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electric troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 48, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (in the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the rearward displacement (in the present embodiment, about one half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension).

  The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed in a staircase shape in which a plurality of bends are made downward as it goes. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 48, the first eaves portion 551da extended behind the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. .. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da in surface contact.

  As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. There is. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. It is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 by falling toward the game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, further, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a contact portion with the first eaves portion 551da so that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a by being dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is attached to the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first eaves portion 551da of the 551a, the metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the base control unit 1500, and further from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. By suppressing the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the occurrence of an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. You can do it.

  In this way, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the cutout portion 553aa, the main cutout portion 553aa is used not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the guide portion 553a to the outside can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, and the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa is peripheral control unit. Preventing the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 while suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of 1500. So that the generation of electrical trouble can be suppressed by.

  In the above example, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eaves 551da are in contact with each other. You may make it arrange | position separately from the part 551da. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da cooperate with each other, and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is placed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da is not limited as long as the entry is suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached production display device 1600 is displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in the present embodiment, about 2 minutes of the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement that is displaced by the distance dimension of 1) (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the cutout portion 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 It is effective for metal powder measures that can prevent electrical troubles due to metal powder.

  Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, while the upper side, left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), Since it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, temporarily, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover body 1501.

  In addition, among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, respectively, one or a combination thereof is provided except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with such a configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) is dropped and invaded into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter is electrically dropped by the foreign matter. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

  When the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface is increased or the area of the ventilation holes 1501 is increased to compensate for the heat dissipation function. May be. This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 and suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble such as thermal runaway.

  Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is substantially horizontal. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B is dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder may be retained on the upper surface of the cover body 1501. it can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. In addition, if the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, a part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined.

  The first eaves member 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (separate structural component).

  In addition, when the upper and rear portions of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are covered by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and / or the back cover 640, and the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is provided. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged to be displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a. When the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside goes to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low, one of the upper surfaces of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 Part (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed). May the ventilation holes 1501az provided at equal) the ventilating hole 1501az is formed.

  Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In comparison with the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to suppress the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in the state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a ventilation hole 1501az is formed in part). Those provided with ventilation holes 1501az are also included in the present technical idea.

  A plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes along the lower side thereof, seven connector holes provided at a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 and a position corresponding to the volume control switch, and seven connector holes, and Volume adjusting holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output substrate, which will be described later, is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 form a gap, Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are exposed through these two connector holes.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is configured such that a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. A plurality of ventilation holes 1540az are formed in 1540 to take in the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). The volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the clearance provided in the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501, and the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole and the gap formed in)

  By the way, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, a heavy powder called the metal powder of the game ball B is influenced by the flow of air and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. The probability of being sucked in is increased, and an electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder causes a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 mounted inside the cover body 1501 and various electronic components provided on various substrates such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530. There will be problems (faults) in the above.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), the game ball is formed by forming the first eaves portion 551da along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves which prevents heavy metal powder of B, which is heavy powder, from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls, similar to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner shown in FIG. 33, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. Notches, holes, or grooves capable of removing powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside may be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 34, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, hole, or groove on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. 27, or can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be cut and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be configured to be staggered. It can also be configured. In addition, an eaves-shaped member is directed rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. It can be formed by projecting, and the position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636. The position and the position can be shifted, or both can be adopted.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a metal powder countermeasure that the electric trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter, referred to as "metal powder countermeasure according to second to fifth embodiments" The configuration of FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. 49 to 51, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 48 (hereinafter, referred to as "a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment") are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portions of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the measure against metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape in which a plurality of pieces are bent downward according to the direction from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a. It constitutes a first eaves portion 551da extending rearward.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is in front of the top plate portion 551a. A plurality of bent downwards are formed in a step shape from the side toward the rear side (from the front side of the top plate 551a toward the rear side), and the lower end of the top plate portion 551a is extended behind the pachinko machine 1. Although the first eaves portion 551da is configured, the first eaves portion 551da is not extended so that the first eaves portion 551da is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553, and up to the time (front of the pachinko machine 1) (see FIG. 48). In the example shown, it is provided only up to just below the notch portion 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553.

  On the other hand, the upper end of the back cover 640 is bent toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the game board 5) and is formed into a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 when assembled to the main body frame 4. The second eaves portion 640a is formed to extend directly below the cutout portion 553aa, and the second eaves portion 640a is in contact with the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the rear end surface of the back cover 640 is arranged further rearward of the pachinko machine 1 than the rear surface of the tank rail 553.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the first eaves portion 551da independently constitutes the eaves portion, whereas in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment. The configuration is different in that the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to form an eaves portion jointly.

  In addition, if the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a jointly form an eaves portion, the length of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, that is, the eaves portion, The respective occupying ratios and the positions where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are brought into contact with each other are not limited to those described above. For example, the first eaves portion 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553, and the second eaves portion 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553 to abut the first eaves portion 640a (tank rail 553. Of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa by mainly contacting with the second eaves portion 640a. May be.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as that of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a in the first eaves portion 551da arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached, or can be received and attached at the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640. Furthermore, since the rear surface of the back cover 640 is extended so as to cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the main surface of the main body frame 4 is cut through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640 by dropping from the guide portion 553a to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and When the metal powder falls from the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640, the metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (after the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). (Side) to prevent the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 from falling, and thus the cutout portion 5. The metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 by the metal powder of the game ball B falling on the peripheral control board 1510 from the main guide portion 553a via 3aa. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the adhesion.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape in which a plurality of pieces are bent downward according to the direction from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a. A first eaves portion 551da extending rearward is configured, and a rear cover 640 is provided behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 without the top plate portion 551a.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the tank rail 553. The rear end portion of the top plate portion 551a is arranged and constitutes a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward by bending. The lower end of the upper back plate 551d is in contact with the upper end of the back cover 640. It should be noted that the length of the back plate upper portion 551d is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 50, and may be extended to a position that covers directly behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. As shown in the figure, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 may be extended above the cover body 1501 without being extended to a position directly behind it.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment, the back cover 640 independently covers at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the back plate upper part 551d and the back cover 640 are connected and jointly cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is different.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same operational effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a in the first eaves portion 551da arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached, or can be received and attached at the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640. Further, since the upper back plate 551d and the rear surface of the back cover 640 are connected to each other in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4 and jointly cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. , The metal powder of the game ball B adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640 by falling outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. When falling from the first eaves portion 551da of the portion 551a or the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640, this metal powder is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Suppressing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the installed effect display device 1600) from falling. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 by the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the powder adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the measure against metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is, as described above, from the front side to the back side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape in which a plurality of pieces are bent downward according to the direction from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a. It constitutes a first eaves portion 551da extending rearward.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is the front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward a plurality as it goes from the side to the rear side (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a), the back side of the bent top plate portion 551a is formed on the top plate portion 551a. It is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, and is a predetermined distance dimension downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one half the diameter of the game ball B). ) Is formed. That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to project downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward to form the second eaves portion 640a. The front surface is arranged parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a that is arranged so as to project downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in a state. Further, the contacting portion between the front surface of the second eaves portion 640a and the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is disposed in front of the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a by a large amount.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the first eaves portion 551da independently constitutes the eaves portion, whereas in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment. The configuration is different in that the first eaves portion 551da is not provided and the second eaves portion 640a independently constitutes the eaves portion.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same operational effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and attached on the upper surface of the second eaves portion 640a which is formed by being largely bent forward. Further, since the rear surface of the back cover 640 is extended to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the main surface of the main body frame 4 is cut through the notch portion 553aa. When the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640 and dropped from the guide portion 553a to the outside falls from the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640, this metal powder causes the game board 5 to play. Falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa. By suppressing the entering into the cover body 1501 of control unit 1500, the metal powder of the game ball B is adapted to the generation of electrical trouble by adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the top portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 constitutes the first eaves portion 551da. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of the members attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 such as the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 and the members attached to the main frame base unit 500. You may make it comprise the 1st eaves part 551da with either of them.

[4-7-1. Confirmation of dust when attaching / detaching game board 1]
As described above, by dropping foreign matter such as metal powder or dust from the discharge hole 553aa provided in the tank rail in the related art, it is possible to smoothly flow down the game ball on the tank rail, while dropping it. When foreign matter adheres to a control board or the like arranged below, a problem occurs in a game component, causing a problem in the game machine or causing a malfunction. Specifically, metal powder generated by the flow down of the game balls on the tank rail, etc. falls from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail and adheres to a predetermined portion (connector portion, etc.) of the control board arranged below. Then, an electrical trouble may occur in the control board, which may hinder the progress of the game on the gaming machine. There is also a problem that foreign matter falls downward from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail that is not a replacement target due to vibration or the like caused by the work of replacing the game board with a new game board (detachment of the game board, etc.). If foreign matter in the tank rail falls downward due to vibrations that occur when the game board is attached, the operation of the game machine on the new game board may be hindered. In order to deal with such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached or detached, the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder or dust of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 (on the lower surface of the tank rail 553). It is possible to easily check the accumulated state of foreign matter and the adhered state of foreign matter on the side surface of the tank rail 553, and to take action (removal of foreign matter, etc.) before the occurrence of a defect. This example will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, 35, 19 to 22, 35, and 52 to 56 in addition to the above-described drawings. FIG. 52 is a schematic view showing an outline of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure in the state where the game board 5 of this example is removed, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 in which the game board 5 of this example is attached. Yes, FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of the present example removed, and FIG. 55A shows the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of the present example removed from the lower right front. FIG. 56 (A) is a perspective view, and when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 hangs down inside the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. It is the figure which showed the location where the upper decoration part X of the door frame 3 is located corresponding to a location with the hatched part, and FIG. 56 (B) is a figure which shows the side view which looked at the pachinko machine 1 from the left side. Is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached to the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are provided with a transparent portion. Specifically, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), and the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely transparent. ing. Also, the ball guide unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 and having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner is transparent as a whole (a part thereof may be used). It is made of a different synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the present embodiment), and is configured so that the entire guide passage 570a (or a part thereof) may be transmitted. Further, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the entire ball tank 552 are made of an opaque synthetic resin (black in this embodiment). Synthetic resin), and these are configured so as not to penetrate.

  Further, in the tank rail 553 of the present example, in a state in which the tank rail 553 is attached to the payout base 551, a portion that overlaps the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1). (Directly supported portion) and a portion where the dispensing base 551 is located (front side of the pachinko machine 1) and the dispensing base 551 do not overlap in the front-rear direction (not directly supported and have a hollow shape). (Placed portion) is provided (see FIG. 54). In this example, these parts of the tank rail 553 are made visible through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. The presence of metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be confirmed, and it is possible to prevent any trouble in the game operation after the replacement with the new game board 5.

  In the following, the metal powder in the tank rail 553 is obtained by looking up at the upper inside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. The details of how to confirm the presence of foreign matter such as dust and the like will be described.

  As described above, FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of the present example attached, and FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of the present example removed. is there. In FIG. 55 (A), as is clear from comparison with FIG. 53, an opening of a game board attachment portion 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. It is arranged such that at least a part of the tank rail 553 is located in the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the tank rail 553 hangs down and faces the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. However, if the entire tank rail 553 faces the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the area of the tank rail 553 that can be seen through the opening becomes large, and the person who confirms even the unnecessary portion for confirming the presence of foreign matter Therefore, in this example, in consideration of speeding up the confirmation of the presence state of the foreign matter, the presence state of the foreign matter in the tank rail 553 is more emphasized than in the entire tank rail 553. Only a specific portion that needs to be confirmed (in this example, the bottom surface and the side surface of the tank rail 553, which is the vicinity of the portion where the discharge hole 553aa for dropping foreign matters is formed) is the front side of the game board mounting portion 301. It is arranged so as to hang down above the opening.

  Then, the right side portion of the tank rail 553 that hangs down in the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 of FIGS. 54 and 55 (A) does not overlap with the above-described dispensing base 551 in the front-rear direction. It is (a part which is not directly supported and is arranged in a hollow shape), and when the opening of the game board mounting part 301 is visually observed from the front, the tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin is directly It can be visually recognized, and the inner surface side (inside the bottom surface and the side surface) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. Further, the left side portion is a portion where the above-mentioned tank rail 553 and the payout base 551 overlap in the front-rear direction (a portion which is directly supported), and when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, Through the dispensing base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin, the tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin can be visually recognized, and the inner surface side (inside the bottom surface and the side surface) of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. ing. As described above, in this example, not only the tank rail 553 but also the part to which the tank rail 553 is attached are made of transparent synthetic resin so that the area for confirming the presence state of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 is not limited. I have to.

  Further, in this example, in the state where the game board 5 is attached as shown in FIG. 53, the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is completely closed in consideration of the decorativeness, so the tank from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 It is impossible to confirm the presence of foreign matter in the rail 553. However, by forming the entire payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 from a transparent synthetic resin, even when the game board 5 is attached, the main body frame 4 and the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 are not removed. It is possible to check the presence state of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 from the side when the front side is opened and closed centering on the left side in front view.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the upper side in the vertical direction of the tank rail 553), the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball tank 552. Since the detour passage 552g and the bypass passage 552g are formed of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the second rail cover 555 located on the back of the tank rail 553 and the first rail The cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the bypass passage 552g are visible through the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. In this way, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the bypass passage 552g can be visually recognized on the back of the tank rail 553 in the opening of the game board mounting portion 301. By looking up at the upper inside, the presence of foreign matter accumulated in the tank rail 553 becomes clear due to the member formed of the opaque resin, and the presence state of the foreign matter can be easily confirmed and removed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is possible to determine the necessity of, it is possible to prevent a problem in game operation after replacement with a new game board 5.

  In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of transparent synthetic resin. However, if the inside of the tank rail 553 can be confirmed, other forms may be used. Good. For example, while the dispensing base 551 is made of an opaque resin, the entire tank rail 553 is made of a transparent resin, and an opening is provided in a part of the dispensing base 551 made of an opaque resin, and the tank is opened through the opening. It may be configured such that the inside of the rail 553 can be confirmed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the ball tank 552 is made of a transparent resin, but in the present example, the ball tank 552 is further made of an “electrical conductor having conductivity”. Has been done. Specifically, in this example, the entire ball tank 552 is molded from a conductive synthetic resin. On the other hand, the tank rail 553 made of a transparent resin is made of an insulator having no conductivity (in this example, it is molded of a non-conductive synthetic resin). Further, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and the electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed. As a result, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is removed (statically removed), foreign substances such as metal powder adhering to the game ball B can be dropped, and the metal powder dropped from the game ball B is removed. Since it is made difficult for foreign matter such as to adhere to the ball tank 552, it is possible to move the foreign matter such as metal powder along with the flow of the game ball B from the inside of the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553.

  Further, as described above, the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa, so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be dropped to the outside. However, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B adheres to the tank rail 553 and remains inside the tank rail 553. In this way, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B can be attached and retained in the tank rail interior 553, and as described above, metal powder and dust. In addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence status, foreign matter such as metal powder that has dropped from the game ball B drops toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually falls from the game ball B. The foreign matter such as the metal powder and the like is prevented from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the foreign matter such as the metal powder and the like dropped from the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 to cause an electrical trouble. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the tank rail 553, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 provided below the tank rail 553 are also insulators ( Polycarbonate resin etc.). That is, when the tank rail 553, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, when a foreign substance such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 falls, an eave portion (first eave portion 551da and / or second eave portion) having the same polarity as the tank rail 553. 640a) and the back cover 640 are made to adhere to foreign matter such as metal powder due to electrostatic force.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material (in this example, it is molded of non-conductive synthetic resin), so that it falls from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553. In addition to the fact that foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the tank rail 553 and is retained by electrostatic force, in addition to the case where the foreign matter such as metal powder that adheres to the tank rail 553 falls from the cutout portion 553aa. Even if there is a foreign material such as a fallen metal powder made of an insulator (molded with a non-conductive synthetic resin in this example), an eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a). Also, it can be attached to the upper surface of the back cover 640 and the like by an electrostatic force to be fastened, and it is possible to suppress the scattering of foreign matter to the outside. As a result, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the existence status of the above-mentioned metal powder and dust, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B drops toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It becomes possible to prevent double, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B enters into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually the metal powder dropped from the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by foreign matter such as the like being attached to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulator (in this example, it is made of non-conductive resin), but as another example, a transparent insulating sheet is provided inside the tank rail 553. Alternatively, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B on the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be attached to the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force and retained.

  Further, in the above example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the bypass passage 552g in the ball tank 552 are made of an opaque resin. However, the second rail cover 555 formed of an opaque resin, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 are visually recognized through the tank rail 553 formed of a transparent resin. At least one of the members visually recognized through the tank rail 553 made of a transparent resin is formed of an opaque resin or metal, an opaque seal is attached to the surface, or a paint is applied. The back may be made difficult to visually recognize (including the one that makes it unclear). That is, since most of the foreign substances such as metal powder and dust are collected on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, when the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is focused on from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, An opaque resin is visible at a position visually recognized through the transparent bottom surface of the tank rail 553, for example, on the outer side of the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. A member formed of metal or the like may be provided, or the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) itself is made of an opaque resin or metal. You may comprise as another member, such as.

  Moreover, when providing the above-mentioned eaves part (1st eaves part 551da and / or 2nd eaves part 640a) below the tank rail 553, these eaves parts (1st eaves part 551da and / or 2nd eaves part 640a). A part or all of the above) may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin. With this, when the game board 5 is removed, the metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin. become. Alternatively, the entire back cover 640 may be made of a transparent synthetic resin, or only a part of the back cover 640 including the second eaves portion 640a may be made of a transparent synthetic resin. May be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 53, the game board 5 can be removed from the front side of the main body frame 4 with the back cover 640 closed. is there. Further, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 52 and 54, if the first eaves portion 551da is constituted by a member attached to the main body frame base unit 500, the game board 5 is removed. Even in the detached state, the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da in the example shown in FIG. 52, but the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a in the other embodiments described above corresponds to the tank). Since it remains below the rail 553, metal powder or dust falling from the inside of the tank rail 553 is received by the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a), and the gaming device such as a connector located below is received. It is possible to prevent the rainwater from adhering and adhering to it, and it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after being replaced with a new game board 5.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52, when checking the tank rail 553 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. In the tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin, and metal powder or dust attached to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin. Since both the metal powder and the dust can be visually recognized, the presence status of the metal powder and the dust can be collectively confirmed. Further, it is formed of an opaque synthetic resin through an eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) formed of a transparent synthetic resin and a tank rail 553 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Since the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the like can be visually recognized, the second rail cover 555 formed of an opaque synthetic resin and the first rail cover The metal powder and dust attached to the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a) by the 554 and the ball rectifying member 556, and the metal powder and dust accumulated in the tank rail 553. Presence becomes clear, it becomes easy to check the presence status of metal powder and dust, and it is possible that game operation will not be disturbed after replacement with a new game board 5. It can be prevented.

  The tank rail 553 made of a transparent synthetic resin and the member made of an opaque synthetic resin are the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side. When the tank rail 553 is confirmed through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the above, it is sufficient that at least a part of the tank rail 553 overlaps and is visible, and this positional relationship is a game store. It depends on the person who confirms the presence of metal powder or dust, such as a store clerk. That is, when a clerk of the game store thrusts his head into the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 and looks up directly above the tank rail 553, it is provided directly above the tank rail 553. The two rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball rectifying member 556 are members that overlap the tank rail 553, and when the tank rail 553 is looked up from the outside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, A member provided directly behind (rear of the pachinko machine 1) or on a rear side (rear of the pachinko machine 1) is a member overlapping the tank rail 553. As described above, a person who confirms the presence of metal powder or dust can visually recognize the opaque member overlapping with the tank rail 553 by appropriately changing the look-in position, thereby making the presence of metal powder and dust clear. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the existence status of metal powder and dust.

  Also, looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side as described above, the first rail located at the back of the tank rail 553. The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are visible through the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, each of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole, and the tank rail 553. The locking projection 553c formed on the outer side of the side wall portion is press-fitted into the locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a, so that the locking projection 553c is detachably attached to the tank rail 553.

  Then, looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front side, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin are seen. A locking portion 555a (all locking portions 555a may be visually recognized, or a plurality of locking portions may be formed through each of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. A part of the locking parts 555a may be visually recognized) and a locking protrusion 553c formed on the tank rail 553 (all locking projections 553c may be visually recognized, or a plurality of locking protrusions 553c may be visually recognized). Some of the locking protrusions 553c may be visually recognized). Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 formed with the game board 5 removed. It is possible to confirm the mounting state, that is, the locked state of the locking portion 555a and the locking projection 553c, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the ball passage in the tank rail 553.

  In addition, when the game ball B is present in the tank rail 553, the visual recognition behind the game ball B is hindered, but the locking projection 553c is formed on the outside of the side wall of the tank rail 553 to The rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553 such that the respective locking portions 555a sandwich the passage of the tank rail 553. In other words, in a state where the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, the game ball B located inside the tank rail 553 is located at a position where visual recognition is not hindered. At least a part of a locking portion 555a formed on the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 and at least a part of a locking projection 553c formed on the tank rail 553 are provided. There is. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553. The locking portion 555a (all or some of the locking portion 555a provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553 may be used) and the outer side of the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided. The locking projections 553c (which may be all or some of the locking projections 553c provided on the outside of the front side wall portion of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) may be the game ball B located in the tank rail 553. It is designed so that visibility is not hindered.

  In addition, when the game ball B does not exist in the tank rail 553, the inner side (lower surface in the vertical direction) of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 is transparent. Can be seen through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of a different resin, and the inner surface of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 (downward in the vertical direction). You can check the adhesion status of foreign matter such as metal powder or dust on the surface. With this, when the game board 5 is replaced with a new one, the states of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 can be easily confirmed and removed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the ball passage in the tank rail 553.

  Further, as described above, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to hang down inside the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Then, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under a condition other than the confirmation of the presence of metal powder or dust, the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized in the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301. Therefore, if there is a chance that only the main body frame 4 is displayed before the game board 5 is changed or when the model is announced, the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 may be lost. In order to avoid this, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to hang down inside the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Alternatively, the door frame 3 may cover the part where the tank rail 553 hangs down.

  Specifically, the upper decorative portion X is provided on the upper portion of the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the front surface of the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper portion of the glass window of the door frame 3. By providing the front end side of the upper decorative portion X so as to hang more than the rear end side of the upper decorative portion X, the hanging portion on the front end side of the upper decorative portion X in the front view is within the opening of the game board mounting portion 301. It is possible to exemplify that the tank rail 553 hangs down (upper part of the opening) so as to cover the whole or a part of the area facing the tank rail 553. FIG. 56 (A) corresponds to a position where the tank rail 553 hangs down in the opening (upper opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 in a front view, It is the figure which showed the location where the upper decoration part X of the door frame 3 is located by the hatched part. Thereby, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under a condition other than the presence check of the presence of metal powder or dust, by closing the door frame 3, the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. The tank rail 553 can be made difficult to see inside (upper opening), and the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the opportunity to display only the main frame 4 before changing the game board 5 or when announcing the model. Can be prevented from being lost.

  Further, although the upper decoration portion X is provided so that the hanging portion on the front end side projects into the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, in other words, into the opening of the game window 201, the upper decoration portion X as shown in FIG. 56 (B). The rear end side of X is provided such that the lower end is located outside the game window 201 and has a predetermined width dimension in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1, and only the width dimension of the rear end side of the upper decorative portion X is provided. Since the front end side of the upper decorative portion X is hung at a position separated from the game window 201 to the front of the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 is attached to the game board attaching portion 301 and is played as the original pachinko machine 1. At the time of playing, a player who is directly seated in the game window 201 can visually recognize the entire game area 5a of the game board 5 from between the upper decorative portion X and the game window 201. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting portion 301 and played as the original pachinko machine 1, a game of the upper decoration portion X of the player who faces the player while sitting on the game window 201 by the hanging portion on the front end side. A pachinko machine that covers all or part of the tank rail 553 with the hanging portion on the front end side of the upper decorative portion X when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 without hindering visual recognition of the game area 5a of the board 5. It is possible to suppress the loss of the decorative property of 1.

[4-7-2. Confirmation of dust when attaching and detaching the game board 2]
In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and the presence of metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be confirmed. However, as another example, the tank rail A configuration in which the presence of metal powder or dust that has fallen from the tank rail 553, not inside 553, and is attached to the upper surface of the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) can be focused on. Is illustrated.

  That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 of FIGS. 52, 54, and 55 (B) is formed of an opaque synthetic resin (black resin in this example), while the eaves portion located below the tank rail 553 (see FIG. 52). In the example shown, the first eaves portion 551da, but in the other embodiments described above, the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a correspond to each other) is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. . The back cover 640 may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin in all parts, or only a part of the back cover 640 including the part forming the second eaves part 640a is transparent. It may be formed of a synthetic resin. When making the tank rail 553 opaque, the tank rail 553 is not limited to one made of an opaque synthetic resin, but the tank rail 553 may be made of an opaque metal or the like, or the surface or the inner surface of the tank rail 553 may be opaque. Any other structure may be adopted as long as it is a non-permeable material (including an unclear material) by attaching a transparent seal or applying paint.

  Then, in this example, the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da in the example shown in FIG. 52, but the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a correspond to the other embodiments described above). A portion of the tank rail 553 located below the cutout portion 553aa can be visually recognized through an opening of a game board attachment portion 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the existence status of the metal powder and dust that have fallen from the tank rail 553 to the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a), and the new game board 5 It is possible to prevent problems in game operation after replacement.

  In the following, the game board 5 detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front side is removed, and the upper side of the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 is looked up from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the eaves portion from the tank rail 553 ( The details of how to confirm the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen and adhered to the first eaves 551da and / or the second eaves 640a) will be described.

  FIG. 55 (B) is a perspective view of the main frame with the game board of another example removed, as seen from the lower right front. As described above, in this example, the tank rail 553 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, and is arranged so as to hang down and face the inside (the upper portion of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Further, the payout base 551 to which the tank rail 553 is attached is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and like the tank rail 553, a part, particularly the lower end part of the payout base 551 constituting the first eaves part 551da is a game board in a front view. It is arranged so as to hang down and face the inside of the opening of the mounting portion 301 (the upper portion of the opening).

  Further, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 are provided in a lower portion of the dispensing base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin below the tank rail 553. It is designed to be dropped onto the one eaves portion 551da. Then, when visually recognizing the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view, the upper surface of the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin is visible, and below the cutout portion 553aa of the first eaves portion 551da. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the site.

  Further, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be viewed through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 formed of an opaque synthetic resin behind the payout base 551 is formed. As a result, the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the first eaves portion 551da becomes clear, and it becomes easy to confirm the presence state of foreign matter, and the game operation may be hindered after replacement with a new game board 5. Can be prevented.

  In the above-mentioned example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that the back part of the tank rails 553 is difficult to be visually recognized (including those that are in an unclear state), but the invention is not limited to this, and at least the first eaves part 551da located therebelow. It is difficult to see the back part of the part that is made of opaque synthetic resin, metal, or the like, or that is covered with an opaque seal on the surface of the part that faces the first eaves part 551da, or is coated with paint. Anything can be used as long as it makes it possible (including one that makes the image unclear). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 52 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1), or the like may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin, metal, or the like. 52. An opaque seal is attached to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the surface of the tank rail 553 on the left side of the tank rail 553 (the side wall of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) or the like, or paint is applied. Therefore, the back may be made difficult to be visually recognized (including the one in the unclear state).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the body frame 4 with the back cover 640 closed while the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. is there. Further, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 52 and 54, the first eaves portion 551da remains below the tank rail 553, so metal powder and dust falling from inside the tank rail 553 are prevented. It is possible to prevent the first eaves portion 551da from catching and dropping and attaching to a gaming device such as a connector located below, and it is possible to prevent a trouble in game operation after replacement with a new game board 5.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of an opaque resin as described above, but in the present example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are further made to be “conductive. And an electric conductor ".

  Specifically, in this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are entirely molded with a resin having conductivity. Further, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559, and the electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is guided to the earth of the island facility in the game hall and removed. It is supposed to be done. As a result, as described above, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence status of the metal powder and dust, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is removed (electrically removed), and the game ball B is removed. Foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the game ball B can be dropped, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B is not easily attached to the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. As the game balls B flow from the inside of the tank 552 to the tank rails 553, foreign substances such as metal powder move, and at the same time, the foreign substances such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are positively dropped from the cutouts 553aa. You can

  On the other hand, in this example, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) provided below the tank rail 553 and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator made of a transparent synthetic resin. With this, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the existence status of the metal powder and the dust, the foreign material such as the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is shielded by the electrostatic force. The first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a and the upper surface of the back cover 640 can be attached and retained, and foreign matter can be prevented from being scattered to the outside.

  That is, while the foreign matter such as the metal powder of the game ball B is positively removed from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the foreign matter such as the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 Since the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640 are adhered and retained, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the game ball B is covered by the peripheral control unit 1500. 1501 and the base body 1502 are prevented from falling, foreign matter such as metal powder enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and further foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles.

  In the above example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of synthetic resin having conductivity, but the material is not limited to synthetic resin as long as it is made of an electric conductor. Alternatively, metal or conductive rubber may be used. When a metal is used for part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be destaticized in an extremely short time. On the other hand, when synthetic resin or conductive rubber having conductivity is used for a part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, it takes a longer period of time than when metal is used. And the tank rail 553 are gradually neutralized. As described above, when a synthetic resin or conductive rubber having conductivity is used for a part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be gradually discharged. As a result, discharge is less likely to occur, and it is possible to prevent the electronic components mounted on various substrates from being affected.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the tank rail 553 has a cutout portion 553aa, whereas the ball tank 552 has no cutout portion. Further, as will be described later in detail, the substrate accommodated in the substrate case is arranged below the tank rail 553 in which the cutout portion 553aa is formed, and the vent hole is not formed on the upper surface of the substrate case. It is like this. On the other hand, below the ball tank 552 in which the cutout portion is not formed, not only the substrate accommodated in the substrate case but also the substrate not accommodated in the substrate case is arranged. That is, by disposing the substrate not housed in the substrate case below the ball tank 552 in which the notch is not formed, the metal powder of the game ball B drops and adheres toward the substrate, and thus the substrate. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game balls B adhering to the substrate not housed in the case. The substrate case that accommodates the substrate disposed below the ball tank 552 in which the cutout portion is not formed may have a vent hole formed in the upper surface of the substrate case, or the substrate case. Vents may not be formed on the upper surface of the.

  Further, in this example, an eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the ball tank 552 in which the cutout portion is not formed, and are housed in the substrate case. The substrate that is not provided is disposed inside the space formed by the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640. Therefore, even if a small amount of metal powder falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the lower side of the ball tank 552, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or first eaves portion 551da and / or Since it can be attached and fastened to the second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640, the metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from adhering to the substrate that is not housed in the substrate case, thereby suppressing the occurrence of electrical trouble. it can.

  In addition, an eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the tank rail 553 in which the cutout portion 553aa is formed, and the substrate housed in the substrate case. Is arranged inside the space formed by the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640. Then, the metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 that are made of an insulating material, and stays there. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B entering the substrate case, and eventually the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, since the vent hole is not formed in the upper surface of the substrate case that accommodates the substrate arranged below the tank rail 553 in which the cutout portion 553aa is formed, the game ball that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provisionally formed. The metal powder of B falls below the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) without adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a). Also, the metal powder of the game ball B can be received on the upper surface of the substrate case, and the adhesion to the substrate can be suppressed. In addition, the substrate case for accommodating the substrate arranged below the tank rail 553 in which the cutout portion 553aa is formed may be made of an insulator. In this case, the metal powder of the game ball B is placed in the substrate case. Since it can be attached to the upper surface of the board case and fastened, the metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the board case, and an electric trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B sticking to the board is prevented. Can be suppressed.

  Thus, the tank rail 553 is configured to positively drop the metal powder of the game ball B from the notch portion 553aa, and the substrate below the tank rail 553 is arranged in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case, Furthermore, since the upper part and the rear part (the rear part of the pachinko machine 1) of this board case are covered with an eaves part (first eaves part 551da and / or second eaves part 640a) and a back cover 640 made of an insulating material, the game ball B It becomes possible to prevent the metal powder of the above from entering the inside of the substrate case of the substrate arranged below the tank rail 553, and the metal powder of the game ball B is electrically attached to the substrate. The occurrence of various troubles can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the third embodiment shown in FIG. 50 has been described in the above-described example, the same operation and effect are achieved in the first embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of only the first eaves portion 551da as in the third embodiment. . In addition, the same operational effect is achieved in the second embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, and in the fourth embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of only the second eaves portion 640. .

  Specifically, in the second embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a as shown in FIG. 49. Configure. In this example, the dispensing base 551 that constitutes the first eaves portion 551da and the back cover 640 that constitutes the second eaves portion 640a are formed of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 551da formed of a transparent synthetic resin provided below the tank rail 553 for removing metal powder, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553. The eaves portion 640a and the eaves portion 640a are dropped.

  Then, when visually recognizing the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view, the upper surface of the eaves portion including the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a formed of transparent synthetic resin can be visually confirmed. It is possible to check the existence status of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the portion of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a below the cutout portion 553aa.

  Further, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, the tank rail 553 is seen through the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It is visible. Since the tank rail 553 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, it is formed of an opaque synthetic resin located behind the payout base 551 and the back cover 640. The presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surfaces of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is made clear by the tank rails 553 that make it possible to easily confirm the presence state of foreign matter, and to add a new game board 5 It is possible to prevent trouble in game operation after replacement.

  In the above-mentioned example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that the back part of the tank rails 553 is difficult to be visually recognized (including those that are in an unclear state), but the invention is not limited to this, and at least the first eaves part 551da located therebelow. And / or the portion facing the second eaves portion 640a is formed of an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or an opaque seal is attached to the surface of the portion facing the first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a. Anything can be used as long as it makes it difficult to visually recognize the back of the person by wearing it or coating it (including one that makes it unclear). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 49 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin, metal, or the like. Attaching an opaque seal or applying paint to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the sidewall of the tank rail 553 on the left side in FIG. 49 (the sidewall of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) and the like. Therefore, the back may be made difficult to be visually recognized (including the one in the unclear state).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the body frame 4 with the back cover 640 closed while the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. is there. Further, since the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a remain below the tank rail 553 even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. The first eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640 can be used to receive the metal powder and dust to prevent it from falling and adhering to a game device such as a connector located below, and after the replacement with a new game board 5. It is possible to prevent problems in game operation.

  In the above example, the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a that form the eaves portion are all formed of transparent synthetic resin, but they fall from the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion. If it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the eaves portion, one of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the other is made opaque. It may be made of synthetic resin, or part of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a may be made of transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be made of opaque synthetic resin. Good. For example, the payout base 551 that constitutes the first overhanging part 551da provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553 (all or part of the payout base 551, and at least the first overhanging part 551da is made of a transparent synthetic resin). (Formed) is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the back cover 640 that constitutes the second eaves portion 640a (all or part of the back cover 640 and at least the second eaves portion 640a is formed of an opaque synthetic resin). ) May be formed of an opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin is seen through. It is possible to confirm the existence status of the metal powder and dust attached to the upper surfaces of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of only the second eaves portion 640a, the eaves portion is composed of only the second eaves portion 640a as shown in FIG. In this example, the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 that constitutes the second overhanging portion 640a are formed of transparent synthetic resin. Further, the second eaves portion 640a, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is provided below the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 to the metal powder, the dust and the like in the tank rail 553, is configured. To the eaves section.

  Then, when visually recognizing the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view, the upper surface of the eaves portion formed by the second eaves portion 640a made of transparent synthetic resin can be visually confirmed, and the second eaves portion 640a can be seen. It is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the portion below the cutout portion 553aa.

  Further, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, the tank rail 553 is seen through the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It is visible. Since the tank rail 553 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 formed of an opaque synthetic resin located behind the back cover 640 is seen. As a result, the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the second eaves portion 640a becomes clear, and it becomes easy to confirm the presence state of foreign matter, and the game operation may be hindered after replacement with a new game board 5. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that the back of the tank rails 553 is difficult to be visually recognized (including those that make the area unclear). Is difficult to visually recognize its back by forming an opaque synthetic resin, metal, or the like on the surface facing the front, attaching an opaque seal on the surface of the portion facing the second eaves 640a, or applying paint. Anything can be used as long as it makes it possible (including one that makes the image unclear). For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. 51 (the side wall portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) and the like may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin or metal, or Applying an opaque seal to the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the surface of the tank rail 553 on the left side of the tank rail 553 in the figure (the side wall of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1), applying a paint, etc. Therefore, the back may be made difficult to be visually recognized (including the one in the unclear state).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to remove the game board 5 from the front side of the body frame 4 with the back cover 640 closed while the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. is there. Further, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, the second eaves portion 640a remains below the tank rail 553, so that the metal powder and dust falling from the inside of the tank rail 553 are prevented. It is possible to prevent the second eaves portion 640 from catching and pouring onto a game device such as a connector located below and attaching the same, and it is possible to prevent a problem in game operation after replacement with a new game board 5.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example, the dispensing base 551 and the second eaves portion 640a forming the eaves portion are all formed of transparent synthetic resin, but the tank rails 553 fall from the inside of the tank rail 553 onto the eaves portion to eaves. If it is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the portion, one of the dispensing base 551 and the second eaves portion 640a is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the other is made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, a part of the dispensing base 551 or a part of the second eaves portion 640a may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin. For example, a part of the payout base 551 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to the tank rail 553 and a part of the back cover 640 forming the second eaves part 640a facing the cutout part 553aa are transparent. The synthetic resin may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the remaining portion may be formed of an opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is visually recognized in a front view, the transparent synthetic resin of the payout base 551 is formed. It is possible to see the existence of metal powder or dust adhering to the upper surface of the second eaves portion 640a through the portion formed by.

[4-8-1. Promotion of falling metal powder 1]
The pachinko machine 1 of this example is characterized by the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the cutout portion 553aa is formed so that the metal powder, dust, and the like of the game ball B is positively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. To have. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIG. 57. FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 57 (B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the tank rail 553 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a first bent portion 553da and a second bent portion 553db. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the tank rail 553 is an axial line extending leftward and rightward from the right end side (upstream side, the right end side in FIG. 57A) in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. After extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to the left end, a first bent portion 553da that moves rearward as it goes to the left is formed, and from the first bent portion 553da to the left and right. After extending diagonally to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the direction, a second bent portion 553db is formed that moves leftward and thus moves in a direction parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is formed so as to extend to the left end in parallel with an axis extending from 553db in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball guided from the ball tank 552 comes to roll like a crank in the tank rail 553.

  Further, as described above, the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, six rectangular notches 553aa having a predetermined length (about 30 mm in the present embodiment) in the left-right direction are provided at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Has been formed.

  Specifically, in the first bent portion 553da, a portion of the main guiding portion 553a on the rear side in a front view (in this example, the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a) and the second bent portion 553db, the front surface of the main guiding portion 553a. The rear side (bottom surface and rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in this example), the front side in front view (the bottom surface and front wall of the main guiding portion 553a in this example), and the site on the rear side in front view of the main guiding portion 553a (book In the example, a cutout portion 553aa is formed on the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a. Further, in the first bent portion 553da, the cutout portion 553aa is formed only in the inner portion of the bent passage, whereas in the second bent portion 553db, the inner portion and the outer portion of the bent passage are formed. The cutout portion 553aa is formed at two places.

  As described above, the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 enters the tank rail 553 through the opening 552k formed on the downstream side. Further, the opening portion 552k is largely opened to the rear side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front. That is, the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 flow down toward the tank rail 553 toward the left rear side in front view. Further, as the game ball B flows down, foreign matter such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 also moves to the left rear direction in front view, that is, near the first bent portion 553da. Thus, metal powder, dust, and the like are collected near the first bent portion 553da, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, foreign matter such as metal powder collected near the first bent portion 553da is removed from the first bent portion 553da. The notch portion 553aa formed at 553da is dropped and removed to the outside of the tank rail 553.

  In addition, foreign matter such as metal powder that has not fallen from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da and foreign matter such as metal powder that has been generated in the tank rail 553 may move inside the tank rail 553 in the first bent portion 553da. It moves to the left rear direction in front view together with the game ball B flowing down toward the downstream side. Further, the game ball B flowing down in the tank rail 553 comes into contact with the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da, and changes the rolling direction along the inner wall of the tank rail 553. In addition, since the game ball B rolling in the tank rail 553 advances straight until it contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da, it comes in contact with the inner wall of the tank rail 553 to move from the inner wall of the tank rail 553. The reaction force that acts becomes large.

  Then, the game ball B contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da, and rolls along the inner wall of the tank rail 553 while receiving a large reaction force from the inner wall of the tank rail 553. By rubbing against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, metal powder, dust and the like attached to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off.

  In this way, at the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553, the game ball B rubs against the inner wall of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder, dust, and the like attached to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off. . Further, metal powder, dust, etc. not attached to the game ball B in the tank rail 553 moves in the second bent portion 553da direction together with the game ball B rolling in the second bent portion 553da direction. . That is, metal powder, dust, and the like are collected near the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to molding the tank rail 553 into a bent shape so that metal powder, dust, and the like collect in the second bent portion 553da, the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a in the second bent portion 553da is formed. By forming the cutout portion 553aa so as to be sandwiched, the metal powder, dust, and the like collected in the second bent portion 553da are made to fall to the outside of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the metal powder and dust attached to the game ball B rolling in the tank rail 553 and the metal powder and dust present in the tank rail 553 without adhering to the game ball B are positively tanked. It can be dropped from the rail 553 and removed from the tank rail 553. In addition, in the second bent portion 553da, it is sufficient that at least the cutout portion 553aa is formed on the outer side portion (the rear side in front view) of the passage, and in the second bent portion 553da, the inner wall of the tank rail 553 on the rear side in front view. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust collected in the above may be discharged from the cutout portion 553aa.

  In the above example, the cutout portion 553aa is formed in the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, but the cut portion is formed in at least one of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. The notch portion 553aa may be formed. Further, even when the cutout portion 553aa is not formed in either the first bent portion 553da or the second bent portion 553db, the cutout portion 553aa is provided on the downstream side of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. It is also possible to collect foreign substances such as metal powder and dust at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db by forming the above, and then discharge them from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the downstream side thereof. That is, by forming the cutout portion 553aa on the downstream side of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, the metal peeled off from the surface of the game ball B at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. It is sufficient that foreign matter such as powder or dust is dropped to the outside of the tank rail 553 from a cutout portion 553aa formed on the downstream side of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. It is possible to prevent metal powder, dust, and the like from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the rail 553, and to prevent trouble in game operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the tank rail 553 is shown to be made of an insulator, but the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as synthetic resin having conductivity to electrically connect to the frame ground substrate 559. By connecting to the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed. In this case, since the metal powder attached to the surface of the game ball B is easily peeled off, the metal attached to the surface of the game ball B at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db of the tank rail 553. The powder can be reliably peeled off and dropped from the cutout portion 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent metal powder, dust, and the like from entering the guide passage 570a, and to prevent a hindrance to the game operation.

  In addition, as described above, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 formed of a transparent material are provided below the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as synthetic resin having conductivity, the tank rail 553 is in an opaque state, so that the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is provided. From the front of the pachinko machine 1 in the removed state, through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) is confirmed. In this case, it becomes possible to make the presence of the metal powder and the dust clear, and to easily confirm the presence of the metal powder and the dust.

  Further, as described above, since the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (polycarbonate resin or the like), from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. The metal powder of the dropped game ball B can be attached and retained on the upper portion of the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) or the back cover 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B is peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 by entering the inside of the cover body 1501.

  Further, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 33, a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner is made of a transparent material ( It may be made of a polycarbonate resin or the like). In this case, it is possible to confirm the metal powder, dust, and the like that have entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 to which the payout unit 560 (the ball guiding unit 570) is attached is molded of transparent synthetic resin, the front side of the main body frame 4 is formed. From the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the metal powder, dust, and the like that have entered into the guide passage 570a can be confirmed with the game board 5 detachably attached from the pachinko machine 1 being removed.

  In addition, a member made of an opaque synthetic resin is arranged on a part or all of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, and a part of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged. Alternatively, an opaque sticker may be attached to all of them, or paint may be applied to make the back of the body difficult to see (including one that makes it unclear). From the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached from the pachinko machine 1 is removed and the metal powder, dust or the like is confirmed in the guide passage 570a. Since the presence of the metal powder or dust that has entered becomes clear, it is easy to confirm the entrance of the metal powder or dust into the guide passage 570a, and the game operation is hindered after the replacement with the new game board 5. It can be prevented in advance.

  In addition, a member made of an opaque synthetic resin is arranged on a part or all of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, or a part of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, the payout unit 560 (ball guide unit 570) can be attached without sticking an opaque seal to all or applying paint to make the back part difficult to visually recognize (including one that makes the state unclear). The back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 may be made of an opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the guide passage 570a. Since the presence of the metal powder and dust existing in is clear, it becomes easy to confirm the entrance of the metal powder and dust into the guide passage 570a, which hinders the game operation. It is possible to prevent Jill.

[4-8-2. Promotion of falling metal powder 2]
Next, a first modified example of a mode in which the metal powder, dust, and the like of the game ball B is positively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 58 (A) and (B). FIG. 58 (A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 58 (B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. The first modified example described below is combined with a mode in which the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B is positively dropped depending on the shape of the tank rail 553, the position where the cutout portion 553aa is formed, and the like. It may be carried out by itself or may be carried out alone.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a first rail cover 554, a ball rectifying member 556, and a second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in order from the upstream side. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the tank rail 553 is a passage through which the game ball B circulates in a portion where the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the second rail cover 555 are attached. Is formed so as to become lower toward the downstream end (left end), and only one gaming ball B can flow at the downstream end (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B). Is formed in.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is formed with a ball pressing portion 556a that projects downward (toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553). The ball pressing portion 556a projects to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer shape of two game balls B, and the game ball passes under the ball straightening member 556 in an overlapping state. B always contacts the ball pressing portion 556a. Further, when the upper-layer game ball B of the two-layer game balls B contacts the ball pressing portion 556a, the upper-layer game ball B cannot flow down to the downstream side.

  On the other hand, the lower-layer game ball B of the two-layered game balls B can flow down to the downstream side even when the upper-layer game ball B is in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a. In the state where the game ball B is in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a, the lower-layer game ball B flows down to the downstream side, whereby the upper-layer game ball B drops toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Due to the impact at the time of this drop, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off. That is, the game ball B in the upper layer of the game balls B passing through the tank rail 553 in a two-layered state abuts the ball pressing portion 556a of the ball rectifying member 556 and drops toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. As a result, the metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface are peeled off. Further, at this time, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust peeled off from the game ball B will fall onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58B, a cutout portion 553aa is formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556, and the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 is pressed by the ball. Foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen off from the game ball B by coming into contact with the portion 556a and dropping toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be dropped from the cutout portion 553aa. In addition, the game ball B which is in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a falls on the upstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIG. 58 (B). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the cutout portion 553aa on the upstream side of the ball holding portion 556a is formed larger than the cutout portion 553aa provided on the downstream side of the ball holding portion 556a. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen off from the game ball B that has fallen in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a can be dropped from the cutout portion 553aa on the upstream side of the pressing portion 556a. .

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball B passes below the ball rectifying member 556, it is brought into contact with the ball pressing portion 556a and dropped toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 to play the game. Foreign matter such as metal powder or dust adhering to the surface of the ball B is peeled off, and metal powder or dust is dropped from the cutout 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556. It has become. That is, from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556 by peeling off metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game sphere B passing below the ball rectifying member 556. By immediately dropping, metal powder, dust, and the like can be positively removed from the tank rail 553. As a result, it is possible to prevent metal powder, dust, and the like from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and to prevent the game operation from being hindered.

  In addition, after removing the metal powder, dust, etc. from the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556, the removed metal powder, dust, etc. are formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556. Since it can be immediately dropped from the cutout portion 553aa, it is possible to suppress reattachment of metal powder, dust, etc. to the game ball B.

  In addition, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553 is superposed in a plurality of layers. Then, the game balls B overlapped with three or more layers are configured to contact the first rail cover 554 provided on the upstream side of the ball rectifying member 556, and by contacting the first rail cover 554, three or more layers are provided. The game ball B is dropped and is in a state of being overlaid on two layers. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a cutout portion 553aa is also formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the first rail cover 554 as shown in FIG. When a foreign substance such as metal powder or dust is peeled off from the game ball B that has changed into a state of being overlaid with two layers, the metal powder, dust or the like is dropped from the cutout portion 553aa.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game balls B stacked in a plurality of layers are gradually collapsed to be changed into a single layer. In addition, the tank rail 553 is removed by dropping foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has been peeled off when the game balls B stacked in a plurality of layers are broken down to thin the layers from the cutout portion 553aa to remove the foreign matter from the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder and dust from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of 553, and to prevent trouble in game operation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), recesses 554a, 555b, 556b are formed on the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. . Then, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 from the game sphere B that is in contact with the upstream ends of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. When foreign matter such as metal powder or dust moves to the upper surface of the, the recesses 554a, 555b, and 556b receive and fix the foreign matter. As a result, when foreign matter such as metal powder or dust moves from the inside of the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553, these foreign matter are removed. Can be retained on the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 so as not to drop. That is, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved from the inside of the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 and the ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553 is a cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500. Electricity due to foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed by suppressing falling toward the base body 1502 and the base body 1501 and further entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of specific troubles.

  By constructing the tank rail 553 with an electric conductor such as a conductive synthetic resin and electrically connecting it to the frame ground substrate 559, electromagnetic noise that has entered the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is prevented from playing in the game hall. You may lead to the earth of the island equipment and remove it. In this case, since the metal powder attached to the surface of the game ball B is easily peeled off, the metal powder attached to the surface of the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 is reliably peeled off and cut. It can be dropped from the notch portion 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent metal powder, dust, and the like from entering the guide passage 570a, and it is possible to prevent a trouble in the game operation. Further, since it is possible to remove the static electricity of the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the reattachment of the metal powder that has peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B.

  Further, when the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as opaque synthetic resin having conductivity, the front of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. Presence of metal powder and dust when confirming the presence status of metal powder or dust adhering to the eaves part (first eaves part 551da and / or second eaves part 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 from This makes it easier to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust.

  In addition, the ball rectifying member 556 (all or part (at least the ball pressing portion 556a) may be formed of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity to electrically connect with the frame ground substrate 559. By connecting, the electromagnetic wave noise of the sphere rectifying member 556 (may be the whole or a part (at least the sphere pressing portion 556a)) may be guided to the earth of the island facility in the game hall and removed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the adhesion of metal powder, dust or the like peeled off from the game ball B to the ball pressing portion 556a.

  Further, as described above, since the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin), the ball rectifying member 556. The metal powder, dust, etc., which has fallen off from the game ball B passing below and dropped from the cutout portion 553aa to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640 and the like. Can be attached and fastened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B is peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 by entering the inside of the cover body 1501.

  Further, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. 33, a single guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner is made of a transparent material ( By molding with a polycarbonate resin or the like), metal powder, dust, or the like that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553 may be confirmed. In this case, with the game board 5 detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front side being removed, from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 through the payout base 551 molded of transparent synthetic resin. It is possible to check the metal powder, dust, and the like that have entered the guide passage 570a, and also to check from the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-8-3. Promotion of falling metal powder 3]
Next, a second modified example of a mode in which the metal powder, the dust, and the like of the game ball B are positively dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (B). As described above, FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from above, and FIG. 57 (B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure. The second modified example described below is a mode and a mode in which the metal powder, dust, and the like of the game ball B are positively dropped depending on the shape of the tank rail 553, the position where the cutout portion 553aa is formed, and the like. It may be performed in combination with one or both of the modified examples, or may be performed alone.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a ball tank 552 has an in-tank step portion 552m, and a tank rail 553 has an in-tank rail step portion 553m. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, an in-tank step 552m is formed along the edge of the opening 552k of the ball tank 552, and the first bent portion of the tank rail 553 is formed. A step portion 553m inside the tank rail is formed on the upstream side of 553da. The in-tank step 552m and the in-tank rail step 553m are inclined at an angle larger than the inclination angle of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Specifically, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined at an angle X, the tank rail step portion 553m is inclined at an angle Y, the tank step portion 552m is inclined at an angle Z, and the tank rail step portion 553m is inclined. And the inclination angle Z of the in-tank step 552m are larger than the inclination angle X of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the inclination angle Z of the in-tank step portion 552m is larger than the inclination angle Y of the in-tank rail step portion 553m. The inclination angle Y of the tank rail step portion 553m may be larger than the inclination angle Z of the tank step portion 552m. Alternatively, the inclination angle Y of the tank rail step portion 553m and the inside of the tank may be increased. The inclination angle Z of the step portion 552m may be the same.

  When the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, the flow speed is increased by the in-tank step portion 552 and drops to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Further, due to the impact at this time, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B is peeled off and falls on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Then, the foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the step portion 552 in the tank moves to the downstream side in the tank rail 553 as the gaming ball B flows down.

  Further, an in-tank rail step portion 553m is formed on the downstream side of the in-tank step portion 552. Then, the game ball B flowing down in the tank rail 553 has an increased rolling speed at the step portion, and due to the impact when it falls on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, metal powder, dust or the like attached to the surface of the game ball B. Is peeled off and falls on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. As described above, the step portion 553m in the tank rail is formed on the upstream side of the first bent portion 553da. The cutout portion 553aa is formed in the first bent portion 553da as described above.

  That is, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the in-tank step portion 552 and has collected on the first bent portion 553da, or metal that has dropped to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the in-tank step portion 553m. Foreign matter such as powder and dust falls from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 is provided with the in-tank step portion 552m, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the in-tank rail step portion 553m. Foreign substances such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off and dropped onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, and the dropped foreign substances such as metal powder and dust are collected in the first bent portion 553da. It can be dropped from a notch portion 553aa formed in one bent portion 553da. That is, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed so as to pass through the tank step 552m and the tank rail step 553m without fail. By removing foreign matter such as metal powder or dust adhering to the ball B and dropping it from the cutout portion 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, the metal powder, dust or the like is actively removed from the tank rail 553. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent metal powder, dust, and the like from entering the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and to prevent the game operation from being hindered.

  Further, in the above example, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553 is configured to be dropped at the two step portions of the tank inner step portion 552m and the tank rail inner step portion 553m. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the can be peeled off at a high rate.

  In the above example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are each provided with a step, but a plurality of steps may be provided only on one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Only one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 may be provided with one stepped portion.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, and is electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the tank rail 553 is grounded to the island facility of the game hall. It may be guided and removed. With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of peeling off the metal powder, dust and the like adhering to the game ball B. That is, since the game ball B flows into the tank rail 553, static electricity is removed to weaken the attraction of metal powder, dust, etc., and in this state, the tank rail step portion 553m is passed, so the tank rail step portion 553m. The metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are easily peeled off due to the impact when passing through. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that metal powder, dust, and the like will be peeled off from the game ball B, and to drop the metal powder, dust, and the like from the notch portion 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, and prevent the metal powder, dust, and the like from entering the guide passage 570a. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered. Further, since it is possible to remove the static electricity of the game ball B that is in contact with the tank rail 553, it is possible to suppress the reattachment of the metal powder that has peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B.

  Also in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having conductivity, so that the pachinko machine with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. When confirming the presence of metal powder or dust adhering to the eaves part (first eaves part 551da and / or second eaves part 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting part 301 from the front of 1, the metal powder and the It is possible to make the presence of dust clear and to easily confirm the presence state of metal powder and dust.

  Further, the eaves portion (first portion) made of an insulator (transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin) is used to prevent metal powder, dust, and the like that have fallen out of the tank rail 553 from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da. Since the one eaves portion 551da and / or the second eaves portion 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640 can be attached and retained, the metal powder of the game ball B is covered with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. It becomes possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually the metal powder of the game ball B is transferred to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the adhesion.

  In addition, the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 may be formed of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like). In this case, the guide passage 570a is not discharged from the cutout portion 553d of the tank rail 553 and is guided into the guide passage 570a. You can check the metal powder and dust that have entered. In addition, the confirmation of metal powder, dust, and the like that have entered the guide passage 570a is performed by opening the game board mounting portion 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. It is possible to confirm it from the payout base 551 molded from a transparent synthetic resin, or from the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-9. Suppression of metal powder movement when tilting a game machine]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the movement of the metal powder is suppressed when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 35, 42 to 45, and 59. FIG. 59 (A) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover 555 as seen from the front, and FIG. 59 (B) tilts the pachinko machine 1 so that the side on which the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is the lower surface. It is a perspective view showing the inside of the 2nd rail cover 555 in the state where it was made.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is connected to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 at the most downstream portion (the right lower end portion in the drawing of FIG. 35) and passes through the tank rail 553. The game ball is guided to the ball guiding unit 570.

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a groove shape that is opened upward, and forms a flow path that slopes downward to the right in the drawing toward the most downstream portion. It is designed to change the direction.

  The second rail cover 555 provided at the upper end of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 has a curved inner surface on the downstream side (lower right portion in the drawing), and the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555. And the inner wall on the downstream side (right end in the figure) of the tank rail 553 are arranged so as to be continuous with each other to form a wall portion on the downstream side (right end in the figure) of the tank rail 553. That is, the curved-shaped upstream portion of the second rail cover 555 serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the curved-shaped downstream portion serves as the side wall of the vertical passage that is the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. Has become.

  As described above, the second rail cover 555 can be attached to and detached from the tank rail 553. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the second rail cover 555 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole so as to face the side wall portion of the second rail cover 555, and the side wall of the tank rail 553. Locking protrusions 553c are formed on the outside of the portions so as to correspond to the locking portions 555a of the second rail cover 555, respectively. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the second rail cover 555 is covered from above the tank rail 553 so that the tank rail 553 is inserted between the side wall portions of the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553 is locked. The second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 by press-fitting the protrusion 553c into the locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a of the second rail cover 555.

  Then, when the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are in a locked state and a load of a predetermined amount or more acts in a direction in which the side wall portion of the second rail cover 555 is separated from the groove portion of the tank rail 553, The side wall of the second rail cover 555 is deformed, and the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. Note that the above-described mode in which the second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 is an example, and is limited to this as long as the second rail cover 555 is detachably attached to the tank rail 553. However, the second rail cover 555 may be screwed to the tank rail 553 with a screw, for example.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, the second rail cover 555 has a tank rail 553 of It constitutes the wall on the extension of the bottom. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided is the metal powder accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as dust and the like moves inside the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream side of the tank rail 553 and comes into contact with the inner wall side of the second rail cover 555 provided at the most downstream side of the tank rail 553.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the removable second rail cover 555 is provided at the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 to form the wall portion of the tank rail 553, and the side portion where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided ( Since the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the right side portion in FIG. 35 faces downward, the second rail cover 555 receives metal powder, dust, and the like accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, so that the ball When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (right side portion in FIG. 35) where the guidance unit 570 is provided is downward, from the inside of the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. The moving metal powder and dust can be received by the second rail cover 555, and it can be prevented from entering the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570. Kill.

  A recess 555c is formed on the inner wall of the second rail cover 555. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the end of the second rail cover 555 (the right end in the drawing) has a bottom portion at the portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage and the portion that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553. A recess 555c is formed. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) provided with the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is downward, as shown in FIG. 59, the vertical direction of the second rail cover 555. The portion that serves as the side wall of the passage is the lower surface, and foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved toward the most downstream side in the tank rail 553 is formed on the inner wall of the portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555. The recessed portion 555c is made to enter. That is, by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) where the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is downward, metal powder and dust moving toward the downstream side inside the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as the above is received and retained by a recess 555c formed in a portion of the second rail cover 555 that serves as a side wall of the vertical passage. As a result, it is possible to prevent metal powder or dust moving from the inside of the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

  Although the second rail cover 555 has the bottomed recessed portion 555c in this example, the same effect can be obtained even with a through hole. That is, a through hole is formed in a portion of the end of the second rail cover 555 (right end in the drawing) that serves as a side wall of the vertical passage and a portion that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) that faces downward is tilted, the foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has moved toward the most downstream side inside the tank rail 553 is It may be discharged to the outside of the tank rail 553 from a through hole formed in the inner wall of the rail cover 555, whereby a metal moving from the inside of the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent powder and dust from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

  Further, since the second rail cover 555 is detachably attached to the tank rail 553, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (right side portion in FIG. 35) on which the ball guiding unit 570 is provided is downward. In this state, the second rail cover 555 is released from the second rail cover 555 by releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553, so that the metal received by the second rail cover 555 and attached to the second rail cover 555. The powder and dust can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553, and the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected intrudes into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570. Can be suppressed.

  The second rail cover 555 can be reused by discarding the adhered metal powder and dust and cleaning the second rail cover 555. In this way, metal powder, dust, and the like in the tank rail 553 can be easily removed from the tank rail 553 by removing the second rail cover 555.

  That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is detached from the island facility of the game shop, the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are released from the locked state, the second rail cover 555 is detached, and the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 is released. By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that this wall part (the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) is in a downward state, The metal powder or dust that moves from the inside of the tank 552 or the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 can be discharged from the part of the second rail cover 555 where the wall portion is missing.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is detached from the island facility of the game store and moved, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 provided with the second rail cover 555 (the side on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided) By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the portion (the right side in FIG. 35) faces downward, metal powder and dust moving from the inside of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 can be removed. Can be received by the second rail cover 555, and in this state, the second rail cover 555 is released by releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and separating the second rail cover 555. The metal powder and dust that are received and attached to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided by releasing the locked state of the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and separating the second rail cover 555. By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) that is moved toward the bottom can be easily removed from the tank rail 553, such as metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 that has moved. . Further, it is possible to prevent the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected.

  In the above example, the second rail cover 555 is provided so that the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side of the tank rail are continuous, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a step may be provided between the inner wall on the downstream side of the second rail cover 555 and the inner wall on the downstream side of the tank rail 553, and in particular, the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 may be located outside the inner wall of the tank rail 553. In the case of providing a step that is located, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 provided with the second rail cover 555 (the side portion provided with the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 (the right side portion in FIG. 35) )) Is tilted downward so that the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 is recessed below the inner wall of the tank rail 553, the inside of the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553. The metal powder and dust moving from the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 can be received and retained by the inner wall of the second rail cover 555, and -555 and the tank rail 553 are released from the locked state and the second rail cover 555 is detached, so that the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 and adhering to the second rail cover 555 are stored in the tank. It can be removed from within the rail 553.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 provided with the second rail cover 555 (the side portion provided with the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 (FIG. 35). In the case where the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the right side portion) is downward, various boards, connectors, and the like are not positioned below the second rail cover 555. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal plate 558 is provided above the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 with a predetermined distance in FIG. 35, and the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 are provided. A payout control board box 632 for accommodating the payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like are provided below the above, with a predetermined distance therebetween.

  In this way, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 provided with the second rail cover 555 (the side portion provided with the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 (the right portion in FIG. 35)) is positioned downward. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted, various boards and connectors are prevented from being located below the second rail cover 555, so that the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. With the second rail cover 555 removed, the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side part where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side part in FIG. 35)) faces downward. When the machine 1 is tilted, or the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 (the side portion where the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35)) When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the position is downward, and the second rail cover 555 is released by releasing the locked state of the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553, the ball tank 552 and the tank Metal powder and dust that move from inside the rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 are prevented from falling toward various substrates and connectors and adhering to various substrates and connectors, and are caused by the metallic powder. It is possible to avoid electrical trouble (short circuit). In particular, when metal powder or dust drops toward the interface board 635 not housed in the board case, the metal powder or dust is likely to adhere to the interface board 635, and electrical trouble (short circuit) easily occurs. Is effective in avoiding electrical trouble (short circuit).

[4-10. Positional relationship between notch of tank rail and various boards]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal generated by the wear of the game ball B is formed. Although foreign substances such as powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, a part of a plurality of substrates arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is a rear side of the game board 5. Among them, the substrate installation mode on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a peculiar configuration so that it is less likely to be affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the tank rail 553. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is viewed from the back side, the tank rail 553 is provided on the upper right side of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the upper right side of the back side of the body frame 4). There is. Then, a plurality of cutouts 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and metal powder or the like generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is formed. The foreign matter is removed from the tank rail 553 so that the game ball B can smoothly flow down on the tank rail 553.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example viewed from the back side, and is located at the leftmost end of the cutout portion 553aa provided in the tank rail 553 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side. A virtual line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass on the left side of the notch portion 553aa, the horizontal direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is divided by the virtual line, and the area on the right side of the virtual line is defined as the area A, while It is the figure which represented the left side area | region as the area | region B on the boundary of a virtual line. In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side in a front view, the tank rail 553 having the cutout portion 553aa is located above the area A. Therefore, regarding the area A, the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided. This is an area that is easily affected by foreign particles such as metal powder falling (area with a high possibility of foreign particles falling). On the other hand, above the area B, there is no tank rail 553 having the cutout portion 553aa, and only the ball tank 552 having no cutout portion 553aa is present. It is an area that is unlikely to be affected by a foreign substance such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the rail 553 (a region in which the foreign substance is unlikely to fall). Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the opening / closing shaft (the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520) of the main body frame 4 is provided at the right end portion of the area A. As a result, the area B farther from the opening / closing axis of the body frame 4 than the area A (the area B closer to the open end side than the area A) is from the outside when compared with the area A when the body frame 4 is in the open state. The area is easily accessible. Further, an area A closer to the opening / closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the area B (an area A farther from the open end side than the area B) is accessed from the outside as compared with the area B when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. It is a difficult area to do.

  In each of the area A and the area B, a plurality of boards are arranged on the back surface side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100) such that the mounting surface of the electronic component can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Of these, in the area A, the panel relay board 1700A is arranged, whereas in the area B, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control unit 1300. A main control board 1310 is arranged. As will be described later in detail, since the panel relay board 1700A is mounted so that each of the connectors is exposed to the outside, the panel relay board 1700A is affected by foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. It needs to be provided in the difficult area B. Further, the panel relay board 1700A includes a peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, various sensors provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, a drive motor, a speaker, etc.). Is mainly connected electrically and is connected to each member by wiring (harness etc.), but by being provided in the area B that is easily accessible from the outside, it is easy to connect and disconnect these wirings. There is an advantage that can be. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 prioritize that the panel relay board 1700A is provided in the area B. And is provided in a region A that is easily affected by a foreign substance such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. However, although the area A is an area that is easily affected by foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is an area that is difficult to access from the outside, and thus the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 1500 is performed. By providing the board 1510, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in the area A, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on these boards.

  First, on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100), from the top, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board of the main control unit 1300. 1310 is provided so that the mounting surface of the electronic component can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The substrates arranged in the area A are respectively housed in a substrate box (a box-shaped box made of a non-conductive resin forming the substrate box and composed of a cover body). Therefore, in the area A, while maintaining the difficulty of being accessed from the outside, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like are controlled by the board box with respect to foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Can be prevented from directly adhering to the board, and the risk of board failure, which is important for game control, can be reduced. A plurality of minute vent holes are formed in each board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are housed. However, these ventilation holes are not provided on the upper surface of the substrate box in a state where each substrate box is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and prevent foreign substances such as metal powder from entering through the ventilation holes. ing.

  In the area A, the main control board 1310 among the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100) is the cutting of the tank rail 553. It is provided at a position farthest from the notch portion 553aa. Further, between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 and the drive board unit 1700 having the panel drive board 1720 are provided. It is provided. Therefore, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is less likely to adhere to the main control board 1310 than other boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, and is useful for controlling the game. The failure risk of the main control board 1310, which is the most important, can be reduced.

  The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 described above are arranged so that not only the area A but also a part thereof is located in the area B in consideration of the ease of confirmation from the outside. However, even when the board is provided over the area A to the area B as described above, the electronic parts having a high degree of importance among the electronic parts mounted on the board (for example, the main control MPU or the peripheral control MPU) It is desirable to arrange it on the region B side to enhance safety. As long as a part of the board is located in the area A, the whole board should be stored in the board box, and foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 should be attached. Is preferably prevented. In the present embodiment, the main control board 1310 is checked more frequently than a board such as the peripheral control board 1510, so that the area extending from the area A to the area B is larger than that of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, as described above, although the main control board 1310 is arranged so as to extend over the area A and the area B, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 cannot be changed illegally. In consideration of making it difficult, the main body frame 4 is arranged on the side of the area A that is difficult to access from the outside when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. However, as described above, since the area A is an area more susceptible to the foreign matter such as the metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 than the area B, in the present embodiment, the area A is mainly formed in the board box. In addition to accommodating the control board 1310, the setting key cylinder is arranged in the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder in the area A is located directly below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Preferably. Specifically, the tank rail 553 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa spaced apart (separated) in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals, and the separation distance of the cutout portions 553aa is set. The setting key cylinder is arranged on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder is located immediately below a portion of the tank rail 553 where the cutout portion 553aa is not provided. Is preferred. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a risk of causing foreign matter such as metal powder to fall into the setting key cylinder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, while making it difficult to illegally act on the setting key cylinder.

  Further, when the setting key is left inserted in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a located in the area A due to the failure of the hall manager or the like, foreign matter such as falling metal powder adheres to the setting key. , There is a risk of causing some abnormality. In order to suppress such a danger, in the present embodiment, in addition to the arrangement of the setting key cylinder described above, an operation of inserting / removing the setting key with respect to the setting key cylinder (insertion / removal operation) is performed by grasping the setting key with respect to the main control board 1310. It is configured such that both surfaces of a portion (a portion other than the insertion portion to be inserted into the setting key cylinder) face in the left-right direction (a posture parallel to the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1). As a result, at least at the end of the work related to the setting change or the work related to the setting confirmation, both sides of the gripping portion of the setting key are oriented in the left-right direction. It is possible to reduce the possibility that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen will be accumulated on the setting key even if is left inserted.

  In the region B, a panel relay board 1710A is provided on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100) so that the mounting surface of the electronic component can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Unlike the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is not equipped with a CPU and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. This panel relay board is mainly used to electrically connect various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, a drive motor, a speaker, etc.). By connecting to the 1710A for electrical connection of performances, productivity at the time of manufacturing a gaming machine is improved, and when any abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, identification of the cause site or electrical disconnection can be performed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made easier, and the convenience of the pachinko machine 1 in terms of manufacturing and inspection can be improved. Further, since the panel relay board 1710A is connected to each member by wiring (harness etc.), a plurality of connectors, which are connection terminals for connecting these wirings, are mounted corresponding to the number of wirings connected to each board. Has been done. It is preferable that each of these connectors is mounted so as to be exposed to the outside in consideration of the above-mentioned convenience. From this point, the panel relay board 1710A has a box shape like the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The substrate is not housed in the substrate box, and the exposed portion (exposure degree) to the outside is higher than other substrates.

  Further, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710A of the present embodiment is mounted so as to be exposed to the outside in consideration of convenience as described above. Further, the connection mode is changed when the gaming machine is designed (connector mounting). In consideration of the high cost due to the change of the number), it is not housed in a box-shaped board box such as the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, but the mounting surface of the electronic component is covered with the back cover 640. I am trying. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the mounting surface of the electronic component is entirely exposed behind the pachinko machine 1. It should be noted that if the cost increase due to the change of the connection mode (change of the number of mounted connectors, etc.) at the time of designing the game machine is not considered, a simple cover in which each connector part is opened considering only the above-mentioned convenience. The panel relay board 1710A may be covered with a body so that only each connector portion is exposed.

  As described above, the region B is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 than the region A. In this embodiment, the panel relay board 1710A is provided in the area B. Specifically, the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are located across the areas A and B, but the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is entirely on the area B side. It is arranged to fit in. By doing so, even if the panel relay board 1710A has a higher exposed portion (exposure degree) to the outside than other boards, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is attached. This can be prevented and the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, the panel relay board 1710A of the present embodiment is arranged so that the entire panel relay board 1710A fits in the area B side, but further, the side end portion of the panel relay board 1710A is arranged as far as possible from the area A. I am trying to do it. That is, in the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment, the sides (long sides) of the substantially rectangular panel relay board 1710A in the longitudinal direction are set so that the entire panel relay board 1710A is surely set in the area B side and is separated from the area A by a predetermined distance. The sides are arranged so that the top and bottom sides are up and down. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A is separated from the area A by a predetermined distance, and foreign matter such as metal powder is surely prevented from dropping from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and adhering to the exposed portion of the panel relay board 1710A. I am trying.

  In this embodiment, in order to preferentially remove foreign matter from the tank rails 553, the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side in a front view, and slightly left from the substantial center of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. Although the virtual line is set at the shifted position and the area of the area A is larger than the area of the area B, the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the tank rail 553 in a front view from the back side. The area of the region A is smaller than the area of the region B in the case where a virtual line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass to the left of the notch 553aa located at the leftmost end of the notch 553aa. Alternatively, the virtual lines may be set as described above, or the virtual lines may be set so that the area of the region A and the area of the region B are substantially the same. Further, when notches are provided not only on the tank rails 553 but also on the ball tank 522 and having a role equivalent to that of the notches 553aa, the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the ball tank 522 in a front view from the back side. Areas A and B may be set as a mode in which an imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the notch located at the leftmost end of the notch.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are kept as close to the area B as possible (the bending portion does not enter the area A). Specifically, more wiring fixing portions (members such as hooks) for fixing various wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are provided on the area B side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 than on the area A side. In addition, as many wirings as possible are retained on the side of the region B. As a result, the wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are also less likely to be affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553.

  Further, as described in detail above, the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, and the first eaves portion 551da is provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 (game). To the left of the rear side of the panel 1100), it extends below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553. That is, in the area A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the board such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, whereas the area B is located. In, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 and the panel relay board 1710A. As described above, in the area A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the substrate such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the back cover 640 is provided. Not only when the back cover 640 is opened, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, Suppressing foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa toward the substrates such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 located therebelow. You can As a result, regarding the substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 provided in the area A, not only the substrate box that accommodates these substrates, but also the foreign material such as metal powder by the first eaves portion 551da. It is possible to prevent the adhesion from occurring.

  On the other hand, in the region B, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends to below the ball tank 552 and is located above the panel relay board 1710A. When the back cover 640 is closed, not only when the back cover 640 is opened, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward the panel relay board 1710A located on the lower left side thereof. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not stored in the board box, but the first eaves portion 551da prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A. You can

  In addition, although the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described above as the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the first embodiment, the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the second embodiment. In the case where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected and jointly constitute the eaves portion, as in the configuration of No. 1, as in the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as metal powder according to the third embodiment, When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the second eaves portion 640a is not provided with the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is independently provided, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. In the case of configuring That is, in the region B, the eaves portion provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is extended to below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and above the panel relay board 1710A. When the back cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached at the eaves portion at least when the back cover 640 is closed. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward the panel relay board 1710A located at the lower left of the foreign material. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B can be prevented from adhering foreign matter such as metal powder due to the eaves although it is not stored in the board box.

  Further, in the above description, the eaves portion of the area A provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend below the ball tank 552 of the area B. The eaves portion is not provided below the ball tank 552 of FIG. 1, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the eaves portion of the area A through the cutout portion 553aa may move to the area B side. You may comprise so that the movement prevention part which prevents may be provided. For example, the eaves of the region A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to bend upward at the boundary between the regions A and B. Even in such a configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the eaves portion of the area A via the cutout portion 553aa does not move to the area B side and moves to the area B side. It is possible to prevent the panel relay board 1710A located from falling. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not housed in the board box, but is protected by the eaves part of the area A and the movement prevention part that prevents movement to the area B side. It is possible to prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the back surface side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100), the board color of the board mounting surface side of the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is provided in the area A. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are coated with a color different from the board color on the mounting surface side. Specifically, the color of the resist or the silk printing color applied to the board surface of the panel relay board 1710A is set to the color of the resist or the silk printing color applied to the board surface of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. Is different from. Thereby, regarding the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B, the peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various kinds provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. A board on which wiring for electrically connecting to a sensor, a drive motor, a speaker, etc.) should be integrated, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is attached. It is possible to easily determine from the outside that the vehicle is located in the area B where it is difficult to perform. Regarding the substrates such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the area A, foreign matter such as metal powder that is easily dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is likely to adhere to the area A. Therefore, it is preferable to apply a color in a color that makes it easy to determine whether or not the foreign matter such as the metal powder adheres, for example, a dark color (green or black). However, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the region B is also located in the region B where foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa is unlikely to adhere to the region B. Similar to the provided substrate, it may be configured to paint with a color (green, black, or the like) that makes it easy to determine whether or not a foreign substance such as metal powder is attached.

  In addition, as a method for facilitating from the outside to recognize the presence of the region B where foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the cutout 553aa is difficult to attach from the outside, as described above The presence of the areas A and B is discriminated from the outside, not only by the difference in the substrate color of the side, but also by making some marking on the portion of the back cover 640 in the closed state that covers the area A or the portion that covers the area B. You may make it easier. Specifically, the specific marking B may be provided on a portion of the back cover 640 that covers the area B, and the specific marking B may not be provided on the area A. As the specific marking B, for example, a sticker or print with specific information indicating that it is the area B (character information or symbol information such as “high safety” or “relay board side”) is attached. Alternatively, it is possible to exemplify that specific information indicating the area B (character information such as “high safety” or “relay board side” or symbol information) is formed and processed on the back cover 640 itself. Alternatively, the specific marking A may be provided on a portion of the back cover 640 that covers the area A, and the specific marking A may not be provided on the area B. As the specific marking A in this case, for example, a sticker or a print in which specific information indicating the area A (text information or symbol information such as “low safety” or “main control board side”) is written Or a specific information indicating that it is the area A. Specific information indicating that it is the area A (character information or symbol information such as "low safety" or "main control board side") is displayed. It can be illustrated that the back cover 640 itself is formed and processed. Further, the specific markings A and B may be provided on the part of the back cover 640 that covers the region A and the part that covers the region B, respectively.

  It should be noted that the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B on the rear surface side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100) is provided immediately below the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 1 may be provided at a position apart from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the side. That is, the panel relay board 1710A is not only the area B separated from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 but also the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured to be provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from. In such a case, since the panel relay board 1710A is located at a predetermined distance from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, it falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A, and reduce the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A.

  Further, when the panel relay board 1710A is provided at a position apart from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined distance when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the cutout portion is provided. The panel relay board 1710A may be arranged in the region B so that the ball tank 522 itself, which is not provided with 553aa, is positioned directly above like the eaves. This prevents the foreign matter from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A even if the foreign matter falls from above the pachinko machine 1 or the like including the island equipment or the like instead of the notch portion 553aa. The risk of failure of the relay board 1710A can be reduced.

  Further, the panel relay board 1710A may be provided separately on a plurality of boards instead of one board. When a plurality of panel relay boards 1710A are provided separately, all the boards may be provided in the area B or may be provided separately in the areas A and B. For example, in the case where a plurality of panel relay boards 1710A are divided into a panel relay board 1710A1 and a panel relay board 1710A2 so as to have different board areas, a board having a large board area and a high possibility of adhering foreign matter (for example, the panel relay board 1710A1). For a substrate having a high safety and having a small substrate area and a low possibility of foreign matter adhesion (for example, the panel relay substrate 1710A2), a portion of the region A side that is sufficiently separated from the cutout portion 553aa ( For example, it may be arranged on the rear right lower end portion of the game panel 1100).

[4-11. Positional relationship between the notch on the tank rail and the drawer connector]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are electrically connected via a predetermined relay board. The game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 as such a relay board. A drawer connector DCN capable of directly electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 to each other without performing a separate wiring work may be provided. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62.

  As shown in FIG. 61, when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the front, each terminal is on the lower right side of the front surface of the main body frame 4 (lower left side when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back side). A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is provided so as to face. Further, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the lower right side of the rear surface of the game board 5 (the lower left side when viewed from the back surface of the game board 5), each terminal faces the back surface side of the game board 5. A board-side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 is provided. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 Each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

  In addition, two sets of drawer connectors each including a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and a game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 are provided. Depending on one drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, thereby providing the main board equipped with the game board 5. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals by the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 are formed. Further, depending on the other drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, thereby allowing the game board 5 to be connected. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by the peripheral control board 1510 provided, the decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, various sensors, various speakers, and the like are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are like the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In the same way as the panel relay board 1710A described above, the board tank is not housed in the board box and is provided in the area B, which is the area on the left side of the tank rail 553 where the ball tank 552 is provided. That is, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided not in the area A that is easily affected, but in the area B that is not easily affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. More specifically, regarding the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 attached It is provided in a position of a region B farthest from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the frame of the frame 4. As described above, by providing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 in the area B instead of the area A, the tank rail 553. Prevents foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the notch portion 553aa from adhering to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. The risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board attaching portion 301, which is a portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is to be attached, is opened. In this state, no member is provided between the tank rail 553 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. Further, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder accumulated in the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 easily falls due to the impact of the removal. In this respect, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided not in the area A but in the area B, so that each terminal is exposed when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4. Although it is in the state, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4, and the body frame of the body frame 4 is prevented. The risk of failure of the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control unit 1500, the drive board unit 1700, the main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are the tank rails 553. While the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided immediately below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Is provided at a position away from the pachinko machine 1 toward the front side by a predetermined distance P1. The notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are separated from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to the region B, it is provided at a position apart from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined distance P1 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, with respect to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, the cutout portion of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. Since it is located at a predetermined distance P1 from 553aa, metal powder and the like dropped from the cutout 553aa of the tank rail 553 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. It prevents foreign substances from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 The risk of failure of the type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In addition, in this example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the pachinko machine 1 from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Although it is provided at a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance P1 toward the front side, the position is separated from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 by a predetermined distance P1 ′ toward the rear side instead of the front side (for example, the main body frame side). The ball connector 552 and the tank rail 553 may be provided directly above the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Even in such a configuration, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 cut the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is located away from the notch 553aa by the predetermined distance P1 ', the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are directed from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. When provided at positions separated by a predetermined distance P1 ', the ball tank 552 does not exist immediately above the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Not only foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the rail 553, but also the game ball B or the like that overflows and falls from the ball tank 552, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex) Type) to suppress direct hits to the main frame 4 and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and game board 5 It is possible to further reduce the failure risk of side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Furthermore, there is a new risk due to the absence of any member of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 immediately above the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 (from the outside). In consideration of foreign matter drop, etc., a means for covering the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 to prevent foreign matter from falling from the outside (a back cover 640, etc.) ) Is preferably provided separately from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553.

  The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is provided in a box-shaped body having a rectangular opening so that the opening of the box-shaped body faces the front side of the body frame 4. However, more specifically, the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided so as to slightly face the left side when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back surface. That is, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4, the opening of the box-shaped body does not face the area A side in the area B, but faces the side opposite to the area A. It is provided. As described above, with respect to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, do not face the area A side which is easily affected by the fall of foreign matter such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Since the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided in the main body frame 4, not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. However, it becomes difficult to enter from the opening of the box-shaped body in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4, and the risk of failure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is reduced. You can

  Further, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided such that a box-shaped main body having a rectangular opening has a vertically long shape (the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction). That is, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 has a vertically elongated shape (upper and lower) in the region B as compared with the case where the boxy body has a horizontally long shape (the left-right direction is the longitudinal direction). Since the direction is the longitudinal direction, the area of the upper surface of the box-shaped main body can be reduced. As described above, with respect to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, the upper surface of the box-shaped main body that is easily affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 becomes smaller. Since the box-shaped main body is provided as described above, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. It becomes difficult to adhere to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the frame 4, and the risk of failure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 can be reduced.

  Further, in the region B, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is extended to below the ball tank 552, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave portion) of the body frame 4 is provided. Type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are located above the main cover via the notch 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. However, the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 (convex type) It can be suppressed to fall toward DCN2. Further, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided in the main body frame 4, not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached, the main guide is provided via the cutout portion 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the portion 553a to the outside can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. , It is possible to prevent the main body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 from falling downward. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the area B are not stored in the board box. However, the first eaves portion 551da can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

  In addition, although the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described above as the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the first embodiment, the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the second embodiment. In the case where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected and jointly constitute the eaves portion, as in the configuration of No. 1, as in the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as metal powder according to the third embodiment, When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the second eaves portion 640a is not provided with the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is independently provided, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. In the case of configuring That is, in the region B, the eaves portion provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends to below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and the body frame of the body frame 4 is provided. It may be configured to be positioned above the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed via the cutout portion 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and attached at the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa is Main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 located at the lower left and game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 It can be suppressed to fall toward DCN2. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the area B are not stored in the board box. However, the eaves portion can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

  Further, in the above description, the eaves portion of the area A provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend below the ball tank 552 of the area B. The eaves portion is not provided below the ball tank 552 of FIG. 1, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the eaves portion of the area A through the cutout portion 553aa may move to the area B side. You may comprise so that the movement prevention part which prevents may be provided. For example, the eaves of the region A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to bend upward at the boundary between the regions A and B. Even in such a configuration, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the eaves portion of the area A via the cutout portion 553aa does not move to the area B side and moves to the area B side. It is possible to prevent the main body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 from being dropped. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the area B are not stored in the board box. However, the eaves portion of the area A and the movement prevention portion that prevents the movement to the area B side can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

  Further, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board attaching portion 301, which is a portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is to be attached, is in an open state, and the main body frame 4 side Although the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is visible, a predetermined region around the installation of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is painted black. As a result, before mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the installation periphery of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. If it is possible to remove foreign matter such as metal powder from the surroundings of the installation, when attaching the game board 5 to the body frame 4, it can be attached to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. It is possible to prevent the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided with a game board mounting portion 501c which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 62 is located behind the game board placing portion 501c, but between the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board placing portion 501c, as shown in FIG. 62 (A). The protruding portion 501z is provided as a step so that the installation location of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is higher than the game board mounting portion 501c. Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is attached so as to move from the front side to the rear side of the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. To be Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a foreign substance such as metal powder on the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. , The foreign matter is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board placing section 501c, and the pushed foreign matter is located on the main frame side drawer connector (behind the game board placing section 501c). It is possible to suppress the movement toward the concave type) DCN1. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is located rearward of the game board placing portion 501c, but it is possible to prevent foreign matter from adhering due to the step difference with the game board placing portion 501c You can

[4-12. Positional relationship between the notch on the tank rail and the external terminal board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the external terminal board 558 electrically connected to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side is provided above the tank rail 553, but the position where the external terminal board 558 is provided. May be provided below the tank rail 553. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, an external terminal plate 558 is provided below the tank rail 553 so that each terminal faces the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the hall computer installed on the game hall side by connecting to the wiring from the game hall side. Then, the hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the external terminal board 558 is provided on the side where the tank rail 553 is provided, like the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. It is provided in a region A which is a region. That is, the external terminal plate 558 is not in the region B where the foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and is unlikely to be affected by the foreign matter such as the metal dust falls from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided in the area A that is easily affected by. The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, which are provided in the area A, are respectively housed in the board box. Since the external terminal board 558 needs to be connected to the wiring from the game hall side, it is not housed in the board box and the wiring connection terminals are exposed.

  In this respect, in the area A, on the back surface side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100), the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the external terminal board 558, and the panel drive of the drive board unit 1700 are sequentially driven from the top. A board 1720 and a main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are provided. That is, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is formed to have a smaller width than the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510 so that the external terminal board 558 does not protrude in the left-right direction with respect to the width of the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is provided below the peripheral control unit 1500. As described above, for boards such as the external terminal board 558 that requires wiring connection work and is difficult to store in the board box, the peripheral control board 1510 has the peripheral control board 1510 although the wiring connection terminals are exposed. By being provided directly below the unit 1500, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the external terminal board 558, and reduce the risk of failure of the external terminal board 558. You can

  As described above, since the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558, the peripheral terminal unit 558 is more peripheral than the peripheral terminal unit 558. The control board 1510 is located closer to the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Therefore, for example, when foreign matter such as metal powder continues to drop from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, the foreign matter such as metal powder may adhere to the peripheral control board 1510 rather than the external terminal board 558. Therefore, it is more likely that an electrical trouble will occur in the peripheral control board 1510 before an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.

  It should be noted that the board provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558 is different from the peripheral control board 1510 except for the main control board 1310 that affects the progress of the game itself. Other substrates may be used. For example, the door frame 3 is provided with a dummy movable body that performs a predetermined operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a certain period of time has elapsed), and the driving force is applied to the dummy movable body with the peripheral control board 1510. The dummy substrate relayed by is provided between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558, and the dummy substrate is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 before electrical trouble occurs. It may be configured to increase the possibility of trouble. When such a dummy board has an electrical problem, it is transmitted to the outside that the dummy movable body does not move and that the external terminal board 558 is likely to have an electrical problem thereafter. You can Further, the substrate provided between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 is not limited to one substrate, and may be a plurality of substrates.

  Here, the external terminal board 558 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by the hall computer, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Although the game of the player is monitored by grasping the above, if an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558, it becomes impossible to monitor the game of the player by the hall computer, and the pachinko machine 1 Even if a fraudulent act is carried out, a problem occurs that the hall manager cannot grasp it on the gaming hall side. By misusing such characteristics, a fraudulent person may give a shock to the pachinko machine 1 to intentionally drop a foreign substance such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, thereby external terminal board It is feared that an electric trouble will be generated in 558 so that a game can be monitored by a hall computer, and some kind of fraudulent act will be performed on it. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc., the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically troubled. When occurs, the game can be advanced on the main control board 1310, but various effects such as light emission effect, sound effect, and movable effect by various decorative boards and display effect by the effect display device 1600 are executed. There is a problem that you can not do it. In this regard, for example, when foreign matter such as metal powder continues to drop from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, first, an electrical trouble is caused in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used. By making various effects non-executable, the fact that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside. In other words, during the period in which the peripheral control board 1510 has an electrical trouble, various effects by the peripheral control board 1510 are in a non-executed state, and thus it is difficult to perform fraud on the pachinko machine 1. . As described above, when an electrical trouble occurs, first, the peripheral control board 1510 is caused to have an electrical trouble, thereby preventing the occurrence of an electrical trouble in the external terminal board 558. It is possible to take measures so as not to cause a situation in which a fraudulent act is performed on the pachinko machine 1 during a period when an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.

  The external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A on the side of the pachinko machine 1 where the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction. As described above in detail, in the present example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side in a front view, the opening / closing axis of the body frame 4 (the body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the body frame lower hinge portion 520) is located at the right end portion of the area A. It is set up in. That is, the area A closer to the opening / closing axis of the body frame 4 than the area B (the area A farther from the open end side than the area B) is accessed from the outside as compared to the area B when the body frame 4 is in the open state. It is a difficult area to do. In this regard, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A that is difficult to access from the outside, thereby making it difficult for a fraudulent person to access the external terminal board 558. As a result, a cheating person can monitor a game by the hall computer, and it is possible to prevent any cheating on the game. The external terminal board 558 is connected to the wiring provided in the island equipment in order to electrically connect it to the hall computer. The wiring provided in the island equipment will be connected when the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A because it hangs down from above toward the area A on the side where the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control unit 1500, the drive board unit 1700, the main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are below the tank rail 553. On the other hand, the external terminal board 558 provided on the game board 5 is provided at a position away from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined distance P2. There is. The notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1. That is, although the external terminal board 558 is the area A on the side where the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1 is formed. Is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance P2 from. As described above, since the external terminal board 558 is located at a predetermined distance P2 from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, it dropped from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the external terminal plate 558, and reduce the risk of failure of the external terminal plate 558.

  Further, a terminal cover 551k whose upper surface extends horizontally is provided on the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the upper side of the external terminal plate 558. ing. Since the terminal cover 551k is located above the external terminal plate 558, it is dropped from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and attached to the terminal cover 551k, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is located below the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to suppress the falling toward. As a result, the terminal cover 551k is provided in the area A that is easily affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in a state where the terminal cover 551k is not housed in the substrate box. The cover 551k can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering. The terminal cover 551k may be provided integrally with the external terminal plate 558, or may be provided on the substrate holder 1200 to which the external terminal plate 558 is attached.

  In this example, below the tank rail 553, the external terminal board 558 is provided below the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. However, at the position where the external terminal board 558 is provided, the above-mentioned external terminal board 558 is provided. Like the panel relay board 1710A, a board in which wiring connection terminals are exposed, that is, a board that is difficult to store in a board box because wiring connection work is required may be provided. Even in such a case, the same effect as in the case where the external terminal board 558 is provided can be obtained.

  Further, in the region A, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the external terminal plate 558. That is, in the area A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558. As described above, in the area A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the substrate such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the back cover 640 is provided. Not only when the back cover 640 is opened, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa from dropping toward the external terminal plate 558 located therebelow. As a result, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A which is easily affected by the fall of foreign matter such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 when it is not housed in the board box. The first eaves portion 551da can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

  In addition, although the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described above as the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the first embodiment, the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the second embodiment. In the case where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected and jointly constitute the eaves portion, as in the configuration of No. 1, as in the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as metal powder according to the third embodiment, When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the second eaves portion 640a is not provided with the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is independently provided, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. In the case of configuring That is, in the area A, the eaves portion provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to be located above the external terminal plate 558, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a via the portion 553aa can be received and attached at the eaves portion, and metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as the like from dropping toward the external terminal plate 558 located therebelow. As a result, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A which is easily affected by the fall of foreign matter such as metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 when it is not housed in the board box. The eaves portion can prevent the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder.

[4-13. Suppression of metal powder movement when mounted on a game board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the protrusion 501z is provided in front of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The movement of foreign matter such as metal powder may be suppressed. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 has a base main body 501a formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and slightly above the upper end of the base main body 501a. Forming the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b and the game board insertion opening 501b that penetrates the front and back in the range of about 3/4 of the total height from the lower position and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side. The game board placing part 501c on which the cage game board 5 is placed, and the game board which protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear. The regulation unit 501d is provided. In addition, on the game board 5 side (game panel 1100), a notched portion corresponding to the game board restriction portion 501d is formed, and the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b at the correct position. In this case, there is no regulation by the game board regulation section 501d, but when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b at a position that is not correct (position shifted to the left or right), the game board regulation section 501d. It interferes with and prevents the game board 5 from being inserted.

  Further, the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is provided with a discharge ball receiving portion 628 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is located immediately below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. It can be discharged to the outside from the discharge portion 1201 formed in the above through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 (A), in the main body frame 4, although the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board placing portion 501c, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game are Between the board mounting portion 501c, a planar plate-shaped protruding portion 501z protruding upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c is provided. That is, the protruding portion 501z is located in front of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and protrudes to a position higher than the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion 501c. Thereby, the protrusion 501z can restrict the rearward movement of the lower end of the game board 5 together with the game board restriction unit 501d. Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is from the front side of the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. It is attached so as to move toward the rear side. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, if there is foreign matter such as dust or metal powder on the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. At that time, such a foreign matter is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board placing section 501c, and the pushed out foreign matter is a discharge ball located behind the game board placing section 501c. The movement toward the receiving portion 628 can be suppressed. As a result, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is located rearward of the game board mounting portion 501c, but the protrusion 501z can prevent foreign matter such as dust and metal powder from entering.

  The above-mentioned protruding portion 501z extends in the left-right direction by the same length as the longitudinal direction of the game board placing portion 501c while maintaining the same height with respect to the rear end of the game board placing portion 501c. ing. In addition, the protruding portion 501z is configured to be higher than the height of the game board restricting portion 501d. For example, the height of the projecting portion 501z may be one or more heights of the game ball B. In such a case, even if the game ball B is on the upper surface of the game board placing part 501c, When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game ball B enters the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the game board placing portion 501c (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). Can be prevented.

  The protruding portion 501z is formed of a single color resin member such as black or white. As a result, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protrusion 501z before the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, and foreign matter such as metal powder is attached. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, it can be prevented from entering the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the protruding portion 501z by removing it from the protruding portion 501z. . The protruding portion 501z is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, can be easily attached to the protrusion 501z, and when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, such foreign matter is placed on the game board mount. Even if pushed from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the portion 501c, it does not scatter, and on the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the game board mounting portion 501c (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). It is possible to prevent entry.

  The projecting portion 501z of this example projects upward from the rear end of the game board placing portion 501c between the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion 501c, and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and Although it is provided so as to project to a position higher than the game board placing portion 501c, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board placing portion is provided between the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion 501c. Any structure may be used as long as it has a step height higher than 501c by a predetermined height. For example, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 may be provided at a position above the step. Even with such a step, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder extruded from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is a game board. It is possible to suppress the movement toward the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located rearward of the mounting portion 501c, and prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the discharge ball receiving portion 628. ..

  The game board mounting portion 501c is located in front of the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, but is located below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no member that blocks the game board 5 between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the game board mounting portion 501c, There is a possibility that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may adhere to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. In this respect, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion Since the protrusion 501z is provided between the portion 501c and the portion 501c, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder attached to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is received by the discharge ball. It is possible to suppress the movement toward the portion 628 and prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from entering the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  Further, the out-port sensor 3032 for detecting the game ball B collected from the out port 1008 is provided in the passage from the out port 1008 to the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 side. However, after the game ball B is discharged from the discharge part 1201, it may be provided in the passage on the body frame 4 side until the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the discharge ball receiving part 628. In such a case, when foreign matter such as metal powder enters from the discharge ball receiving portion 628, the foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the out-port sensor 3032, and the game balls B collected from the out-port 1008 cannot be normally counted. there is a possibility. Further, the number of balls of the game ball B detected by the out mouth sensor 3032 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, but if the out mouth sensor 3032 does not operate normally, the game ball B collected from the out mouth 1008. It becomes difficult to normally display the number of spheres. In this respect, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placement portion 501c, the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placement portion Since the protrusion 501z is provided between the portion 501c and the portion 501c, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder adhered to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is received by the discharge ball. It can be prevented from adhering to the outlet sensor 3032 through the portion 628, and it is possible to prevent occurrence of an electrical trouble such as erroneous counting of the game ball B due to the outlet sensor 3032.

  In the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633 are provided behind the game board placement portion 501c and further behind the discharge ball receiving portion 628. A unit 620d and an interface unit 620e having an inter-interface board 635 are provided. In this respect, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, the interface unit. Since the protrusion 501z is provided between the 620e and the game board mounting portion 501c, the metal powder adhered to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as the above from moving toward the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e. Thereby, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are located behind the game board placing portion 501c, but the metal powder or the like extruded from the game board placing portion 501c by the protrusion 501z. It is possible to prevent foreign matter from adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the inter-interface board 635, and reduce the risk of failure of those boards.

[4-14. Measures against metal powder on power supply board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the power supply board 630 is located below the tank rail 553, but the protrusion 630h is provided so as to cover the upper side of the power supply board 630, and the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided. It may be configured so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen off does not adhere. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

  As described above, the board unit 620 includes the base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and the power supply unit 620c. The payout control unit 620d is mounted on the right side in the front view, and the interface unit 620e is mounted on the left side in the front view on the power supply unit 620c. The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and.

  As shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66B, in the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface at a position below the tank rail 553. An interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 is provided. In these units, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the payout control unit 620d having the payout control board 633 and the interface unit 620e having the inter-interface board 635 are located immediately below the tank rail 553, whereas the power supply board is The power supply unit 620c having 630 is located slightly forward of the tank rail 553.

  In addition, the base unit 620b attached to the power supply unit 620c has an upper surface that horizontally extends so as to project upward from the vicinity of the rear end thereof, bend backward from a predetermined height, and cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. The protruding portion 630h is provided. The protrusion 630h is formed such that the rear end of the upper surface thereof is rearward of the rear end of the power supply unit 620c, and the left and right ends of the upper surface are longer than the length of the power supply unit 620c in the longitudinal direction. Is formed. Further, the protruding portion 630h is formed such that the rear end of the upper surface thereof is located behind the rear end of the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. The notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, since the upper side of the power supply unit 620c is covered by the protrusion 620h, not only when the back cover 640 is closed, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, the main guide portion 553a is exposed to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has dropped onto the upper surface of the protrusion 630h can be received and attached, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be included in the protrusion 630h. It is possible to prevent the power source unit 620c located on the lower side of the upper surface of the device from falling. The power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes for radiating the heat generated from the power supply board 630. As described above, regarding the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 is provided with the plurality of holes, since the protrusion 630h is positioned so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, the cutout portion of the tank rail 553 is formed. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from 553aa from adhering to the power supply board 630, and reduce the risk of failure of the power supply board 630.

  The above-mentioned protrusion 630h is formed of a single color resin member such as black or white. As a result, before and after mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder is attached to the protrusion 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder is attached. In this case, by removing it from the protruding portion 630h, it is possible to prevent the power source unit 620c located below the protruding portion 630h from being attached to the power supply substrate 630. The protruding portion 630h is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder that is a conductor can be easily attached to the protrusion 630h, and such foreign matter scatters toward the power supply unit 620c located below the protrusion 630h. Therefore, it can be prevented from adhering to the power supply substrate 630.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the protruding portion 630h is provided not on the game board 5 side but on the main body frame 4 side like the power supply unit 620c. In other words, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no game board 5 between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, but the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. Since the projecting portion 630h is located so as to cover the main body frame 4, the main guiding portion 553a is dropped to the outside through the notch portion 553aa not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and attached on the upper surface of the protruding portion 630h, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa can be removed from the upper surface of the protruding portion 630h. It is possible to prevent the power supply unit 620c located on the lower side from falling. As a result, in the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 has a plurality of holes, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630 due to the protrusion 630h. .

  The projecting portion 630h is formed so as to cover not only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c but also a part of the upper side of the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e located behind the power supply unit 620c. It may be formed so as to cover the entire upper side of the unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. In such a case, also in the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e, foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the payout control board 633 and the inter-interface board 635 due to the protrusion 630h formed so as to cover the upper side thereof. Can be prevented. The protrusion 630h may be formed so as to cover only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, and in addition to the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, one of the upper side of the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. You may form so that only one may be covered.

  Further, a first eaves portion 551da provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is located above the power supply unit 620c. That is, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c. As described above, since the first eaves portion 551da is located between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and attached at the first eaves portion 551da, and the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa. It is possible to suppress foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the power source unit 620c located below the foreign matter. Accordingly, in the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 has a plurality of holes, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630 by the first eaves portion 551da. You can

  In addition, although the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described above as the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the first embodiment, the foreign matter countermeasure such as the metal powder according to the second embodiment. In the case where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected and jointly constitute the eaves portion, as in the configuration of No. 1, as in the configuration of the foreign matter countermeasure such as metal powder according to the third embodiment, When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the second eaves portion 640a is not provided with the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is independently provided, as in the configuration for preventing foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. In the case of configuring That is, the eaves portion provided below the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be located above the power supply unit 620c, and at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the cutout portion 553aa is interposed. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a can be received and attached at the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa, It is possible to suppress falling toward the power supply unit 620c located therebelow. As a result, in the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 has a plurality of holes, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630 due to the eaves.

  When the back cover 640 is closed, the back cover 640 and the power supply unit 620c are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, but the upper end of the power supply unit 620c is lower than the lower end of the back cover 640. It is located so that it is above. From this point as well, when the back cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa is positioned so that the upper end is higher than the lower end of the back cover 640. It is possible to prevent the power unit 620c from falling. Thus, in the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 has a plurality of holes, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the power supply board 630. However, the risk of failure of the power supply board 630 can be reduced.

  In addition, the protruding portion 630h is formed so as to protrude upward from the vicinity of the rear end of the base unit 620b and have a vertical surface. That is, in the main body frame 4, the power supply unit 630 has a power supply board 630 at a position rearward of the protrusion 501z protruding from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c and further rearward of the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h. 620c, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface unit 620e having an inter-interface board 635 are provided. As described in detail above, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, after the game board mounting portion 501c. By providing the projecting portion 501z projecting from the end, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, such foreign matter is on the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 located behind the projecting portion 501z (power source). The unit 620c etc. is prevented from entering. At this time, even if foreign matter such as metal powder enters behind the protrusion 501z, the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h, which is a separate member, is provided at a position behind the protrusion 501z. Thus, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent such foreign matter from moving toward the power supply unit 620c or the like located behind the vertical surface of the protrusion 630h. . That is, not only the protruding portion 501z but also the vertical surface of the protruding portion 630h which is a separate member, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting portion 501c is eliminated. , Functions as a member for suppressing movement toward the power supply unit 620c and the like. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder extruded from the game board placement portion 501c is prevented from double-adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the inter-interface board 635, and the risk of failure of those boards is reduced. It can be reduced. In the above description, the protruding portion 501z is provided in front of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. You may comprise so that only a vertical surface may be provided.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 to 74. FIG. 67 is a front view of a game board in which the game panel and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 seen from the right front, FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 seen from the left front, and FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 71 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, it is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 111 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rear end of the game area 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 77 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and the game is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 156 and 111, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 75 and the like) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving the decoration board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720 are provided. The rear side of the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 so that the left side thereof can be hinge-rotatably attached, and the right side of the drive substrate box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B.

  The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200, which is attached to the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front and has two general winning openings 2001, and the starting position at the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. From the attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in the front view and having one general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 Also above, a frame having a gate portion 2003 that is attached to the game area 5a at a position slightly above the center of the front view. And includes the center role object 2500, the.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a first starting opening sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning hole sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided therein, and a second detecting hole for the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004. The starting opening sensor 2402 and the special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 are provided. In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism that acts illicitly.

  The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the rear unit 3010 is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 111). See).

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back first rendering unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second rendering unit 3200 mounted inside the back box 3010 behind the back first rendering unit 3100. , A rear third effect unit 3300 that is mounted in the back box 3010 behind the second rear effect unit 3200, and a starting opening unit 2100 and a side unit 2200 that are installed on the front surface of the second rear effect unit 3200 in general. The back left ball discharging unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and discharges it downward, and the game received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. And a back right ball discharging unit 3040 for receiving the ball B and discharging it downward.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (a) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the rear.

  The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front constituent member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 extending in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a center view in a front view, and extending in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and the outer rail of the right rail 1005. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

  Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail and the front view timepiece. A backflow preventing member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 is provided with an out port 1008 penetrating forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view in the frame. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes the outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner of the front view. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is a minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recessed portion 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, and a plurality of positioning holes formed in the front and rear circular holes and short elongated holes. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the panel plate 1110, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the circulation direction (circumferential direction of the frame) of the game ball B has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B has a wide width that can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width that a plurality of game balls B cannot line up.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is approximately the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion, and a plurality of projecting pins that protrude forward from the holding step portion and are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. The three engaging claws that elastically engage the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging step portions on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward by engaging the engaging step of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above and tilts the upper part and the lower left part. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the portion where it is engaged with the engagement claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface. The discharge portion 1201 formed in the above can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 73. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. And a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200.

  In a state where the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from the rear, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Of the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, the area is formed so as to occupy about ⅕ of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining ⅕ area is formed. Therefore, the square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the corner area where the upper and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

  As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially rotates the body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main frame 4 can be supported and opened / closed to the front centering on the left side in front view, the main frame upper hinge part 510 and the main frame lower hinge part 520 of the main frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the pivotal side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction that is viewed from the front is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main shaft 4 of the main body frame 4 ( The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

  Further, the back cover 640 that is openably and closably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the back cover 640 has the right side in front view attached to the right end of the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side in front view is paid out. Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side of the front view is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side of the front cover, which is the opposite side to this, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

  In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resists and solid-painted except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color that is different from the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 is white. It is solid-painted with a resist except various land patterns.

  Here, the point that a color different from the color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320. A manager such as a game hall store manager, a game hall store clerk, or the like, is a board of high importance for crime prevention, in which the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game, payout of the game ball B, and the like). Awareness about is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to distinguish the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 from other boards to call attention. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, it is housed in the main control board box 1320, but its importance for crime prevention is high. Very little awareness of the high substrate. Therefore, it is necessary to call attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 by distinguishing it from other boards.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, green that is generally used as the resist of the substrate is adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, and white different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 becomes more prominent than the main control board 1310, and in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 is also highly important for crime prevention. It can contribute to increase the awareness of being a substrate.

  In the present embodiment described above, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310, but the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 may be distinguished. If possible, yellow, red, blue, transparent, or the like may be used.

  Further, in the above-described present embodiment, the resist of the setting change substrate 1311 is a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control substrate 1310. However, instead of the resist of the setting change substrate 1311, It may be printed in white as silk printing so as to cover almost all of the front surface (mounting surface) and / or the back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow, and red colors. You may print it.

  Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from a resin of polycarbonate, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether unauthorized modification is performed, It is also possible to confirm from the outside of the main control board box 1320 whether or not an illegal IC is mounted. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence against the unauthorized activity on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. It should be noted that the cover body is provided with a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation that can release the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning opening sensor. 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an outlet sensor 3032 are connected.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness. It may be electrically connected via (electrical wiring). The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (softens) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a to the setting control board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Can be difficult to reach)). By this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. It should be noted that there are two types of connector connection, which are inter-board connections, that is, a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism and a special connector that has a floating mechanism. A normal connector not equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in.When the socket is fitted with the plug, The structure is such that there is no amount of movement in the vertical direction (for example, the vertical direction) with respect to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed. On the other hand, a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it. When mating, it is possible to absorb an error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs when the socket is pushed by moving the socket in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (for example, in the vertical direction) by a predetermined distance range. It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism is used as the connector connection that is a connection between boards, but a special connector that has a floating mechanism may be used.

  The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side thereof being approximately one fifth of the lateral distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. Is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side, and the lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the respective midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected to the main control board 1310. Of the setting change board 1311 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at a center point where the center lines of the square-shaped setting change board 1311 intersect in the vertical and horizontal directions. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z capable of emitting light of a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the left-right direction and near the connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g composed of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310 is arranged. A base monitor 1310h, which is arranged further downward from the center toward the right side of the display, includes six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line.

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction). Position), the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted in the insertion slot, so that the outer frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting keys that are lined up opposite the island equipment of the game hall do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to damage it.

  When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and a signal of this setting key ON is transmitted to the setting change substrate 1311. From the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, but corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A wire intrusion prevention unit is formed in the cover body for the opening so that the setting change substrate 1311 and the main control substrate 1310 cannot be modified by intruding a wire or the like through a "gap" formed in the opening. It is a structured structure.

  The setting key switch 1311a accommodates a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated by being inserted into a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. A surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder in which a setting key insertion slot is provided, and the metal cylindrical ( Alternatively, a surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing (or a rectangular shape) is arranged substantially flush with a surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. When the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing, the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. Has become.

  The setting key switch 1311a is provided with a circuit in the setting key cylinder that can take out (output) as a signal whether the setting key switch 1311a is in an ON state or an OFF state. The signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. The circuit provided inside the setting key cylinder and the pair of opposing lead terminals are electrically insulated from the setting key cylinder, and are electrically connected to the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a. Electrically isolated.

  From the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a, a pair of opposing lead terminals projecting from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder have a 90-degree rotation angle and have a predetermined length. A pair of protruding mounting plate pieces are formed. The pair of opposing mounting plate pieces pass through the mounting slots formed on the setting change board 1311 and are soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311. It can be fixed to.

  Further, as described above, the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not project outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320.

  Accordingly, when the worker mounts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, it is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or its periphery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the temporarily placed game board 5 is accidentally touched and the operator's leg hits the game board 5 and falls. Further, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or in the vicinity thereof. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 and falls over during the work.

  The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, but the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of spheres displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted are set as routing. The change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern in which various signals are transmitted from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). The wiring patterns for transmitting the signal are also close to each other. Are formed so as not to be separated from each other (separated from each other), and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is transmitted does not come close to each other (separated from each other). Formed).

  Here, a procedure for operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the axis of the main body frame 4 is arranged. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is in the state of being covered by the back cover 640. Further, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, since the back cover opening side of the back cover 640 is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, the body frame 4 is larger than the outer frame 2 (about Unless opened (near 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 cannot open the state of covering the rear side of the game board 5. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a in order to operate the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 only by a gap enough to insert the arm. Even if the user tries to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 by using the back cover 640, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. That is, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first sets the outer frame 2 in order to secure a space in which the back cover 640 can cover the rear side of the game board 5. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees).

  In this way, since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, as compared with the case where the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 is provided. When a cheating person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a uses an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a wire, it is located between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and on the open side of the body frame 4. Therefore, even if an illegal tool is inserted and fed, the route from the opening side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, so that the illegal tool needs to be deeply fed. As a result, the operation time for sending an illegal tool to the setting key switch 1311a also becomes long, so that an employee such as a clerk in the game hall can easily find such an illegal act.

  Since the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered with the back cover 640. There is. As a result, a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can use the illegal tool such as a piano wire or a wire to connect the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 with each other. Even if an illegal tool is inserted and sent from the opening side of No. 4, the illegal tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before reaching the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the switch 1311a from being inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port.

  Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion opening for inserting the setting key, and the insertion opening of this setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 largely (about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. By accommodating such a plurality of operations, it is possible to improve the crime prevention property against access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, thereby enhancing the deterrent power against the illegal act by the illegal tool.

  As described above, the back cover 640 is attached such that the left side in front view is openably and closably pivotally supported by the back cover mounting portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600. The lock screw 642 is screwed to the back cover attachment portion 601a to fix the back cover 640. The lock screw 642 is also arranged on the open side of the back cover 640, so that the main body frame 4 It is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, which is the opposite side to the open side. Therefore, an unauthorized person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the open side of the body frame 4. Even if it is sent, an incorrect tool needs to be deeply sent because the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the lock screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long. In this respect as well, since the operation time for sending an illegal tool to the locking screw 642 becomes long, it is possible for an employee such as a clerk in the game hall to easily detect such an illegal act, and a setting change board. By increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to enhance the deterrent power against illegal acts by an illegal tool.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is accommodated in the payout control board box 632, and the payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. Mounted on the side. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, respectively, and the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated by making the objects to which the boards are attached different. You can When the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, only one board needs to be tampered with, which is not preferable for crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, respectively, and the configuration is such that the objects to which the boards are attached are also different. Security against the clear button 633z is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls the game preparation and the game (controls the game after the control of the game preparation). The control of the game preparation is based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and can change the set value to the first step (the step S14 in the main control side power-on process described later). After the determination and the processing in step S16A) and the first step, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value) of the payout control board 633. The second step (selection of step S216 in the setting change processing described later, processing of step S218) capable of selecting and switching the setting value based on the above. Subsequent to the game preparation control, the game control is composed of a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process described later, a main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

  Although such crime prevention can be enhanced, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different substrates, respectively, and the target to which the substrate is attached is also different, so that the setting key Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not particularly necessary to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged, whereas where the RWM clear button 633z also having the function of the setting switching button is located. In some cases, it is difficult for a store manager in the game hall, a clerk in the game hall, or the like to know whether or not they are arranged because they are unfamiliar.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that is location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, on the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z is attached. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet. For example, red semi-transparent characters (height: 7 mm) are printed on this rectangular sheet, "RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board". ing. As a result, the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button) can be communicated to the staff such as the game hall store manager and the game hall store clerk. Therefore, the game hall store manager, the game hall clerk, etc. When the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it is possible to easily find the RWM clear button 633z, so that the user does not have to turn his / her eyes. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

  It should be noted that this seal does not hinder the visibility of the main control board 1310 even if it is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Further, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of the character printed on the rectangular sheet of the sticker.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When molding the cover body of the substrate box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily know the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, a setting change is made. On the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, the characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switch button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white as silk printing, or on the payout control board 633. Characters (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switch button)” may be printed in white on the surface (mounting surface) as silk printing. The colors of silk printing may be the same or different. Further, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of the silk-printed character. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily know the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, a setting change is made. Characters may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311 and removed (height: 7mm) "RWM clear button (setting switch button is on the payout control board)" may be formed by resist or payout. A character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633, and a blank character (height: 7 mm) “RWM clear button (setting switching button)” may be formed by resist. The colors of the resist may be the same, but different colors are preferable because the substrates can be distinguished. Further, instead of the blank characters, blank symbols in which symbols such as arrows are masked may be used. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily know the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. A similar sticker to the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and in this rectangular sheet, for example, red translucent characters (high 7 mm), "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is printed on the payout control board" is printed.) Or the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 is red semi-transparent. A transparent rectangular sheet called "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be attached with a simple character (height: 7 mm). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily know the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, RWM clear button is used. An announcement sound may be played from various speakers as to where the button 633z is arranged, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, staff such as a store manager of a game hall or a clerk of the game hall operates the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice "RWM clear button is on the payout control board. RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button" that tells where the RWM clear button 633z is placed is played from various speakers, An announcement image (which may be taken as a photo) indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The manager of the game hall, a clerk of the game hall, or the like, knows the location of the RWM clear button 633z based on the announcement voice or the announcement image, and then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 to change the set value. It can be done smoothly. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily know the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead of this, the set value is set. When changing the setting of, the announcement voice may be output from various speakers as to where the RWM clear button 633z also having the function of the setting switching button is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and decided, Telling where the RWM clear button 633z is placed under the control of the control board 1510 "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as the setting switching button. Please change the value. ”Is repeatedly announced from various speakers. Upon completion of the setting change process, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice and advances various processing based on the received predetermined command. Will be done. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily know the location of the RWM clear button 633z. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that conveys the operation method of the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. In addition, an image of “setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement voice is being played.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of, the announcement voice may be output from various speakers as to where the RWM clear button 633z also having the function of the setting switching button is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and decided, Telling where the RWM clear button 633z is placed under the control of the control board 1510 "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as the setting switching button. Please change the value. ”Is repeatedly announced from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for a sticker attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It should be noted that, although such an announcement sound is repeatedly played from various speakers, assuming that the contents of the announcement sound may be overlooked, a sticker attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement sound starts to flow. By visually observing, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to "RWM clear button is on the payout control board. RWM clear button also serves as a setting switch button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the set value." You may also guide the contents which tell the place where the sticker showing the whereabouts of the button is pasted. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement voice. Even if the person who changes the setting of the set value gets used to changing the setting of the setting and is uncomfortable with the work, if he / she operates the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work, this will be a trigger. , The announcement voice can be stopped promptly, and even if it is necessary to do the work after the opening of the game hall, it is necessary to start the work so as not to cause trouble to the player. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement voice can be stopped promptly by this. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice that conveys the operation method of the setting key after the setting value is determined may be played from various speakers. In addition, an image of “setting” may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement voice is being played.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on different boards, respectively, and the objects to which the boards are attached are made different so that the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are different. However, if the crime prevention can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 to the setting switching button Function is removed.) Can be collectively arranged. For example, in the setting change board 1311, the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side is substantially the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the main control board 1310. Is shorter than the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main control board 1310 and passes through the respective midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the centerlines passing through the respective midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311. , Have a matching shape. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the vertical distance dimension is on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is Along the right side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. Below the center line of the setting change board 1311, a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted and rotated is placed near the lower side of the setting change board 1311. A setting switch button having a pressing operation portion is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the lower side of the same board, that is, the setting change board 1311, whereas the setting switch buttons are arranged on the upper side of the same board, which are arranged apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are separately arranged on the same substrate, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are combined on one substrate, Since it is possible to make it more difficult to carry out unauthorized modification as compared with the case where the and are arranged close to each other and arranged in a separate body, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are arranged on a single board in a separate body. In some cases, crime prevention can be enhanced.

  Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, the case of changing the setting of the set value will be briefly described, and the case of confirming and displaying the current set value will be briefly described. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting values that have been set in addition to changing the setting values, so that only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, can possess it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure), power is restored to the outer frame 2 with respect to the main frame. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned ON. It is necessary to satisfy the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. The setting key is turned ON, and then the power switch 630a is operated to operate the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z.

  The person who changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then attaches the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The setting key switch 1311a is operated by opening the setting key switch 1311a, inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it ON. To turn the setting key ON. Then, while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set to the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state.

  When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z causes the payout control board 633 to perform main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is input to. Every time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. Then, when the set value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, the setting value 1 which is the initial value is returned, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

  When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value is the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). To turn the setting key cylinder to the OFF position (rotation position of the cylinder), rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the OFF operation. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a and hides the set value from the state in which the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. The state is switched to the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned on, and then turned off.

  A person who changes the setting of the set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the set value. To complete.

  When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, the outer frame 2 is displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and turned on. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. In other words, the person who actually performs the confirmation display of the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then Performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2, then inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotating the setting key switch 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

  The person who performs the confirmation display of the set value currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the outer frame 2 is checked. To open the main body frame 4 and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to turn it ON. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Then, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set to the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, even if the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and a person who confirms the set value currently set presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, the pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON is set. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the position (that is, the setting key cylinder turning position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), and turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

  A person who confirms and displays the currently set set value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the current setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

  In addition, as described above, the preset set value change permission condition is an external frame at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs). 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and turned on. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the predetermined set value display permission condition is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 When the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the connector, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on, whereby the setting key is turned on, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. It needs to be unoperated. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are used when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, so that the setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by being operated dynamically and turned on, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is “when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when a power failure (instantaneous "The pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a momentary power failure (a power outage occurs). The requirement is that "the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or power restoration at the time of power restoration after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs)." Differences in points.

  Further, there are two types of setting key switches, a lead type and a surface mounting type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment is basically a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation such that the setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion port. Therefore, the force associated with this operation acts on the board on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided, and the board is bent. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged so as to project outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  As a result, in the lead type, if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is removed from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and the back surface of the board ( Since it is soldered to the solder surface), the lead of the setting key switch is arranged so as to project toward the outer shape and soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, compared to the SMD type The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board becomes large, and this load works strongly from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board and the board itself flexes greatly. Becomes On the other hand, in the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is removed from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. Since it is placed and soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outline of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board. The load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller than that of the setting key switch, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. Even if you work toward it, the board itself is difficult to bend.

  In addition, when the board itself bends significantly due to external force acting on the board, there is a concern that the peeling load of the land pattern may be peeled off abruptly at the solder part to which the SMD type electronic component is soldered. In the case of using the SMD type, it is desirable to mount it on a substrate on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. Moreover, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern in the solder part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch is Considering the strength of the solder part, it is desirable to use a lead type switch as the setting key switch because it can be made strong against peeling.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, basically, a lead type switch is used as the setting key switch 1311a. In the present embodiment, since the lead type electronic component is mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 without mounting the SMD type electronic component, the lead type one is mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 as the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port and the substrate itself is largely bent as described above when the setting key is removed from the insertion port, the leads soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. There is no risk that other electronic components of the type will come off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) as described above (connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). Since the connectors and may be electrically connected via a harness), signals and the like from the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  A rectangular main control board 1310, which is long in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left side, the upper side, the right side, and the lower side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Is formed and arranged so as to occupy an area of about ⅕, and the upper and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected to the remaining ⅕ area. A square setting change substrate 1311 is arranged in the corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side being approximately one fifth of the distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 in the lateral direction, and a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. The size is smaller than the shape of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square-shaped setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and the setting key is temporarily inserted into the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and pushed. Even if the board itself bends due to the setting key, or the board itself bends when the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small substrate. By doing so, the size of the deflection can be suppressed smaller than that of the main control board 1310. As a result, the cover body or the base body of the main control board box 1320 is prevented from being bent by contacting the front surface (mounting surface) or the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 at a position corresponding to the setting change board 1311. Since it is not necessary to provide ribs that can be set, screwing holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting change switch 1311a is housed in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the lead type switch is used as the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the setting change substrate 1311 which is separate from the main control substrate 1310, the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 is bent due to the operation (operation) of inserting and removing the setting key into and from the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  On the other hand, instead of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be arranged on any one of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the like. When SMD type electronic components are mounted on the board, SMD type ones are adopted instead of the lead type ones as the setting key switch 1311a and mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board and temporarily inserted. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the mouth, the board itself is difficult to bend as described above. Therefore, other SMD type electronic parts soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board are used. There is no danger of peeling from the surface (mounting surface).

  Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" means, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery and the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit, from the probability change time to the normal value. It is possible to change the probability for lottery judgment when moving to time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires The probability (the degree of advantage) that the number of game balls that can be played can be increased is set in advance. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of a jackpot determination value indicating that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot pattern). Big hit symbol determination table that stipulates the ratio of determination values, small hit determination table that stipulates the ratio of small hit determination values that indicates that you have won a small hit, percentage of determination values for the determination of small hit symbols The small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation time to the normal time is specified) is selected, and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. Select various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids) Or. In the various tables used for various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. It should be noted that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned set values, the six set values (integers) in the range from the set value 1 to the set value 6 are set, but the set values may be set in a smaller range or set in a larger range. It may be one. For example, there may be four set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8.

  As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a itself when the power is restored to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the power-off process on the main control side does not end normally when the power is shut off, there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM incorporated in itself (or you trust it). Cannot be done), and an error message is displayed to inform that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 among the game balls shot in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls that have been launched into the game area 5a, the game balls that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the outlet sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. Has become.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting position). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. , This OFF signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although input to the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key switch 1311a is provided with a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the information transmitting the setting key ON and OFF as serial information. Good. As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects one of the setting keys ON and OFF from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the serial circuit may be referred to as "a modification of the setting key (1)").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting position). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. , This OFF signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was designed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a, a pulse output circuit capable of outputting information transmitting ON and OFF of the setting key as a pulse signal to the outside may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. . As a result, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided in the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633. . The pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has, for example, a pulse width of 1 ms when it is information for transmitting a setting key ON, and a pulse width of 5 ms when it is information for transmitting OFF. . When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON or OFF from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be referred to as "a modification of the setting key (2)").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting position). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder which is turned off. , This OFF signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although it was input to the main control MPU 1310a, the voltage level of the signal of the setting key ON and the voltage level of the signal of the OFF key are set to the intermediate potential between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. (For example, from 0V to 5V, a potential of 2V to 3V) is used, a comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control is performed. The MPU 1310a may determine ON / OFF of the setting key ON signal and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be referred to as "a modification of the setting key (3)").

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a included in the setting change board 1311 is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a is set). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the main control board. Although it was designed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310, this setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch is “Modification of setting key (4)”). May be stated).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 formed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are caulked by a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by intruding a wire or the like through "clearances" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. In order to prevent this, the wire intrusion prevention part is formed in the cover body with respect to the opening. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. An opening / closing switch for the setting change substrate cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be performed. Based on the detection signal from the opening / closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box The mode may be described as "a modification of the setting key (5)").

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the aspect which selected and combined suitably among the modification examples (1)-(5) of the above-mentioned setting key. May be described).

  In addition, in the setting value described above, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, in order to make a lottery judgment when shifting from the probability variation time to the normal time It is possible to change the probability of, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, increase the number of game balls that the player can obtain). Probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player has been set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of setting values ranging from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player for other pachinko machines is high. In some cases, there is a single preset value that is preset. In other words, like the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance, and the game specification that requires setting change is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (advantage) has only a single set value in advance and no setting change is necessary. However, when the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed in design or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are set. Is dependent on the game specification, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations are provided according to the game specification. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be commonly used without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance for the probability of being advantageous to the player (advantage degree), the probability that the setting value is advantageous to the player (advantage degree) will be obtained. Since there is no need to use it as, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be dealt with by the design change by the software that assigns the following contents. You can

  For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area (the area excluding the specific area of the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein (after clearing the RAM). The pachinko machine 1 can be started up in various ways) and can be used as a set value. In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (feature) controlled by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of the light-emitting body such as the lamp or the LED, the set value 1 is "all operations (movable body (role)". Object operation, lighting of the light emitter)) is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, and the setting value 2 is assigned to actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies the "operation of the movable body (feature)" and is set. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3, and the detailed value of the movable body (role) (variable moving speed, movement over the entire operation area, other The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "operation of interference check with structure or other movable body (role), operation order with other movable body (role), etc.)" is assigned, and "5" is set as the set value. Light emitter 1 port unit (Main control MP The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating "lighting of the light emitting body for each predetermined output port of 1310a (that is, the lighting of the light emitting body for each output port)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation for specifying "no operation" as the setting value 6 is confirmed. The operation pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be referred to as “variant (1) with common hardware configuration”). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (role) and the lighting of light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs by repeatedly performing the main-control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, in the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 121) from the main control MPU 1310a has the peripheral control with the content (actual device confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of the movable body (feature) controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light emitting body. Due to the mode of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbols to the demonstration (demonstration performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies “10 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies “15 seconds” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is “20 seconds”. , A time setting pattern 3 designating “25 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 4, and a time setting pattern 5 designating “30 seconds” is assigned as a setting value 5, The time setting pattern 6 designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the time when the player is in the waiting state after the fluctuation of the symbol is set to "a modification example of the common hardware configuration (2 ) ”May be described). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of the setting of changing the time to enter the waiting state for the player after the change of the symbols, it is possible to give variations to the time from the end of the change of the symbols to the demonstration.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the variation of the symbols as a set value that can be set. In this case, a demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies “comical effect” as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)” is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that specifies “serious effect” as the setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies “serial effect, motion effect of movable body (role)” is set as the setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies “period play style production” as the setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies “period play style production, movable body (role)” as the setting value 6 Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration effect may be referred to as “variant (3) with common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration effect, it is possible to give variations to the contents of the demonstration effect performed after the change of the symbols is completed.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by a sound volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 as setting values capable of being set. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 designating "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 designating "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. , The volume setting pattern 3 designating “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 designating “volume 5” is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies “volume 6” is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of default volume change setting may be referred to as “variant (4) with common hardware configuration”). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default volume is set with the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the set value included in the setting change command. Also, the default volume of “volume 1” assigned to the setting value 1 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch decreases the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is increased), and the movement to the minimum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of “volume 6” assigned to the setting value 6 is moved to the direction in which the volume adjustment switch increases the volume (in the direction opposite to the direction to decrease the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume, or may be a volume of a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This default volume change setting mode allows the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510 to have variations.

  Further, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sound in error notification of various problems, spots, errors, and the like. The various error notification sounds are those that cannot be adjusted (that is, those that are not dependent) by the operation of the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for the staff such as a store clerk to notice, it may sometimes be offensive to the player who is playing the game on another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 1 that specifies “error notification sound volume 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification sound volume setting pattern 2 that specifies “error notification sound volume 2” is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies “error notification volume 3” is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies “volume 4” is assigned as the setting value 4, and the setting value 5 is “ The error notification sound volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification sound volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification sound volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification sound volume 6 (maximum sound volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (volume of error notification sound In some cases, the aspect of the change setting of (1) is described as "Modified example (5) by common hardware configuration". It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute, and the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound stops), the setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the sound volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even a few meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a performs control to emit the error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification sound volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light-emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies “brightness 1” is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies “brightness 2” is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is “ A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies “brightness 3” is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies “brightness 4” is assigned as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies “brightness 5” as a setting value 5 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies “brightness 6” as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the default brightness may be referred to as “variant (6) with common hardware configuration”). is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness so that the light emitter is turned on, blinks, and gradation points are set. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a becomes a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the existing light emitter, the light emitter can be turned on, blinked, gradation points, and the like. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitters such as the lamp and the LED.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of brightnesses of light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs in error notification of various problems, spots, and errors. The error notification brightness setting pattern 1 for designating “error notification brightness 1” as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and “error notification brightness 2” as the setting value 2. The error notification brightness setting pattern 2 to be designated is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 to be designated as the setting value 3 is "error notification brightness 3", and the error notification brightness to be designated as "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is The brightness notification pattern 4 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies “error notification brightness 5” as the setting value 5 is allocated, and the error notification brightness that specifies “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as the setting value 6 The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification is set to "common hardware"). It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that from the setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low but the lamp brightness is low and the brightness of the lamp at which the error notification can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) goes to the setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly changing the brightness of the light emitter in error notification by performing a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, to control lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. To do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the illuminant that is turned on, to turn on the illuminator, to blink, to the gradation point, and so on. Depending on the mode of changing and setting the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitter such as the lamp or the LED in the error notification can be varied.

  Further, the various set values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration described above satisfy the preset set value display permission condition in the set value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later. Although it is displayed on the setting display 1310g at this time, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (setting value display). May be referred to as "a modified example (8) with a common hardware configuration").

  Further, any one of the modified examples (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted in the modified example (6) of the setting key described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 and power restoration at the time of power restoration after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on, whereby the setting key is turned on. Assuming that, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is being pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later to execute the main control internal RAM. Clear all areas except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by making interrupt permission settings, etc., while the payout control board When the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of No. 33 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting and the like. To proceed with the game. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process even once when the progress of the game is started. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game spheres collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 in the sphere counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. In the port output process of the power-on process on the main control side, which will be described later, the number of game balls output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the outlet 1008 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the present set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-described base monitor 1310h. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that has been set during the period from the power recovery to the start of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. As well as being able to display the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after power recovery, the setting display 1310g can be displayed. It is not necessary to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 70, and 71. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400, a detailed illustration of which is omitted in the figure, includes a state indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and two for displaying the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of LEDs and a normal reservation display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result which is drawn by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is repeated when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is "big hit". Equipped with an indicator.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on / off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

  Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, especially the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

  The wiring FCBL electrically connected through the connector 1400a provided on the back surface of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the back box 3010. When drawn up to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 that are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the board 1100 or is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 as it is. It is routed downwards.

  Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN. After being routed to the lower part of the table, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of 3010 is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is assembled and attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320. The area in which the wiring FCBL is routed in this manner is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 137 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Will be placed in.

  Behind the function display unit 1400, a decorative substrate 1131 on which a plurality of decorative LEDs are mounted is arranged. The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the decorative substrate 1131, is bent to the upper rear surface of the game panel 1100, and then on the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is routed to the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close to (or in contact with) the wiring FCBL described above, the back box 3010 moves downward to the rear surface. The wiring processing pieces 3011 that are vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 are grouped together and routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. It Then, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, apart from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  In this way, the wiring UPCBL electrically connecting the decorative substrate 1131 and the panel drive substrate 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a long wiring length, and particularly from the upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and extends vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed to collect the wiring processing pieces 3011 and the wiring processing pieces 3011 are arranged under the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 153 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that is being provided.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide path of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

  Further, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing electromagnetic noise. discharge. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of accumulating the game balls B, the payout unit 560, and the periphery thereof is accumulated.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. I have it. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be disabled by being controlled by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described below, and again executes the main control side power-on process described below. Will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a will always occur. Therefore, the content of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a is Will be completely erased. That is, when the internal reset circuit forces the reset, the RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

  In the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are The main control board 1310 is projected from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are projected toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are mounted and the surrounding area thereof, when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display unit is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. There may be a case where the wiring FCBL that electrically connects 1400 and the main control board 1310 is entered, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. It may invade the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL, or conversely, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is provided in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is drawn in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320, Where it has a length of ¼, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320.) The main control board box 1320 of the main control board box 1320 is passed when passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged nearer. When the wiring FCBL is bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL becomes When the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 is routed, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control board 1310a). When passing through a region (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), electromagnetic wave noise penetrates through the wiring FCBL into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and penetrates this pin. Under the influence of electromagnetic noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to reset by its own reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  If the wiring housing groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is The function display after being accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 and pulled out from the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320 It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a. When passing through a region in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may intrude into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a is the functional display unit connector MFCN. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged closer to the left side than the center of the lower side of 1310, and is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 below the function display unit connector MFCN. By disposing the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL can be separated from the function display unit connector MFCN. It is possible to prevent various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering through the space separating the MPU 1310a from the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL. , On the main control board 1310 or in the space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a in the main control board 1310, it is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic noise that enters through the wiring FCBL. ing. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic waves that have entered this wiring FCBL. This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

  Further, the wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is, as described above, in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. (Or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 can be prevented. When it is routed downwards along it, it is bent toward the left side of the main control substrate box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , The main control board box 132 because it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension"). ) Can be secured largely. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. Can be prevented. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be electrically connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise with respect to the wiring FCBL. Thus, the electromagnetic noise that enters through the wiring FCBL can be prevented from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit uses a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. Designed to pass through.

  Moreover, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, etc., an EMC countermeasure component (coil, bead, condenser, etc.) can be cited. When the capacitors are used, the capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining may be inserted respectively.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 111) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center thereof. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79 and the like. FIG. 76 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 76 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails. 78 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group at the upper right corner in FIG. 77, and FIG. 79 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit at the lower right corner in FIG. 77.

  The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects further forward than the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Through, and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open at a different position in the area 5a so as to receive the game ball B, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 or the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged above the right general winning opening 2001 and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged below the right general winning opening 2001 and higher than the first starting opening 2002. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than that of the first starting opening 2002.

  The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001, and a start. The side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side in the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the starting mouth unit which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the front view 2100 and having one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005, and above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. At the center of the game area 5a as viewed from the front, the frame-shaped cell is provided slightly above the center and has the gate portion 2003. The Tar won game 2500, is equipped with a.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the out opening 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 accepts only one gaming ball B at the bottom left of the first starting opening 2002, which is always open upward with a width that allows only one gaming ball B to be received. It has one general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a possible width. The starting opening unit 2100 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like).

  The starting opening unit 2100 is a panel for the first starting opening sensor 2101 (see FIG. 77 and the like) for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A guide path 2102 (see FIG. 76) for guiding the board 1110 rearward and discharging the board 1110 downward (on the substrate holder 1200) is provided.

  By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and is opened upward, and the first starting opening 2002 has a center described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, and the first starting opening 2002 is located immediately below the central emitting portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the central emitting portion of the stage 2503. The game ball B released from 2503a is configured to be received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning openings 2001 that are open to receive the game ball B at all times, and a first shelf portion 2201 that is inclined so that the right end is lower at the upper left of the two general winning openings 2001. The second shelf 2202 that is inclined so that the right end of the upper part of the two general winning openings 2001 is lowered. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  The side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning openings 2001 at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. The two general winning openings 2001 are provided so as to face each other so as to be arranged side by side. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side is open to the upper left, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right is open to the right.

  The side unit 2200, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, has the left end of the first shelf 2201 located near the periphery of the game area 5a and flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the right. The extension line of the upper surface of the first shelf 2201 is inclined so as to pass between the first starting port 2002 and the stage 2503. The extension line of the upper surface of the second shelf 2202 is inclined so as to pass through the opening portion of the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  The side unit 2200 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 are in a state of projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. . The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 111).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a at the lower right corner of the starting port unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74 and the like). The attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning openings 2001, a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 79 and the like).

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 when viewed from the front is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the upper right corner, and the second starting opening 2004 is open downward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001. Can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004 that is open upward with a size slightly larger than the game ball, and a special winning opening 2005 is approximately three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large size. The special winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 111 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting opening door 2411 that can open and close the second starting opening 2004, and opens and closes the second starting opening door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by the passage of the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The winning opening solenoid 2412, the big winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the big winning opening 2005, and the big winning opening door 2413 is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. And an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the one special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 79 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422 through which the game ball B can flow downward on the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged at the upper right, and the attacker left passage. A second starting opening guide shelf 2423 having a second starting opening 2004 opening in the middle of the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and a second opening below the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423. A special winning opening guide shelf 2424 in which the special winning opening 2005 is open in the middle of the starting opening guiding shelf 2423, which is inclined to the left from a position spaced from the left end to the left and lowers to the left. I have it.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a communication port 2425 communicating with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, and a lower end than the special winning port 2005 from the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423. From the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker that extends to the left end of the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 so as to decrease toward the left after extending between the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424. An intermediate passage 2427 that extends downward from the special winning opening 2005 and communicates with the lower right attacker passage 2426 is provided.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001 to partition the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and a communication port 2425 between the lower end and the second starting port guide shelf 2423. The partition portion 2428 to be formed is provided with an inclined portion 2429 that is inclined so as to be positioned to the left as it goes upward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428.

  A second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004 that is open in the second starting port guide shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction and has a plate shape that extends left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is formed, and the left end side is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. This second starting opening door 2411 is a game ball to the second starting opening 2004 by setting the right end side above the horizontal and at a position slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting opening 2004. The second starting port 2004 can be closed by disabling the reception of B. The second starting opening door 2411 guides the game ball B flowing through the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left side in a state where the second starting opening 2004 is closed. be able to.

  The second starting port door 2411 is rotated from the state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed to the state in which it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the right end side moves upward with the left end side as the center, The game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened). When the second starting opening door 2411 is raised so that the right end side is raised to open the second starting opening 2004, the second starting opening door 2411 is raised from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423. Therefore, the path of the game ball B rolling on the second starting port guide shelf 2423 is obstructed, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let it open.

  The special winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the special winning opening 2005 opened in the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 is formed in a plate shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered. By advancing and retreating forward and backward, the special winning opening 2005 opened upward can be opened and closed. The special winning opening door 2413 can close the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and in the state where the special winning opening 2005 is closed, the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side). The game ball B that has been played can be guided to the left. Further, the special winning opening door 2413 is retracted by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005, and circulates through the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 of the center accessory 2500. The game ball B can be accepted into the special winning opening 2005. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (non-energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (energized).

  Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving opening 2007 that can be opened upward inside the special winning opening 2005, and is upward on the right side of the first receiving opening 2007. A second receiving port 2008 that is always open is arranged. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a first entrance sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received in the first entrance 2007 and a second entrance sensor for detecting the game ball B accepted in the second entrance 2008. 2405 and the first reception opening 2007 are opened and closed (the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 and flowing inside is distributed to either the first reception opening 2007 or the second reception opening 2008) And a distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the distribution piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. , Are provided. The distribution piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the right end is lowered inside the special winning opening 2005. It is possible to open and close the first reception opening 2007 (V winning opening). The distribution piece 2415 closes the first entrance 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upwards the second entrance. Acceptable to 2008. In addition, the distribution piece 2415 is driven by the distribution solenoid 2416 to retreat to open the first reception opening 2007, and the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is highly likely to be received in the first reception opening 2007. Can be accepted by The distribution piece 2415 closes the first inlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is OFF (non-energized) and opens the first inlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is ON (energized). Let In other words, the distribution piece 2415 can distribute the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 to either the first reception opening 2007 or the second reception opening 2008.

  This attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the general winning opening 2001 is below the gate portion 2003 (below directly below the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later). The second starting port 2004 is located at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the special winning port 2005 is located below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Further, when attached to the panel board 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is moved from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it is not accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B flowing down the right side (circulation passage group 2520) of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. At the downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general winning opening 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500. B will enter any of them.

  When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. , Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) at the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted into the general winning opening 2001, it drops onto the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 According to the inclination, the liquid flows to the second starting port 2004 side (left side). When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, the second starting port 2004 circulates leftward on the second starting port door 2411 and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second starting port guiding shelf 2423. . If the second starting port 2004 is opened when the gaming ball B passes through the second starting port guiding shelf 2423, the gaming ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received in the second starting opening 2004, it is discharged to the left special winning opening 2005 side through the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 is the special winning opening 2005 side, Alternatively, it will flow down to either side of the intermediate passage 2427. When the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 when it flows down to the big winning opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the big winning opening door 2413 and from the left end of the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. It is released to the left. When the special winning opening door 2413 closing the special winning opening 2005 is retracted and the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B flowing down from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 to the big winning opening 2005 side is It is accepted in the special winning opening 2005. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning hole sensor 2403, and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, and the game ball B that has been discharged to the left from the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 pass through the out opening 1008 and are behind the game panel 1100. Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200).

  On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and is on the right side of the general winning opening 2001. When it enters the attacker right passage 2422, it comes into contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and bounces back to the left. In the present embodiment, the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 is aligned with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B rebounded by the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 will drop (distribute) on the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with high probability.

  When the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 and is in contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces upward from the communication opening 2425, the partition portion 2428 forming the upper end side of the communication opening 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429. Since this inclined portion 2429 is inclined such that the upper end is positioned to the right with respect to the lower end, the game ball B that abuts on the inclined portion 2429 is reflected downward to the attacker lower right passage 2426 side, It will enter the attacker lower right passage 2426. Further, when the game ball B that is in contact with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces below the communication port 2425, it will enter the attacker lower right passage 2426.

  The game ball B that has entered the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a from the out port 1008 without any chance of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the special winning port 2005.

  The attacker unit 2400 also includes a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second starting port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display device, the first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and by the lighting / blinking of the LED, the emission color, etc., the gate unit. The normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B to the 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are displayed. To do.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 111). The magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center goods]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly above the center in the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting further forward than the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. You can't break into.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B emitted from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is displayed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110) is formed in a corrugated shape (W shape) such that the position of the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2503, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2503a) and a lowest portion on both left and right sides (side emission portion 2503b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightwise central portion of the stage 2503 (central emission portion 2503a) is located directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 that is provided below the center in the vertical direction and on the right side of the outer peripheral surface on the right side. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. The gate section 2003 is provided between the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 and a space such that only one game ball B can pass through.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 constitutes a part of the outer peripheral surface on the upper side, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right from the position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. , A distribution passage group 2520 including a plurality of passages provided in the upper right corner and through which the game ball B can circulate. The distribution passage group 2520 extends vertically from near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003.

  77 and 78 and the like, the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. And a second distribution passage 2522 that is present. The first distribution passage 2521 extends in an arc shape along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the game area 5a from the inlet side of the upper end downward, the vicinity of the lower end bends leftward in a crank shape, and the outlet is downward. It opens towards. The outlet at the lower end of the first circulation passage 2521 is located slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003.

  The second circulation passage 2522 has an inlet at the upper end opened to the left of the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 with a space leftward, and is bent to the right near the upper end in a crank shape, and then the first passage. It extends downward in an arc shape adjacent to the flow passage 2521, bends leftward in the shape of a crank in the vicinity of the lower end, and then bends rightward in the shape of a crank so that the outlet is adjacent to the outlet of the first flow passage 2521 and is downward. It opens towards. Thereby, the second distribution passage 2522 can reduce the distribution speed of the game ball B more than the first distribution passage 2521. It should be noted that the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of ridges 2523 spaced from each other in the distribution direction of the game ball B, and the game ball B should abut the ridge 2523. Therefore, the distribution speed can be suppressed.

  This center accessory 2500 is upstream of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 (periphery of the game area 5a) in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The upstream space 2511 through which the game ball B can flow is formed. Further, when assembled on the game board 5, the entrance of the upper end of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located immediately below the stopper 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is located on the right rail 1005 (game). It extends along the peripheral edge of the region 5a). Further, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a).

[5-8e. Flow of game balls through the distribution channels of the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B by the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate portion 2003, and between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. Has been planted. Regarding the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003, the game ball B that has flowed through the first distribution passage 2521 is on the right side of the gate portion 2003 (gate portion 2003 and right rail 1005). And) are adjusted so that there is a high probability of distribution. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game ball B that has flowed through the second distribution passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. Has been adjusted. Further, regarding the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003, the game ball B that has circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 has the next highest probability of the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to flow on the left side of 2003.

  On the other hand, regarding the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B flowing on the right side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being in the attacker unit 2400. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the gate portion 2003 or the game ball B circulating on the left side of the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted so as to enter the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted so that the general winning opening 2001 can be received with the next highest probability of the attacker left passage 2421.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with a strength such that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 is formed. The game ball B flows through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first circulation passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first distribution passage 2521 has a high probability of being on the right side of the gate portion 2003 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the downstream end of the first distribution passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Pass through. Then, the game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 will flow through either the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 or the attacker lower right passage 2426.

  As described above, the game ball B that has flowed through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 much, so that the lottery of the ordinary lottery result performed by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B is not performed much. It is unlikely that the ordinary lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B flowing through the first distribution passage 2521 flows through the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second starting opening 2004 is often closed and the second starting is performed. Since the game ball B is not received so much in the mouth 2004, there is little chance that the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 and the privilege such as the lottery of the second special lottery result and the payout of the game ball B is given. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates in the first circulation passage 2521, the privilege given to the player becomes relatively small.

  In addition, in the above, the case of hitting to the right has been described, but the game ball B hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 opening near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it enters the first distribution passage 2521, the same result as above is obtained.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2511 enters the second distribution passage 2522 and circulates in the second distribution passage 2522, between the downstream end of the second distribution passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003. The plurality of obstacle nails N that have been planted pass through the gate section 2003 with a high probability, and the ordinary lottery result is drawn. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and from the attacker left passage 2421. The second starting port guide shelf 2423 is distributed.

  At this time, since the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003 and the ordinary lottery result has been drawn, if the drawn ordinary lottery result is “normal win”, the second starting opening 2004 has a predetermined pattern. The game ball B may be received in the second starting port 2004 because the game ball B is opened. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates in the second circulation passage 2522, the privilege given to the player becomes relatively high (more).

  For this reason, the player is more likely to be given a privilege in the second distribution passage 2522, and therefore has a driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511, and a game. The striking strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the striking strength of the ball B entering the second distribution passage 2522 is driven into the game area 5a. A change can be added to the driving operation, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, in the case where the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is a “big hit” or the like that causes an advantageous gaming state, The special winning opening 2005 becomes a state in which the game balls B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when the game balls B are received in the special winning opening 2005, many game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous game state (“big hit game state”), if the player is requested to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B, some players feel frustrated or irritated, and the game is felt. There is a risk that it will reduce the interest in the. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right to circulate in the first circulation passage 2521, after the circulation in the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422, the communication is established at the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. The game ball B can be circulated to the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side) by bouncing toward the opening 2425 and falling through the communication opening 2425 to the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423. Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 by an easy driving operation without fine adjustment of the driving operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened in accordance with the game state, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center character]
Subsequently, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory different from FIG. 78 and the like, and FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment. 81 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory, which is different from FIG. 80, and FIG. 81 (b) is a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a different center accessory. FIG. 82 is an enlarged view of essential parts showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group for a center accessory, which is different from FIGS. 80 and 81. 80 and 81, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80 (a), as compared with FIG. 78, the inlet at the upper end of the second flow passage 2522 is flowed a distance to the left of the inlet of the first flow passage 2521. It was done. This distribution passage group 2520 can also achieve the same effect as the above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80 (b), the angle of the stop 1006 in the front component member 1000 is such that the abutting game ball B can easily bounce back to the inlet side of the second circulation passage 2522. And a portion between the inlet of the first circulation passage 2521 and the inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) becomes lower. It was made. Thereby, since the game ball B easily enters the second distribution passage 2522 side, the range of adjusting the driving strength of the game ball B where the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 becomes wide, It is possible to facilitate the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the distribution passage group 2520 of FIGS. 78 and 80, the inlets of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream sides of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are directed leftward in a state of being vertically aligned. It is designed to be opened.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first distribution passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 forms one part of the second distribution passage 2522. Make up part. Further, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (the peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is the first distribution from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. The length reaches the respective inlets of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2511 shown in FIGS. 78 and 80.

  In this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the driving strength is such that it hits a narrower portion on the left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 than the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, Since it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens to the left, compared with the embodiment of FIG. 78 or 80, The adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B becomes narrow. In addition, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 and the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 partitions the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. When it abuts on the left end of the existing wall portion (a portion between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space portion 2511 depending on the momentum and angle of the bouncing game ball B to the left. That is, even if the player hits the game ball B with the strength of entering the upstream space 2511, it does not deviate to the left from the upstream space 2511 and enter either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. The center accessory 2500 may be distributed on the left side. Because of this, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B becomes high, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the driving medium of the player can be driven. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  The embodiment shown in FIG. 81 (b) is different from the embodiment of FIG. 81 (a) in that the first circulation passage 2521 is provided with a branch portion 2524 which is in one-way communication with the second circulation passage 2522. Is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above the portion that is bent downward from the right end of the portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) that extends left and right in the second circulation passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength of entering the first distribution passage 2521, the game ball B is secondly moved in the branch portion 2524 depending on the strength of the hit (when the hit strength is weak). Since it branches to the side of the distribution passage 2522, the difficulty level of distribution of the game ball B in the second distribution passage 2522 can be made lower than that in the embodiment of FIG. 81 (a).

  In addition, in order to enter the game ball B into the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B into the first distribution passage 2521 weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B and the first distribution passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second distribution passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second distribution passage 2522 is a portion that is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (to the side of the branch portion 2524) and does not enter the first circulation passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates with the first distribution passage 2521 from the second distribution passage 2522 in one way.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the first circulation passage 2521 is introduced by entering the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 on the way, the first circulation passage 2521 side is located at the branch portion 2524. Or, since it branches off to either side of the second distribution passage 2522, the player can be throbbing and pounding depending on which side the game ball B branches into at the branching section 2524. It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second distribution passage 2522, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Since there is a possibility of branching to the second distribution passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521, the player is harassed by whether the branch portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side. It is possible to excite the player and entertain the player, and when the branch portion 2524 branches to the side of the second distribution passage 2522, the mistake of the driving operation of the player is covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is covered. Since the game ball B is distributed, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she got it, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 82, the second circulation passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the inlet of the second circulation passage 2522 is open upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B hit into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 will flow through the first flow passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen when the game ball B flows through the bypass section 2525, and the game is played. It is possible to let a person perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and entertain the driving operation of the game ball B to suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86 and the like. 83 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and the rear unit 3010 is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 111). See).

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back first rendering unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a back second rendering unit 3200 mounted inside the back box 3010 behind the back first rendering unit 3100. , A rear third effect unit 3300 that is mounted in the back box 3010 behind the second rear effect unit 3200, and a starting opening unit 2100 and a side unit 2200 that are installed on the front surface of the second rear effect unit 3200 in general. The back left ball discharging unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and discharges it downward, and the game received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. And a back right ball discharging unit 3040 for receiving the ball B and discharging it downward.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is open at the front and penetrates the back wall in a rectangular shape, and a flat plate frame-shaped that projects backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame in the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction, and the lock mechanism 3020 is attached (see FIGS. 85 and 86, etc.).

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d in the rear surface when viewed from the rear side so as to be slidable left and right.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

  Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion opening 3011 that is cut out so as to be recessed rearward from the front end near the center in the up-down direction on the left and right side surfaces. The insertion opening 3011 is configured to communicate with a space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first effect unit 3100, which will be described later, and the outside of the back box 3010 when assembled in the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, this insertion port 3011 is inserted into the space between the rotating decorative bodies 3210 from the side surface side of the back box 3010, so that vibration of the transportation causes vibration of the rear second rendering unit 3200. The rotating ornament 3210 may be stationary. Alternatively, when a problem occurs in the movement of the rotating decoration body 3210 of the second back production unit 3200, it is possible to eliminate the problem by inserting a finger, a tool, or the like through the insertion port 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 88 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the back first effect unit. The back first effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening that is open to the front.

  The back first production unit 3100 includes a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are arranged above the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. A back first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which LEDs 3121 are mounted, and a plurality of LEDs 3131 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3110 and radiating light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted on the back first left. The diffusing lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffuses the light from the LED 3131 to irradiate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. And are equipped with.

  In addition, the back first effect unit 3100 is mounted on the upper edge of the front surface of the light guide plate 3110 and has a transparent flat plate-shaped upper base 3151, and is attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 to sandwich the light guide plate 3110 and the back side. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent flat plate-shaped left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and a rear side of the left base 3153. And a transparent left rear cover 3154 sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 and having the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110. -Shaped right part base 3155 and a transparent right part rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right part base 3155 and holding the light guide plate 3110 therebetween. It is equipped with a.

  Further, the back first effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decorative body 3161 on which a relief-like decoration is formed and the front surface of the left base 3153. , A back first left decorative body 3162 having a relief-like decoration formed thereon, and a back first right decorative body 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and having a relief-like decoration formed thereon. It is attached to the center of the lower edge of the front surface of the light plate 3110 in the left-right direction, and has a back first lower decorative body 3164 on which a relief-like decoration is formed, and a rear first lower decorative body 3164 is attached to the rear side. A rear first lower decorative substrate 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light toward are mounted.

  The light guide plate 3110 of the back first effect unit 3100 has a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view, and has a notch 3111 that is notched upward in a semicircular shape at the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light by the light emitted from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light by the light emitted from the left surface. The first pattern and the second pattern are different patterns. Although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the LED 3121 of the plurality of LEDs 3121 on the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 emits light in a different manner.

  LED3121 and LED3131 mounted on back 1st upper decoration board 3120 and back 1st left decoration board 3130 are full color LED, respectively. In addition, the back first left decorative substrate 3130 is vertically divided into three parts. Since the back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three parts, the diffusion lens 3140 is also divided into three parts in the vertical direction correspondingly. By making the LED 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 emit light, the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light, and by making the LED 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130 emit light, the second light guide plate 3110 The pattern can be made to emit light.

  The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 each include a plating layer having a metallic luster. The back first upper decoration body 3161, the back first left decoration body 3162, and the back first right decoration body 3163 are formed in a strip plate shape along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the light guide plate 3110. There is.

  The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of portions that are concentric with the arc of the cutout portion 3111 at the lower edge center of the light guide plate 3110 and extend in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and the upper and lower portions are open. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a plurality of three-sided decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 has protrusions that extend radially so as to pass through the decoration portions of the three-sided decorations. These radially extending protrusions extend outward from the decoration of the three-sided body and extend short toward the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is a transparent member provided with a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster of a predetermined color and a light-transmitting property. The back first lower decoration 3164 allows the player to visually recognize the decoration on the front side in a good state by the vapor deposition layer having a metallic luster when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 is not illuminated. .

  The LED 3171 is mounted on the rear first lower decorative substrate 3170 at a position behind the three-sided decorative portion of the rear first lower decorative body 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are caused to emit light, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be illuminated and decorated, and at the same time, the decoration part of the three-sided can be illuminated more brightly. The plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

  The back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, and the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 and extends substantially above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the first pattern. The second pattern can be displayed by light emission. Also, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled to the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, the back first upper decoration body 3161, the back first left decoration body 3162, and the back first right decoration body 3163. However, they are located at the upper edge, the left edge, the right edge, and the vicinity in the game area 5a, respectively.

  Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 is located immediately above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially ring-shaped back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. . This back first lower decorative body 3164 can decorate the outer side of the rotary decorative body 3210 located at the lowest specific position among the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 of the second back production unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at the specific position.

[5-9b. Second back production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96 and the like. FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the second rear production unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the second rear production unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 93 is a front view showing a drive mechanism in the second rear effect unit. FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (d) are explanatory views showing the movement of the plurality of rotary ornaments in the second back production unit, and FIGS. 95 (e) to 95 (g) are in the second back production unit continuing from FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a some rotary ornament. FIG. 96 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the second rear effect unit.

  The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300. The second back production unit 3200 is arranged in a line on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of disk-shaped (here, 12) rotary ornaments 3210 that revolve while revolving around their own axes. Each of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 has a shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The plurality of rotary decorations 3210 have a light-transmitting property. The plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are provided in front of a back second outer decoration 3228 and a back second inner decoration 3229, which will be described later.

  The plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are composed of a plurality (here, four) of special rotation decorations 3211 and the rest (here, eight) of ordinary rotation decorations 3212. The special rotary decorations 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a fixed number (two in this case) of normal rotary decorations 3212 in between. In the present embodiment, the special rotation decoration 3211 is decorated with three sides. The special rotation ornament 3211 has a red toe part and a gold part having a metallic luster at the other parts, and is entirely transparent. The ordinary rotary ornament 3212 is decorated with petals. In the ordinary rotary ornament 3212, the petal portion is formed in a pink color having a metallic luster, and the other edging portions are formed in white, and the whole is light transmissive.

  The second rear production unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a quadrangular outer shape, a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center, and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a diameter larger than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base. It is rotatably attached to the front surface of the 3220, and penetrates forward and backward at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference that is larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating ornament 3210 is rotatable. And an annular drive ring 3221 having an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the axial holes 3221a and a plurality of axial holes 3221a.

  In addition, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and the back second drive motor 3222 having a rotation shaft penetrating the unit base 3220 and projecting forward, and the back second drive motor 3222. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3223 attached to the rotary shaft of the drive motor 3222 meshes with the drive gear 3223 and also meshes with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221, and is rotatable with respect to the unit base 3220. A transmission gear 3224 having a spur gear shape attached to the rotary gear body 3224, and a rotary body gear 3225 fixed to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210a of the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 and meshing with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220. , Are provided.

  Further, the back second effect unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through hole 3226a having a quadrangular outer shape and a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. A circular shape which is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the outer base 3226 and the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and is attached to the unit base 3220, and the outer shape is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. Is attached to the front surface of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 having a polygonal through hole 3227a in the center, and the outer shape is substantially the same square as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. Second outer side having through hole 3228a of even smaller diameter The ornamental body 3228 and the through hole 3228a of the second back outer decorative body 3228 are attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227. A second back inner decoration body 3229 having an annular shape, and an annular second back inner decoration body 3230 inserted into the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration body 3229 and attached to the unit base 3220. , Are provided.

  Further, the back second effect unit 3200 has a rotation position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotary ornament 3210 that revolves while revolving is located at the lowest specific position, and a special revolving body that revolves while revolving. And a special rotation position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotary decoration 3211 is located at the lowest specific position.

  Also, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, and the back second outer decoration body 3228 and the second back inner decoration body 3229. And a second back decorative board 3240 having a plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface. By appropriately causing the LED 3241 of the second back decorative substrate 3240 to emit light, the rotating decoration 3210, the second back outer decoration 3228, and the second back inner decoration 3229 can be illuminated.

  The unit base 3220 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of shaft holes 3221a formed in the same number as the plurality of rotary decorations 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions projecting toward the center side are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The trapezoidal protrusions are provided in the same number as the rotary decoration 3210 (here, 12). In the present embodiment, twelve trapezoidal protruding portions are provided at an angle of 30 degrees in a clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

  The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c projecting from the inner circumference of the portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a toward the center. In addition, the drive ring 3221 further extends toward the center side from the detection pieces 3221c that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a fixed number (two here) of detection pieces 3221c among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c. It has a plurality of (here, four) special detection pieces 3221d. That is, the drive ring 3221 according to the present embodiment has the same number (12) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotating decoration body 3210, and the same number (4) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotation decoration body 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

  The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is the same as that of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts with a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a as boundaries, and each is attached to the unit base 3220.

  The inner base 3227 is formed such that the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the same size. The inner base 3227 is transparent and has a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts, with a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center being separated by a cross line that is rotated about 20 degrees in the clockwise direction, and each is attached to the unit base 3220. There is. In the present embodiment, since the divided portion of the inner base 3227 divided into four is different from the divided portion of the outer base 3226, the unit base 3220 is different from the case where the respective divided portions are the same. It is possible to improve strength and rigidity when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to the.

  The outer shape of the second back outer decorative body 3228 is the same as the outer shape of the outer base 3226 and the same size. The second back outer decoration 3228 is formed such that the inner diameter of the through hole 3228a is slightly larger than the same circumference in which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a of the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The second back outer decorative body 3228 includes a red annular decorative portion 3228b which is annularly provided with a constant width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside the circular decorative portion 3228b. And a corner decoration portion 3228c provided on the. The annular decoration portion 3228b is decorated by arranging the leaves of the patterned plant in a circumferential direction in a fixed pattern. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated in the style of a gable gable. The back second outer decoration 3228 has a relief-shaped decoration formed on the surface. The back second outer decoration 3228 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light-transmitting property. The second back outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four, like the outer base 3226.

  The back second inner decoration 3229 has a circular outer diameter slightly smaller than the same circumference in which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a of the drive ring 3221 are arranged in a row. The second back inner decoration 3229 is formed such that the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227 and the same size. The back second inner decoration 3229 is a red decoration in which stylized plant leaves are circumferentially arranged in a fixed pattern so as to be a set with respect to the annular decoration 3228b of the back second outer decoration 3228. Has been applied. The second back inner decoration 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. The second back inner decoration 3229 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light-transmitting property. The second back inner decoration 3229 is divided into four, like the inner base 3227.

  The back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 is formed to have a length in the front-rear direction that connects the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration body 3229. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the second back inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The second back inner peripheral decoration 3230 includes a vapor-deposited layer having a metallic luster and a light-transmitting property.

  The rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the second back decorative board 3240. The rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c located at the lowermost position among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 93).

  The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227, and is for detecting the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is moved clockwise from the lowest end portion of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding portions of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 (rotate 30 degrees). (Fig. 93).

  On the second back decorative board 3240, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The second back decorative substrate 3240 has a quadrangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240a is formed in the center. Further, the back second decorative substrate 3240 has an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. In the second back decorative board 3240, a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b is attached to the outer base 3226, and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b is attached to the inner base 3227. The second back decorative board 3240 is divided into eight parts so as to correspond to the respective divided parts of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 which are divided into four parts.

  Next, the movements of the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 in the second back production unit 3200 will be described. First, in the second back production unit 3200, the shaft portion 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 has the inner circumference of the second back outer decoration 3228 and the second back inner decoration 3229 from the front. To the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 through the insertion hole 3240b of the second back decorative substrate 3240 and the inner circumference of the outer base 3226 and the outer circumference of the inner base 3227. While being inserted, the rear end penetrates the shaft hole 3221a and projects rearward from the drive ring 3221. A rotary gear 3225 that is meshed with the fixed gear 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft 3210a of the rotary decoration 3210.

  Among the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, four special rotary decorations 3211 move one counterclockwise direction from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 in a front view. The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotation decorative body 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. The remaining eight ordinary rotary ornaments 3212 have respective shaft portions 3210a inserted into the remaining shaft holes in which the shaft portions 3210a of the special rotary ornament 3211 are not inserted.

  In the normal state, in the second rear production unit 3200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 93, four special rotation decoration bodies 3211 out of twelve rotation decoration bodies 3210 are in orbit. It is located at both ends in the vertical direction and both ends in the horizontal direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotary ornaments 3211 are located at the positions of 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock, and 12 o'clock in the timepiece, and the remaining eight ordinary rotary ornaments 3212 are It is located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock. In the present embodiment, the position of the part at 6 o'clock is the specific position of the rotary decoration 3210.

  In this normal state, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (FIG. 93).

  In the state where the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, a plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are arranged in a circle along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and the left and right end sides are arranged. Except for the above, all the rotating decoration bodies 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in a good state. Further, in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear is viewed from the front through the through hole 3229a (the second back inner decoration body 3230) of the back second inside decoration body 3229. It can be seen in good condition.

  Then, in a normal state, the rotary decoration 3210 located at the specific position of the 6 o'clock position which is the lowermost end is the center of the substantially ring-shaped back first lower decoration 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100. And the outer side is decorated with the back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, the rotating decoration body 3210 at the specific position is located behind the first starting opening 2002, and the rear of the first starting opening 2002 can be decorated.

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3223 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back second drive motor 3222, the transmission gear 3224 meshed with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshed with the transmission gear 3224. The drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction via the. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotary decoration 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

  At this time, since the rotary body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decoration 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, the rotation of the shaft portion 3210a in the circumferential direction is accompanied. The rotator gear 3225 rotates about the shaft 3210a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, the clockwise direction). Accordingly, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolved in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees, each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates about one rotation. ..

  As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction, the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 revolve around their own axes, and the normal rotary ornament 3212 is located at the specific position. The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 94 (a)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation decoration 3211 approaches the specific position, the normal rotation decoration immediately before the special rotation decoration 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a in which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 94 (b) to (d) and FIG. 95 (e). ), (F)).

  When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation ornament 3211 reaches a specific position, the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotation ornament 3211 corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. The detected detection piece 3221c is detected by the rotational position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotary decorative body 3212, which is one before the rotating direction of the special rotary decorative body 3211, is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 95 (g)). That is, by detecting the special detection piece 3221d by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the specific position.

  The second rear production unit 3200 rotates the second rear drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to the above to rotate the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the above. However, it can also be revolved in the counterclockwise direction.

  Subsequently, the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 in the second back effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 96 and the like. The plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the second back decorative board 3240 are high-luminance full-color LEDs. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player with the emitted color regardless of the decorative colors of the rotating decoration 3210, the second back outer decoration 3228, and the second back inner decoration 3229 arranged on the front side. it can. That is, the rotating decoration body 3210, the second back outer decoration body 3228, and the second back inner decoration body 3229 can be light-emitted and decorated with an appropriate color depending on the emission color of the LED 3241.

  The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 are provided at a position behind each of the rotating decorative bodies 3210 in a state where the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state). Of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 respectively provided between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, and the rear of the corner decorative portion 3228c of the second back outer decorative body 3228. The upper left corner LED group 3256 and the upper right corner LED group 3257 provided in the position position, the lower left corner LED group 3258 provided in the lower left corner position behind the side unit 2200, the starting opening unit 2100 and the side. The unit 2200 is composed of a prize hole LED group 3259 provided behind each general prize hole 2001. .

  The twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 are arranged such that the rearmost portion of the lowermost specific position is the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a, and the second rotating decorative body LED group 3250b and the third rotating body are rotated in the clockwise direction. Decorative LED group 3250c, fourth rotating decorative body LED group 3250d, fifth rotating decorative body LED group 3250e, sixth rotating decorative body LED group 3250f, seventh rotating decorative body LED group 3250g, eighth rotating decorative body LED group 3250h , The ninth rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, the tenth rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, the eleventh rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, and the twelfth rotation decoration body LED group 3250l. The LED 3241 provided in each of the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 can emit light independently.

  In each of the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, the radiation passing from the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 through the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210 and the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210 centering on the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210. It is divided into four lines of an arc line passing through, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. The four first LED groups 3251, the second LED groups 3252, the third LED groups 3253, and the fourth LED groups 3254, which constitute one rotating decorative body LED group 3250, have LEDs 3241 provided respectively, Can emit light independently

  The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is on the revolution center side (inner side) with respect to the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210, and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation decoration body 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outer side) to the revolution center side of the first LED group 3251 with respect to the rotation center side of the rotary decoration 3210. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotary decoration 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side (outer side) of the third LED group 3253 from the rotation center side of the rotation center of the rotary decoration 3210.

  The twelve intermediate LED groups 3255 have a portion adjacent to the lowermost specific position in the clockwise direction as a first intermediate LED group 3255a in the clockwise direction, and the second intermediate LED group 3255b, Third middle LED group 3255c, fourth middle LED group 3255d, fifth middle LED group 3255e, sixth middle LED group 3255f, seventh middle LED group 3255g, eighth middle LED group 3255h, ninth middle LED group 3255i, third Ten intermediate LED groups 3255j, eleventh intermediate LED groups 3255k, and twelfth intermediate LED groups 3255l are provided.

  In the normal state, the second back production unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits the LEDs 3241 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the second back decoration substrate 3240 to emit a plurality of LEDs. The rotating ornament 3210 can be light-emitted. That is, the twelve circular light emitting decorations arranged on the circumference can be shown to the player. At this time, it is possible to illuminate the rotating decorations 3210 in different colors or to illuminate the special rotating decoration 3212 in different colors with respect to the normal rotating decoration 3212.

  In addition, by causing the twelve rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 to sequentially emit light in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the next rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 may be made to emit light before the next rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is made to emit light. As a result, the light emission between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 is supplemented by the light emission of the intermediate LED group 3255, so that the player can see the light emitting effect of turning more smoothly.

  In addition, each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 is divided into four groups of a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. After the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 are made to emit light, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, and subsequently, they are adjacent to the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect of turning more smoothly and a light emitting effect of turning in smaller steps. Then, when the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolving while revolving around themselves, if the above-described light emitting effect is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotary decoration 3210, an LED is provided on the rotary decoration 3210 itself. As if, the effect that the rotary decoration 3210 revolves while emitting light can be shown to the player.

  Further, in each of the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, ... By causing the lights to be emitted in this order, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light is rotating in the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 at one place. Thereby, when the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped in a normal state, when the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 emit light in order, It is possible to make the player illusion that the rotating ornament 3210 is rotating (spinning) in a state where it is not revolving.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light, the outside is from the center. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, by causing the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 to emit light after causing the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 to emit light, the player is shown a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Further, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are made to emit light at the same time, a ring-shaped light emitting decoration can be shown to the player. At this time, by increasing the brightness of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to make the shape of the rotating decoration 3210 or the like difficult for the player to recognize (make it difficult to see). Thereby, for example, in a state in which the rotary decoration 3210 is made difficult to see by increasing the brightness and is made to emit light in an annular shape, the rotary decoration 3210 is revolved while rotating and the position of the special rotary decoration 3211 is changed, After that, by lowering the brightness or turning off the lights, the rotating decorative body 3210 is made easier to see, so that it is possible to show the player an effect as if the rotating decorative body 3210 is moving.

  As described above, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210, and various light emission is performed by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decoration substrate 3240. You can direct. Further, by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect, it is possible to show a variety of effects to the player and prevent the player from getting tired.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the back third rendering unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back third rendering unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 101 is a front view showing a drive mechanism and a decorative substrate in the back third effect unit in a state where the left horizontal ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body are moved to the appearance position. The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted inside the back box 3010 behind the second back effect unit 3200.

  The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010, and has a rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper front surface of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. Lower unit 3330 provided on the lower portion of the front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided on the left portion of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided on the right portion of the front surface of the unit base 3301. And are equipped with.

  The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 that is openably and closably mounted near the center of the upper part of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction, and is attached to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. Upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315, a rear third upper drive motor 3320, which is attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and has a rotation shaft protruding rearward of the unit base 3301, and a third back upper drive. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3320, a rotation link member 3322 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3322. To slide left and right to open and close the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. That the slide link member 3323, and a.

  The upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the open / closed position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 from the front side. The front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and the slide link member 3323 are urged in the direction in which the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is closed. And an upper spring 3327.

  The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 includes a first decorative body 3312 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right side of the first decorative body 3312 on the proximal side. The second decorative body 3313 is attached to the unit base 3301 such that the base end side is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line except for a part. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in a direction away from the base end side, the corrugation is further formed in a wavy shape extending in a direction away from the base end side in the same direction with the antinode of the string extending in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend from the base end side to the front end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large diameter decorative portions 3311a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative portions 3311b with small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3312 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 side with the shaft hole 3312a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3312a as a center. The first gear portion 3312b, the link piece 3312c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip side, and the elongated link slit 3312d penetrating the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. A transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323 described later is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d.

  The second decorative body 3313 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side with the shaft hole 3313a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3313a as a center. It also has a second gear portion 3313b that meshes with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decoration body 3312 is rotated, the second decoration body 3313 is rotated in the opposite direction to the first decoration body 3312 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. As a result, in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the first decoration body 3312 and the second decoration body 3313 are movable such that the tip end side opens and closes around the base end side.

  The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, and the first LED 3316 that is behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3311b. And a second LED 3317 that is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

  The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the left side of the third back upper drive motor 3320 and at the same height as the rotation axis of the third back upper drive motor 3320. The rotary link member 3322 includes a transmission gear portion 3322a in the shape of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 3321, and a crank pin 3322b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. The crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323 described below.

  The slide link member 3323 has a base end located near the back third upper drive motor 3320, and a front end supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 is rotatably supported). ) To the vicinity, and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 extends vertically on the base end side and has a transmission slit 3323a into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted, and a cylindrical protrusion forward on the tip end side. It has a transmission pin 3323b slidably inserted in the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312 and a detection piece 3323c detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, the lower end is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and is directed toward the tip side. So that it is bent. Further, the slide link member 3323 has a hook portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is constantly urged to the right by an upper spring 3327 that is hooked on a hook 3323d.

  In the upper unit 3310, in a normal state, the slide link member 3323 is located at the moving end to the right, and the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are the farthest apart from each other, and the upper vertical ring. The decorative body 3311 is in the most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are located near the upper edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in the normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is located at the bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

  In this normal state, the tip ends of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 are distant from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments in which the respective tip ends approach each other are acting, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to move to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. The force that tries to move it is acting. Due to the force that moves the slide link member 3323 to the left, a force that moves the crank pin 3322b to the left acts via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323.

  In a normal state, the crank pin 3322b is located below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), so that the crank pin 3322b moves clockwise so as to move downward and leftward. However, since the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve in the clockwise direction any more and the crank pin 3322b revolves. There is no. In other words, in a normal state, even if a force from the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 acts, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not close (moves to the appearance position side), and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 does not move to the standby position. It is locked in this state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3322 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the drive gear 3321 by the back third upper drive motor 3320, the crank pin 3322b of the rotation link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the urging force of the upper spring 3327 so that the slide link member 3323 revolves so as to slide in the direction. When this slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a so that the front end side moves downward via the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the front end. While rotating in the direction, the second gear 3313b meshing with the first gear 3312b causes the second decorative body 3313 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3313a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 closes).

  Further, when the slide link member 3323 slides to the left, the detection piece 3323c also moves to the left, so that the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

  The crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward, and the crank pin 3322b moves normally. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the drive of the third back upper drive motor 3320 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. The appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, a force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the right is exerted by the biasing force of the upper spring 3327, so that the crank pin 3322b is transferred to the crank pin 3322b via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. A force is trying to move it to the right. In this appearance position, since the crank pin 3322b is located below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), the crank pin 3322b rotates counterclockwise so that it moves downward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot further revolve in the counterclockwise direction and the crank pin 3322b revolves. There is nothing to do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the upper vertical ring ornament 3331 does not open (moves to the standby position side) even when a force from the upper spring 3327 or the like acts, and the state of the appearance position remains closed. , And the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until the respective tips contact each other, and the positions rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (the first decoration body 3312 and the second decoration body 3313) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be located. When moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is set as described above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. Can be returned to the standby position by driving it in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the upper unit 3310, the upper third ring drive motor 3320 can open and close the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 between the opened standby position state and the closed appearance position state.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the driving gear 3321 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 by a constant current drive method, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is placed in the standby position and the appearance position. It is possible to move (open and close) between and in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The lower unit 3330 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 that is openably and closably attached near the center of the lower part of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction, and is attached to the rear side of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331. Lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335, a lower back third lower drive motor 3340, which is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301, and has a rotation shaft protruding rearward of the unit base 3301, and a third back lower drive. A spur gear drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3340, a rotation link member 3342 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3341 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotation link member 3342. Slide the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 by sliding to the left and right. That the slide link member 3343, and a.

  Further, the lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the opening / closing position of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 and a part of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the front side. The front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and the slide link member 3343 are urged in the direction in which the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is closed. And a lower spring 3347.

  The lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is a first decoration body 3332 that is attached to the unit base 3301 so that the base end side is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the left side on the base end side of the first decoration body 3332. The second decorative body 3333 is attached to the unit base 3301 such that the base end side is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first decoration body 3332 and the second decoration body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line except for a part. The first decoration body 3332 and the second decoration body 3333 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the straight line portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in a direction away from the base end side, the corrugation is further formed in a wavy shape extending in a direction away from the base end side in the same direction with the antinode of the string extending in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend from the base end side to the front end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large diameter decorative portions 3331a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative portions 3331b with small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3332 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 side with the shaft hole 3332a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3332a as a center. The first gear portion 3332b, the link piece 3332c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip side, and the elongated link slit 3332d penetrating the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. A transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d.

  The second decorative body 3333 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 side with the shaft hole 3333a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3333a as a center. It also has a second gear portion 3333b that meshes with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3332 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. Accordingly, in the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the first decoration body 3332 and the second decoration body 3333 are movable such that the tip end side opens and closes around the base end side.

  The lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration body 3332 and the second decoration body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large diameter decoration portion 3331a and the rear side of the small diameter decoration portion 3331b. 2nd LED3337 which becomes, is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

  The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at the right side of the third back lower drive motor 3340 and at the same height as the rotation axis of the third back lower drive motor 3340. The rotation link member 3342 includes a transmission gear portion 3342a in the shape of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crank pin 3342b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. The crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343 described later.

  The slide link member 3343 has a base end located near the back third lower drive motor 3340, and a tip end supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 is rotatably supported). ) To the vicinity, and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 has a transmission slit 3343a which extends vertically at the base end side and into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotation link member 3342 is slidably inserted, and a cylinder-shaped projection forward at the tip end side. It has a transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332, and a detection piece 3343c detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342, the upper end is located above the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342, and is directed toward the tip side. So that it is bent. Further, the slide link member 3343 has a hook portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is constantly urged to the left by a lower spring 3347 that is hooked on the hook 3343d.

  In the lower unit 3330, in a normal state, the slide link member 3343 is located at the moving end to the left, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are the farthest apart from each other and the lower vertical ring. The decorative body 3331 is in the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are located near the lower edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is located at the bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

  In this normal state, the tip ends of the first and second decorative bodies 3332 and 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are distant from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers. Rotational moments in which the respective tip ends approach each other are acting, and due to the rotation moments, the slide link member 3343 is moved to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. The force that tries to move it is acting. Due to the force to move the slide link member 3343 to the right, the force to move to the right is applied to the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343.

  In the normal state, the crank pin 3342b is located above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342), so that the crank pin 3342b is rotated clockwise so as to move upward and rightward. However, since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot further revolve in the clockwise direction and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 side acts, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 does not open further and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotation link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the urging force of the lower spring 3347. When this slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 is moved counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip. While rotating in the direction, the second gear 3333b meshing with the first gear 3332b causes the second decorative body 3333 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3333a. That is, the tip of the first decoration body 3332 and the tip of the second decoration body 3333 rotate so that they approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 closes).

  Further, when the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right, so that the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

  The crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, and the crank pin 3342b moves normally. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the driving of the back third lower drive motor 3340 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. The appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, a force for moving the slide link member 3343 to the left acts due to the urging force of the lower spring 3347, so that the crank pin 3342b is transferred to the crank pin 3342b via the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. The force to move it to the left is acting. In this appearance position, since the crank pin 3342b is located above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342), the crank pin 3342b is rotated counterclockwise so as to move upward and leftward. However, since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot further revolve in the counterclockwise direction and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is nothing to do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, even if the force from the lower spring 3347 or the like acts, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 does not open (moves to the standby position side), and the state of the appearance position remains closed. , And the load from the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 come into contact with each other, and they are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 (the first decoration body 3332 and the second decoration body 3333) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be located. When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is set as described above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. Can be returned to the standby position by driving it in the opposite direction.

  As described above, in the lower unit 3330, the lower third vertical drive motor 3340 can open and close the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 between the opened standby position and the closed appearance position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the driving gear 3341 is rotated with a high torque by driving the back third lower drive motor 3340 by a constant current drive method, and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. It is possible to move (open and close) between and in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The left side unit 3350 of the rear third effect unit 3300 is provided on the left side of the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the left side ring decoration body 3351 which are openably and closably attached near the vertical center of the left side of the unit base 3301. The attached left horizontal ring decoration substrate 3355, the back third left drive motor 3360, which is attached to the upper left corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301, and has the rotation shaft protruding to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3361 attached to the rotary shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotary link member 3362 rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 by being rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361, and a rotary link member 3362. Rotate to slide up and down to open and close left lateral ring decoration 3351. That the slide link member 3363, and a.

  The left unit 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the open / closed position of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and a part of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 from the front side. And a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

  The left lateral ring decorative body 3351 includes a first decorative body 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper side of the first decorative body 3352 on the proximal side. The second decorative body 3353 is attached to the unit base 3301 such that the base end side is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first decoration body 3352 and the second decoration body 3353 are vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for a part. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear part from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in a direction away from the base end side, the corrugation is further formed in a wavy shape extending in a direction away from the base end side in the same direction with the antinode of the string extending in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend from the base end side to the front end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large diameter decorative portions 3351a with large diameters and six small diameter decorative portions 3351b with small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3352 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 side with the shaft hole 3352a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3352a as a center. The first gear portion 3352b, the link piece 3352c projecting from the base end side to the side opposite to the tip side, and the elongated link slit 3352d penetrating the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. And have. A transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363 described later is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d.

  The second decorative body 3353 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 side with the shaft hole 3353a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3353a as a center. And a second gear portion 3353b that meshes with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3352 due to the meshing of the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. As a result, in the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are movable such that the front end side opens and closes around the base end side.

  The left lateral ring decoration substrate 3355 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration body 3352 and the second decoration body 3353, and is located behind the large-diameter decoration portion 3351a and the first LED 3356, and behind the small-diameter decoration portion 3351b. And a second LED 3357 that is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

  The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position below the third back left drive motor 3360 and on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the third back left drive motor 3360. The rotary link member 3362 includes a transmission gear portion 3362a in the shape of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. The crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363 described later.

  The slide link member 3363 has a base end located near the back third left drive motor 3360, and a tip end supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the up-down direction (the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is rotatably supported). ) To the vicinity, and is vertically slidably attached to the unit base 3301. The slide link member 3363 is provided on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 extends to the left and right on the base end side, and the transmission slit 3363a into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted, and the tip end side protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape. It has a transmission pin 3363b slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, the right end is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and is directed toward the tip side. So that it is bent.

  In the left part unit 3350, in a normal state, the slide link member 3363 is located at the upward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are the furthest apart from each other, and the left lateral ring. The decorative body 3351 is in the state of the standby position which is the most opened. When the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are located near the left edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. In the normal state, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363. Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

  In this normal state, the tip ends of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 approach the vertical lines passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is higher than the rotation center. It is located on the right. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, the rotational moments that try to rotate in the clockwise direction act on the first decorative body 3352 and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3353b of the second decorative body 3353 is meshed with the second gear portion 3353, the rotational moments applied to each of them are offset, and the second decorative body 3353 is maintained in the standby position. Accordingly, from the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 up and down through the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 does not act. The load is hardly applied from the body 3351 side to the back third left drive motor 3360.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotation link member 3362 moves to the left in the transmission slit 3363a. The slide link member 3363 slides downward while revolving so as to slide in the direction. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the first decoration body 3352 moves counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3352a so that the tip end side moves upward through the link slit 3352d by the transmission pin 3363b at the tip. While rotating to, the second gear 3353b meshing with the first gear 3352b causes the second decorative body 3353 to rotate clockwise around the shaft hole 3353a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate such that they approach each other (so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 closes).

  Further, when the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward together, so that the left detection sensor 3364 becomes a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crank pin 3362b slides leftward in the transmission slit 3363a and then slides rightward, and the crankpin 3362b moves. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (rightward from the center of revolution), the driving of the back third left drive motor 3360 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are close to each other so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed. The appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 are in a state of extending to the right from their respective rotation centers. Also, the rotational moment of turning in the clockwise direction acts on the second decorative body 3353 and the second decorative body 3353, and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are rotated. Since the second gear portion 3353b is meshed with the second gear portion 3353b, the rotational moments applied to the respective second gear portions 3353b are offset and the state of the appearance position is maintained. Accordingly, from the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 up and down through the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b, and the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 does not act. The load is hardly applied from the body 3351 side to the back third left drive motor 3360.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 come into contact with each other. Stop at (appearing position). When the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the left lateral ring decoration 3351 (the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be located. When moving the left lateral ring decoration 3351 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is set as described above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. Can be returned to the standby position by driving it in the opposite direction.

  In this way, in the left unit 3350, the back third upper drive motor 3320 can open and close the left lateral ring decoration 3351 between the opened standby position and the closed appearance position.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the driving gear 3361 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third left drive motor 3360 by a constant current drive method, and the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. It is possible to move (open and close) between and in a very short time of 650 ms.

  The right side unit 3370 of the back third effect unit 3300 is provided on the right side of the right side ring decoration body 3371 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 that is openably and closably attached in the vicinity of the vertical center of the right side of the unit base 3301. The attached right lateral ring decoration substrate 3375, the back third right drive motor 3380, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and has the rotation shaft protruding to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotary shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 by rotation of the drive gear 3381, and a rotary link member 3382. Rotate to slide up and down to open and close right lateral ring decoration 3371. That the slide link member 3383, and a.

  The right unit 3370 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the opening / closing position of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 and a part of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the front side. And a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

  The right lateral ring decorative body 3371 includes a first decorative body 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a base end upper side of the first decorative body 3372. The second decorative body 3373 is attached to the unit base 3301 such that the base end side is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed symmetrically with respect to the horizontal line except for a part. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend in a straight line from the base end side, and have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in a direction away from the base end side, the corrugation is further formed in a wavy shape extending in a direction away from the base end side in the same direction with the antinode of the string extending in the same direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend from the base end side to the front end side with a substantially constant width. The first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373 have three large diameter decoration parts 3371a with large diameters and six small diameter decoration parts 3371b with small diameters along the extending direction.

  The first decorative body 3372 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3373 side with the shaft hole 3372a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3372a as a center. The first gear portion 3372b, the link piece 3372c projecting from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip side, and the elongated link slit 3372d penetrating the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. And have. A transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383 described later is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d.

  The second decoration body 3373 is provided in a circular arc shape so as to face the first decoration body 3372 side with the shaft hole 3373a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3373a as a center. And a second gear portion 3373b that meshes with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 is rotated in the opposite direction to the first decorative body 3372 due to the engagement of the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, in the right lateral ring decoration 3371, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are movable such that the tip end side opens and closes with the base end side as the center.

  The right lateral ring decoration substrate 3375 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373, and the first LED 3376 behind the large diameter decoration portion 3371a and the rear side of the small diameter decoration portion 3371b. 2nd LED3377 which becomes, is mounted. In the present embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

  The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotation link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position above the back third right drive motor 3380 and on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotation link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crank pin 3382b that protrudes forward from the eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. The crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383 described later.

  The slide link member 3383 has a base end located near the back third right drive motor 3380, and a tip end rotatably supported in the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the right lateral ring ornament 3371 is rotatably supported). ) To the vicinity, and is vertically slidably attached to the unit base 3301. The slide link member 3383 is provided on the right side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 extends to the left and right on the base end side, and the transmission slit 3383a into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 is slidably inserted, and the tip end side protrudes forward in a columnar shape. It has a transmission pin 3383b slidably inserted in the link slit 3372d of the decorative body 3372, and a detection piece 3383c detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

  The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3382, the left end is located to the left of the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3382, and Bends to the other side.

  In the right unit 3370, in a normal state, the slide link member 3383 is located at the upper moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are the furthest apart from each other, and the right lateral ring. The decorative body 3371 is in the most open standby position. When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are located near the right edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in the normal state, the crank pin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383. Further, in the normal state, the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

  In this normal state, the tip ends of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 approach the vertical lines passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is higher than the rotation center. It is located on the left. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, the rotational moments that try to rotate in the counterclockwise direction act on the first decorative body 3372 and the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3373b of the second decorative body 3373 is meshed with the second gear portion 3373, the rotational moments applied to the second decorative body 3373 and the second gear portion 3373b are offset, and the second decorative body 3373 is maintained in the standby position. As a result, from the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. There is almost no load from the body 3371 side to the back third right drive motor 3380.

  In this normal state, when the rotation link member 3382 is rotated clockwise by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381, the crank pin 3382b of the rotation link member 3382 moves rightward in the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward while revolving so as to slide. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the first decoration body 3372 moves clockwise around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3372d by the transmission pin 3383b at the tip. While rotating, the second gear 3373b meshed with the first gear 3372b causes the second decorative body 3373 to rotate counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3373a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate such that they approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed).

  Further, when the slide link member 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward together, so that the right detection sensor 3384 becomes a non-detection state.

  Then, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 revolves clockwise, so that the crank pin 3382b slides rightward in the transmission slit 3383a and then slides leftward, and the crank pin 3382b normally moves. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the above state and is located near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (to the left of the center of revolution), the driving of the back third right drive motor 3380 is stopped. In this state, the leading ends of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are close to each other so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed. The appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are rotated by 50 degrees from the standby position.

  In this appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are in a state of extending to the left from the respective rotation centers, and therefore, the first decorative body 3372. Also, the rotational moment of turning in the counterclockwise direction acts on the second decorative body 3373 and the second decorative body 3373. However, the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are acted upon. Since the second gear portion 3373b is meshed with each other, the rotation moments applied to the respective second gear portions 3373b are canceled and the state of the appearance position is maintained. Accordingly, from the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 side, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 does not act. There is almost no load from the body 3371 side to the back third right drive motor 3380.

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 do not rotate until the respective tips contact each other, and the positions are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearing position). When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the right lateral ring decoration 3371 (the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373) is placed within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be located. When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is set as described above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. Can be returned to the standby position by driving it in the opposite direction.

  As described above, in the right unit 3370, the back third right drive motor 3380 can open and close the right lateral ring decoration 3371 between the opened standby position and the closed appearance position.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive method, and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is set to the standby position and the appearance position. It is possible to move (open and close) between and in a very short time of 650 ms.

  In the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 of the back third effect unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. In the back third effect unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are provided behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331.

  In this embodiment, two-phase stepping motors are used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, with the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 attached, 200 pps (1 pulse width is 5 ms). It is also possible to drive the motor from the stopped state, and even if it is excited by a pulse of 200 pps from the stopped state without a slow-up process.

  Moreover, since the movement from the standby position to the appearance position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is completed in 130 steps, [130 step × 5 ms = 650 ms], and it is possible to make it appear or be saved (appear / save) at 650 ms.

  Next, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 in the back third effect unit 3300 will be described. The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are each in the standby position in a normal state. ing. In a state where the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are in the standby position, the back side of the back second effect unit 3200 arranged in the front side. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decoration 3229 and is invisible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, When viewed from the front, in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are in close proximity to each other, and a decoration in which three rings are arranged vertically (up and down) It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 104).

  Further, in a normal state, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position. In a front view, at the center of the frame of the unit base 3301, the tip of the left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are in close proximity, and three rings are arranged side by side (left and right). Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 105).

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively, in the center view in the frame of the unit base 3301, the upper vertical ring The tip of the ring decoration body 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are brought close to each other, and the tip of the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 and the tip of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other. The player can see the decoration in which the rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross pattern (see FIG. 106).

  In the back third effect unit 3300, in a normal state, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Is moved to a position on the way from the standby position to the appearance position, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 (first The front end portions of the decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) are located inside the through hole 3229a of the rear second inner decorative body 3229 in the rear second effect unit 3200 in a front view, and are partially on the player side. It can be seen from (see FIG. 107). In this state, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229, and the two ends of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are exposed. Since one tip appears at the upper and lower right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229 can be changed. it can.

  As described above, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are appropriately combined. By moving to the appearance position with, it is possible to make the decorations of the rings arranged vertically, horizontally, or crosses appear, and to show the player a variety of movable effects.

  Further, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355, and the right horizontal ring. By appropriately illuminating the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are illuminated. Therefore, various luminous effects can be shown to the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110 and the like. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which a plurality of rotary ornaments in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in the clockwise direction from the normal state. FIG. 103 is an enlarged front view showing the lower part of the game board in a state where the special rotary ornament in the back second effect unit is moved to a specific position. FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decorative body and the lower vertical ring decorative body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the left horizontal ring decorative body and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper vertical ring decorative body, the lower vertical ring decorative body, the left horizontal ring decorative body, and the right horizontal ring decorative body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. is there. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position.

  FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing an example of an effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back upper third effect unit. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during the light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 110 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown with the game board facing the game window of the door frame.

  In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, which defines the rear end of the game area 5a, the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, etc. are substantially entirely formed. Since it is formed transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, through them, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000. A plurality of rotations of the back first upper decoration body 3161, the back first left decoration body 3162, the back first right decoration body 3163, the back first lower decoration body 3164, and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back first effect unit 3100. Decorative body 3210 (special rotary decorative body 3211 and normal rotary decorative body 3212), back second outside decorative body 3228, back second inside Kazaritai 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognize the.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, four special rotary decorations 3211 out of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 in the second rear effect unit 3200 are arranged at both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution orbit. , Located at the left and right ends. That is, one special rotating decorative body 3211 is located at the lowest specific position (the 6 o'clock portion of the timepiece) on the orbit. The special rotation decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is located at the center of the substantially ring-shaped back first lower decoration 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outside is the back first lower decoration 3164. It has been decorated by. Further, the special rotating decorative body 3211 (rotating decorative body 3210) at the specific position is located behind the first starting opening 2002 and decorates the rear of the first starting opening 2002 (see FIG. 103).

  Further, in a normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are in the standby positions, respectively. Since it is located outside the back second inner circumference decoration body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 in a front view, the front is a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210, the drive ring 3221, and the back second outside. It is covered with the decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, and the like, and is invisible from the player side.

  In this normal state, the player displays the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged rearward through the inside of the second inner second decoration member 3230 of the second rear effect unit 3200. Therefore, it can be visually recognized in good condition.

  The game board 5 is the back first of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The effect unit 3100, the second back effect unit 3200, and the third back effect unit 3300 perform predetermined movable effects.

  First, an effect using the second rear effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. As an effect using the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 of the second back effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 102, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the second back drive motor 3222. It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the plurality (12 pieces) of the rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. As a result, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 revolves (circulates) around the effect image that can be seen through the inside of the second back inner periphery decoration 3230 while rotating, so that the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 that rotate around the game area 5a can be made lively and entertaining the player.

  As described above, for example, when the LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 in the back first effect unit 3100 are made to emit light in a state where the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while revolving, the rotation decorative body is moved backward. Since the substantially annular back first lower decoration 3164 circling 3210 emits light, the player's interest can be directed to the back first lower decoration 3164. Further, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, a desired rotary decorative body 3210 (special rotary decorative body 3211) is provided in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164 to the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, it is possible to excite the player and to excite the player.

  At this time, only the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decorative body 3210 that passes through the rear side in the ring of the back first lower decorative body 3164 can be visually recognized well, and it is difficult to visually recognize the other rotating decorative body 3210. It is possible to show the player an effect such as a roulette or a slot with a window inside the circle, and to increase the excitement of whether or not the desired rotary decoration 3210 stops at a specific position. You can

  Then, when the desired rotary decoration 3210 (special rotary decoration 3211) stops within the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting opening 2002 is provided, it is very likely that if the player accepts the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002, the "big hit" is very likely to be drawn. Thus, the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, and the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  Further, when the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolved while being rotated by the drive of the second back drive motor 3222, the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decoration board 3240 are appropriately adjusted according to the moving position of each rotary decoration 3210. You may make it light-emit. For example, when one rotating decorative body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are set. The intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off while being turned on. Then, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are kept lit and the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3251 are turned on. The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Further, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is turned off, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Leave it alone.

  Then, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 are turned on to turn on the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group. While keeping 3254 turned off, the intermediate LED group 3255 is kept turned on. When the rotary decoration 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the initial position (the next rotary decoration 3210 is located at the specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to rotate the rotary decoration LED. The group 3250 is turned on and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. As a result, the LED 3241 in which the rotating decoration 3210 is located in the front is turned on, and the LED 3241 in which the rotating decoration 3210 is not located in the front is turned off. Therefore, the rotating decoration 3210 is also displayed. It is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is revolving while emitting light as if the LED itself is provided, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Also, in the back second effect unit 3200, in a normal state, all the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 are made to emit light with high brightness, and then a plurality of rotation decorations are made by the back second drive motor 3222. The body 3210 is rotated and revolved, and the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 is stopped in a state different from the normal state so that the rotary decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. May be. As a result, since all the rotating decoration bodies LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotating decoration body bodies 3210. By changing the position of 3210, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and to surprise and entertain the player.

  Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 can be appropriately made to emit light, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is changed from the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. , Second rotating decoration LED group 3250b, third rotating decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotating decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotating decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotating decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotating decoration Body LED group 3250g, eighth rotating decorative body LED group 3250h, ninth rotating decorative body LED group 3250i, tenth rotating decorative body LED group 3250j, eleventh rotating decorative body LED group 3250k, twelfth rotating decorative body LED group By emitting light (lighting) in sequence like 3250l, the player is given a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in a predetermined direction. So it can, it is possible to entertain the player. When stopping the rotation of the light, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation and entertain the player depending on the position where the rotation of the light stops.

  When the rotation of the light is stopped, the rotation speed of the light is gradually reduced, and in the rotating decoration LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3253. The LED group 3254, and then the intermediate LED group 3255 may be turned on in order, and the light may be moved in small increments in the rotation direction so as to be slowly stopped. As a result, the position where the light stops becomes fine, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of the light will stop, and it is possible to entertain and entertain the player.

  In addition, as described above, the light can be rotated (orbited), so by turning on or off the light in order in the circumferential direction, the light emission effect of measuring time like a clock and the remaining time can be set. It is also possible to perform a suggested light emitting effect and the like, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, ... The light may be emitted in any order. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if light is rotating in the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 in one place, and to the player while the rotating decoration body 3210 is not revolving. It is possible to make the illusion that it is rotating (spinning) and entertain the player.

  Further, in each of the rotating decoration body LED groups 3250, for example, when the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light, the outside is from the center. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect that moves and spreads. Alternatively, by causing the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 to emit light after causing the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 to emit light, the player is shown a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

  Next, an effect using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 104, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331. Move from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, when viewed from the front, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 come closer to each other at the center of the inside of the second back inner decoration 3230, and the three rings are vertically ( The decorations lined up (upper and lower) can be shown to the player.

  In addition, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 105, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from the normal state, and the left lateral ring decoration is performed. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, the front ends of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are close to each other at the center of the inside of the second back inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in a front view, and the three rings are lateral ( The left and right) decorations can be shown to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the left side ring decoration body 3351 and the right side ring decoration body 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position to form a decoration in which three rings are arranged side by side. The display device 1600 displays the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, in the portions inside each of the three rings. It is possible to perform variable display of three symbol strings for suggestion. As a result, in the state where the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the upper and lower sides of the three symbol rows are compared with the case where the three symbol rows are variably displayed. The left lateral ring decoration 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 at the appearance position are in a state of being physically decorated, so that the symbol sequence that is variably displayed to the player is a game such as "big hit". It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility of being stopped and displayed by a combination of advantageous symbols, and to increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 106, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, And driving the back third right drive motor 3380 to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position. To move. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring ornament 3331 are brought closer to each other at the center of the inside of the second back inner peripheral ornament 3230, and the left lateral ring ornament 3351 is The tip and the tip of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, so that the player can see the decoration in which five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106, when all of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross shape is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, such as a “big hit”, is likely to occur with respect to the player. It is possible to increase the expectation for the “big hit” game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. May be. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 are moved to the appearance positions in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring ring are formed. The decoration body 3331, the left side ring decoration body 3351, and the right side ring decoration body 3371 may be sequentially moved to the appearance position. As a result, since the five rings are arranged in a cross through multiple stages, it is possible to excite and excite the player at each stage depending on whether or not to move to the next stage. Can entertain.

  By the way, in the back third effect unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. Since it is driven by torque, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are extremely short for 1 second or less (650 ms here). ), It is possible to move from the standby position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the standby position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 appear or disappear in an instant, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to entertain the player.

  Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 107, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven, and the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 is driven. And the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is moved to a position on the way from the standby position to the appearance position. Thereby, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (the first decoration body 3312 and the second decoration body 3313) and the tip portion of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 (the first decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373). However, it is located inside the back second inner circumference decoration body 3230 in a front view, and can be partially viewed from the player side.

  More specifically, in the state of FIG. 107, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 appear in the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration body 3229, and The two ends of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 appear at the upper and lower right corners of the four corners of the through hole 3229a of the second back inner decoration 3229. As a result, the shape of the inside of the second back inner peripheral decoration body 3230 facing the display screen of the effect display device 1600 changes to the rear, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body are presented to the player. The movement of 3371 can be easily noticed, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by making the player feel that something will happen.

  When moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, first, only the tip portion can be visually recognized. As described above, it may be moved halfway and then moved to the appearance position as the next step. This can excite the player depending on whether or not the player completely moves to the appearance position, which can entertain the player. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small steps with respect to the standby position, and the inner shape of the back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 is changed in small steps, so that the player Can be more easily noticed.

  In the back third production unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335, the first LED 3356 and the first LED 3356 of the left horizontal ring decoration substrate 3355. The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration substrate 3375 are appropriately caused to emit light, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that have moved to the appearance position side can be made to emit light in various light emission modes. Can entertain the player.

  By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third rendering unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Occasionally, as effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, those are provided at a position directly behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. A decoration image 3390 similar to the above is displayed (see FIG. 108).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is caused by some cause. , If the player cannot move to the appearance position, even if the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is executed. In addition, they are kept in the standby position and are not moved to the appearance position side, and the effect display device 1600 is caused to display the decoration image 3390 (see FIG. 108). As a result, even if a defect occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the defect by seeing the decoration image 3390. By recognizing, it is possible to prevent the player from having to interrupt the game and feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to keep the player entertained in the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as an effect using the back unit 3000, an effect obtained by appropriately combining the effect by the second back effect unit 3200 and the effect by the third back effect unit 3300 can be performed. As a result, more various effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired. In addition, since it is possible to show the player a multi-stage effect, it is possible to make the player feel more excited and excited at each stage, which can increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when an appropriate light emitting effect is being executed using the back first effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300, It is possible to turn off the LED located on the line and perform a shadow effect in which the line is moved from one side of the predetermined direction to the other side in a short time (one second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a. (See Figure 109). As a result, by turning off the LED on the specific line, a dark portion (shadow portion 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow portion 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player “hatched”, and to concentrate on the game with a feeling that something will happen. The shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the diagonal direction.

  In addition, the above-mentioned shadow effect is a movable effect by the rotating ornament 3210, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311, the lower vertical ring ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, the right lateral ring ornament 3371, and the like, It can also be executed at the time of switching of the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the like. This makes it possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the next movable effect, effect image, and the like, with the shadow effect as a delimiter, and to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the game board 5 of this embodiment can be viewed from the player side inside the game area 5a through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 as shown in FIG. 110 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. Then, in the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is a semi-tubular dish upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate center upper decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration. It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decoration body 453. In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. To the rear, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left. Since the decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs of these decorative substrates to emit light. The light can be moved along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  Then, as described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, since various light emission effects can be performed, for example, the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253, the second second effect unit 3200, the second When the LED group 3252, the fourth LED group 3254, and the LEDs on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 are made to emit light in this order, the player can be shown a light emission effect that moves outward from the center and spreads out. Can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Alternatively, when the LEDs of each decorative board of the door frame 3, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the back second effect unit 3200, the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light in this order, It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges from the outside to the center, and to direct the player's interest to the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, in the second back production unit 3200, as described above, at the time of the light emission production in which the light is rotated (turned) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a light emission effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a may be executed. As a result, the player can be made to see a light-emitting effect in which the light spins around the entire pachinko machine 1 centering on the center of the game area 5a, which can give a strong impact to the player and also entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest.

  In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the movable effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to achieve various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 are lower. 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 of the right unit 3370, the central portion of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second effect unit 3200). The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration are rotated by rotating the outer circumference of the decoration body 3230 to the outer side. A body 3371 is a rotating decoration body 3210, a back second outside decoration body 3228, a back second inside decoration body 3229 of the back second effect unit 3200. And the back second inner circumference decoration body 3230, the rotation decoration body 3210, the back second outside decoration body 3228, the back second inside decoration body 3229, and the back second inner circumference decoration body 3230 make the upper vertical direction. The ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the upper vertical ring to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the production display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a. The effect image displayed at can be favorably viewed from the player side (front side), and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are within the range of 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds (this embodiment. In the mode, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the back third to rotate (move) from the retracted position to the appearance position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds). The three left drive motors 3360 and the back third right drive motors 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method to drive the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated with a high torque. As a result, a large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, which have stopped due to the high torque. Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can be rotated to the appearance position at an extremely fast speed, the player does not recognize. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 show the player an effect as if they suddenly appeared in the center of the game area 5a. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left. The sudden appearance of the ring decoration body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 can make the player strongly think that something is good, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 by a constant current drive method. When the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with a high torque, they are rapidly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position. Since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. , An upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right lateral ring to the appearance position for the player. The movement of the ornamental body 3371 can be immediately recognized, and the movement of the upper vertical ring ornamental body 3311, the lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331, the left lateral ring ornamental body 3351, and the right lateral ring ornamental body 3371 can greatly improve the player. You can be amazed.

  Further, the portions of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 between the proximal end side and the distal end side are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. Since it is positioned on the rear side of the straight line connecting the base end side and the tip end side when rotating, the shape extending non-linearly between the base end side and the tip end side (here, an arc) Since the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, Further, the tip ends of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are visible. At this time, the portion (tip end side) of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 that is visible from the front side is the base end. Since the non-linear shape between the side and the tip side, the direction projecting inward from the second back inner peripheral decoration body 3230 is the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body. The direction is different from the direction of the base end side of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped on the way to the appearance position side and only the tip side is visually recognized. When a possible effect is executed (see FIG. 107), the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are different for the player. Since it is possible to make an illusion that another ornament appears, it is possible to show the player more various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, the base end side is the central portion of the game area 5a (the second back inner peripheral decorative body). 3230) is rotatably supported on the outer side, and has an elongated frame shape such that the tip end side extends to the central portion of the game area 5a at the appearance position. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring When the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right. Since the tip side of the horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is located at the center of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration body 335 at the appearance position. , And the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be conspicuous, and the player's interest is strongly focused on the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. Can be attracted.

  By driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 by a constant current drive method. , The time when the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by 0. Since it is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, it is not necessary to use a large drive motor having a torque higher than necessary, and the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the back third left. An increase in space required for the drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 can be suppressed, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring device are relatively provided. A space for arranging the body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and other members can be easily secured, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical space can be secured by the secured space. The ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the like can be made larger, and large upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the like. , And the right lateral ring decoration 3371 and the like, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player. Further, since it is not necessary to use a large drive motor having a torque higher than necessary or a complicated control circuit for outputting a high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

  In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the emerged position or from the emerged position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened to thereby provide the player with the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the movement of the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, by brightening the display screen after that, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, The lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 suddenly appear in the central portion or disappear from the central portion. The effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be surprised, and the game is performed by the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring decoration is obtained. Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with high torque, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, a back third left drive motor 3360, a back third right drive motor 3380, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, a right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the like. Although there is a possibility that a failure may easily occur due to fatigue in an early stage, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 335. , And the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect of moving the right horizontal ring decoration object 3371 to the appearance position. Even if the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be moved (rotated) to the appearance position, the decoration image 3390 allows the player to see them. It is possible to make an illusion that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 have moved to the appearance position. Same effect as ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 It is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to show the exit to the player.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1511 and effect display control unit 1512) causes the upper unit 3310 of the rear third effect unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000 to operate. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are invisible from the player side. Since it has been moved to the retreat position, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well, and the player can entertain the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position, an appropriate operation is performed. A number of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 appear on the effect display device 1600 at the timing of moving from the retracted position to the appearance position. A decorative image 3390 is displayed at a position behind the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the frame-shaped upper vertical ring is displayed. Ring decoration body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration body 3371. Since a specific effect image (for example, a plurality of symbol strings for suggesting a special lottery result selected by lottery) is displayed in the divided section, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left side The specific effect image is clearly divided by the ring decoration body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371, the specific effect image can be made conspicuous, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. .

  For some reason, even one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, all of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring by the peripheral control board 1510. Since only the movement control of the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is suspended, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3351. When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring Ring decoration body 3331, left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move from the retracted position, and the effect display device 1600 displays the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 at the appearance position. , The left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are displayed with a decoration image 3390, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring appearing. Since the specific effect image is displayed in the region partitioned by the ornamental body 3351 and the right lateral ring ornamental body 3371 (decorative image 3390), the upper vertical ring ornamental body 3311 and the lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 are displayed to the player. , The left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made to appear as if they have moved to the appearance position. Decorative body 3311, lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are similar to the decorative image 3390, and thus upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, left horizontal ring. It is possible to show the same effect as the effect by the decorative body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 to the player. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are unable to move to the appearance position due to a problem, A decorative image 3390 similar to the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring can be displayed. The same effect as the effect by the decorative body 3331, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351, and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player by the decorative image 3390, and the specific effect image can be made conspicuous by the decorative image 3390. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect using the specific effect image and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the case where a problem occurs in which even one of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot move to the appearance position, The movement control of all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, the left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorations 3371 is suspended, and the upper vertical ring decorations 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorations Since the 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and When the effect of moving the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position at the same time is performed, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3311 that have moved to the appearance position are displayed. A presentation in which any one of the ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 and the decoration image 3390 that is visible by not moving to the appearance position due to a defect are performed is performed. It is possible to avoid such a situation, prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move to the appearance position regardless of whether there is a defect or not. Since 3390 is displayed, an image for when a failure occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is separately provided. There is no need, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 allow the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351. When a defect that the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is not moved is detected, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped. Therefore, due to a defect, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 stop at an incomplete position. It is possible to prevent the player from having a bad performance, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Since the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while only the movement control is suspended, the decoration image 3390 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 is stopped by detecting a defect, the upper vertical ring decoration body Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371. The motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are not overloaded, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 and It is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction from expanding.

  Further, since the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are invisible in the state of the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3171 is not visible for some reason. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can not be moved to the appearance position, even if a defect occurs, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is decorated. Since the image 3390 is displayed, the effect of the decoration image 3390 can be enjoyed, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration can be enjoyed. Since the body 3371 is not visible, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration body It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that there is a problem that the 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 do not move, and to prevent the player from feeling anxious and to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, in a state where the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the retreat position (normal state), the player moves upward from the player side. Since the vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the player can see the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 in the retracted position. Since it is possible to make the presence of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 less noticeable, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal When the ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body which are not visible are displayed. The appearance of the ornament 3331, the left lateral ring ornament 3351, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 can greatly amaze the player, entertain the player, and provide something to the player. It is possible to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3331. 3371 is configured to detect a defect that the 3371 does not move to the appearance position, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are set to the upper position. Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are used for detection, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring. The decoration 3351 and the right side ring decoration 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position. In this case, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 cause the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal. If the ring decorative body 3371 is still detected, it means that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 have not moved, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3371 has not moved. It is possible to detect a defect that the ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move to the appearance position, and implement a gaming machine that achieves the above-described operational effects. Can be converted.

  Note that the decoration images 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body. It may be larger or smaller than the sizes of 3331, the left lateral ring decoration body 3351, and the right lateral ring decoration body 3371. When the decoration image 3390 is made larger than the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, the decoration image displayed on the effect display device 1600. 3390 has an advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decoration image 3390 is smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring When an effect of moving the ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, an upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and a left vertical ring decoration body 3331 due to occurrence of a defect. There is an advantage that the player cannot recognize the decoration image 3390 unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through hole 3329a penetrating forward and backward. In front of the back second inner decoration 3229, in a normal state, four special rotation decorations 3211 with special decoration and the remaining 6 different decorations from the special rotation decoration 3211 are left. Twelve flat plate-shaped and light-transmitting rotary ornaments 3210 composed of individual ordinary rotary ornaments 3212 center around an axis extending in the front and rear direction so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. The display screen of the effect display device 1600, which is lined up on the circumference of the revolution, is provided rearward from the through hole 3229a. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotary decoration 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. Along with the shaft portion 3210a, the rotary ornament 3210 and the rotor gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a are arranged on a circle having a radius from the rotation center of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a (revolution circle). Move around (revolution). At this time, since the rotary body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the unit base 3220, the rotation is prevented. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolving direction of the rotating body gear 3225, and the rotating body gear 3225 rotates the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decoration body 3210. Together with this, it rotates (spins) around an axis extending in the front and rear of the shaft portion 3210a. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the second back drive motor 3222, a plurality (12) of the rotary ornaments 3210 revolves in the same direction while rotating, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline of interest. Can be made.

  In addition, since the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 that revolve around the axis extending in the front-rear direction while revolving around the axis are formed in a flat plate shape, the surface of the rotary decoration 3210 faces forward, and the entire rotary decoration 3210 is a player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decorations 3210 revolve while revolving, it is possible to show the player that a plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are spinning and to give a lively feeling to the player. In addition to being able to show, the player can be greatly enjoyed by giving a strong impact to the player, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, behind the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, the second back outer decoration 3228 and the second back inner decoration 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotary decoration 3210, the stop position on the revolution circle (one A plurality of (12) rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, which are located behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 that are revolving stopped at the position where the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves at a specific position) and are divided in the revolution direction, Since the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 configured by the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 are provided, the plurality of rotating decorative body 3210 is at the stop position. In this state, when the LED 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is made to emit light, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be made to emit light and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are stopped. In state between each other, when the emit LED3241 intermediate LED group 3255 can emit light decoration rotational decorative body 3210. Therefore, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the LED 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves. Since the rotating LED 3241 moves along with the revolution of the rotating decoration 3210, the light from the LED 3241 has a translucent back second outer decoration 3228 and second back inner decoration 3229 and rotation decoration. By irradiating the front (player side) through the body 3210, the rotary decoration 3210 can be light-emitted as if the rotary decoration 3210 was provided with the LED 3241. By showing the player the effect of the revolving decorative body 3210 revolving around its own axis, the player can be greatly entertained. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 forming the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolving direction of the rotating decoration body 3210 with the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group. Since it is divided into 3254, the LED 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 can be finely lit according to the revolution of the rotating decoration body 3210. Therefore, only the LED 3241 located behind the rotating decoration body 3210 can be emitted. The LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves around its axis while rotating, and this can give a strong illusion to the player, and also the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 that is decorated with light emission. It can be more entertaining and can prevent the player from having less interest in the game. .

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 composed of the group of rotating decoration LEDs 3250 and the group of intermediate LEDs 3255 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. , The LED group 3256 in the upper left corner, the LED group 3257 in the upper right corner, the LED group 3258 in the lower left corner, and all LEDs 3241 except LEDs 3241 included in the winning hole LED group 3259 are caused to emit light, thereby showing the player a ring-shaped light emitting effect. be able to. Further, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolving direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are circumferentially arranged. By alternately emitting light in directions, the player can see a light-emitting decoration in which light rotates on the circumference. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotary decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in a ring shape with a predetermined width. Therefore, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged inside the ring. By sequentially emitting light from the outside to the outside, the player can see a light emission effect in which the ring of light spreads outward, or by causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light in order from the outside to the inside of the ring. It is possible to show or give the player a luminous effect that converges inward. In this way, since various luminous effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  In addition, when performing a light-emitting effect such that light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotary decoration 3210, each rotary decoration LED group 3250 moves in the revolution direction of the rotary decoration 3210 in the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252. Since it is divided into the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254, it is possible to make the movement of the light in the revolving direction finer, and thus the player can create a luminous effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. Can be shown to. Further, since the movement of the light in the revolution direction of the rotary ornament 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be further slowed down, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired by various light emission effects, and to be entertained. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, by appropriately combining the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect of revolving the rotating decorative body 3210 while revolving, the player can obtain an effect that cannot be seen with the conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and intermediate LED group 3255 are controlled to emit light. By doing so, compared with the case where a plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled to emit light one by one, it is possible to reduce the load on the control, and a problem occurs due to the occurrence of overload, which is a pleasure for the player. It is possible to avoid lowering the power consumption, and also to simplify the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like, thereby reducing the cost.

  Further, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolving direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, for example, only the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is provided at a constant time interval. If the rotating decorative LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED groups 3255 are alternately emitted in the circumferential direction at the same time interval, the speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction is different. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emission effect, and it is possible to entertain the light emission effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. it can.

  In addition, since the back second outer decoration 3228 and the second back inner decoration 3229 having a light-transmitting property are provided between the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the second back outer decoration 3228 is provided. Since the LED 3241 of the second back decorative board 3240 is difficult to be seen from the front by the second back inner decoration 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decoration 3210. Therefore, it is possible to make an illusion that the rotating decoration 3210 is provided with the LED 3241, so that it is possible to further increase the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotating decoration 3210 that revolves around its own axis while rotating. The effect by the decorative body 3210 can be made more enjoyable, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Door can be.

  Further, since the special rotary decoration 3211 having a special decoration (three-sided decoration) is provided in the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolved while revolving. When the special rotating decorative body 3211 revolves at a specific position or not, the player can be throbbing, and the player can enjoy the movable effect of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a rotation position detection sensor 3231 that detects that one rotary decoration 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolution circle including the stop position, and one special rotary decoration 3211 is located at the specific position. Since the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the normal rotation decoration 3212 is located at the specific position among the plurality of rotation decorations 3210, only the rotation position detection sensor 3231 is provided. When the special rotation decoration 3211 is located at the specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect the rotation position detection sensor 3231. Depending on the combination of the detections by the position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotating decorative body 3212 or the special rotating decorative body 3211 is placed at a specific position. Les it is possible to detect whether located. Therefore, by using the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 when stopping the revolution of one of the plurality of rotation decorations 3210 at a specific position, a normal rotation decoration that revolves while rotating. Since either 3212 or the special rotation decoration 3211 can be revolved at the specific position, it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotation decoration 3211 is revolved at the specific position. It is possible to entertain and excite the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotation decoration body 3212 and the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position. Since 3221d is provided on the drive ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate as compared with the case where the rotation decoration 3210 is provided with the detection piece and the special detection piece. The detection pieces 3221c and the special detection pieces 3221d can be simplified in structure, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since a plurality of rotary ornaments 3210 can be revolved while rotating by one back second drive motor 3222, when the rotation and revolution of the rotary ornament 3210 are driven by different drive motors. In comparison, the configuration of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be simplified, the drive mechanism can be downsized, and the control related to the movable effect of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be achieved. The load can be reduced. Further, as described above, since the driving mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210 can be made small, it is possible to relatively widen the space for disposing the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be made larger so that the player can stand out, and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be strongly attracted by the player.

  Further, since the shaft portion 3210a is projected rearward of the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is rearward of the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are naturally rearward of the LED 3241. The rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221, and the like do not block the light emitted from the LED 3241 to the front, and the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 can be reliably illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the back second drive motor 3222 that rotates the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, and the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220b (the inside of the through hole 3229a) can be wide, so that it faces the inside. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made more visible, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

  Further, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220b and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the back first drive motor 3222 is provided at a position substantially the same as the front-back direction position of the drive ring 3221. Since the second drive motor 3222 can be provided, an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be suppressed. Further, since the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 have a flat plate shape, the thickness in the front-rear direction applied to the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be reduced. From these things, since the thickness in the front-back direction can be reduced, the space for arranging the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be relatively widened to increase the diameter of the rotary decoration 3210. It can be conspicuous from the player side, can strongly attract the interest of the player to the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210, and can be provided with other members in front of or behind the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210. By performing the effect using the other members provided, it is possible to show a variety of effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B, which is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side, is a gate as a privilege granting portion provided in the game area 5a. When the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 that passes through the section 2003 or serves as the privilege giving section are accepted, a predetermined privilege (for example, a normal lottery in which the player is advantageous) Results and special lottery result lottery, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are given, so that the player is allowed to drive the game ball B aiming at the privilege giving unit such as the gate unit 2003. You can play games.

  In this game area 5a, an upstream space portion 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and on the downstream side of the upstream space portion 2511. Since the gaming ball B circulates through a different route depending on the driving strength and the distribution passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate portion 2003 is provided, the first distribution forming the distribution passage group 2520. The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 on the downstream side is different for each of the passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the game ball B is at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 where the player has the driving strength that the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 and the probability of the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is high. The driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with the driving strength of entering. A change can be imparted, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the desired entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, a stopper 1006 projects inward from the periphery of the game area 5a near the right end of the upstream space 2511, and an inlet for the first flow passage 2521 is provided in the vicinity of the stopper 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the hitting portion 1006 (for example, a driving strength that is equal to or higher than a specific value at which the game ball B flows (rolls) along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 will enter the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 near the stopper 1006 in the circulation passage group 2520 with a high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first distribution passage 2521, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second distribution passage 2522, strength at which the abutment portion 1006 is not contacted. It suffices to hit the game ball B with, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Then, the probability that the game ball B, which has flowed through the first circulation passage 2521 having an entrance near the stopper 1006, passes through the gate section 2003 on the downstream side, and the privilege is also given. Since the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a, the driving strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the player does not enter the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521. As a result, a change can be given to the driving operation of the game ball B, the player can be prevented from getting tired, and a game aiming at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522 to the player. It is possible to entertain the operation of hitting the ball B, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is driven, the distribution passage group 2520 (first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2521 that are distributed in different routes depending on the driving strength of the game ball B). The distribution passage 2522) can be surely embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the desired entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522, It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a with a driving strength to enter the space portion 2511 and a desired driving strength to enter the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B can be further increased, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of interest.

  Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other, and thus the game ball B has a slight difference in the driving strength of the game ball B. Since the entrances of the distribution passages through which the players enter are likely to be different, it is possible to increase the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B by the player, and entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B, thereby reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are aggregated to some extent, so that the inside of the game area 5a or the center is formed. The frame of the accessory 2500 can be relatively widened, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area 5a and the effect in the frame of the center accessory 2500, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, the distribution passage group 2520 is constituted by the two distribution passages of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three It may be configured by one distribution passage.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 with a high probability by the contact with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, the game ball B entering the attacker right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker lower right passage 2426 with a high probability.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the second back production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the one that revolves in the same direction as the direction in which the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 rotate is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be revolved in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 do not move to the appearance position regardless of whether there is a defect. Although the decoration image 3390 is displayed when the effect using is displayed, the invention is not limited to this, and when there is no defect in them, the effect image without the decoration image 3390 is displayed. The decorative image 3390 may be displayed only when a defect occurs in them.

  In the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven by a 2-2 phase excitation method, and high torque can be generated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are stepping motors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a DC motor having a large starting torque may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is used. Although the drive motors such as the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 have been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a solenoid or a rotary solenoid. .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the door frame sub based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. The display unit 185 and the effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the effect display device 1600 are provided. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is a main control which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU 1310a, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids For displaying the circuit, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error display, and the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 And a base monitor 1310h. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  In the main control MPU 1310a, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. This once-added ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the content of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the content of the register changes to something inconsistent, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly determined to have been affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit that resets. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism in which it cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described below, and again executes the main control side power-on process described below. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main-control internal RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main-control internal RAM are completely erased ( It will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in hardware") that updates the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state, among the various random numbers related to the game, by hardware. Random number circuit ") is built in. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and the initial value is generated. The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and within a predetermined numerical range. When all the values in 1 are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, the first start port sensor 2101, and the second start detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. Mouth sensor 2402, general winning a prize sensor 2401 which detects the game ball B which is received in general winning a prize 2001 and general winning a prize sensor 3001, gate sensor 2506 which detects the game ball B which passes gate section 2003, big winning a prize 2005 The special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first winning opening sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received in the first receiving opening 2007 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, the big winning prize A second inlet port sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second inlet port 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403, A magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a, and an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5 to collect. The detection signal from the out-mouth sensor 3032, etc. for detecting the game ball B to be played is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signal from the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. A signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in a payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in a main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310. The function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each of the prescribed areas, the function as an error release switch for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and the set value It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signals from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 include a signal (RAM clear signal) for notifying RAM clear as a RAM clear switch and a signal (RAM clear signal) for notifying that the error has been canceled as an error cancel switch. Although there is an error release signal) and a signal (setting value selection switching signal) for transmitting selection switching of the setting value as a setting switching button, the main control board 1310 sets the RAM clear signal and the setting which are important signals for itself. While monitoring the input with the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error release signal which is the control target of the payout control board 633 which is not related to itself.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, a payout control input circuit and a payout control output described later). When it is input to the main control board 1310 as it is without passing through the circuit), it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

  The respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 2101 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and go through the main control input circuit. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a general winning opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404, a second receiving port sensor 2405, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out opening sensor 3032. The respective detection signals from are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs the start opening solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid. 2414, each drive signal is output through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal pattern display, the normal Hold indicator, the first special symbol display, the first special reserved number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second special reserved number indicator, the round indicator, etc., each drive signal, other substrate Output directly without intervention. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various kinds of information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various kinds of information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or a game ball B from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal that allows the launch of the game ball B, the launch control signal that outputs the game ball B to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the firing permission signal that informs that the firing is permitted is set to the firing permission logic when the firing is permitted, while the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) is the reverse of the firing permission logic when the firing is not permitted. Is set to. The logic of the launch permission signal is, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power restoration), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. Up to this point, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic is set.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the second starting opening sensor 2402. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2101, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  Further, when an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (“big hit” game, etc.) occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B is frequently entered. Therefore, the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403. B is also frequently detected. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. Further, since a large amount of the game balls B shot in the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out port sensor 3032 is also possible. It happens frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the out-port sensor 3032. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 use mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. It should be noted that a proximity switch having high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral controller 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “main control side”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. "Capacitor"). With this main control side capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The various information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a as a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

  Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Discharge control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the firing that controls the ball feed by the ball feeding solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation unit having a plurality of functions are provided. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM (built-in main control built in the main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310). (RAM) function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information respectively stored in a predetermined area, a function as an error cancel switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and setting It also has the function of a setting switch button for selecting and switching values.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is a RAM clear determination period after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (main control side power-on process described later by the main control MPU 1310a after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. From the start of the process until the determination of step S14 in the same process is performed).

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed (when the main control MPU 1310a has passed the RAM clear determination period and the main control side power supply to be described later is turned on. In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311. To the initial position (that is, the period until it is determined that the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)). There is.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error release switch is a valid period after the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have elapsed. In the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period, even if a signal notifying that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is input to the payout control unit 633a (payout control MPU described later), it is invalidated. Has been done.

  The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, during this setting switch valid period, the main control MPU 1310a has the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process described later after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. An interrupt enable setting for permitting the start of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed because the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 1311a continues to monitor the rotational position of the setting key cylinder. (Step S52 in the main control side power-on process) cannot be performed, and the injustice detection process of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching valid period is the fraud detection impossible period.

  During this setting switching valid period, that is, the period in which the fraudulent activity cannot be detected, a fraudulent person may make some unauthorized alteration to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a in order to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure a space in which the state can be opened, the main body frame 4 has to be opened largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, during the setting switching valid period, that is, the fraud detection undetectable period, the main body frame 4 is largely opened (close to about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2, so that the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311a. If any unauthorized modification is attempted, the unauthorized activity becomes extremely conspicuous in the game hall, and thus such unauthorized activity countermeasures can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 633 is a micro in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. Issue control MPU which is a processor, issue control I / O port as an I / O device, external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the issue control MPU is operating normally, and issue A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input.

  In the payout control MPU, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in payout control”) for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also built in.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various kinds of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, and the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to the signal indicating that the pressing operation unit has been operated via the payout control I / O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-cutting detection sensor 574, and the payout. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal notifying that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  The detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Is entered.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are paid out via the payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. Entered in. In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game ball B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, or outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display, A command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is serially transmitted to the main control board 1310, or the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "the ball is out" (specifically, the ball is cut off). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the player is informed that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "the ball is a ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, "Count It is an "itch error" (specifically, there is a problem in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154) and the number "7" is displayed. Sometimes, it informs that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, "CR" is not displayed. Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and is sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the emission control unit 633b includes an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and an oscillation circuit to this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 110, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is in contact with the handle 111, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 which notifies the launch of the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 111 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 in which the palm or finger touches the handle 111 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are connected based on the CR connection signal. If the firing condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the firing condition 3 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit cannot output the drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and cannot fire the game ball B.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 111. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

  The payout control board 633 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “payout control side” as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. "Capacitor"). The pay-out control side capacitor allows the pay-out control MPU to store various information in the pay-out control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at power-on is input to the payout control MPU. It is completely erased from the control internal RAM. The signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with the firing control section 633b for performing the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. You may comprise. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not exist.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the door frame effect based on the peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310 and the control data from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

[6-3a. Peripheral controller]
Although not shown in detail, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is sent from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700. Game board side drive data for transmitting to each decoration board of the game board 5 or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 for the game board decoration drive board serial It is transmitted from the I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or provided on the door frame 3. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the first elevating and lowering drive motor 175b, the second elevating and lowering drive motor 182, etc., and a lighting signal, a blinking signal or the like to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 or Door side light emission data composed of a door side light emission data for outputting a gradation lighting signal is transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port, or a door frame effect display device. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the 152 or the effect display device 1600 to the effect display control unit 1512 from the display control unit serial I / O port, or extracting sound information from the sound ROM. And outputs a control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC.

  A plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 of the second back rendering unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring ornament 3311, a lower vertical ring ornament 3331, and a left horizontal ring ornament 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotational position, the moving position, and the like of the body 3351, the right lateral ring decoration 3371, and the like are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720.

  A detection signal from the press detection sensor 165 of the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided in the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 operates. Watching for activity.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs various information from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 provided in the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sound such as music and sound effects that match the performance is output. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4ch) as sound information. .1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown). Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5 are different from the display command. Input / output ports are used, and in the present embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

  The panel drive board 1720 sends a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command to the LEDs (LED 121 a, LED 122 a, LED 138 a, LED 153 c, LED 159 a, lattice decoration LED 195) of each decoration board provided on the door frame 3. , LED 213a, upper outer LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.), and the game board 5 is provided with a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. It also outputs to the LED of each decorative board.

  Further, the panel drive board 1720 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the first elevator drive motor 175b and the second elevator drive motor 182 provided on the door frame 3 and each drive provided on the game board 5. Output to a motor, etc.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a door frame effect display device 152, and effect display. A VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls display of the device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of a screen displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and an image ROM that is stored in this image ROM. An image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral controller 1511 to display the door frame effect display device 152. Drawing control of the effect display device 1600 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives the execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In this non-resident area transfer data, the screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in various orders. It is prescribed.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. Further, when the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs a running signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer system is adopted for VDP. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction is held in the line buffer, and the drawing for one line held in this line buffer is performed. This is a method of outputting data to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and the door frame effect display device 152 and effect display are displayed. This will affect the speed with which the device 1600 is rendered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device are set such that these sprites are set in a position on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “the order of sprite superposition”). It is drawn in 1600.

  The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, one sprite character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged horizontally 2 x vertically 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 sequentially perform main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front, and intersect with the one direction. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in the direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, the front side of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. When viewed from the left, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly when the drawing data for the next line is input, the next line. Based on the drawing data of the minute, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels of one line as main scanning from left to right when viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Next, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board that is treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front surface side, and the back surface is mounted. It is necessary to solder on the solder side which is the side. However, as described above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion gaming machines, but other general electric equipment manufacturers can downsize them. A surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production of lead-type electronic components may be reduced, resulting in discontinuation of production. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component that can be configured as an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on the mounting surface of a substrate that is treated as a main substrate.

  However, when configured as this lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component is larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and a protruding portion is present in part or more thereof. It may be formed into a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead type electronic component having such an outer shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a substrate that is treated as a main substrate, it may be difficult to place the lead type electronic component on the substrate due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. Therefore, it is difficult to configure the SMD type electronic component as the lead type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, of lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, SMD-type electronic components are used as a main substrate in a limited manner. It may be allowed to be mounted on the mounting surface.

  Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. FIG. 112 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of the area where the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and a view of the enlarged view seen from the right side of the main control board (b). FIG. 113 is a schematic view (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which lead-type electronic components are replaced with SMD-type electronic components in a predetermined area. FIG. 114 is a schematic view (b) showing a front surface (mounting surface) and a back surface (solder surface) of a board in which electronic devices of a type are integrated and miniaturized, and FIG. 114 is a back surface of the main control board (enlarged view of FIG. FIG. 115 is a view showing a solder surface), and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit. It should be noted that, in FIGS. 112 and 114, various electronic components other than the electronic components necessary for the description are omitted for the sake of easy understanding of the drawings.

  The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is an alternative having the same function as a lead type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type). Is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits constituting the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input, and the main control is performed by some unauthorized means. When it is dropped from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 always determines that none of the various sensors that informs the entry of the game ball is an entry ball, and the fraudulent approach of the magnet or the improper vibration. It is designed to always discriminate that a fraudulent act is being carried out for something that conveys a fraudulent act. A plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead type electronic components.

  In the present embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resist and are solidly coated except for various land patterns. Has been done.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 112A and 112B, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30”). And a lead type high frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor MC30”) capable of removing a noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself in the vicinity of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. Note that the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted from FIG. 112 (a) for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 has six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits integrated and accommodated in one SMD package. In this embodiment, an SOP (Small) having 14 pins is used as the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.
Outline Package) is adopted (hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, seven leads from two opposite sides of the SMD package body have a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, 1.27 mm in the present embodiment) and bend outward. Of the leads and the main control board 1310 after being mounted on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead. A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead, and is 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). Is. In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body has a width dimension of 5.3 mm, a length dimension of 10.8 mm, and a height dimension of 1.5 mm. Including the length of the protruding lead, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 has 7.8 mm.

  Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as a solder surface in order to mount the lead type electronic component on the main control board 1310. It is described as "the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310" (hereinafter the same).

  In the capacitor MC30, two leads projecting from the main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape have a distance dimension between leads (so-called “lead pitch”, 5 mm in the present embodiment) and project in a straight line parallel to the outside. Are formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads by penetrating the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. Of the ring-shaped land pattern (also referred to as a through hole; the same applies hereinafter) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. On the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 after the two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern. A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder side) 1310Y of the two leads and the main control board 1310 which protrudes from the ring-shaped land pattern are soldered, respectively. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1. 3 mm).

  The surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and other areas other than areas where various land patterns are formed as ground (GND). In addition to being formed as a so-called solid earth (substrate ground), the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 is also a region where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. It is formed as a so-called solid earth (substrate ground) in which the other area except for is the ground (GND). The solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same as those of the main control board 1310. A plurality of through holes (both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310) that are formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) (copper plated) The same ground (GND). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. In addition, in the through hole, a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , Which are electrically connected to each other to form the same ground (GND), and which are used to route various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. There are also multiple.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 112A, a region MSLKMIC30 indicating a position (including the designation of the direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white in silk printing. A solid line (or a black solid line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the lower left side near the region MSLKMIC30. Specifically, in the area MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the first terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is located on the lower left side and the seventh terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is the horizontal direction in FIG. 112 (a). It is instructed to arrange the lead serving as the (GND) terminal on the lower right side, the lead serving as the 8th terminal on the upper right side, and the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) on the upper left side. .

  The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which are the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals, are electrically connected to the respective wiring patterns for transmitting the corresponding control signals. The rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 serves as a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The rectangular land pattern that is electrically connected and corresponds to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that supplies power.

  On the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, a manufacturing company name (including an abbreviation and a symbol, for example, "ABC") and a product number (a number published in a catalog, for example, "74XXYYZZ") are engraved. Or, it is printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small, the surface area of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, and thus prevents the main control board 1310 from a person who makes an unauthorized modification to obtain an unauthorized game ball. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent base body and a transparent base body in which a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation are formed. The vent hole for heat dissipation can discharge the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

  Then, when confirming the product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 (in the state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320) is checked. The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) that are engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when the mounting surface side is viewed through the transparent cover body. Is small and hard to see.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on the right side of the area MSLKMIC 30 in FIG. 112A, and the Schmitt trigger inverter is provided in this information area. Silk so that the product number of the MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is easier to see than the product number (the number listed in the catalog) that is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The print is printed in white (or black). Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number published in the catalog) can be surely visually recognized.

  The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) is used as silk printing so that the size is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferably printed with. As a result, the name of the manufacturer of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (including an abbreviation and a symbol) can be reliably viewed.

  Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 is arranged so as to be arranged in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30. Then, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper right. Specifically, in the region MSLKMC30, one lead is electrically connected to a wiring pattern for supplying power so that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are in the vertical direction in FIG. 112 (a). The ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead are respectively instructed to be inserted into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern.

  The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310.

  Here, the advantage of mounting the SMD type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate treated as the main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, the SMD type electronic component can be downsized as compared with the lead type electronic component. Therefore, the electronic component mounting density when the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate Can be extremely suppressed compared with the electronic component mounting density when the lead type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as this lead type electronic component on the surface (mounting surface) area of the substrate on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic component is small, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted, and from the lead type electronic component to the SMD type electronic component. It is also possible to increase the area between the components replaced by each other (that is, a mounting mode of an electronic component having a large gap on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate depending on the replaced components). As a result, the SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate can be viewed from multiple directions, so that the SMD type electronic components can be tampered with and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate and the SMD type It is possible to confirm the mounting state (soldered state) with the electronic component, the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns to the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, by using the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to contribute to the easiness of discovering the tampering.

  In addition, the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic component is mounted can be increased, and the area between the components in which the lead type electronic component is replaced with the SMD type electronic component is also increased. Therefore, in these areas (surface of the board (mounting surface)), the product number of the SMD type electronic component (the number listed in the catalog) is stamped on the surface of the package body of the SMD type electronic component or It is possible to print in white (or black) as silk printing so that the size is easier to see compared to the size of the printed product number (the number published in the catalog). It is also possible to print the name of the manufacturing company (including abbreviations and symbols) in white (or black) as silk printing together with the number. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the recognizability of the SMD type electronic component.

  When the front surface (mounting surface) of the SMD type electronic component is mounted, the distance between the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, a Schmitt trigger). In the inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the main body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm.), The back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface of the board ( There is a problem in that it is difficult to find such an illegal circuit even if the goto act of forming an illegal circuit in the gap with the mounting surface) is performed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing the formation of any unauthorized circuit between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

  A configuration is adopted in which wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are not arranged at all in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). The area where the control signal is transmitted is not arranged at all in the area that passes through.

  In the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND) and a wiring pattern for supplying power are not arranged at all. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). The wiring pattern that electrically connects to the ground (GND) and the wiring pattern that supplies the power source are not arranged at all in the area that passes through.

  A structure is adopted in which no through holes are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, through holes MTH are arranged in the upper right and upper left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration is adopted in which the through hole MTH is not arranged at all in the region of (mounting surface) (in other words, the region passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). As described above, the through holes MTH are electrically connected by the holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the same ground (GND) can be obtained. In addition to the through hole MTH, a plurality of through holes MTH ′ (not shown) are provided on the main control board 1310 in order to route various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. Although present, such a through hole MTH ′ also passes through a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The area where the through holes MTH 'are not arranged is adopted.

  Of the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to one lead is formed in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. We adopted a configuration that does not pull out the electronic components of. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, a structure is adopted in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is not arranged at all, but is arranged from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  Of the leads of the SMD type electronic component, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to another lead, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component (the mounting surface) The wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal is not arranged in the area (1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. (In other words, a structure is adopted in which the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is not arranged at all, but is arranged from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  By soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern. In this case, the control signal cannot be taken out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112A, the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to land pattern. The configuration is such that the control signal cannot be taken out without going through each wiring pattern electrically connected to. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short circuit circuit or a broken circuit circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Can be difficult. Further, since various wiring patterns to the SMD type electronic parts can be visually observed, it is necessary to give up the intention of a fraudulent person who intends to provide an illegal circuit for the SMD type electronic parts. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on SMD type electronic components.

  Further, by not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and this SMD Control signal to the SMD type electronic parts so that other illegal ICs (SMD type electronic parts) are not mounted between the back surface of the main body of the type electronic parts and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the board. It is possible to prevent the unauthorized use of the control signal to another IC in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component.

  Further, by not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, other illegal ICs (SMD type electronic component) As a type, the control signal can be easily routed between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. You can choose not to be able to choose one.

  Further, among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one lead is formed in a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not drawing out the SMD type electronic component to the outside, the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern drawn out to the outside can be prevented from being illegally used.

  In addition, by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern is interposed. Without removing the control signal, it is impossible to extract the control signal from a part different from each lead of the SMD type electronic component, so that the control signal for transmitting the wiring pattern cannot be illegally used. can do.

  In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead to another lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the surface of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component ( By not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal in the area of (mounting surface), each wiring pattern electrically connected to each lead of the SMD type electronic component can be provided from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging them, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized circuit from being formed around the leads. Among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, unused leads (also referred to as “empty terminals”) are electrically connected to a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to a ground (GND), Alternatively, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern for supplying power, by arranging from above or below the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the empty terminal. You can

  Further, by not arranging through holes at all in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of this SMD type electronic component Prevent the control signal from being taken out through the through hole so that an unauthorized IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. It is possible to prevent other ICs from being improperly fixed (soldered) in the through holes, and control signals from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board can be used as through holes through the through holes. It can be made unavailable as a retrieval.

  Further, by not arranging the wiring pattern electrically connecting to the ground (GND) and the wiring pattern supplying the power in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, , An illegal IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, it can be prevented from being a driving source for other illegal ICs.

[6-4a. Measures for visibility of part number by SMD package]
Next, a configuration will be described in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate that is treated as a main substrate. Since the SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized as described above, the size of the substrate itself can be miniaturized by being collectively mounted. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is visually checked in the state of being housed in the main control board box 1320, a measure for visibility of the product number by the SMD package is taken. Another configuration (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of a product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the second to third embodiments”) will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) (hereinafter referred to as "a configuration of a product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment") is described. The same reference numerals are given to those having the same function as the above), and the setting display 1310g, the base monitor 1310h, and the like described above are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a countermeasure for the visibility of the product number, the lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. Area MSLKMIC30 showing a position (including designation of direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the electronic type electronic component, is arranged as a silk-printed white solid line (or black). Solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMIC30 and at the lower left.

  In addition, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, information is provided on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30. An area is provided, and the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) within this information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to visually recognize as compared with.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113A, the main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component and various lead type connectors Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other alternative electronic components of the SMD type having the same function as the electronic components are integrated into the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. ) 1310x '. The outer dimensions (longitudinal dimension, lateral dimension, and thickness dimension) of the main control board 1310 ′ are the same as the outer dimension of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for the visibility countermeasure of the product number. .

  The main control board 1310 ′ has various electronic parts in the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ on the left side of the center line, with straight lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side thereof as center lines. And a part placement area 1310xa 'for arranging various connectors, and a part number and a part number (printed in the catalog in the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of the center line. And (number) are formed as a parts list area 1310xb ′ which is an information area described like a parts list of electronic parts configured in an arrayed manner.

  Specifically, in the component placement area 1310xa ', a main control MPU 1310a of a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other connectors not shown), and a resistor MR0. To MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other not shown) IC) is mounted. In the component placement area 1310xa ', an unillustrated area showing positions (which may also include designation of orientation) where these various electronic components and various connectors are placed is white solid line (or black solid line) as silk printing. In addition to the above, the corresponding component numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors. Also, various types of connectors are of the lead type, which means that when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is due to routing in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate due to the reaction force of the wiring that acts on the connector.

  In the parts list area 1310xb ', a parts list of electronic parts configured by aligning part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the part arrangement area 1310xa '. Is printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as being consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified.

  In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviation and symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, cautions regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a description such as "The main control board is an important board for security and should be handled with care" may be added.

  In this way, since the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′ can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa ′ and the component list area 1310xb ′, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. It is possible to make it easy to recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the.

  In place of silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, the foil removal area and the foil removal in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described later. Characters may be adopted, or a resist removal area using a double-coated resist and a white resist removal character using a double-coated resist in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. And may be adopted.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a countermeasure for the visibility of the product number, the lead is applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmitt trigger inverter which is a lead type electronic component is mounted. Area MSLKMIC30 showing a position (including designation of direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the electronic type electronic component, is arranged as a silk-printed white solid line (or black). Solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMIC30 and at the lower left.

  In addition, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, information is provided on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30. An area is provided, and the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) within this information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to visually recognize as compared with.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the main control MPU 1310a which is a lead type electronic component and various lead type connectors are provided. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other alternative electronic components of the SMD type having the same function as the electronic components are integrated into the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. ) 1310x '. The size of the main control board 1310 'can be reduced by collectively mounting the SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310 '. The outer dimensions (longitudinal dimension, lateral dimension, and thickness dimension) of the main control board 1310 ′ are the lateral dimensions of the outer dimension of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Only the size is half (the vertical size and the thickness are the same).

  Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x 'of the main control board 1310'. The arrangement of these various electronic components and various connectors is arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa ′ formed in the main control board 1310 ′ in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. (That is, a region (not shown) showing positions (in some cases, designation of orientations) where these various electronic components and various connectors are arranged has the same arrangement as white (or , Black)), and the corresponding part numbers in the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors have the same arrangement and are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Also, various types of connectors are of the lead type, which means that when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is due to routing in the wiring path until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate due to the reaction force of the wiring that acts on the connector.

  On the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, a parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310 ′ in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. A part list of electronic components configured by aligning a part number and a product number (numbers listed in a catalog) printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the area 1310xb ′ is white as silk printing (or , Black). The size of the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) is larger than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 ′. Large (for example, 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as being consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviation and symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Further, in addition to describing information on such parts, cautions regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a description such as "The main control board is an important board for security and should be handled with care" may be added.

  Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, each lead of the above-mentioned ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (described as a part number “MIC1” in the drawing) and a lead type electronic component are provided. Leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5 and MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control board 1310'. The part number and part number (number listed in the catalog) of the main control board 1310 'are included so that they do not overlap with this part (to avoid it), though there is a part (indicated as a bullet in the figure). Is printed in white (or black) as silk screen printing on the parts list area 1310xb ′ formed in FIG.

  In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is used as an area for component placement, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is a part number and a product number (listed in the catalog). And the number) to be used as a part list of electronic parts configured in an aligned manner, so that the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ and the back surface of the main control board 1310 ′ can be used. Since it is possible to distinguish the role from the (solder surface) 1310y ′, it is possible to easily recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′.

  Further, by collectively mounting the SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, it is possible to reduce the size of the main control board 1310 ′. It is possible to determine and reduce the number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting electronic components. As a result, the number of parts where various leads of the lead-type electronic component are projected and soldered to the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ is reduced, and thus the back surface of the main control board 1310 ′ ( The solder surface) 1310y 'can be formed as a flat surface.

  In addition, since the various leads of the lead-type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y 'of the main control board 1310' are soldered, they are reflected by the light of a fluorescent lamp or the like and feel dazzling. Although there may be a problem that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the soldered part, as described above, various leads of the lead type electronic component are projected and soldered on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′ can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of the formed portions, even if light such as a fluorescent lamp hits the flat surface, The parts list of electronic parts, which is configured by arranging the silk-printed part numbers and the product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog), is visible. It does not occur adverse effects of Kunar.

  It should be noted that instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y ′ of the main control board 1310 ′, the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, which will be described later, is used as a measure for the visibility of the product number. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character in the configuration may be adopted, and the resist-removed area and the double-coated area using the double-coated resist in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment may be used. It is also possible to employ a white resist-less character using a resist.

  By the way, general electric machine manufacturers use a multilayer substrate on which various wiring patterns can be formed in each layer. However, the main control board and payout control board used in the gaming machine are two-layer boards ("double-sided board") in which various wiring patterns are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the board in order to enhance security. It is also necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate regardless of whether the electronic components are lead type electronic components or SMD type electronic components. For example, in order to enhance security, it is necessary to mount the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and it is advantageous to mount the lead type electronic component. For those having the above, the lead type electronic component is mounted without using the SMD type electronic component.

  When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are co-located and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or the payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or the payout control board Compared with the case where only the lead type electronic component is mounted, the number of each lead of the lead type electronic component protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board is reduced. This makes it possible to increase the area used as the area for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or the payout control board, and also to obtain the area used as the area for other functions. You can

  Therefore, for example, in the area where the above-mentioned area is increased on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board produced as a mass production machine. It is possible to provide a mounting land pattern etc. forming region 1310ya '(see FIG. 113B) in which various land patterns for mounting can be formed and a pad pattern for taking out a signal can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-production machine, SMD type electronic components are not mounted on various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya ′, so various land in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya ′ are not mounted. The pattern or pad pattern becomes an unmounted pattern, and the mounting land pattern etc. forming area 1310ya 'becomes an empty area.

  When such an unmounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are formed depending on the area where the unmounted pattern is formed. However, when such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, the front surface of the main control board ( The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being restricted by the arrangement of various electronic components and various connectors on the mounting surface) and the routing of various wiring patterns.

  Further, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it is not visible from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the existence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. It is preferable for security.

  Incidentally, a part of such unmounted pattern may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience. For example, the connector (SMD type connector) may be easier to connect to the wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

  In addition, a part of such unmounted pattern may be formed as a lead type electronic component or a lead type connector for convenience. For example, a case where soldering strength is required, such as a connector which is frequently inserted and removed, can be mentioned.

  Next, when the main control board 1310 is viewed in the state where it is housed in the main control board box 1320, the manufacturer's name (also referred to as an abbreviation or symbol is used) due to the small surface area of the package body of the small Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 that is an SMD package. And the product number (the number published in the catalog) is so small that the SMD package is difficult to see. Configuration of measures against visibility of product number by such SMD package "). 114 (a) to 114 (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) (hereinafter referred to as "a configuration of a product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment") is described. The same reference numerals are given to those having the same function.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, the position where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged (the orientation is also specified). The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the area) is printed by a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the lower left near the area MSLKMIC30. Is printed in white (or black).

  In addition, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, information is provided on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30. An area is provided, and the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) within this information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to visually recognize as compared with.

  Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ), The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it is arranged in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. A white solid line (or a black solid line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the visibility countermeasure of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the main control board 1310 has a back surface (solder surface) 1310y, as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC30 ′ indicating a position (including a designation of the direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a white chain line for silk printing. (Alternatively, the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper left side near the area MSLKMIC30 'while being printed by (or a black chain line). This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place the component number near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to print by increasing the size of the component number.

  Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC 30p to be produced, the product number MSLKMIC 30p is a back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and an information area is provided below the area MSLKMIC 30 'and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided in the information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that the size is easier to see compared to the size of the product number (number published in the catalog) printed or engraved on the surface of the package body. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number published in the catalog) can be surely visually recognized.

  The product number MSLKMIC 30p may be the same size as or larger than the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a countermeasure against the product number visibility. May be. Since a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p and arrange it near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to increase the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p for printing.

  The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing together with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In this case, white (or black) is used as silk printing so that the size is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferably printed with. As a result, the name of the manufacturer of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (including an abbreviation and a symbol) can be reliably viewed.

  Moreover, in the configuration of the visibility countermeasure of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30 'indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is a silk-printed white solid line (or black solid line) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. In addition to being printed, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper left side near the area MSLKMC30 '. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for the visibility countermeasure of the product number, the size of the component number is changed. It is necessary to reduce the size of the electronic component and place it near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number is increased. Because it can be printed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, the position where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged (the orientation is also specified). The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the area) is printed by a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the lower left near the area MSLKMIC30. Is printed in white (or black).

  In addition, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, information is provided on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30. An area is provided, and the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) within this information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to visually recognize as compared with.

  Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ), The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it is arranged in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. A white solid line (or a black solid line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the visibility countermeasure of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a main body as shown in FIG. 114 (b). A region MSLKMIC30 'indicating a position (including the designation of the direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a chain line as a foil stripping region. A part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a foil-delineated character in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30 'and in the upper left direction.

  The foil stripping area is a copper foil wiring pattern except for the wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, the wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns in the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed. Is a region formed by removing the copper foil around it. A region MSLKMIC30 'formed as a foil removal region has a cutout portion 1310yMIC30 in a part on the left side in FIG. 114 (b). As a result, the area MSLKMIC30 'becomes a katakana U-shape, and the solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 via the notch 1310yMIC30 and the area MSLKMIC30 in a U-shape. It can be in a state of being electrically connected to the inner region of the '. Since the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the ground (GND) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 corresponding to the mounted area. This is because it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from malfunctioning due to noise (strengthen against noise) by assuring as much as possible.

  The foil stripped character is formed as a stripped character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it. The part number formed as the foil-cut character is formed as the foil-cut character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place the component number near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to increase the size of the component number and form it as a foil-cut character.

  In addition, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC 30p to be produced, the product number MSLKMIC 30p is a back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and an information area is provided below the area MSLKMIC 30 'and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided in the information area. It is formed as a foil-cut character so that the size is easier to visually recognize than the size of the product number (the number published in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. The foil stripped character is formed as a stripped character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number published in the catalog) can be surely visually recognized.

  The product number MSLKMIC 30p formed as a foil-extracted character is the same size as the product number MSLKMIC 30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It can be large or large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. It is necessary to reduce the size of the electronic component and place it near the corresponding electronic component for printing, whereas the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This is because it can be formed as a foil-cut character.

  The manufacturing company name (including an abbreviation and a symbol) may be formed as a foil strip character together with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, it is formed as a foil-cut character so as to be easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Is preferred. As a result, the name of the manufacturer of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (including an abbreviation and a symbol) can be reliably viewed.

  Moreover, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30 'indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (a direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain line as a foil stripping region at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30. A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a foil-cut character in the upper left part near the '. The foil stripping area is a copper foil wiring pattern except for the wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, the wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns in the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed. Is a region formed by removing the copper foil around it. The foil stripped character is formed as a stripped character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it. The part number formed as the foil-cut character is formed as the foil-cut character larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place the component number near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to increase the size of the component number and form it as a foil-cut character.

  In addition, the wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed region and the foil-removed character is electrically insulated from various electronic components, and also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and various wiring patterns. It is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the land pattern and the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310.

[Contrast between the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasures by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, the position where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged (the orientation is also specified). The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the area) is printed by a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the lower left near the area MSLKMIC30. Is printed in white (or black).

  In addition, in the configuration of the measure against the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, information is provided on the right side in the vicinity of the region MSLKMIC30. An area is provided, and the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p is engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog) within this information area. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so as to have a size that is easy to visually recognize as compared with.

  Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ), The area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it is arranged in the vicinity of the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead. A white solid line (or a black solid line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing near the area MSLKMC30 and in the upper right. .

  Further, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as the countermeasure for the visibility of the product number, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The whole is painted solid with green resist except various land patterns.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC30 'indicating a position (including a designation of the direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 is a white color that is twice painted. A white resist using a white resist which is formed by a chain line as a white resist removal area using a resist and has a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in the upper left near the area MSLKMIC30 ' It is formed as a blank character.

  Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. In place of the product number MSLKMIC30p, the product number MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and below the area MSLKMIC30 '. It is formed as a white-resist-extracted character using a double-coated white resist so that the size is easier to visually recognize than the size (number published in the catalog).

  Further, in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30 'indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (a direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 to be formed is a white resist removal region using a double-coated white resist. And a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 near the region MSLKMC30 ′ in the vicinity of the area MSLKMC30 ′ is formed as a white resist-free character using a double-coated white resist.

  Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with the white resist as the first time of the white resist with the double coating (that is, with the white resist with the double coating). For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is located at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 to be printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 as the second time of the twice-coated white resist. , The region MSLKMIC30 ′ indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is located near the region MSLKMIC30 ′ in the upper left direction. The part number corresponding to is masked as a white resist removal character, and an information area is provided in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 'and below the area MSLKMIC30p, and the product number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is used as a white resist removal character. A region indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (a direction is not designated because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The MSLKMC 30 'is masked in a chain line shape as a white resist removal region, and a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as a white resist removal character in the vicinity of the region MSLKMC 30' and in the upper left.

  In the masked state as described above, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 is covered with a white resist by solid-painting a white resist except various land patterns. That is, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a countermeasure for the visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solid-coated with a white resist except various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except various land patterns.

  As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and the area MSLKMIC30 ′ indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white. Part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a resist removal area with a chain line, and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist removal character, and is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number listed in the catalog). MSLKMIC30p has white resist Area MSLKMC30 'formed by arranging the capacitor MC30 and indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist-less character. To be done. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (the number published in the catalog) can be surely visually recognized.

  When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a white resist removal character, it is formed to be larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place the component number near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white resist-extracted characters.

  When the part number MSLKMIC 30p is formed as a white resist removal character, the size of the part number MSLKMIC 30p to be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment as a measure against the part number visibility. And may be larger. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and therefore the size of the product number MSLKMIC 30p is set in the configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It is necessary to reduce the size of the electronic component and place it near the corresponding electronic component for printing, whereas the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This is because it can be formed as a character without white resist.

  The manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as the white resist removal character together with the product number (the number published in the catalog). In this case, it is formed as a white-resist-extracted character so as to have a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) that is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is preferable. As a result, the name of the manufacturer of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (including an abbreviation and a symbol) can be reliably viewed.

  When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as a white resist removal character, it is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so that it is necessary to reduce the size of the component number and place the component number near the corresponding electronic component for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white resist-extracted characters.

  In the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a countermeasure for the visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solid-coated with a white resist except various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solid-painted with a green resist except various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is white resist and various lands. You may comprise so that it may be painted solid except a pattern. In this case, the area indicating the position (in some cases, the designation of the orientation) of the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is silk-printed and the surface (mounting) of the main control board 1310 is mounted. Printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, gray, etc. on the surface), and the component numbers corresponding to various electronic components are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as dark green, black, gray, etc. Printed as dark text. With this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the other boards are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns, so that they are mainly applied to these other boards. The control board 1310 can have a characteristic that it can be emphasized. Further, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, a part number of an SMD type electronic component (manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to this part number) is also described. ) May be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by silk printing.

  The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a white resist except various land patterns. It is also possible to print by silk printing using a resist of a different color that is twice applied, in which the resist colors of the second (base) and the second resist are different. As the first time (base), after the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed by silk printing in white except various land patterns, subsequently, on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. As a second time, the main control board 1310 is masked with a region indicating positions (in some cases, including designation of orientations) of the various electronic components to be mounted, and component numbers corresponding to the various electronic components. The entire surface (mounting surface) may be printed by silk printing in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red except for various land patterns. Even with this configuration, since the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the other substrate are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns, the other substrate is mainly coated. The control board 1310 can have a characteristic that it can be emphasized. Further, it is possible to visually recognize a region indicating a position where various electronic components are arranged (which may also include designation of orientation) and a component number corresponding to each electronic component.

  Further, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment as a countermeasure for the visibility of the product number, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a white resist except various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solid-painted with a green resist except various land patterns, but the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is white resist and various lands. You may comprise so that it may be painted solid except a pattern. In this case, an area indicating the position (in some cases, including the designation of the orientation) of the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is set on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The white resist removal area is formed by a solid line, and the component numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Further, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (manufacturing company name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to this product number) is also the main. It may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 as characters without white resist.

[6-4b. Measures to prevent modification of SMD type electronic components]
Next, a miniaturized electronic component called SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, so that the electronic component is replaced with an unauthorized electronic component to obtain an unauthorized gaming ball. Explain how to prevent actions.

  As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension as the size of the SMD package body. Has a height dimension of 10.8 mm and a height dimension of 1.5 mm, and including the lengths of the leads protruding from two sides of the SMD package body, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 has a width dimension of 7.8 mm.

  Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from a person who obtains an illegal game ball by making an illegal modification, and a main heat dissipation board is provided. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body having a plurality of pores and a transparent base body. As shown in FIG. 115, in the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimp portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with the one-way screw of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 can be opened. Needs to destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

  However, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire on the main control substrate box 1320, and the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegal. If the electronic parts are exchanged, it is possible that an unauthorized game ball will be obtained by a person who makes such unauthorized modifications.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in the present embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. Adopted the configuration. As a result, even if the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to the main control-board box 1320 by some illegal means such as a thin wire, the SMD-type Schmitt is removed. The trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be taken out from the main control board box 1320 via the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

  As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits forming the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors are input, and is omitted from the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means. Then, the main control MPU 1310a always determines that, out of various sensors, that the game ball has entered the ball is not entered, and that the illegality is always detected for those that report an illegal act such as approach of a magnet or illegal vibration. It is designed to determine that fraudulent activity is being performed. As a result, when the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of the SMD type is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is missing, it is possible for a person who makes an unauthorized modification to obtain a state without a ball. Unauthorized game balls will not be acquired by maintaining the state, and the fact that unauthorized modification has been made by notification of injustice is reported to the hall computer in the game card (hall) and the game is played. You can also tell the staff such as the clerk in the hall. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that, out of various sensors, illegal activity such as approach of a magnet or illegal vibration is illegal, the main control MPU 1310a, as described above, releases the firing permission signal. Is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. It becomes a state that cannot be performed at all.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the point which mounts the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component was explained, as another SMD type electronic component, For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320 is provided via the ventilation hole 1301z. It is necessary to make the inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z smaller than the resistance of the SMD type so as not to jump out from the inside to the outside.

  Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is possible to visually check whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Sometimes it is difficult to determine. Further, when the SMD type resistance that has peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 jumps out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation holes 1301z, the inside of the main control board box 1320 is exposed to the lower side. Since the trace of the peeled-off SMD type resistance disappears, it becomes more and more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, for example, when the JIS standard ⅛ watt 2012 type is adopted as the resistance of the SMD type, the length dimension is 2.0 mm and the width dimension is 1.2 mm in this 2012 type. In such a small SMD type resistor, even if a problem occurs that the main control board 1310 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310, The inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller dimension of the length dimension and the width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, the width dimension is 1.2 mm) so as not to jump out to the outside. (Here, for example, 1.0 mm).

  Thereby, even if a small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is surely prevented from jumping out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually recognize the peeled-off small SMD type resistance inside the main control board box 1320. If the main control board box 1320 is shaken in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, A small SMD type resistor that is peeled off collides with the inner wall of the main control substrate box 1320 and the main control substrate 1310 to generate a sound, and this sound gives an opportunity to recognize the peeled down small SMD type resistor. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, when electronic components such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils and LEDs are adopted instead of lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs and other electronic components Makes the inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z smaller than the smallest dimension among them.

  In this way, even if a small SMD type electronic component is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is ensured that the small SMD type electronic parts jump out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation holes 1301z. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that an SMD type electronic component may be peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the deflection of the main control board 1310.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment (including the configuration for the visibility countermeasure of the product number by the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments), the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. However, SMD type electronic components can also be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board that is treated as a main board such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633.

[6-4c. Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the game hall without the approval of the specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for taking out various signals relating to the game. The test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the vertical direction). When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, it is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and on the transparent cover body 1301 facing the testing connector 1310k. While the test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine to be shipped to a game hall, a main control board 1310 is formed. Not mounted on the transparent cover body 1301 and a test harness cover body side opening 1301k is formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It is made as to not. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass production machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing organization, the test connector 1310k is provided on the rear surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya. '(See FIG. 113 (b)), and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is mounted on the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. The configuration to form is adopted. Thereby, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific test organization, and also when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine to be shipped to a game hall, the surface of the main control board 1310. Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted is not formed as an empty area on the (mounting surface), another SMD type electronic component can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

  With this configuration, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution. Then, a test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in a specific test institution is provided with a test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in a transparent base body 1302 through a main control board. It is electrically connected to the test connector 1310k mounted on the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya 'on the back surface (solder surface) of the 1310. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness can be sandwiched and held (held) by the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200. Therefore, the test harness is directed to the test connector 1310k. When a load is applied in a direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electric connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations of a movable body that is operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being able to prevent this, it is possible to prevent the test harness from which various important signals relating to the game are taken out in the test of the pachinko machine 1 from being twisted and broken.

  In this embodiment, as the test connector 1310k, a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the vertical direction). The right angle SMD type connector (type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) The side wall (transparent cover body 1301) of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the control board near any one of the left side, the lower side, the right side, and the upper side. The test harness to the test connector 1310k on the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall of the side wall facing the test connector 1310k). An arrangement for forming a test harness cover side opening 1301k may be employed for applying Ri. Even if configured in this way, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine tested in a specific test organization, and when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass production machine shipped to a game hall, Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310, another SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. In addition, as a preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 in a specific test organization, the test operator first performs a specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 73. The test harness electrically connected to the test device installed in the engine is attached to the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board through the test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the mounted test connector 1310k.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a test firing test terminal (test connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a testing device in a specific testing organization is connected is provided in a gaming control device (gaming control board). (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-128621 (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, a test connector is mounted on the surface of the gaming control board when tested in a specific testing organization, whereas when it is used in a gaming hall. Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and becomes an empty area, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased due to this empty area.

  Further, conventionally, a game machine for mounting a surface mount type electronic component on a substrate has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, in the surface mount type electronic parts in the gaming machine described in this document, although the identifier such as the product number corresponding to the surface mount type electronic parts may be attached, the size of the surface mount type electronic parts is large. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the identifier due to its small size.

  Further, conventionally, a game machine for mounting a surface mount type electronic component on a substrate has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount type electronic parts in the gaming machine described in this document are mounted on the game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface mount type electronic parts are to be replaced by some illegal means. There is a risk that an illegal game ball may be acquired by peeling it off from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a tact switch or the like is provided on a substrate, which allows a user to feel the switch being turned on or off by operating the pressing operation section with a click feeling at the time of operation (for example, Open 2017-023427 (paragraph [0071], and FIG. 70)). By the way, the electronic components such as the tact switch described in this document are of lead type in which the respective leads are inserted into the through holes provided in the substrate from the front surface to the rear surface of the substrate and soldered on the rear surface side of the substrate. It is an electronic component. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a substrate such as a game control substrate that controls the progress of a game, when the lead-type electronic component is operated and the substrate bends, the deflection causes the substrate There is a risk that the soldered part of the other electronic component mounted on will be peeled off and an electrical problem may occur.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back surface of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to [0034], and FIG. 3)). By the way, since the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to give a profit to the player, it is housed in a board case having a sealing structure, and it is Preventive measures are required.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine for mounting a surface mount component on a board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, in the case where the surface mount component in the gaming machine described in this document is mounted on the game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, within the surface area of the game control board on which the surface mount component is mounted. When the wiring pattern is routed around, the distance between the back surface of the surface mount component and the surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is altered by some unauthorized means, it will be difficult to see and the surface mount type electronic component There is a problem that it is impossible to prevent cheating against.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a main control board for controlling a game is housed in a case and arranged on the back side (for example, JP-A-2016-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph). [0031] and FIG. 2) By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, since the main control board is an important one for controlling the game, it is housed in a case and sealed as a crime prevention measure. It is placed on the back side of the, and it is required to enhance the crime prevention capability for important things in crime prevention.

[6-5. Measures against electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the metal housing of the setting key switch]
Next, a countermeasure for electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the metal casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 and a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 in which the main control board box 1320 is the game board 5 It is a figure (c) which shows a lower part of left side view of the game board 5 in the state attached to.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a accommodates the setting key cylinder, into which the setting key is inserted and rotated, in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length, as described above. As described above, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged in substantially the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of metal is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. ing.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a has a circuit which can take out (output) as a signal whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON state or the OFF state. The signal is taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals provided in the cylinder and protruding from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. Further, as described above, from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a, the 90 ° rotation angle is set with the pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are formed which have a predetermined length and project therefrom.

  The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is provided on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions as shown in FIGS. Of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the respective center lines of the two intersect with each other, the pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a. A pair of long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 facing each other and having a long slot along the up-down direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the slot can be inserted are formed on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposing slots that can pass through a pair of opposing lead terminals that project from the rear surface of the configuration key cylinder of the configuration key switch 1311a. Horu SLTH1, SLTH2 are formed on the long through hole SLH1, SLH2 90 degree rotation angle has a setting change substrate 1311 on vertical center line of a pair of opposed.

  Also, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3 through which various pin terminals (first pin terminal to third pin terminal) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are inserted are formed.

  Of these three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, the upper through hole SSTH1 into which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is a pair of protruding through the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the upper through hole SLTH1 of the pair of opposed through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 which can pass through the opposing lead terminals. The lower through hole SSTH3 into which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted can insert a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A pair of opposing stripes The wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the lower through hole SLTH2 of the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, and the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. The inner through hole SSTH2 through which is inserted is electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311.

  On the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in the copper plane, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 for the setting key switch 1311a are entirely surrounded and the setting change board 1311 is provided. A foil stripping region SINSx having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is formed. Due to the foil removal region SINSx, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 are electrically connected to a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is in an insulated state. In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane is formed by removing a copper foil except the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A foil removal area is also formed, and the foil removal area electrically insulates the solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Has become.

  On the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, in the copper plane, at a position corresponding to the foil removal area SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, the setting change board 1311 is long in the left-right direction. In addition to having a rectangular shape, a foil-removed foil-removed region SINSy formed by removing a copper foil is formed except for the periphery of the above-mentioned wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2. The foil removal region SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 up to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311. Due to the foil removal region SINSy, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, and the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 are the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is in a state of being electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed in.

  Through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. These four through holes STH are solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 and solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. ) And are electrically connected to each other to form the same ground (GND).

  The entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are solidly coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. The surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 has a color different from the predetermined color of the resist on the resist of the predetermined color, and the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged is silk-printed. The area SSLKSW1 showing the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is printed with a solid line and is silk-printed as the area SSLKSW1 showing the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged with a color different from the predetermined color of the resist for silk printing. Printed with solid lines of the same color. The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged in the area SSLKSW1 and mounted (soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311). In this state, the boundary line (circular solid line) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the boundary line (circular solid line) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping. As for the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, similarly to the area SSLKSW1, even if this connector SMCN is mounted, the boundary line (solid U-shaped line) of the area SSLKCN1 does not overlap with the connector SMCN. It is like this.

  In the area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged, a reference mark SSTD indicating the rotational position (initial position) of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311a is OFF is printed. ing. This reference mark SSTD prevents the operator of the manufacturer from flipping the setting key switch 1311a upside down (incorrectly) when mounting the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. I have to. When the reference mark SSTD is not printed, for example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down and soldered (incorrectly), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and turned off. When a signal indicating which of the two states is on is taken out as a signal, the content of the signal is reversed between the state where the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state where it is OFF.

  Here, the reason why the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 will be described. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a accommodates the setting key cylinder, into which the setting key is inserted and rotated, in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length, as described above. As described above, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged in substantially the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key. As described above, the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of metal is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. ing. Further, in the state where the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing, as described above, the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are It is in an electrically connected state. In other words, a state in which the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder that can be a member for electromagnetic wave noise to enter the setting change board 1311 is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Has become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to thereby set the metal of the setting key switch 1311a. Made of a cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and having a pair of opposed long and thin holes along the up-down direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposed mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface can be inserted. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 can be electrically insulated from the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. There is. In other words, in the present embodiment, the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed via the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces projecting from the rear surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered. Even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder, this electromagnetic wave noise is generated on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is made of metal by blocking the invasion of the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 through the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy formed in It is damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder itself. That is, in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic noise from the front surface of the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder is prevented from entering the setting change substrate 1311 to the substrate ground by the foil stripping regions SINSx and SINSy. can do. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of electromagnetic noise from the front surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder on the setting change substrate 1311 side, and therefore the electromagnetic noise It is possible to reliably prevent the intrusion of the game from proceeding to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game through the setting change board 1311, and transmitting the board ground (ground). It does not change the line. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  It should be noted that the setting key cylinder is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder so that the setting key cylinder has a metallic (or rectangular) shape. ) The structure that is rotatable with respect to the housing is adopted, and the structure in which the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected and insulated from each other is also adopted. Good. Even with such a configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, the electromagnetic wave noise is generated by the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. ) Is prevented from entering the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 via the foil removing regions SINSx and SINSy. It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. That is, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing from entering the setting change substrate 1311 to the substrate ground by the foil stripping regions SINSx and SINSy. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing on the side of the setting change board 1311, so that the electromagnetic wave noise can enter through the setting change board 1311. The progress of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the board, can be surely stopped from proceeding to the board ground, and the ground line transmitting the board ground (ground) is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  A state in which electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder housed in the setting key switch 1311a. Since this setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting values that have been set, in addition to changing the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. It is limited to 2-3 people. Therefore, when confirming the setting value or changing the setting value, first, an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and then presses the setting key. The person who possesses it will access the setting key switch 1311a. That is, the person who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a may be different.

  Then, an attendant such as a clerk in a game hall that opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 inserts a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotates to charge itself. Electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the frame earth via the door frame metal earth wire. It is electrically connected to the substrate 559. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground wire. In other words, an attendant such as a clerk in a game hall that opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 charges itself and electrostatically discharges it when inserting a regular metal key into the key hole 128 of the cylinder lock 127. By transmitting the electromagnetic wave noise to the cylinder lock 127 through a regular metal key, the door lock reinforcing unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground board 559, the island equipment ground wire, and It can be removed from the pachinko machine 1 by being transmitted to the ground of the island facility in the game hall. On the other hand, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a receives the electromagnetic noise caused by the fact that the cylinder lock 127 is not touched and is electrostatically discharged to the setting key switch 1311a through the regular metal key. It will be transmitted to 1311a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. The electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic charging by the person who performs the electrostatic discharge can be attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or the setting key cylinder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise caused by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from being charged and electrostatically discharged from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311.

  As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with various decorative parts, and when electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wire (not shown), the door frame metal It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 through the ground wire, and then transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground line and is removed from the pachinko machine 1. The various decorative portions are for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and are arranged substantially over the entire door frame 3, so that a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is aware of the door frame 3 when accessing. If you touch it without touching it, you will touch various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3, and electromagnetic noise due to being charged and electrostatically discharged to yourself will eventually be transmitted to the ground of the island facility in the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1. It is supposed to be done.

  In the present embodiment, the foil-removed areas SINSx, SINSy of the setting-change board 1311 are formed on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting-removal board 1311. In addition, a long length along the up-down direction of the setting change board 1311 into which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Although a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having a hole shape are formed, one of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 is connected to the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 and the resistor through a resistor. It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface). , Long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically connected to solid earths (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 via corresponding resistors. It may be configured to. In this way, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic charging of a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a and electrostatic discharge of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted through the metal tubular (or rectangular) casing or the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. By transmitting it to a resistor, it can be attenuated by this resistor. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise caused by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from being charged and electrostatically discharged from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311.

  In the present embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad capable of removing electromagnetic noise may be provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the door frame 3, or when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is removed. Of the main body frame 4 on which the main frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 are arranged, and the left side of the main body frame 4 in a vertical direction in front view is opposite to the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4. The right side in the up-down direction when viewed from the front may be provided in the open side portion of the main body frame 4. Also, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in multiple rows in the back of the island facility of the game hall, when the main frame 4 of the one pachinko machine 1 is released from the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 faces the one pachinko machine 1 in the back. Behind the other pachinko machine 1 which is marked, the staff such as a clerk in the game hall can reach. For some reason, a clerk such as a clerk at the gaming hall opens the main frame 4 of the one pachinko machine 1 from the outer frame 2, and then the other pachinko machine 1 that is opposite to the one pachinko machine 1 You may also access the side. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge by charging a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall. Therefore, as an accessible portion of the clerk in the game hall, for example, an antistatic pad is used. It may be provided on the back surface side of the back cover 640, may be provided on the back surface side of the interface board cover 636, may be provided on the back surface side of the cover body of the payout control board box 632, or the back surface of the payout device 580. It may be provided on the side.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 5 may be formed of a conductive resin. Since the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, the main body frame base unit 500 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected. . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected to the above-described frame earth substrate 559 via a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). As a result, an employee such as a store clerk in the game hall or a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is, for example, on the main body frame base unit 500 on the open side of the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. Since the left hand is placed to support the body and the right hand can be extended to the rear side of the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, when the left hand is placed on the main body frame base unit 500, it is charged and static electricity When electromagnetic noise caused by discharging is transmitted to the main frame base unit 500 and then to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 through the door frame metal ground wire, and from the frame ground substrate 559 to the island facility ground. It is transmitted to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the line and removed from the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 as described above, and this metal door frame reinforcing unit is the door frame metal ground. It was electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 via a wire, and the frame ground board 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire. The wire is not electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, but is electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply board 630 of the main body frame 4 so that the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 are electrically connected. You may Further, the door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts are not subjected to decorative plating at all, or the entire front and back surfaces are subjected to decorative plating. Some of the various decorative parts have decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces, and are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown). The frame earth board 559 was electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall through the island equipment earth wire, but the door frame metal earth wire was not electrically connected to the frame earth board 559, and the main body frame 4 may be electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board 630 to electrically connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board 630. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and almost no current flows, if an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , And has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the pachinko machine 1. To be done.

  By the way, as described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. As described above, the drive display box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. In a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. 116C, the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is provided. The rear surface is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730.

  This arrangement will be described. The setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with the insertion port for inserting the setting key, as described above. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the same plane as the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not project outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. When a worker mounts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, first, it is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, or Even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, there is a case in which the legs of the worker hit the game board 5 and fall when the game board 5 is temporarily placed during work.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is A configuration is adopted in which the distance dimension is set to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the game board 5 is arranged closer to the front side. As a result, when the worker temporarily puts the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or its surroundings, the legs of the worker hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls down, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 has a distance dimension da to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall due to the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protruding as compared with the control board box 1320, the setting key The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a prevents a collision with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space with the floor of the game hall. It is possible.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting to various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are hung from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the back of the island facility in the game hall, this unconnected wiring provides various boards on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching such light emitting means may cause a short circuit (short circuit) and damage (may cause fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, in many cases, the back cover 640 is bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wiring, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641 so that the game board 5 is Since it is difficult to invade toward the back surface side, it is possible to prevent a short circuit. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is the cover body of the drive board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da to the rear surface, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back surface side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is driven. It cannot be penetrated toward the main control board box 1320 by being blocked by the cover body of the board box 1730, and the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. It can be surely prevented.

  Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change substrate 1311 or the front surface of the setting key cylinder, in the present embodiment, As described above, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is formed. -Shaped (or rectangular-shaped) pair of opposed long through holes having a long hole shape along the up-down direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposed mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface can be inserted. SLH1 and SLH2 are solid earth (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is in a state of being electrically insulated from the land) and the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed via the setting key switch 1311a, so that the game progresses through the setting change board 1311. There is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling, and there is no fluctuation in the ground line that transmits the board ground. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded of non-conductive resin. Further, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover is provided. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other without making contact with each other.

  The setting key switch 1311a used in the above-described embodiment has a predetermined number of tumbler pins arranged in the setting key cylinder to be housed therein, but one having a larger number of tumbler pins may be adopted. By doing so, security can be further improved, and if the product is mass-produced and widely distributed in the market, the unit price can be reduced and the cost can be reduced. As to a case where a setting key switch 1311a ′ for accommodating a setting key cylinder having a larger number of tumbler pins is mounted on the setting change board 1311 as compared with the setting key cylinder accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a, refer to FIG. explain. FIG. 117 is a modification 1 (a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in the state where the main control board box is attached to the game board, and the main control board box is attached to the game board. It is a modification 2 (b) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 117, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 117 (a). , The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ projects from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, and the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ covers the drive board box 1730. It has a distance dimension db with respect to the rear surface and is arranged so as to project to the rear of the game board 5. In order to protect the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ protruding from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, a protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported by the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 and can be opened and closed. It is provided in. A locking projection (not shown) is formed on the protective cover 1304, and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking projection is formed on the cover body 1301 'of the main control board box 1320. When the locking projection of the protective cover 1304 is released from the locking groove of the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, the protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported and the protective cover 1304 is opened from the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 to set the key switch. 1311a 'can be accessed.

  By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320, when the worker temporarily puts the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or its surroundings, the worker does not care. Even if the legs of the game board 5 hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the game hall, the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320 contacts the floor of the game hall. The front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ can prevent a collision with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space with the floor of the game hall.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting to various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are hung from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the back of the island facility in the game hall, this unconnected wiring provides various boards on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching such light emitting means may cause a short circuit (short circuit) and damage (may cause fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, in many cases, the back cover 640 is bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wiring, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641 so that the game board 5 is Since it is difficult to invade toward the back surface side, it is possible to prevent a short circuit. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back surface side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring. Can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ provided on the setting change board 1311. The cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are molded of non-conductive resin.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and main cover The back cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction without making contact with the cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320. They are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

  A board holder 1200 in which the length of the board holder 1200 in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in front view is shortened as compared with the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 described above. If the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the main control board 1300 ', the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' is the main control board as shown in FIG. 117 (b). Although protruding from the cover body 1301 ′ of the box 1320, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ has a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the front surface of the game board 5. It is located on the side. As a result, when the worker temporarily puts the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or its surroundings, the legs of the worker hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls over, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 has a distance dimension dc with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5. Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall due to the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protruding as compared with the control board box 1320, the setting key The front part of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a 'is prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space with the floor of the game hall. Rukoto can. In other words, when the worker temporarily puts the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the legs of the worker hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls over, the front of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200 ′ in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) in the board holder 1200 ′ is prevented so that the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ does not contact the floor of the game hall. The length is adjusted. In addition to the length of the board holder 1200 ′ in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in front view so that the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′ does not come into contact with the floor of the game hall. In addition, a concave portion is formed in the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 to which the substrate holder 1200 ′ is attached, and the concave portion is adjusted by the depth (the length in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front). Alternatively, the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction) may be adjusted by the recess and the substrate holder 1200 ′.

  In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting to various connection terminals of the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are hung from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, there are wirings that are electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wirings that are not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558. In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unconnected wiring and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the back of the island facility in the game hall, this unconnected wiring provides various boards on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. Touching such light emitting means may cause a short circuit (short circuit) and damage (may cause fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, in many cases, the back cover 640 is bent at or near the tip of the unconnected wiring, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is caught by the slit 641 so that the game board 5 is Since it is difficult to invade toward the back surface side, it is possible to prevent a short circuit. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 ′, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 covers the drive board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension dc to the rear surface of the body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back surface side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, The front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a ′, which is blocked by the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and cannot enter the main control board box 1320 and the tip of the unconnected wiring is provided in the setting change board 1311 It is possible to reliably prevent contact with. The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded of non-conductive resin.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover is also provided. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially parallel to each other without making contact with each other.

[7. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to allow the player to rotate the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3. However, it is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role object 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously recorded in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp entrance 2501. .

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view (the left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510) from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, While contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 to move back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N bring the game ball B to the center side in the left-right direction, and the side unit. There is a possibility of being accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 is on the right side (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall 2510) of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. Part 2511), it passes through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and is discharged above the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 to form the gate. After coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the portion 2003, they pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first distribution passage 2521 having an inlet opening near the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first distribution passage 2521. And a second distribution passage 2522 that opens. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of abutting against the stopper 1006, it enters the first circulation passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2511 and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not come into contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than a right hit), the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2511 flows through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 depending on the strength of the driving.

  On the other hand, the game ball B flowing through the first distribution passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted above the gate portion 2003, so that the gate portion 2003 is not so much. It does not pass, but flows on the right side of the gate portion 2003. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is guided to the left side of the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and is high. There is a probability of passing through the gate unit 2003.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is carried out on the main control board 1310. The closed second starting opening 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 60 seconds, which is also commonly called a variable time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 or the sub-function display unit 2450 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

  It should be noted that if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result cannot be started. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is held until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of ordinary lottery results to be held is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the number is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate unit 2003 has a very high probability of the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate unit 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. To the attacker's right passage 2422. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate portion 2003 is a plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. With a very high probability, the vehicle is guided to the left of the attacker right passage 2422 and enters the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability.

  A general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 comes into contact with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 to enter the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability and is in the closed state. It circulates on the second starting door 2411. If the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 has not entered the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, it enters the attacker lower right passage 2426 and is involved in the second starting opening 2004 or the special winning opening 2005. Instead, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a through the outlet 1008. Further, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the second starting opening door 2411 in the closed state.

  Then, when the game ball B enters on the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is "normal win", and the second starting door 2411 is When in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

  The game ball B that has entered the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and is not accepted by the second starting opening 2004 is discharged to the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side and rolled on the closed special winning opening door 2413. After that, it is discharged into the game area 5a and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424, the intermediate passage 2427 is opened, so that the second starting opening guide is provided. The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a regardless of the special winning opening 2005.

  From the above, the game ball B that has flowed through the first flow passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 much, so the second start port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B. The ordinary lottery result that becomes is not often drawn, and the game ball B is not received so much in the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B flowing through the second distribution passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability, the second starting opening 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B. There is a high possibility that the “normal hit” will be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second starting opening 2004.

  Because of this, the player comes to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, and thus the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511. And, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the second circulation passage 2522 with the driving strength so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Since it does not happen, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B so that the player is less likely to get tired, and entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 causes an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”). )) Is generated, a special lottery result is drawn. Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). The special lottery results that are selected by the game balls B being received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include “miss”, “15R jackpot A”, “15R jackpot B”, and the like. ..

  The special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 while the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout controlling board 633 cause a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 pieces) from the payout device 580. The game ball B of is paid out to the upper plate 130. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B when the special winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or a predetermined winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of accepting the number of game balls B (for example, 10) is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the game balls B into an unacceptable closed state, Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "15R big hit", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

  In the “big hit”, when the big winning hole 2005 is open due to the big hit game state, the game balls received in the big winning hole 2005 are sorted by the sorting piece 2415 to the second entrance 2008, and the big hit game is played. After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is a time change for changing the probability of changing the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn during a predetermined number of times of variation, or for changing the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. It maintains the state of.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are set. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  In addition, as described above, when the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the second distribution passage is opened. When the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of 2522 is performed, the driving operation has to be finely adjusted. Therefore, some players feel frustrated or irritated with the arrival of the opportunity. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right to circulate in the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication opening 2425, and the The game ball B can be distributed to the special winning opening guide shelf 2424 side (the special winning opening 2005 side) through the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423, so that it is easy to carry out without fine adjustment of the driving operation. The game ball B can be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 by a driving operation, so that the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous game state, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharply changed depending on the game state. Can be attached, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450, the main control board 1310 directly controls to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture strings are stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture strings that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, 15R jackpot game A, 15R jackpot game B, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 are set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 is performed according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect for operating the section 161 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the pressing operation unit 161 can be raised and made conspicuous by the first elevating drive motor 180a and the second elevating drive motor 182, and the operation of the operation unit 160 allows the player participation type effect to be enjoyed. be able to.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the back first rendering unit 3100 and the back second rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. , And the third back production unit 3300 and the like can be appropriately used to perform a light emission production, a movable production, and the like, which can entertain the player with various productions, and the interest of the player in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the back first of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is selected according to the special lottery result that has been drawn. By appropriately using the effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, the back third effect unit 3300, and the like, it is possible to perform a light effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[8. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 120 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, we will explain various random numbers used for game control, and then move the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on process, main control side timer interrupt process, setting change process, error display process, set value confirmation The display process will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[8-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination used for determining whether to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400. Random display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when the big hit game state is generated. Design random number to be used for determination of big hit symbol and small hit symbol (decision of hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display, and determination of initial value of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for determining whether to open or close the movable piece that enables the acceptance of the game ball in the second starting port 2004, and this regular symbol determination Normal symbol for determining the initial value of the random number for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and the normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for variable display patterns, etc. are prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the hard random number circuit with a built-in main control first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting other values in the specified numerical range one after another and extracting all the values in the specified numerical range, the main control is performed again by extracting one value in the specified numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control at the time of acquiring the value as a special random number. It is supposed to do.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter usually counts up from the initial value determination random number for symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determination of normal symbols. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, it is stored in the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the various information as numerical values and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-down process (power-off) on the main control side. When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area such as when they do not match, the initial random number for random determination for normal symbols is a non-volatile RAM included in the main control MPU. ID code is taken out from, and the initial value derivation that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the extracted ID code Run the physical, fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. In other words, the normal value per random determination initial value determination random number is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value derivation process. Thus, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area. By executing the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and the two-step security measure, the analysis is prevented.

  Here, the advantage of using the ID code taken out from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken-out ID code as the normal per symbol determination initial value determination random number will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying an individual. Since they are provided with reference numerals, they are completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting determination random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened / closed to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting opening 2004. Cannot be generated.

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning from this routine after ending the subroutine. It indicates an address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control internal RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In the power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). The RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions as described above, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM here. Acts as a function of a RAM clear switch to completely erase information. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is not performed when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated is HI. When it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, the signal indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated (RAM clear signal) is LOW, RAM clear is performed. It is determined that the operation is performed, and it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. In addition, since it is an extremely short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination of step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is actually pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z.

  When determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). Is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is erased and a value of 0 when the various information is not erased. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turned on, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is set. The key is turned on, and the setting key switch 1311a outputs a setting key ON signal. In addition, since it is an extremely short time within the period from the start of the power-on process on the main control side, which is the present routine, to the determination in step S18, in reality, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a turns it on. After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch based on the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1313a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value exclusive area in a specific area, which will be described later) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change and confirmation display of the set value 1 to set value 6) at the time when is turned on. The value is set to 1 when the display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change or confirmation display of the set value is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. At the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Is ready to receive various commands from.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that the power outage notice signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1 It is determined (step S25). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, it means that the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value of 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1. Moreover, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). Although the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the preset setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. It is determined that various pieces of information are deleted in the same manner as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

  In the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG does not have a value of 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0. Moreover, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, it means that the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

  In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that there is a setting value confirmation display processing is performed (step S28). In the setting value confirmation display process, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g, which will be described in detail later.

  Following step S28 or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG does not have a value of 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. Is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0), the checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum thereof.

  Subsequent to step S29, the main control MPU sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) to be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When determining in step S30 that the two match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main power supply-side power-off process to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power cut-off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, calculation of the checksum in step S29 and determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

  In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is turned off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  In addition, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After the turning operation is performed by 60 degrees in the clockwise direction and the ON operation is performed, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. A main control side power-on process is started. In the determination of step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. At the same time, in the determination of step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined based on the setting key ON signal. Is set and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S20A described above. Therefore, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value in the determination in step S25 described above. 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, It is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and subsequently to the setting change process of step S37 described later, in a process of step S38 described later, a specific region is excluded from the entire region of the main control internal RAM. By clearing the RAM error, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be advanced (hereinafter, referred to as "first RAM error canceling method").

  As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination of step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and / or the setting key is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the switch 1311a is not turned on and the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Therefore, in the determination in step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set. Is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0. That is, although the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, it is determined that various information is deleted as in the case where the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and the main control is performed in the process of step S38 described later. By clearing all areas of the built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error cancellation method"). .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines that When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed, an error display in step S33 is displayed and the main control internal RAM is displayed. When notifying that there is an abnormality (or something that cannot be trusted) in the contents stored in, there are two releasing methods, a first RAM error releasing method and a second RAM error releasing method. Can be done by. Thus, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RWM clear button 633z.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power cutoff process has been normally completed, the main control MPU incorporates the main control as the power recovery. A work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is cut off, a state in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person is A state in which a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is applied to the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU itself is reset and then returned is also included.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, a predetermined setting value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). Although detailed description will be given later, this setting change process is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. The RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions as described above, and here, setting switch for selecting and switching a setting value. Acts as a button function. Every time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal (a selection switching signal for setting value) to that effect is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a. The changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a due to the setting key cylinder being operated from OFF to ON, and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. .

  In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. If the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is determined that various information is to be erased as in the case where a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control internal RAM. To clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specific area of the entire main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is terminated, the RAM with built-in main control must be used. The specified area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specified area of the main control built-in RAM) is cleared except for the specified area. Here, the "specific area" is a set value dedicated area in which set values are stored, and a count of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the result (total number) is stored. The set value exclusive area stores a set value that is changed in the setting change processing described later, and the out ball counting exclusive area is a ball of the game ball collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball number counting processing described later. The number counting result (total number) is stored.

  The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value as an initial value from the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control MPU is a logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch. Is an instruction to clear the RAM and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main power supply side power-off processing is not normally completed, the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU is written. A unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken out ID code is performed. A fixed value is set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for normal symbol hits described above. Tosuru.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control. As a result, the game backup information is initialized and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “the dock dock timer control register” built in the main control MPU for setting an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is normally operating. WDT control register ") to set the timer setting value to start the main control built-in WDT and reset the main control MPU. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register (built in the main control MPU until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value). Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The timekeeping by the WDT with main control is cleared and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the processing of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The transmission serial port prescaler is set to the communication speed and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the test organization of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, of various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state, a random number is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU to be updated by hardware. Settings such as latching and acquisition are made, and activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and predetermined. When all the values within the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value within the specified numerical range is extracted again, and the specified numerical range is set at a high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main random number circuit with built-in main control when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and when the latch signal is input, the main control internal hard disk The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified into Remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. It The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-win / win random number updating process.

  After step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that the power outage notice signal is input, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear processing in step S12 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU stops, for example, the drive signals output to the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the RAM with built-in main control, it is possible to prevent the content of the RAM with built-in main control from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the WDT with main control. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

  As described above, the main control MPU undergoes a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and again executes the main control side power-on process. . In other words, since the main control power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. When the power is shut off, the checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power-off process on the main control side and the checksum calculated in step S29 when the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted The value (sum value) must not match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control internal RAM. It will be completely erased.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

  Further, in the determination of step S25, it is determined that the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1. If so, the setting change process in step S37 is performed, and in the process in step S38, the RAM is cleared (cleared) completely except for the specific region in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the determination in step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL. -FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that various information is erased in the same manner as in step S38, in the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control internal RAM are specified. With the exception of the band to completely erase (clear). In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. When powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing it), even if it is not the case that the setting change that can change the set value is made (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), The control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 Is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a probability variation (probability change) hit state), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information by the start of the next business. Therefore, an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch. Further, when changing the setting value, if the setting changing process is performed, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting changing process is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to confirm the current setting value that has been set in addition to changing the setting value. Only possessions are allowed and limited to 2-3 people. In the present embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed and decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the clerk such as the clerk in the game hall erases (clears) the game backup information. When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch when it is necessary to turn on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the game backup information is mainly stored. It can be erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM.

  Here, description will be made on the point that the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the problem in the case of advancing the processing of step S26 and subsequent steps after the wait time standby processing of step S22 will be described.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as + 5V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, even if the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, so that the island in the game hall is The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off from the equipment. This is when the player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the island facility of the game hall is installed. When the power supply from the power source is cut off, the main control side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted) (boot timer: in the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set), and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs immediately before the waiting time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side described later is performed. Even if the contents of the main control internal RAM are updated by the timer interrupt processing, the main control side power-on processing Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

  Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then in step S29, the main control built-in RAM When the checksum value calculated based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire main control RAM is cleared except for the specific area. In other words, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch at the time of power recovery, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall to play a game called RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention indication by a clerk such as a store clerk.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power outage notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, the step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input, By repeating the determination of step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculated and stored value of step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is in progress while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, so that the game information by the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) Step for backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off process constituted by the processes of 58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU of the main control MPU is When restarting, it is determined that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the calculated checksum value in step S64) match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are reset. While the main control-side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the power-off process on the main control side within the “power supply securing period during an instantaneous power failure or power failure” of about 7 ms due to hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as a direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. Therefore, in the case where the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as it remains input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  Since the progress of the game is prevented by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are set by blocking the progress to a control flow of setting and starting the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. It is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for). When the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) Various information) (including information indicating the counter value) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of main control internal RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all. , It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, description will be made regarding the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). In order to convey, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is included as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, there is a problem in a case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, A problem will be described when the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on is not set in step S50.

  For example, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the drive of the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to open / close the special winning opening 2005. The member is changed from the closed state to the opened state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as the game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state It is not possible to display at which round of the time. That is, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it cannot display at all which round (that is, how many rounds) the jackpot gaming state is.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the special winning opening 2005 by the opening / closing member when, for example, ending the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting closing between the rounds of the special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 to open the special winning opening 2005 from the state closed by the opening / closing member. To the state of being changed (that is, the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, for example, a screen informing that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and is advantageous to the player (for example, the player is notified that the movable piece is open). Screen is transmitted to the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the state where 2004 is opened, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM in the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2404 is started and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Even if the player can display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is entered, which indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball was received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

  As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

  In view of this, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power-on and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in four rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to drive and the special winning opening 2005 is released from the state in which it is closed by the opening / closing member as the destination of the return of the main control board 1310. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the big hit game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). Although it cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is the attacker solenoid 2 in the big hit game state. A screen that tells you that the driving of 05 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is open by the opening / closing member (for example, "This is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Enter the game ball into the big winning opening. Please display a message saying "Please play the ball to the player." In the display area of the effect display device 1600 and give the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine a special winning opening after power recovery 2005. It is possible to instruct a game in which a game ball is to be entered, and, for example, in the above-described example, a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is advantageous to the player. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the starter solenoid 2404 is started to drive and the movable piece is opened as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the second starting opening 2004 is open (for example, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game ball so that it enters the second starting opening." The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message to the player on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine inserts the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after the power is restored. It is possible to instruct a game of making a ball.

  This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting on the front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumpy state, a so-called frozen state, when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and it is mistaken for it. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S29 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is constituted by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S29, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, the checksum values must be cleared except for a specific area of the entire main control RAM.

  Accordingly, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information. By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball Only three commands of the number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are first transmitted as a power-on state command, then transmitted as a power-on main control return destination command, and subsequently as a power-on main prize ball count. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command includes the RWM clear button on the payout control board 633 at power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure). When the 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to perform the RAM clear, the information for instructing that fact, and at the time of turning on the power (in addition to the case of turning on the power, Including power recovery when power is restored due to a power outage or momentary power failure.) Of the pachinko machine, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine, to which the so-called Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310), is the copyright for which work? What kind of game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state)).

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for whichever of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of movies A, B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

  Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and even for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state is maintained until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is mixed in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the time when power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). In order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the power-on status to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command classified into power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on status The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspecting step, which is the inspecting step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus operates as the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes in the special symbol Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) of slipping, and by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, the main control board 1310 can control the copyright of which work. It is possible to determine which is the model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether or not (the game specification or the ST machine that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability variation occurs).

  As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[8-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 118 and 119.

  When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 120 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing which is the present routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is changed to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. Performing time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 normally receives various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms every time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variable display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, detects the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, and the second starting opening sensor 2402. Detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. A signal (the signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine, so it may be masked to omit reading), the door frame opening switch 4a. From the main frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described below, is read, and the input information of the main control internal RAM is input as input information. Store in the storage area. Further, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding starting port winning commands classified as others are transmitted as transmission information of the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 2101, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and from the second starting mouth sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which the input signals are input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those in which the idle terminal process is performed). First, it is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball entered or if the input is ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the input terminals having the vacant terminal processing) is repeated for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Since it is made possible, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, The detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the out opening sensor 3032, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005. Signal, signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (the signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, so it is masked and read. May be omitted.), The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the control board 633 has normally received.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal process is applied among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display indicating that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU has a defect. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In the winning random number updating process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 119, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol hitting random number, the normal symbol hitting initial value determination random number are also updated by the winning random number updating process.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Ordinary symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, then from the minimum value normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. Normally, when the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for random symbol determination, the random number for initial determination for random determination is updated by this winning random number updating process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of occurs, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And a small hitting symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball number counting process (step S107). In this sphere counting process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 is input to the game area 5a partitioned and formed in the game board 5. When the game ball collected by the provided outlet 1008 is detected by the outlet sensor 3032, the value 1 is added to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the outlet 1008. Perform an operation (increment). The main control MPU sets the value of the collected sphere counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the spheres of the game spheres collected by the out port 1008, in the area dedicated to out sphere counting in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. The output of the lighting signal to be stored and displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, creates a ball collection command to that effect. Then, it is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU, when the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value of 65535) and is further incremented by 1 to the value of the collected ball counter, the collected ball is collected. The value of the counter overflows to the value 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball is output. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the command has been normally received by the payout control board 633 is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process of step S108, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the input information. In order to notify that fact, a main prize ball number information output command classified into other is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. , The second starting opening 2004, and various winning openings such as the special winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"), based on the gaming balls that have been paid. This is for counting the number of game balls to be put out, and in the prize ball control processing of step S108, it is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the prize ball control processing of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter. To the value of, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area and the value indicating the number of exceeded balls is set as the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter. It is adapted to store update.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 sends various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Further, the main control MPU shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a command of 2 bytes (16 bits) (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, although the second starting opening door 2411 is not in the open state, there is a ball entering the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004, or the special winning opening door 2413 is not in the open state. First, it is confirmed whether or not there is an abnormal state related to the prize ball, such as the game ball B entering the big winning opening 2005. In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state related to a prize ball has occurred in the fraud detection process, the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. Thus, the main control MPU outputs a security signal, so that a clerk such as a store clerk in the game hall can detect an abnormal state regarding the prize ball at an early stage. The security signal output when it is determined that an abnormal state related to a prize ball has occurred is the security signal output when it is determined that the magnet goto described below is performed, or the vibration signal described below. This is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that the goto is being performed. Further, the security signal is output by the main control MPU via the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. However, after the main control MPU sends a command instructing the output of the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU sends the command through the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 to the game hall side. You may make it output a security signal with respect to the hall computer installed in.

  In addition, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, the fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto”) is performed. The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one (1). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the magnet goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is the initial value when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the injustice detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). .), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display for notifying that the magnet goto is being performed is stored and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the magnet is being performed in the fraud detection process, the main computer for the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. The control MPU outputs the security signal, which can contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall can find the magnet goto at an early stage.

  Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, the fraudulent activity due to vibration (hereinafter referred to as “vibration goto”). The value of the vibration goto counter is incremented by one. The value of the vibration goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that the vibration goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set. The value 0 (zero) is set as. When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the misconduct detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). .), A vibration goto notification command divided into a notification display for notifying that the vibration goto is being performed is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the vibration goto is being performed in the fraud detection process, the main computer with respect to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. The control MPU outputs a security signal, which can contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall can find the vibration goto at an early stage.

  In the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the jackpot gaming state is not set (the big winning opening) When a special winning opening abnormal prize occurs (such as when a game ball enters 2005), a prize abnormal display command classified into notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

  In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the magnet goto and / or the vibration goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 as detection of the fraud while the magnet goto and the vibration goto are detected. When the fraudulent activity is not detected, the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 as undetected fraudulent activity. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, when the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal winning is detected, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraud.

  Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the gaming ball B is fired is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the above-described fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, that the fraudulent activity has not been detected. Sometimes the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic), and the firing information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The logic of the firing enable signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic as the initial value (default) by the hardware including the main control output circuit with the reset function. Although configured, the launch permission logic is set after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored).

  Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114). In this special design and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit determination value previously stored in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). Whether to generate a game state (called "special lottery")) or take out the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number and is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (whether the hit type is determined) whether the hit type determination value matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting mouth sensor 2101, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting mouth sensor 2402. If it is due to the above, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect are created, stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big A winning a prize 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area, or, for example, a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (rounds) the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, 2 of the round indicators of the function display unit 1400 are displayed. To turn on the round display lamp, turn on the lighting signal to the 2 round display lamp. A force is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp to turn on the 15-round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal is set to the status display of the function display unit 1400 so that the output of the function display unit 1400 is turned on and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the presence or absence of time saving is turned on in a predetermined color. Is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the normal winning a prize winning processing is performed based on this input information. In the normal winning opening award process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning award winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

  The normal winning opening prize information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and the normal winning opening is in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. The winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th partition to the second partition of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning award winning information is set, the ordinary winning award winning information storage of the first section of the ordinary winning award winning information is stored in the 0th section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage and the second of the ordinary winning award winning information storage. The regular winning opening prize information of the section is stored in the first storing section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information of the third storing section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second storing section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage that has been shifted becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal prize opening prize information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal prize opening prize information storage, the normal prize opening prize information of the first section of the normal prize opening prize information storage is the normal prize winning information. In the 0th section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage, the ordinary winning award winning information of the second section of the ordinary winning award winning information storing is respectively shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning award winning information storing, whereby The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, when the normal winning award winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning award winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning award winning information is set as the reserved ball and the normal of the function display unit 1400 is normal. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

  Following the normal winning award winning process, the normal winning award winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number per ordinary symbol is determined from the read ordinary winning award winning information to perform the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open / close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, and the game state becomes a state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is stored. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric-role effect are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area as information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the extracted normal When the value of the random number for symbol determination is not the same as the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. , Create various commands related to the general figure synchronization effect, and store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, Set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern of the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of being a normal win) is 1/2.

  Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is issued to the payout control board 633. Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, or outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. Besides, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, or the launch permission logic Is a base monitor that outputs a firing permission signal set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633 and displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008. A display signal is output to 1310h, and a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g is output.

  Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified by special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified by special figure 2 tuning effect related, and jackpot related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Various commands (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified for power-on, various commands classified for general figure tuning performance, various commands classified for normal electric figure performance, various commands classified for notification display, various classification for status display Commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided on the game board 5). Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as the main prize ball number information. Through the terminal board 558, the main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer, and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 is Every time 10 balls have been reached, a ball collection command to notify that, a setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control internal RAM (or something that cannot be trusted) Error display command indicating that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is confirmed. Sure display command, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by summing the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes various commands as main circumference serial data. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. The main circumference serial transmission port built in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as main circumference serial data. You can do it. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when the power is restored and power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is transmitted at step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reserved setting of the command, the power-on status command that is classified as power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power-on status command is configured as main-cycle serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and then constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, etc. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and set according to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

  It should be noted that, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a peripheral collection MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the received ball collecting command to the peripheral control board 1510. For each collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information (counted value (that is, collected at the out port 1008 is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC not shown). (The total number of balls in the game ball) and the information that associates the updated date and time). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after the business hours of the gaming hall are not received without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the outlet 1008). The total number of balls) and the updated date and time are stored in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the start of the game hall business, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 starts the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the day, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and held in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection information, the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the total sum of the counted values so far may be used.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off while the game is progressing. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. When the power is turned on, a power-on main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing the drive states of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. Is able to. That is, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 118 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on of step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area, the power-on status command classified as power-on is transmitted in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main-circulation serial data, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Subsequently, the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the power outage or power failure should be promptly restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to notify, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a lumped state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has broken down. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

  Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process shown in the main control side, all areas of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared except for a specific area. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 119, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on. , Power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, the power-on state command is configured, and the status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and subsequently the power-on main control return destination command is configured. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The data is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process. It has become.

[8-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 121 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is acquired, it may be read out or may be taken out. When the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

  Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is to calculate various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control as numerical values, and the checksum performed in step S28 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. 118. Is the same as the calculation of

  Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off processing (main power-off) in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119. It is determined whether or not the check sum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When determining in step S204 that the two match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination of step S204 and the determination of step S206 are the same as the determination of step S30 and the determination of step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG contains various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-down processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is stored and held in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. To be done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal due to the flow of the process to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing is not normally terminated when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 are in the normal range, ie, set value 1 to set value 6 It is determined whether or not any of the values is set, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S208, when determining that the main control MPU is not within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the setting value 1 which is the initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). Note that in the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is a value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. When it does, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 which is the initial value may be set to the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main-control-side power-off process has normally ended, or in the determination of step S208. When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). The RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions as described above, and here, setting switch for selecting and switching a setting value. Acts as a button function. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection switching signal) indicating that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and reading the setting change signal of the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated when the selection switching signal of the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z is input, while the main control MPU determines that the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. When the selection switching signal is not input, it is determined that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated.

  In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update (step S218). ). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and updates the setting display for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is turned off. It is determined (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning the switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the setting key is OFF. It is determined that it has not been operated.

  In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. . In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the setting key is pressed. When it is determined that the OFF operation has not been performed, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is turned OFF, the set value is changed each time. The value is incremented by 1 and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed. It is displayed on the container 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored by the time it is determined that the setting key has been turned off in the determination at step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure is the main cause. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal control RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the dedicated set value area in the specific area of the main control RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the set value set in the above is updated, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. After the processing of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the Enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure is stored in the main control internal RAM. It is stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of.

  Following step S224, the main control MPU stops the output of the lighting signal for displaying the updated set value to the setting display 1310g and updates the setting value to the setting display 1310g. Is hidden (step S228).

  Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

  Following step S230, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S232). This setting key ON flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON). This is a flag that indicates whether to permit setting change and confirmation display of the set value (setting value 1 to setting value 6) at the time point. The value is set to 1 when it is permitted, and to 0 when the setting change or confirmation display of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0, and thereafter, the setting value setting change and the confirmation display are not permitted.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as the one determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU normally checks the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is the range, and when it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  When it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S234), subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmitting process in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted as peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, this has priority before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. Upon receiving the setting change command, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the set value history information (information that associates the set value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is turned off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 122 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change processing of FIG. 137, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU checks the setting value obtained in step S350 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM to confirm again whether the setting value is an abnormal value). (Setting value stored in) is any one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is within the normal range, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the setting value is used as it is. To do.

  In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 to the setting display device 1310g, and outputs the lighting signal to the setting display device 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S354).

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed when the power is turned off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

  Following step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the switch 1311a to the OFF position of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. If not, the setting key is turned off. It determined not to have.

  When determining in step S358 that the main key MPU has not operated the setting key to be OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S358 again and repeats the determination of step S358 until the setting key is operated to OFF.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S358, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU sends the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired set value is hidden on the setting display 1310g (step S360).

  Following step S360, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S361). This setting key ON flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON). This is a flag that indicates whether to permit setting change and confirmation display of the set value (setting value 1 to setting value 6) at the time point. The value is set to 1 when it is permitted, and to 0 when the setting change or confirmation display of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0, and thereafter, the setting value setting change and the confirmation display are not permitted.

  Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S362), subsequently creates a set value confirmation display command and sets transmission information (step S364), and then at step S364. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the set transmission information (setting value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S366), and this routine ends. The serial communication initialization in step S362 is the same as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 is the same as that shown in FIG. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S362, the transmission information (set value confirmation display command) set in step S364 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 is performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This is done before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 119. This is because, in priority, the peripheral control board 1510 is notified by the setting value confirmation display command that the setting values have been confirmed. The set value confirmation display command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM has been confirmed. ) Is a command to convey.

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (FIG. 121). 118 is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 118, and is a process performed in step S28 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 122). This is the process performed in.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 123 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 of launching the game ball B, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is started. While the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic, it can be transmitted that the firing is stopped (non-permission). .

  The error display process of this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, FIG. 122). )), The main control MPU may perform the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119. Therefore, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120 can be performed. , It is impossible to perform firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display processing, which is the present routine, of the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 and the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, 122 is started as the processing performed in step S356 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122), after the main control MPU restores power in step S400, the main display MPU starts the error display processing that is the main routine. Also, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched, a launch permission signal It is set to fire stop logic logic (firing unauthorized logic) to the fire control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the reset function main control output circuit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port.

  Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all of the various display devices of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), subsequently creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 includes the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 121, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. This is the same process as the serial communication initial setting of step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410 is the periphery of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. The control board transmission command transmission processing, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S366 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122, and the peripheral control board transmission of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is the same process as the command transmission process.The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (FIG. 121). When the process is started and ended as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 122) and the process performed in step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 122, as described above, the endless loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the peripheral control board as the peripheral serial board data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the peripheral control MPU stores the error display history information (information in which the error display command and the received date and time are associated with each other) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Update.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a white background "RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member" is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a blue background image. The volume is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510, as well as performing the control to display the message image of the character and the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." It is controlled not to depend on, but forcibly set to the maximum volume and played from various speakers. The process of issuing the RAM error notification by the error display command has the highest priority, and when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command for transmitting another error, the RAM error notification is performed. Is the highest priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process, and FIG. 126 is a payout control unit following FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[9-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure notification. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions, and is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM here. Acts as a function of a RAM clear switch to completely erase information. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) for notifying that the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not performed, and the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z While it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed and the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is determined that the pressing operation unit is operated.

  When it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) incorporated in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU has not operated the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, the payout RAM MPU notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area). The number of prize ball stocks PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. The PRDY signal output setting information etc.) indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout is to be erased. The flag is set to 1 when the payout information is erased and to 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU makes a setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending the subroutine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power shutdown process (power shutdown) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPUs match each other, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process of the payout control unit described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU determines that power is restored and the payout control internal RAM is used. The work area of is set (step S530). With this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, and this power recovery time is read. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the CR communication information storage area is set, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S536.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has not input the power failure advance notice signal, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU inputs the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command or self-check command) are normally received, and drive control of the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the payout motor 584 outputs the number of balls actually paid out of the game balls to the external terminal board 558 as an award ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided, and the prize motor number information output determination counter is actually the payout motor 584. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. By a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is displayed. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, the value is added with the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and the memory is updated.

  In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the award ball number information output determination counter is read from the award ball information storage area, and when the value of the read award ball number information output determination counter exceeds 10 ( That is, when the payout motor 584 has actually paid out the number of game balls of 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter.), And a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error cancellation switch, it becomes an error cancellation signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED display has been canceled), A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, and a command transmission process described later. The main control board 1310, which informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands are normally received, is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not a ball gami state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball gami determination time set as the determination condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition, the number of balls of the game balls received and received by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number. It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the inconsistent game balls due to the disagreement are repeatedly paid out. At that time, time management of the mismatch counter reset determination time set as the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball-game determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-game determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is the value. When it becomes 0, the ball-game determination time is accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is executing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power restoration. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU, in the CR communication process, exchanges various signals with the CR unit, while paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, the power is stopped or the power is cut off and the CR unit is discharged. Even if it is not possible to continue paying out game balls, the exchange of various signals with the game ball is interrupted, and at the time of power recovery, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, or the like, which is stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, so that the instantaneous value is restored. It is possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately after the power is restored, just before the stop or power failure. With wear, so that we can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop even when the power is restored or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal which tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is payout controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. That is, that is, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gami operation determination setting process, For setting the error status output to the CR unit, for example, pay a ball when not communicating with the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored when the power is restored, so it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 is provided to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game ball by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected to each other, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, the PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is notified that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-mentioned lower bowl 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the tank is full, or the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. Or not. For example, the determination of whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full with the stored game balls is performed by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank (2 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is counted in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is full in the stored game balls is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is not full in the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area area.

  To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to check whether the game is full or out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball cut switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball cut switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and the ball cut check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is When the state is changed from OFF to ON, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is considered that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is cut off. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that indicates that is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

  Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball gamming are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball cutout information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the ball cutout information, it corresponds. The display data (in the present embodiment, the display value 1 (numeral “1”)) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state display are created based on this various information. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power outage notice signal is input, and this power outage notice is issued. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552 The timer update process is performed at step CR and CR is performed at step S554. Communication processing, full tank and out-of-bulb check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and LED processing is performed in step S564. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has received the power failure advance notice signal, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S576). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets a prohibition setting for access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset at the time of a power failure or momentary power failure, and performs the payout control unit power-on process by the subsequent power restoration.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[9-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 127 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

  Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). The value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten by using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 130 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral controller V blank interrupt processing, peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing, peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  In the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral controller power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initialization processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, hot start / cold start determination processing, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU, but the time required for the processing for initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. Can be converted. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control command reception interrupt process to be described later, a command or pachinko related to control of game effect output from the main control board 1310. It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

  Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0. In the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to this. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1006 again, and whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. Is repeatedly determined. By repeating such determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so as not to reset the peripheral control MPU after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU first sets the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG to a value of 1. Is set (step S1008). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) and Various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Rotation based on the RAM of the peripheral control MPU in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set) Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the work 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light, based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value, Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specification value ranging from the brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so that the brightness specification value is set. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and a normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. A player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set the first brightness specified value to the maximum brightness of the 31st brightness. It is possible to set one luminance specified value up to the specified value.

  For example, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotary operation unit 302 in a clockwise direction, the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (light off) and the 0th (zero) luminance is designated. When the brightness is set to the first brightness designated value which is the next highest brightness level, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, linear equation) is set from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are changed to be higher along a tone curve or a tone curve like a spline curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed. When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness to the 1st brightness specified value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) Staff member) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image what the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th brightness designation value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as brightness information of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are directly illuminated with light, as the gradation information described above. is there. The normal pallet value is selected from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. In a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are specified values, a palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a tone curve like a spline curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. It is a value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

  In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is directly illuminated with light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Of the various decorative boards that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and that are provided on the game board side that is directly irradiated with light, a palette is provided for a specific decorative board (LED that makes the player feel dazzling) not shown. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information, which is the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. The special pallet value is different from the normal pallet value in only one step, and is one of the 32 step ranges from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which are the above-mentioned brightness specified values. The palette value corresponding to the brightness designation is set as the gradation information described above according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as the direct light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits the indirect light for the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (off). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value that is almost equal to the 18th brightness specification value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and is in the range from the 1st brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one luminance designated value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the designated brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. The brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the While being set according to the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designation value by the operation of 303. Thereby, when the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness in order to reduce the brightness, the brightness is changed to the direct light. The brightness of the LED used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (light off) and the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness), and linked with this. Then, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the smallest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is the second highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value at which the brightness is minimum (light off)). Also, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and door frame sides to the LEDs used as direct light individually. Even if you do not set, set the light emission mode according to the flow of production, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side Then, the normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, it is possible to extremely easily change the balance of the entire light emitting mode. That is, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness. Even if one brightness specification value is set up to the brightness specification value, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one specified luminance value is set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship of the light emission modes set (bright or dark) is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the above relationship.

  Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) is used for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is normally managed by the palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted respectively.

  Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process to be described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the peripheral control MPU and generates one screen (generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control MPU). The drawing data of one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, the output of the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but although so-called frame drop occurs, it is possible to produce music such as music and sound effects according to various effects from various speakers by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to production.

  Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the peripheral control MPU and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel in the sound data creation process described later. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various effects.

  Following step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series which configures the light emission mode generation schedule data is to be output. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound command data that directs the sound data of the effect sound such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series to configure the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, in the scheduler update processing, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which form the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data from the first drive data to the output target is the number of the drive data. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described below occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor / solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

  Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various effect settings. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to hold prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyze the various commands that have been performed. The peripheral control MPU reads the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands (extraction). Then, it is set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp pallet setting processing. By executing, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the maximum brightness is reached from the above-described first brightness designation value. When one brightness specification value up to the 31st brightness specification value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to be the set brightness specification value. You can do it.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of holding normal symbols Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), variation pattern command for instructing the start of variation production such as variation display of decorative symbols in the production display device 1600 in synchronization with variation display of special symbols, A pattern storage command that is output when the number of pending start changes changes, and it is analyzed whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command that is output each time a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005. Recognize if there is.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Various commands are analyzed. The various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Figure Various commands related to performance related, various commands related to normal electric-role effect, various commands related to notification display, various commands related to status display, various commands related to test, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical data. The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-series arrangement of light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and a plurality of tracks of the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU. , And a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set, The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically made. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality has been resolved. You can

  Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, is updated, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

  Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed in the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) the image on the effect display device 1600 for one screen ( The drawing data of one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. It is read from the peripheral control ROM (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to use according to the channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the peripheral channel control unit outputs from the output channel set in the sound data creation process. Outputs sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects can be played from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The value is converted to a value of 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects are played from various speakers. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch.

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the vessel (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, to the peripheral control unit) And 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received and after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 seconds are elapsed after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit. Except the above), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) In the fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the periphery 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. (Until the second elapses), by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process. The voltage divided by is converted into a value of 7 levels of the substrate volume 0 to 6, and further the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300 is applied to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. It is possible to adjust the sub-volume value of the effect sound by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the press operation unit 303 or It has become.

  In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU include a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value that is the volume that flows from various speakers is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume that flows from the various speakers is allowed to be the maximum volume by being amplified to the master volume value. Is set to be Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control MPU and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The volume control switch, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting, is combined with the adjusted board volume by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually the volume that flows from various speakers. It is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data. For the informative sound, the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the informative sound were incorporated in the track to be used. It is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch that is set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound. Synthesized and volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound, indeed, amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from various speakers, and outputs the amplified notification sound as the audio data serialization.

  Here, in the case where the effect sound is being output from various speakers, a brief description will be given of the control of sending the alarm sound to notify the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1. The sub volume value of the track containing the effect sound is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound are included. The sound data of the track and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the volume that flows from various speakers. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, actually, only the notification sound of the maximum volume is played through the various speakers. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from various speakers, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from various speakers for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the notification sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to silence. With respect to the volume of the effect sound that is being produced, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set again as the sub-volume value (at this time, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are set. When the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the operation, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound), and the sound is played from various speakers.

  In this way, when the effect sound is being output from various speakers, the volume of the effect sound is changed when the alarm sound is output to notify the clerk or the like in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a misconduct to the pachinko machine 1. Although the notification sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the various speakers, since the production sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the notification sound stops flowing from the various speakers after a predetermined period of time, The sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but starts to flow again from the point where the notification sound started to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU sets the volume from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the sound produced by various speakers, such as sound effects and sound effects, is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 does. When a malfunction occurs or when a player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff member such as the clerk in the game hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Following step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for regular processing and back up.

  Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 0 to the in-steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in -FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, steps S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and the value is set to 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, if the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control part steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. In the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, as described above, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed as a result. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU will be described. To do. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 129 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine directly executes this routine. finish. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. Is set to the value 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when executing the peripheral control unit steady process, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling the process on the way, the peripheral control unit of FIG. It is this routine that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG in step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process). By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing and setting the value 0 to the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral control steady processing) of FIG. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, so that the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine. Whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed is determined. To have. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined next time in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is omitted, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[10-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 128 will be described. . When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times (step S1100), as shown in FIG. As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Sometimes, this routine ends as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher priority as the interrupt processing priority. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, the peripheral control MPU adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids that are arranged in time series and form the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data to be updated, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) , Driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

  Following step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5, based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The moving position is grasped by performing or acquiring the moving position.

  Following step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc. are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of effect sound output from various speakers is adjusted, and a plurality of them are mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The brightness of various LEDs can be adjusted.

  Following step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Backup is performed by copying to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set in different areas, and the SDRAM is The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the above and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 128, various processes relating to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled and the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU sends the peripheral serial data of 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU. When the information is fetched into the reception buffer and this fetching is completed, an interrupt occurs triggered by this, and peripheral control command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the 1st byte, the mode is allocated as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 131 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU receives 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the acquisition period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). ). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the reception buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3, the peripheral control MPU determines that the status is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode is the second byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the second byte of the main serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to the initial value 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). .. This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data, which has already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as a numerical value and sums them (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility in the game hall, and when the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, static electricity is discharged to generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in an accessible environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

  In the determination of step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match. When this is done, the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216). This routine ends.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU determines that 1-byte (8-bit) information in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period that can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the step S1212. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step 3 does not match, the routine ends as it is.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power outage notification signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 132, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. The determination is made (step S1302). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the peripheral control MPU ends this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that the peripheral control MPU has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302, it is determined whether the power failure advance notice signal is input, and it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is not input. While sometimes this routine is ended as it is, when it is determined that the power failure notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the peripheral control unit power outage advance signal interrupt process of this routine is started and the power outage advance signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, the peripheral control MPU performs the power saving process ( Step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in order to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1. By suppressing the electric power of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Following step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

  Following step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs a command backup process (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the peripheral control MPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power outage notification signal is not input, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage notification signal is input. judge. In other words, it will continue to infinitely determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, in the determination of step S1312, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure notice signal is not input, the peripheral control MPU cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT, and the peripheral control is not performed. While the MPU is reset, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal is input, the peripheral control MPU performs the WDT clear process in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 128 is restarted.

  In this way, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, if the power outage notification signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and thus the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 2101. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is stored in the RAM A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S2032). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2034).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S2035), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S2039) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode that suggests "15R jackpot A", 15R jackpot opening / closing control of the special winning opening 2005 according to the gaming state A, and the distribution piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. The drive control is performed, and the process of setting the game ball B to the second reception port 2008 in the valid state in the 15th round is executed. Also, when it becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed according to the 15R jackpot gaming state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is first received. The distribution piece 2415 to be distributed to either the 2007 or the second entrance 2008 is driven and controlled, and the processing for setting the game ball B to the second entrance 2008 to the valid state in the 15th round in which it can be distributed is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and the “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 has an “effective state”. Here, the "valid state" is high after the jackpot gaming state ends because the game ball B is received in the second receiving opening 2008 in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008. It is a state in which control to a stochastic state is permitted (activated). Therefore, by accepting the game ball B in the second reception port 2008 in the "valid state", it is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008, there is an “invalid state” different from the “valid state”. Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted into the second entrance 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first entrance 2007, and is temporarily the first. Even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state is finished. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the "invalid state" makes it possible to notify the hall management side of information regarding the occurrence of such an abnormality when the game ball B is received at the second entrance 2008 due to the occurrence of an abnormality such as fraudulent activity. Therefore, it is set as a period for monitoring whether or not the game ball B has been received at the second reception port 2008. In the present embodiment, a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second entrance 2008 is set to the "valid state", and the second entrance 2008 is played. Whenever the ball B is accepted, the high-probability state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state is over. Further, although the "invalid state" is set in a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which the game ball B is not distributed to the second reception port 2008, it may be set in the "valid state". In this way, even if the "valid state" is set in all the rounds during the big hit game state, the game ball B is not received in the second entrance 2008 in the first to fourteenth rounds, so As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 14th round, whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set in the "valid state" is important.

  In the big hit control process (step S2041), after performing the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, each process of setting the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag that indicates a high probability state. During execution of the big hit game state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B), it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second receiving opening 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds when the big winning opening 2005 is opened. When the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is controlled because the high probability state (high probability time saving state) is controlled after the jackpot game state is completed. Although it is set, if the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. The high probability flag is not set because it does not. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit, or when the count value of the hour / hour reduction counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 described later or The high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is in a time saving state, and it is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) that is controlled to a time saving state (high probability short cut state, low probability short cut state) after the big hit game state ends. It is set when the jackpot game state based on it is finished. Then, the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the value of the time saving counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown. Reset by processing.

  In addition, the time saving counter is a counter showing the remaining number of fluctuations in the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation of the time saving state, and the time saving state (high probability after the jackpot gaming state ends). When the big hit game state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which is controlled to a time saving state, a low probability time saving state), the continuation number of the time saving state is set, and the time saving number counter , It is counted down every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes "0", it will be described later with reference to FIG. 144. Is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in or the second special symbol stop process not shown (returning the counter value to "0").

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". (Step S2036), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S2037), and the second special symbol reservation storage area stores the second. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S2036), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S2038). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S2032).

  Now, in the processing of step S2031, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 2101 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S2042). In the processing of this step S2042, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S2043 to set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the newly reserved state. The processing of S2045 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S2044, each random number acquired in step S2041 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S2041. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before the variable display according to the start winning is started (step S2045), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storage is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S2043 to S2045, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the first reserve memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the first LED holding state of the two LEDs of the first special reserve number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. In addition to updating so as to correspond to the number of storages, a command for instructing the first number of reserved storages (first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S2041, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S2061).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. Type of game effect), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored in association with the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first starting opening passing process, the specified pre-determination information, the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special hold number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto is set (step S2062).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether to display the result of the variable display of special symbols based on the generated start winning as a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, execute with the effect display device 1600 A peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the game effect, or prior to starting the variable display according to the starting prize, the pre-determined information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed. Will be able to grasp.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the pre-judgment command is received, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the first variation pattern command that stores the variation display start of the first special symbol is received, the advance storage is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

  In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), This can be preceded by, for example, notification at a predetermined timing such as new output of the hold display or shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S2034).

  Now, in the process of step S2033, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the on state and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, the same is shown in FIG. 136. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved memory number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is "4" (step S2052). In the process of step S2052, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S2053 to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the newly reserved state. The processing of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2053, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S2054, each random number acquired in step S2051 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  On the other hand, in the processing of step S2052, when it is determined that the second number of reserved memories is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S2053 to S2054, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second hold storage number changes based on the fact that the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, the second LED holding state of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, a command (second holding number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second number of holding storages is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S2037). The first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process are the same. Since it is a program module of, and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S2080)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) in which the determination process and the like of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuation control is stopped )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S2082) in which lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2083)
5. The mode at the time of fluctuation control of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S2084)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S2080) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S2080).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S2101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S2102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner for random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start prize from the first (first) area in order. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, after that, as the process of step S2105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) (step S2106), this process ends.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S2105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S2111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. Select the big hit determination table (step S2112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S2111), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) (step S2113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing are compared (step S2114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is at a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) And a big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, and a big hit judgment table at the time of high probability used when the game state is at the high probability (high probability short time state). In the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, 1/319 is set value 1, 1/309 is set value 2, 1/299 is set value 3, and 4 is set value. With a jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has been won in a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/289 when the set value is 5, 1/279 when the set value is 6, and a jackpot probability of 1/269 when the set value is 6. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the other first special random numbers are other than the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first, Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability that is referred to for comparison with a special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and 3 when the setting value is 3. The second special random number is a big hit with a probability of 1/299, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the second special random number and the other second special random numbers coincide with the deviation determination value indicating that the other special deviation.

  Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 1 / 31.9 when the set value is 1, ⅓0.9 when the set value is 2, ½9.9 when the set value is 3, The first special random number (with a low probability) has a jackpot probability of 1 / 28.9 when the setting value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the setting value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the setting value is 6. The first special random number that is the same as the first special random number set in the big hit judgment table of No. 1) matches the big hit judgment value, and the other first special random numbers match the deviation judgment value. Special random numbers are associated with each other. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), when the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won for each set value has a low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time saving state) And the time saving state (low-probability time saving state). In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process in the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038, in the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first, Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1 / 31.9 when the setting value is 1, 3 / 30.9 when the setting value is 2, and setting value 3 When the set value is 4, it is 1 / 29.9, when the set value is 4, it is 1 / 28.9, when the set value is 5, it is 1 / 27.9, and when the set value is 6, it is 1 / 26.9. The probability that the second special random number (including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the big hit judgment table when the probability is low) matches the big hit judgment value, and the other second special random numbers fall out. The second special random numbers are matched so that they match the judgment value. It is associated.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S2115) ), Sets the big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit and ends the process (step S2116), and selects the big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process first special read in step S2102. If the result of the comparison with the random number is that it is out of alignment, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, as a result of the comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S2102, when it is determined that the reach is out of alignment (step S2118), the reach flag indicating that the variation becomes reach is set and the process is performed. The process ends (step S2119).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S2105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S2121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140 (B). (Step S2122), the type of big hit is determined, the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S2121, it is determined to be a deviating symbol as the mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2124).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), the symbol determination table stores the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened / closed in accordance with the big hit gaming state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening when the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and long time opening (game ball B can be entered (easy) to open. For example, 20 seconds) when the game ball B is in the valid state (the second receiving port 2008 receives the game ball B, it is in the big hit game state). When the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the special probability after the jackpot gaming state is set. While the variable display of the symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is controlled to a high probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, the game ball B is in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. Not accepted When the can, 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times
2.15R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened / closed according to the big hitting game state B, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening when the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. 5 seconds) when set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second entrance 2008 to control to a high-probability state after the jackpot gaming state is completed), and is effective in the 15th round When the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008 during the state, high until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. While controlling to the probability time saving state, when the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state ends) Determining 15R jackpot B which variation display of the special symbols) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times, from among the two types of jackpot to any jackpot.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A of this example, as the operation schedule of the special winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the predetermined time (4.5 seconds) is set as the in-round interval time. After the elapse of seconds, the special winning opening 2005 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short-time opening of the special winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds) is started, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. However, when opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds), long-time operation (10 seconds) of the distribution pieces 2415 is started, and the second inlet 2008 is operated during the operation period of the distribution pieces 2415. Is set so that the game ball B can be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008, the state is to be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state) ) Is set.

  On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the operation schedule of the special winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is set to open the special winning opening 2005 for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short-time opening of the special winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds) is started, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. However, it is set so that the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008, the state is to be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state) ) Is set.

  As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are in the valid state in the 15th round (the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, and thus the high probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state is finished. However, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) in the second opening of the special winning opening 2005 in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period when the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the accepted game ball B to be distributed (accepted) to the second reception opening 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit game state A, since the probability that the game ball B will be received in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, the high probability state is controlled after the big hit game state ends. The probability of doing it is extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the special winning opening 2005 is only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult to receive the game ball B in the special winning opening 2005. Since the distribution piece 2415 operates only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period when the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the entrance 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit game state B, the probability that the game ball B will be received in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit game state ends. The probability of doing it is also extremely low.

  In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415, the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the distribution piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10 seconds). Have a single operation schedule that is set to), and such a distribution piece 2415 operation when starting the 15th round in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. I'm trying to start the schedule. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 as a single operation schedule, the amount of data regarding the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the 15R big hit game state A and the 15R big hit game state B of this example, the big prize hole 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big prize hole 2005 in each of the first to 14th rounds. Is set. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the distribution piece 2415 is not operated, and during that period, the game ball B is not in the second reception opening 2008 but in the first reception opening 2007. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, as an invalid state (as a general rule, the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008, after the jackpot gaming state ends. High probability state will not be controlled). In this way, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, the game balls B are distributed to the second entrance 2008 when the special winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. Without playing a game of (accepted), the game of whether the game ball B is accepted is simply played when the special winning opening 2005 is opened.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different as compared with the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, 15R jackpot A (15 rounds) which is relatively advantageous to the player. Distribution of 50 determination values for the high probability that the game ball B will be accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state with the eyes, and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the big hit game state is high) However, the probability of accepting the game ball B to the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends. The distribution of 50 determination values is set for a big hit which has a low probability of being controlled to a high probability state later). On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, of the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, the distribution of 65 determination values is set for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the distribution of 35 determination values is set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, during the big hit on the side of the first special symbol, since either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage for the player is decided, what kind of big hit is decided at the time of the first big hit. Can be noticed. Also, in the time saving state that is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004) is performed, but the second special At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, since it is determined to be the 15R big hit game A with a higher probability than at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, it is possible to pay attention to how much award ball amount can be obtained at the time of continuous play it can. Therefore, the game is not monotonous because the game characteristics change between the time of the first big hit and the time of the continuous vacation.

  Further, when the type of big hit is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as a process of step S2125, these lottery results (type of jackpot, out of reach, or out of order are instructed (a mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is shown. The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction result may be sent) to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the process of step S2126, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082), this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received determination result notification command and the variable pattern command, and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → medium decorative pattern. Display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed as described above.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 stop changing (stop symbol), is 15R of the jackpot related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command. When the big hit A is specified, it is decided to be the 15R big hit A pattern (a combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R big hit B is specified, it is decided to be the 15R big hit B symbol (common to the 15R big hit A symbol), and it fluctuates When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 1600 is variably stopped in either the 15R big hit A design or the 15R big hit B design, it is possible to determine that it is a big hit from the stop design of the decorative design. Although it is possible, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot symbol B, either the 15R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B cannot be discriminated.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing (stop symbol), when the reach symbol is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol symbol with the reach symbol is released. (A combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same.) If you determine the deviation, the deviation pattern that does not involve reach (the combination of the decoration patterns that are not the same. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set If it is done (step S2141), the type of big hit determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the big hit time fluctuation pattern table (not shown) according to the current game state are selected (step (S2142), if the reach flag is set (step S2143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S2144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are selected. If it is not set, that is, if it is out of the normal state (outside without executing reach effect) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S 2145).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2146), and the determined variation pattern is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S2147). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S2148). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, the variation pattern table selected and the variable random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, and by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super-reach effect is executed, the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, then as the process of step S2149, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S2083). At the time of updating, this process ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of shortening is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The variation time information of the special symbol that is set to about 12 seconds at the time of saving time is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. That is, in the variation pattern at the time of out-of-time selected at the time saving, compared to the variation pattern at the time of out-of-range selected at the time of non-time saving, the time required for the variable display control of the above-mentioned special symbol is extremely short. Variable time information of the symbol is set.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S2171. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S2082) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of this step S2173, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084), this process is ended.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S2084).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S2181. As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the production display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set and the count value of the time saving counter for setting the number of times of the time saving state is “0”. (Step S2183). Then, if the counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S2184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S2185). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). When it is determined in the processing of step S2183 that the count value of the hour / hour counter is “0”, or when it is determined that the hour / hour counter is not “0” in the processing of step S2185. At that time, the process proceeds to step S2187.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S2187), a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started is set (step S2189), and the jackpot gaming state is started (set the jackpot round start command). The waiting time (period during which a display to the effect that the big hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and the count value of the time saving counter is If it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning to "0"), the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S2192), this process is ended.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S2039).

  In the step S2189, the waiting time until the big hit game state is started is set in the interval timer, but in the process of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, the same in FIG. As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening / closing of the special winning opening 2005, and is in the valid state in the 15th round (the game ball B is received in the second receiving opening 2008, so that the big hit gaming state). After the completion of the above, the special winning opening opening / closing processing (step S2402) is set to a high probability state, and the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is set in the second receiving opening 2008. The distribution piece 2415 is driven and controlled so that it can be distributed, and in the 15th round Performing second receiving opening and closing process of monitoring the second receiving port 2008 whether the game ball B is received in the valid state (step S2403), in this order.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening / closing process (step S2402).

  Now, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the main winning opening 2005 When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opened for a long time and 0.5 seconds when opened for a short time) has passed from the open state of the special winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule of step S2412, or When the game balls B have won the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) in the open special winning opening 2005 (step S2413), the open special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). When it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 in the closed state (step S2415), the type of the big hit and the current round number are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

  If it is determined in the process of step S2411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When it is determined that a new round is started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state at the timing of opening the special winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S2417), (Step S2418) sets a big hit round start command according to the kind of big hit and a new round number as a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). When it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds when the special winning opening 2005 is opened. If it is the start time (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). When the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S2420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the big winning opening 2005 in the closed state or the big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in the open state (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. In addition, when it is determined that the new round will not be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state (the second opening in the same round or the like) (step S2418), or the valid state flag When it is determined that it is not the timing to set (not at the start of the 15th round) (step S2420), the closed special winning opening 2005 is controlled to the open state (step S2422), and step S2428. Move to. As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect according to the type of the big hit and the current number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command.

  It should be noted that the valid state flag indicates that the state is set to a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving opening 2008, so that the high probability state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished). It is a flag that indicates. In the 15th round out of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 in the second opening / closing processing for the second receiving opening (step S2403) described later is used as the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, the game ball B can be received in the second reception port 2008 by driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 that is distributed to one of the second reception ports 2008, and the game ball B is set to the valid state.

  Further, in the processing of step S2428, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a peripheral control board. A special winning opening ball entry command is set as the command transmitted to 1510 (step S2429), and this processing ends. As a result, when the special winning opening ball entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like produce an effect according to the acceptance of the game ball B into the special winning opening 2005. Can be performed by.

  If it is determined in the process of step S2417 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that When all the number of rounds is completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the jackpot execution flag is reset (step S2424). If it is determined that the second reception passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S2425), the high probability flag is set (step S2426), the time saving flag is set, and the counter value of the time saving counter is set. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuation of the time saving state (step S2427), this process is ended. If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, the time saving flag is set, and the time saving state is set in the time saving state counter value. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) has been set as the number of times to continue (step S2427), this process ends. In this way, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is set (the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag And the time saving flag is set to control to a high probability time saving state, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round). If it is determined that the time has been shortened, only the time saving flag is set and the low probability time saving state is controlled.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second inlet / outlet opening / closing process (step S2403).

  Now, in the processing of step S2431, if it is determined that the second entrance 2008 is in the open state (the game ball B is distributed to the second entrance 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), FIG. As shown in, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, according to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415, from the open state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when it is opened for a long time). , When a short time is 0.2 seconds) (step S2432), or when the current round (fifteenth round) is ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to a closed state (step S2432). (S2433), the second reception port 2008 in the open state is closed (the distribution ball 2415 causes the game ball B to swing to the first reception port 2007 side). Controlling the divided state) (step S2434).

  If it is determined in the process of step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second reception port 2008 (step S2435), the second reception port 2008 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S2436).

  Next, in the processing of step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving opening 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. Determines whether or not the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round while the valid state flag is being set (step S2438). When it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2438), the second receive in the valid state in the 15th round. When the second reception passage passage flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second reception passage passage flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. When the second acceptance passage command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this process ends. Thus, as long as the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second entrance passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. Since is not set, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state is over. When the second entrance passage command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, etc., which produces an effect according to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second entrance 2008 is provided. Can be performed by.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S2802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

  Then, in the normal symbol and the normal electric auditors product control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the above normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the universal symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S2805)
4. Ordinary symbol variation control stop time mode determined on the basis of the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal pattern variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal display of the function display unit 1400 normal symbol display Normal symbol stop processing to stop variable display of symbols (step S2806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the second starting opening door 2411 is rotated and the game to the second starting opening 2004 is performed. Ordinary electric accessory release process that executes a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball B (step S2807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S2802).

  Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 149, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2811.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and the holding number of the normal symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value, "4". It is determined whether or not (step S2812). In the processing of this step S2812, when it is determined that the number of holding of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not its maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol into the newly held state, the following steps S2813 to S2814 are performed. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S2813, the ordinary hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S2814, each random number acquired in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. .

  However, in the processing of the step S2812, when it is determined that the number of holding of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processes of steps S2813 to S2814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S2803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S2821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S2822, normally stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, general figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, while counting down the ordinary reserved number counter, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

  Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area. Store in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. Is stored, and various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols is stored is identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S2826), a time saving time universal figure hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S2826), and if the current game state is the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S2825), the non-time saving universal figure determination table (not shown) is selected (step). (S2827), the selected per-universal-drawing judgment table and the ordinary random number read out in step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing are compared (step S2828).

  In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the ordinary figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is short-time (low probability short time state, high probability short time state), It is provided with a non-time saving universal figure hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving (low probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time-saving, ordinary figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the figure figure hit judgment value indicating that each ordinary figure is won, The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, the game ball B is always won and the second starting opening door 2411 rotates to the second starting opening 2004. The game ball B is controlled so that it can be accepted.

  Also, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the universal figure determination value indicating that the ordinary random number has been won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. As described above, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the second winning opening door 2411 is rotated because the second starting opening door 2411 is rotated because the winning is not won. (2) It is not possible to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected ordinary figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that it is an ordinary figure hit (step S2829). ), After setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S2830), the regular symbol hit as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S2831), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, if it is determined that the symbol is out, the variation of the ordinary symbol An out-of-the-general symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the regular symbol) when the control is stopped is determined (step S2832). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2804) (step S2833), this process ends.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is always a win, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is extremely extreme. It is shortened to a very short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbols is a win, the second starting port 2004 is controlled in an open / close pattern in which it is closed as an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability of winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is constant and short, and the second start port 2004 is in the open state. It is much easier to win the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 due to the long time, and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2004 rather than the first starting port 2002. B can be awarded. Incidentally, in the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol does not always win, and the second starting opening 2004 is aimed at. Even the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting opening 2004.

  As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second starting opening 2004 is aimed, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting opening 2004, so the first starting opening 2002 In order for the game ball B to win, the game ball B must be shot (so-called “left hit”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 5a on the left side of the center role object 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge array at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is the obstacle nail. By abutting on N, various movements are given to the game ball B so that it flows down. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, it does not always win the first starting port 2002, and wins the first starting port 2002. The game ball B which is not played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower end of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to efficiently win the game ball B by aiming at the second starting port 2004 rather than at the first starting port 2002, so that the game is performed at the second starting port 2004. In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be shot (so-called “right hit”) aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 while aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is opened. The game ball B that has passed through is to win the second starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside), and the control of the non-time saving state is performed. Compared with the first starting port 2002 in the inside, the game ball B comes into the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

  Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, the probability of winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol when passing through the gate portion 2003 is extremely high, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long, so that the game ball B can easily enter the second starting port 2004, and further to the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely short as compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state, so in a short time. The variable display control of the special symbol (holding the variable display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when controlling to the time saving state after finishing the big hit game state, by hitting the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the big hit is again made in a short time. You can expect to win a lot of game balls B by controlling the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is one, the game to the second starting port 2004 is made. Even if the winning of the ball B occurs frequently, it is possible to increase the interest of the player and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[12. Behavior of pachinko machine when power is turned on]
In the present embodiment, as functions of the pachinko machine 1, a function of changing the setting of the setting value and a function of confirming and displaying the setting value are installed. Specifically, it is possible to change the setting of the setting value by executing the setting changing process of step S37 described above, and the setting value confirmation display is performed by executing the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 described above. It is possible to be done. When changing the setting of such a set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 can be operated. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating it. The RWM clear button 633z also has the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch, as described above.

  First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 (A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM with built-in main control is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. 151 (B) is the pachinko machine 1 power-on. 151 (C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, and FIG. 151 (C) shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when confirming the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. 2 is a time chart showing.

  As shown in FIG. 151, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10) and then performs the power failure clearing process (step S12). In the power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU operates the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch. It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). When determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch based on the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1313a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). That is, at the timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. The determination result is stored as operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z operates the pachinko machine while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. It is necessary to turn on the power of No. 1 and the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

  After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. Since the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) activates (boots) the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24), and the power failure notice signal When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination of the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, the preset setting value change permission condition is When the condition is satisfied, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the main control internal RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. In addition, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a preset setting value display permission is given. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at the timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. The determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as operation information, but the operation is continued until the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. It is supposed to maintain the memory of information. Then, at the timing ty, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value confirmation display process (step S38) is performed. It is decided to perform S28).

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), in the case of initializing the RAM with built-in main control, at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned on. In this way, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Is not operated, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is decided to initialize the main control internal RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the timing ty, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38). Step S38) is to be performed.

  In addition, when the RAM with built-in main control is initialized, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is not necessary for the pressing operation unit to be operated. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the RWM clear is performed. It is possible to change the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be one that is reset to the value 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control internal RAM (step S38) is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (B), when the setting value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. The setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. In this way, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Is turned on, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change process (step S37) is performed from the timing ty. .. After the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  When changing the setting of the set value, it is necessary that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, and that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. However, at the timing ty, it is not necessary that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and similarly, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the RWM clear is performed. It is possible to change the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated. Similarly, from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which it is turned off. It is possible to do. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation before the timing ty arrives, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty, It is necessary to change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, and further from the ON state of the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF operation state. This is because in the determination of step S222 of the setting change process, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This is because, when the switch is turned off, the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the RAM with main control (step S38) is completed after the setting change processing (step S37). Anything can be used. Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. The ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is initialized (step S38) after the setting change processing (step S37) from the timing ty. Any value may be reset until the value is reset to 0.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Is turned on, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the timing ty, it is decided to perform the set value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and the set value confirmation display processing (step S28) is started from the timing ty. I am going to do it. In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  It should be noted that in order to confirm and display the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing tx, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty. No need. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the setting key It is possible to change the state in which the switch 1311a is turned on from the state in which it is turned off. However, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation before the timing ty arrives, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty. After that, it is necessary to change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state again, and further from the ON state of the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF operation state. This is because in the determination in step S358 of the set value confirmation display process, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This is because the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the OFF state is changed from the ON state.

  In this example, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed at the timing t4. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set between the timing ty and the timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets the value to 0 may be used.

  Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the power-on process on the main control side, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is to set the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 151B and 151C, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The assumption is that the situation is continuing. In this respect, a situation in which the main body frame 4 has never been opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the time the timing tx arrives, or the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 does not move from the timing t3 to the timing tx. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from setting a value of 1 (setting a value of 0) as the second operation information. There is. This is because the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 during business hours of the game hall (when it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice), or the settings are illegally set. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in the present example, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The main frame 4 has never been opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the time the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is not opened between the timing t3 and the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM clearing is performed. The notification flag RCL-FLG can be set to a value of 1 to prevent the initialization of the main control internal RAM (step S38) from being disabled. Then, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent at least the trouble from starting the game itself.

  In the present embodiment, at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the setting key ON flag as the second operation information. The value of CS-FLG is set, and the operation information thereof is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives, and the operation information is stored at the timing ty. Based on this, it is determined whether the RAM with built-in main control is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. I'm trying to do. In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx and before the timing ty arrives, the operation mode of the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed. Even if there is, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the hall administrator mistakenly operates the operation mode of the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a. Even if the operation mode is changed, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained so as not to be changed, so that the pachinko machine 1 does not need to be turned on again, and the pachinko machine 1 does not need to be turned on again. After the power is turned on, the hall manager intends to promptly execute any one of the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), or set value confirmation display processing (step S28)). can do.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed without operating the setting key switch 1311a. In order to change the setting of the set value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a in addition to operating the power switch 630a. When performing the confirmation display, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. Then, at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. Is set, the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and at the timing ty, depending on which combination of the operation information, the hall manager Intended processing (any one of initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), and set value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is executed. For example, when the operation section is provided for initialization of the RAM with built-in main control, change of the setting value, and confirmation display of the setting value, the power switch 630 a It is necessary to provide three operation units in the above, but by changing the processing executed after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depending on the combination of operation information, in addition to the power switch 630a, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. It is only necessary to provide two operation parts for the setting key switch 1311a and the number of parts involved in the operation part can be saved.

  Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the power-on process on the main control side, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is to set a value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and as shown in FIGS. 151 (B) and 151 (C), for the period from timing tx to timing ty, The setting state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, regardless of whether the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, in the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, opening and closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be repeated any number of times. On the other hand, after the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 is moved to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. When it is closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx is reset, and at the timing ty, the setting change processing (step S37) and the set value confirmation display processing are performed. The setting change process (step S37) is performed at timing ty without performing (step S28) or resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at timing tx. Alternatively, it may be determined that the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is not performed. That is, even when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. May limit the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value. According to this, as described above, during the business hours of the game hall or the like, the setting is illegally changed under the situation where the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (the situation where the manager of the game hall is hard to notice). It is possible to prevent unauthorized access and setting confirmation.

  Further, in the present example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on process, the RAM clear notification flag is set as the first operation information on condition that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is temporarily operated. Although the value 1 is set in RCL-FLG, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed and held. You may make it a condition. Similarly, in step S18 of the power-on process on the main control side, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1 as the second operation information on condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON even temporarily. However, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, even if the hall manager accidentally touches the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a process not intended by the hall manager can be performed. It can be prevented from being executed.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted so as not to be performed. . That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, the hall manager changes the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although it is possible to change from the state in which it is turned off to the state in which it is turned off, the fraudulent activity monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted. . As a result, even when the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as an illegal act. It is possible to prevent this from being performed and to prevent the hindrance of regular work.

[12-1. Modification of behavior of pachinko machine when power is turned on]
In the above-described embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed when the main control internal RAM is initialized, when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is confirmed and displayed. The timing for determining whether or not the unit is operated is the same as the timing for determining whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, but the main body frame 4 is opened and set. The timing of determining whether or not there is an ON operation of the key may be different from the timing of determining whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. A modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main control-side power-on process. Further, FIG. 153 (A) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control internal RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. 153 (B) is a pachinko machine. FIG. 153 (C) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed when the machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a behavior of pachinko machine 1 at the time of performing. The RWM clear button 633z also has the function of the RAM clear switch, the function of the setting switching button, and the function of the error release switch, as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 153, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10) and then performs the power failure clearing process (step S12). In the power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

  At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S12). S14). When determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). That is, at the timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored as the first operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. ing. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z operates the pachinko machine while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. It is necessary to turn on the power of 1.

  After the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. Since the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) activates (boots) the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  At the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24), and the power failure advance notice signal When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned on (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch based on the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1313a is ON, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination result is stored as second operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. are doing. As described above, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time waiting process, while the main control MPU finishes the wait time waiting process at the timing ty1. The second operation information is stored in. Note that, as the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty1, at least 10 seconds (s), which is the waiting time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time waiting process (step S22), is set, so the setting key switch 1311a. The person who operates ON may turn on the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, The setting key switch 1311a may be turned on before the timing ty1 at which the control MPU completes the wait time waiting process.

  At the timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the main control MPU continues to step S20A or step S20B and the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. -Which combination of FLG values is determined (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, the preset setting value change permission condition is When the condition is satisfied, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the main control internal RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. In addition, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a preset setting value display permission is given. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at the timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, and the determination result is stored as the first operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, arrives thereafter. On the other hand, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination result is stored as second operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. However, the storage of the second operation information is to be maintained until the timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, arrives thereafter. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value confirmation display process ( It is decided to perform step S28).

  As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the RAM with built-in main control is initialized, at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. Must be operated. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when initializing the RAM with built-in main control, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned on at the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value 0 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation information. The data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to initialize the main control internal RAM (step S38) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the timing ty2, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38). Step S38) is to be performed.

  In addition, when the RAM with built-in main control is initialized, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx. It is not necessary that the pressing operation unit of the button 633z is operated. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, and thus before the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to change the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  When initializing the RAM with built-in main control, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the timing ty1, but at the timing tx or the timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is not operated. It may be turned on. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is stored. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. There is.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be one that is reset to the value 0 from the timing ty2 until the initialization of the RAM with built-in main control (step S38) is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (B), when the setting value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Must have been As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation. The data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change processing (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information, and the setting change processing (step S37) is performed from the timing ty2. . After the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty2, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

  In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty1 or the timing ty2, the RWM clear button 633z. It is not necessary that the pressing operation unit of is operated. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, and thus before the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to change the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

  Further, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing tx or the timing ty2. It does not have to be done. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is stored. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. There is.

  In this example, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be one that is reset to the value 0 from the timing ty2 until the initialization of the RAM with built-in main control (step S38) is completed. Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1, and the setting key is set at the timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is initialized (step S38) after the setting change processing (step S37) from the timing ty2. Any value may be reset until the value is reset to 0.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (C), when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Must not have been. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when confirming and displaying the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing ty1, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 1 as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main operation. The data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the timing ty2, it is decided to perform the set value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and the set value confirmation display processing (step S28) is started from the timing ty2. I am going to do it. In addition, after the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty2, when the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

  In addition, in order to confirm and display the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing tx or the timing ty2. It does not have to be done. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. However, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is stored. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. There is.

  Further, in this example, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing ty1, and the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed at the timing t4. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 from the timing ty2 until the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that can be reset to.

  Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the power-on process on the main control side, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 153 (B) and 153 (C), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The assumption is that the situation is continuing. In this respect, the body frame 4 is never opened to the outer frame 2 before the timing ty1 arrives, or the body frame 4 is not fitted to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing ty1. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from being set to a value of 1 (set to a value of 0) as the second operation information. There is. This is because the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 during business hours of the game hall (when it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice), or the settings are illegally set. This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in the present example, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on process. The main frame 4 has never been opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the time the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is not opened between the timing t3 and the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM clearing is performed. The notification flag RCL-FLG can be set to a value of 1 to prevent the initialization of the main control internal RAM (step S38) from being disabled. Then, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent at least the trouble from starting the game itself.

  In this embodiment, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, and the first operation information is used as the main control. The first operation information stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the MPU and stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. At the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after the timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set to the main control MPU. The second operation information stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) is stored at the timing ty1 until the timing ty2 arrives. Then, at timing ty2, based on the storage of the operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value confirmation display process ( Whether or not to perform step S28) is determined, and the determined processing is performed. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and is turned off. It is possible to freely change the state and the state. Then, at the timing ty1, the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed in the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. At the timing ty2 after that, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38) or the setting change process (step S37) is performed based on the storage of the operation information. Whether the display process (step S28) is to be performed is determined, and the determined process is performed. As a result, in the case of changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, the hall manager mistakenly turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3. Even if the operator forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1 by changing the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives. It is not necessary to turn the power of the pachinko machine 1 on again, and the processing intended by the hall manager after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized (initialization of the RAM with main control (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing) (Any of step S28) can be promptly executed. Further, in the case of initializing the RAM with built-in main control, even if the hall administrator mistakenly turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF operation during the period until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, it is not necessary to change the setting value again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the process intended by the hall manager (any one of initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change process (step S37), and setting value confirmation display process (step S28)) is promptly executed. be able to.

  As described above, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, It is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored arrives. Accordingly, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is not necessary to simultaneously operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is operated after operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. It is possible to perform an ON operation, and it is possible to facilitate the operation of the hall manager for a plurality of operation units.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when the RAM with built-in main control is initialized or the setting value is changed, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. The timing for operating the pressing operation unit of the 633z is the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, not the timing ty1 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. This is because the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is composed of a push-down switch that does not maintain the operation state, and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, until the timing ty1 arrives. , It is unclear whether or not the timing ty1 has arrived even if an attempt is made to continue operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, and therefore the hall manager operates the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. It may stop. Therefore, regarding the timing of operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated for a long period of time by setting the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is no longer necessary to continue, and the initialization of the main control internal RAM (step S38) and the setting change processing (step S37) can be surely executed as intended by the hall manager.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) has a system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process for starting (booting) is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. At the time of completing such initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510, a command for specifying that it is waiting for determination of whether or not there is an ON operation of the setting key at timing ty1 is issued to the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ), The setting key switch 1311a is output by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker during the period until the timing ty1 arrives after the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed. Is performing the setting key operation notification notifying that it can be changed to a state where is turned on. As the notification that the setting key can be operated, a voice that repeats "the setting key is being operated" is repeated, a message that "the setting key is being operated!" It is supposed that the lamp light emission is executed in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted so as not to be performed. . In other words, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty2, the hall manager changes from the state where the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to the state where it is not operated or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although it is possible to change the state from the ON state to the OFF state or from the OFF state to the ON state, the magnetic sensor 2470 is used to monitor fraudulent activity and the vibration sensor 3005. It is restricted so as not to execute fraud monitoring using. As a result, even when the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as an illegal act. It is possible to prevent this from being performed and to prevent the hindrance of regular work.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machine in change permission status and confirmation display status]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the state where the change permission of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting of the set value, and FIGS. 155 and 156 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the set value. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different in the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed as compared with the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. It has become a thing. Further, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the set value is almost the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the change of the setting of the set value, but the RWM clear button 633z when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the pressing operation unit is not operated, it is different in that various information at the time of turning off the power is retained even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 154, when changing the setting value, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state. In some cases, it is necessary to cut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the pachinko machine 1 is powered off), when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened (timing t1), the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by operating the setting key switch 1311a (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (timing t3). The value can be changed (the change permitted state). In such a change permitted state, the set value (set values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 which operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off (timing t4). That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be changed (the change permission state), and the setting value is changed after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It becomes impossible to change the setting (unchangeable state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game. It will be in a state.

  When changing the setting of the set value, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until that, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined in step S222 of the setting change process that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and then the period from timing t3 to timing t4 The interrupt permission setting of step S52 is prohibited so as not to be performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed as compared with normal power-on. Then, until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the main control side timer interrupt process is not started, so the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control of step S114. The process, the normal symbol in step S116, the normal electric auditors product control process, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be changed (the change permitted state), but the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 It does not make the input of the detection signal effective when the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the gate section 2003, and the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, the second starting port. It is a special period during which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the special winning opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, and the like are not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 155, when performing confirmation display of the currently set set value, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered-on. If the pachinko machine 1 is in the off state, it is necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the pachinko machine 1 is powered off), when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened (timing t1), the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by operating the setting key switch 1311a (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), it is possible to perform confirmation display of the set value ( Confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, the current setting value (the setting value among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Then, by turning the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position (timing t4). ), The setting display 1310g is switched from a state in which the set value is displayed to a state in which the set value is not displayed. That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value The confirmation display cannot be performed (unrecognizable state). Then, by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game. It will be in a state.

  When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process, but is set at the timing t4. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the set value confirmation display process of step S28 is not completed (it is not determined that the set key switch 1311a is turned off in step S358 of the set value confirmation display process), and from timing t3. During the period up to the timing t4, the interrupt permission setting in the subsequent step S52 is prohibited so as not to be performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in the step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Then, until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the main control side timer interrupt process is not started, so the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control of step S114. The process, the normal symbol in step S116, the normal electric auditors product control process, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), but the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 It does not make the input of the detection signal effective when the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the gate section 2003, and the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol, the second starting port. It is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the special winning opening door 2413, the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415, and the like are not performed.

[13-1. Special design, various ball detection, payout device]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is not started in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) It is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (variation) It becomes impossible state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes possible (variable state).

  In addition, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6, the detection signal when the game ball B wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 While validating the input, the special symbol display of the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes incapable of performing variable display of the special symbol (immutable state B). In this way, the unchangeable state A and the unchangeable state B are the same in that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be performed, but the unvariable state. In A, the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, whereas in the unchangeable state B, the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 is used. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B wins the second starting opening 2004.

  Also, at the time of turning off the power at the timing t0, if the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is being performed, or if the variable display of the special symbol is stored as a hold, When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the setting changing process of the step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then, in a step S38, a specific region out of all the regions of the main control internal RAM. Since it is cleared except for, the information regarding the variable display of the special symbol will be lost. Therefore, after the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is changed, but the variable display of the special symbol, which has been interrupted when the power is turned off, is not restarted, Further, when the power is cut off, the variable display of the special symbol stored as a hold is not performed.

  Also, in the fluctuable state, some fraudulent act was performed and a fraud related error (for example, a severe error in magnetic detection or vibration detection) that made it impossible to play games such as variable display of special symbols occurred. In this case, the peripheral control MPU performs a display process of the fraudulent-related error information for notifying that to a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600) or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of light emitting devices). The LED 121a, the plurality of LEDs 213a, and the like) perform a light emission process in a fraudulent-related error mode for notifying the fact, or inform a predetermined sound output device (for example, the lower speaker 153a) of that fact. Illegal related error output processing is performed to perform related error sound output processing, but during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. The change permission state, but is an inability to perform the variable display of the special symbols state (variation disabled state A), is not carried out the fraud-related error output processing described above. In the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to change the setting value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of the fraudulent-related error output processing intended to suggest that the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing the fraud-related error output processing, all of the fraud-related error information display processing, the fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and the fraud-related error sound output processing described above are not performed. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify that the output processing of the fraudulent-related error sound that may reduce the work efficiency of the operator at a high volume is not performed, but the other processing is performed normally.

  Further, since the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is not started in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 , When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the special winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors are mainly controlled. There is no input by the MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be input and treated as invalid. In this way, in the case of invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation of special symbol) Display), the payout of the game ball B is not performed anymore, whereby the game ball B is the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting value. Even if the player enters 2004, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second entrance 2008, the payout of the game ball B is made. , The high probability state is not given anymore, so that the game ball B is the special winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the Even if a ball enters the second entrance 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

  It should be noted that the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to various winning openings and gates (gates) in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h described above. It becomes possible to exclude it from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid such a situation that the value is measured (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the first start opening 2002 , When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, from the detection sensors corresponding to each. The main control MPU inputs the detection signal of, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. In this way, in the case of validating the detection of the game ball B, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, lottery and symbol fluctuation (variable display of special symbol) The gaming balls B can be paid out. Similarly, in the case of validating the detection of the game ball B, when the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second entrance 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the game ball B is set in the "valid state" as a state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

  In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, the end time of the change permission state, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the first receiving opening 2007. , When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second entrance 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as an effective one. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid at the time when the main body frame 4 is closed or at the time when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at the timing t4. This is because it is difficult to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is substantially difficult to start the game. Because there is.

  Further, in the present example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out the gaming balls B from the payout device 580. That is, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the payout device 580 can pay out the game balls B. However, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning openings and the gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 in the change permitted state, the game ball B is not paid out. ..

  At the time of turning off the power at timing t0, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating, the main control board 1310 inputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z to the payout control board 633, and the payout control built-in RAM is operated. Since the entire area is cleared, the information regarding the payout of the game ball B will be lost. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580, but the payout of the game ball B which has not been paid out at the time when the power is cut off. It will not restart.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114), like the change permission state. Since it has not started, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The state becomes impossible (unchangeable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes possible (variable state).

  In addition, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6, the detection signal when the game ball B wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 While validating the input, the special symbol display of the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 becomes incapable of performing variable display of the special symbol (immutable state B). In this way, the unchangeable state A and the unchangeable state B are the same in that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be performed, but the unvariable state. In A, the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, whereas in the unchangeable state B, the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 is used. The difference is that the input of the detection signal is made valid when the game ball B wins the second starting opening 2004.

  Also, at the time of turning off the power at the timing t0, if the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is being performed, or if the variable display of the special symbol is stored as a hold, , When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z (when changing the setting of the set value), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. At this point, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and subsequently, in step S38, the specific control area is cleared out of the entire area of the main control internal RAM, so that the special symbol changes. Although the information regarding the display is lost, the timing t is reached without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when confirming the set value is displayed), the setting value of step S28 of the main control power-on process is set when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Although the confirmation display process ends, the process of step S38 for clearing a specific region out of the entire region of the main control built-in RAM is not executed as after the setting change process of step S37. Information will be retained. For this reason, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is ended, the variable display of the special symbol, which has been interrupted at the time of turning off the power, is restarted with the opportunity of changing to the variable state. Moreover, when the power is cut off, the variable display of the special symbol stored as a hold is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the fluctuating state, some fraudulent activity is performed and it becomes impossible to play a game such as a variable display of special symbols. When an error) occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs a display process of fraudulent-related error information for notifying the display device (for example, the effect display device 1600) of the fact, or a predetermined light emitting device. (For example, a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) is subjected to light emission processing in an unauthorized-related error mode for notifying the fact, or for a predetermined sound output device (eg, lower speaker 153a) Although the fraudulent-related error output processing for outputting the fraud-related error sound for notifying the effect is performed, the timing t3 to the timing t In the confirmation display state, which is the period up to, as in the case of the change permission state, although the variable display of the special symbol is impossible (variable state A), the above-mentioned fraud-related error output processing is performed. I try not to do it. In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to perform the confirmation display of the set value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of the fraudulent-related error output processing intended to suggest that the occurrence of an event that obstructs the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing the fraud-related error output processing, all of the fraud-related error information display processing, the fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and the fraud-related error sound output processing described above are not performed. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify that the output processing of the fraudulent-related error sound that may reduce the work efficiency of the operator at a high volume is not performed, but the other processing is performed normally. In addition, in order not to perform the fraud-related error output processing, the prohibition processing is performed according to the difference in the events that obstruct the work of the hall clerk from the control performed in the change permission state described above. The types and the number of may be different. For example, in the change permission state, if any fraud related error occurs, all of the fraud related error output processing is not performed, while in the confirmation display state, if any fraud related error is output, fraud related error output Do not perform only a part of the processing, or in the change permission state, if some fraud-related error occurs, do not perform all the fraud-related error output processing, while the confirmation display state Then, it is possible to exemplify not performing a part of the fraud-related error output processing when some fraud-related error occurs.

  Further, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is not started, as in the change permission state, so that the first start port 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first winning entrance 2007, the second winning entrance 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the winning portion and the gate portion 2003, the detection sensor corresponding to each The main control MPU does not input the detection signal from and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be input and treated as invalid. In this way, in the case of invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation of special symbol) Display), the payout of the game ball B is not performed anymore, whereby the game ball B is the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the player enters 2004, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second entrance 2008, the payout of the game ball B is made. , The high probability state is not given anymore, so that the game ball B is the special winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the Even if a ball enters the second entrance 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control MPU does not input the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning openings and gates (gates). At the same time, the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h described above. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (the target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining due to a ball slid (ball clogging) in the game area 5a is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the value is measured (added to the out number counter).

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the first start opening 2002 , When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, from the detection sensors corresponding to each. The main control MPU inputs the detection signal of, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective. In this way, in the case of validating the detection of the game ball B, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, lottery and symbol fluctuation (variable display of special symbol) The gaming balls B can be paid out. Similarly, in the case of validating the detection of the game ball B, when the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second entrance 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the game ball B is set in the "valid state" as a state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

  In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, the end of the confirmation display state, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the first receiving opening 2007. , When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the second entrance 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as an effective one. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid at the time when the main body frame 4 is closed or at the time when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at the timing t4. This is because it is difficult to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is substantially difficult to start the game. Because there is.

  Further, in the present example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out the gaming balls B from the payout device 580. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is possible to pay out the game balls B from the payout device 580, similarly to the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning openings and gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, or the special winning opening 2005 in the confirmation display state, the payout of the game ball B is not performed. .

  At the time of turning off the power at timing t0, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the push operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 while operating the button (when changing the setting of the set value), at that time, the main control board 1310 operates the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633. By inputting a signal (detection signal) and clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM, information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 (when the set value is confirmed and displayed), the payout control internal RAM of the payout control RAM is stored at that time. Because it does not execute a process of clearing the area, so that the information about the payout of the game ball B is held. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the payout device 580 can pay out the game ball B, which is an unpaid game ball B when the power is cut off. It is supposed to resume the payout.

  Further, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on in the setting display 1310g). 6 set value) is displayed, but as described above, when the power is cut off, in the confirmation display state in which the unpaid gaming ball B is being paid out When a related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies the display device (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633) different from the setting display device 1310g to that effect. The error information display process is performed, or the predetermined light emitting device (for example, the plurality of LEDs 121a or the plurality of LEDs 213a) is notified to that effect. And to perform a payout associated error output processing for light emission processing notifications to payout related errors manner. As a result, in the confirmation display state, whether or not the payout of the game ball B that has not been paid out has been completed at the time of turning off the power source, or a payout-related error such as running out of a ball has occurred and the payout of the game ball B has been performed. It is possible to determine whether or not there is, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing. Since payout-related error processing is an important event for smooth game play later, payout maintenance will be emphasized regardless of the work efficiency of the hall clerk, and the above-described fraud-related error processing will be performed. There is no prohibition, and the same processing as normal is performed without any suppression.

  As described above, when the power is cut off at the timing t0, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation section (when confirming the set value is displayed), at that time, the game ball that is unpaid at the time when the power is cut off. The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the special symbol (first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device) of the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol) , Second special symbol) because it is a state (variable state A) in which variable display cannot be performed, at the time of turning off the power at the timing t0, the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. When the display is performed or when the variable display of the special symbol is stored as a hold, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If (when confirming the set value is displayed), at that point, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was cut off is restarted, or the power is turned off. Never or performs variable display of the special symbols are stored as pending at the time of the cut off. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the variable display of the special symbol, which has been interrupted at the time when the power is cut off, is resumed, or is stored as a hold when the power is cut off. It is a period in which it is possible to only pay out the unpaid gaming ball B when the power is cut off, while preventing the progress of the game due to the variation display of the special symbol. . For example, at the time of closing the hall, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the power is cut off when the power is cut off. However, the player loses by the amount of the unplayed game ball B, but after that, by turning on the pachinko machine 1 and putting it in the confirmation display state, the progress of the game after the power is cut off is prevented. At the same time, when the power is cut off, only the unpaid gaming balls B can be paid out, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing.

  As a modification example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned off, the variable display of the special symbol is disabled, and while the game progress after the power is cut off is blocked, the unpaid gaming ball B is cut off when the power is cut off. While the payout period can only be performed, the set value confirmation display may not be performed. In addition, when an operation section different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided, and the operation is turned on by the hall clerk, the operation section is turned off. , It is in a state where it is impossible to display the variation of the special symbol, and while the game progress is prevented after the hall clerk turns the operation ON, only the payout of the game ball B which has not been paid when the hall clerk turns the operation ON May be set as a period during which it is possible. Even in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, while the progress of the game during the period when the hall clerk is in the operation ON state is stopped, the payout of the game ball B which has not been paid out when the hall clerk is in the operation ON state It is possible to do only that, it is possible to prevent the player from losing.

  As described above, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it becomes the fluctuable state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be variably displayed. , While the variable display of the special symbol stored as a hold is not performed when the power is cut off, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, ends, the variable state is set. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol stored as a hold when the power is cut off is performed. More specifically, when a ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the variable display of the special symbol, a special random number is stored as a hold in the RAM with built-in main control, but at the timing t0, the power source is turned on. When the special random number is stored as a hold in the main control built-in RAM at the time of shutting off, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power-off process. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 and the change permission state is entered, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and when the change permission state ends, the change is permitted and stored in the main control internal RAM. Since the game backup information stored is cleared, the special random number stored as a hold is also lost.

  In the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off is erased. Therefore, the function display unit 1400 is added to the hold display on the effect display device 1600. The hold display on the hold number display of is not displayed. Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the player enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid, No special random number is stored as a new hold.

  By the way, when the special random number stored as a hold before the power is turned off is not erased at the end of the change permission state, the following harmful effects occur. In this example, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the larger the number of big hit determination values set in the big hit determination table so that the big hit probability becomes higher. When changing the setting value in the permitted state, if the low setting value (for example, the setting value 1) is changed to the high setting value (for example, the setting value 6), the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. Since the special random number increases and the jackpot probability increases, the special random number that was out of the set value before the power shutdown may be a big hit in the set value after the end of the change permission state. On the other hand, when changing the setting value in the change permitted state, if the high setting value (for example, the setting value 6) is changed to the low setting value (for example, the setting value 1), the result of the jackpot determination is Since the special random number that is a big hit decreases and the big hit probability becomes low, there is a possibility that the special random number that was a big hit in the setting value before the power was cut off will become out of the setting value after the end of the change permission state. . In this regard, in this example, by deleting the special random number stored as a hold at the end of the change permission state, the result of the big hit determination is changed before the power is shut down and after the change permission state is ended. It is possible to prevent a situation in which fairness is lost. In particular, when a person who is not the hall administrator changes the setting value in a change-permitted state due to a fraudulent act, he or she tries to change the setting value to a high setting value (for example, the setting value 6). For example, even when the setting value is changed to 6), the result of the big hit determination is not changed to the big hit, and it is possible to prevent a person other than the hall manager from performing an illegal act. In addition, when the hall manager changes the setting value in the change permitted state, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off is erased, so that no disadvantage is given to the player. It is preferable to turn off the power in a state where there is no hold and then change the setting of the set value in the change permitted state.

  In addition, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, not only when changing from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) before power-off to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), Even when the set value before power-off is maintained, the special random number stored as a hold is erased at the end of the change permission state. For example, when a person who is not the hall administrator changes the setting value in a change-permitted state due to a fraudulent act, he or she tries to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, the setting value 6), but before the power is turned off. The setting value of is a high setting value, and it may not be necessary to change the high setting value. Even in such a case, by deleting the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off at the end of the change permission state, the special random number that was likely to be a big hit at the high setting value before the power was shut down. Since the opportunity to make a jackpot determination based on it is lost, it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing an illegal act.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 and the state is changed to the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and is stored in the main control internal RAM when the confirmation display state ends. Since the game backup information is not cleared, the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off is held. In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if the player enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid, No special random number is stored as a new hold. In such a confirmation display state, only setting confirmation of the set value is performed, and the set value is not changed unlike the change permitted state. In other words, even if the person who is not the hall administrator confirms the setting of the setting value in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent acts, the special random number stored as a hold will be Since the result of the big hit judgment does not change after the end and there is no profit from fraudulent acts, keep the special random number stored as a hold before the power is shut off even when the confirmation display state ends. I am trying.

  In addition, when a person who is not the hall administrator confirms the setting of the set value in the confirmation display state due to a fraudulent act, he / she accesses the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 in some way while pretending to be playing a game normally. If the illegally confirmed setting value is predicted, and the illegally confirmed setting value is the disadvantageous setting content (for example, the setting value 1 having the lowest jackpot probability), the advantageous setting content ( For example, it is conceivable that the pachinko machine 1 having the highest jackpot probability 6) is sought and immediately left. In this regard, in this example, when the setting value is confirmed in the confirmation display state, the hold is retained without being erased. It is possible to make it difficult to take an uncomfortable action of "leaving away from the seat." Also, by monitoring such an uncomfortable action, it is possible to easily catch a person who makes an unauthorized setting confirmation. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person other than the hall administrator from making unauthorized settings confirmation.

  Further, in order to further enhance the deterrence of fraudulent activity, in the confirmation display state, while holding the special random number stored as a hold before power-off, in addition to the hold display on the effect display device 1600, a function display unit is also provided. The hold display on the hold number display device 1400 is also temporarily hidden so that it is displayed as if the special random number stored as hold is no longer present, as in the change-permitted state. As a result, it is possible for the wrongdoer to misunderstand that the hold has disappeared, and to abandon the continuation of the game after illegally confirming the setting. It should be noted that in order to effectively exert such an effect of deterring fraudulent activities, not only the confirmation display state but also a predetermined return timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is closed or at a predetermined time) after the confirmation display state ends. The hold display may be set to the non-display state for a period until the arrival of (elapsed time).

[13-2. About jackpot games and launchers]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is not started in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. The big winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the big winning opening 2005, and the distribution piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving slot 2007 or the second receiving slot 2008 are operated. It becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. The special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. Accordingly, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6, the big winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. The game ball B can be inserted into the special winning opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

  At the time of turning off the power at timing t0, when the big winning game is being executed and the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operating, at the time of turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. , The setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and subsequently, in step S38, the specific control area is cleared out of the entire area of the main control internal RAM, so that the big hit game is being executed ( Information regarding the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 being operated) will be lost. Therefore, after the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, ends, the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated, but the power is interrupted when the power is cut off. The big hit game that is being performed is not restarted, and the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are not operated.

  As described above, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is not started in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the respective winning openings. The main control MPU does not input, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the special winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second entrance 2008, The payout and the addition of the high-probability state are not performed anymore. As a result, the game ball B is the special winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the setting value. Even if the player enters the second entrance 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

  Further, in this example, the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state. The special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated at the timing of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at a timing t5 or at a timing of a predetermined time after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at a timing t4. It may be in a possible state. This is because it is difficult to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is substantially difficult to start the game. Because there is.

  Although the main control timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process of step S113) is not started in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the firing by the handle 182 is performed in the change permission state. In consideration of performing operation inspection and the like, in the period, the logic of the launch permission signal for informing that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is set, When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B can be launched. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process of step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the change permission state is set. Even after the end, the state in which the game ball B can be fired is continued when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to operate the handle 182 before the closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B. The game can be started immediately after closing.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is performed like the change permission state. Since it has not started, the special winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the special winning opening 2005, and the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. The distribution piece 2415 cannot be operated. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52. The special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. Accordingly, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6, it is possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 as the big hit game. The game ball B can be inserted into the special winning opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.

  At the time of turning off the power at timing t0, if the big winning game is being executed and the special winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating, the timing is obtained while operating the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at t3 (when the setting value is changed), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and the setting of step S37 of the main control power-on process is performed. The change processing is ended, and subsequently, in step S38, the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed (the operation of the big winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415). Information about the middle) is lost, but the pachinko machine 1 does not operate the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing t3. If the power is turned on (when the setting value confirmation display is performed), the setting value switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, and the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 of the main control power-on processing is ended. However, since the processing of step S38 for clearing a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is not executed as after the setting change processing of step S37, the big hit game is being executed (the big winning opening door 2413). And (the operation of the distribution piece 2415) is held. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, ends, it is possible to operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415. As a trigger, the big hit game suspended when the power is cut off is restarted, and the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B before restarting the big hit game which is interrupted at the time of turning off the power at timing t5. Immediately after the game is restarted, the game ball B can be efficiently put into the special winning opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008.

  As described above, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process of step S104) is not started in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of them. The main control MPU does not input, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the special winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, The payout and the addition of the high-probability state are not performed anymore. As a result, the game ball B is the special winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the player enters the second entrance 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

  In addition, in this example, the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state. The special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated at the timing of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at a timing t5 or at a timing of a predetermined time after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at a timing t4. It may be in a possible state. This is because it is difficult to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is substantially difficult to start the game. Because there is. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the big hit game interrupted when the power is turned off is restarted from the end of the confirmation display state, before the big hit game is restarted. It is difficult to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, but by delaying the restart of the jackpot game which is interrupted when the power is cut off, before the jackpot game is restarted. It becomes easy to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be efficiently put into the special winning opening 2007 or the second entrance 2008 immediately after the big hit game is restarted. .

  Further, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the emission permission signal setting process of step S113) is not started as in the change permission state, but the confirmation display is performed. In consideration of performing an inspection of the firing operation by the handle 182 in the state, a firing permission signal for notifying that the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is permitted to fire the game ball B during that period. The logic is set so that the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process of step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, and the change permission state is set. Even after the end, the state in which the game ball B can be fired is continued when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to operate the handle 182 before the closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B. The game can be started immediately after closing.

[13-3. About production devices and production materials]
As shown in FIG. 154, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and a predetermined screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display images. Then, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker is used. The setting change notification is performed to notify that the setting value setting is being changed. As the notification of this setting change, a voice that repeats "setting change", a message "Setting change!" Is displayed, and a lamp is emitted in a color corresponding to the set value of 1 to 6 in the selection operation process. I have decided. Further, the setting change notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change permitted state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (such as the display of "the frame is open" and the sound), but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification is given. It is supposed that the notification during the setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing the above. The main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, the setting change notification is given priority over the main frame opening notification, and the main frame opening notification is given after the setting change notification is completed. The form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, until the predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the variation of the symbol and the big hit game by the output of the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. The game start notification for notifying that the game can be started is executed.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in addition to the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also notifies the setting change notification as described above. Running. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator, an ordinary symbol indicator, an ordinary reserved indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special reserved number indicator, and a second special indicator. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirmation-in-progress display device including one LED for indicating that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LEDs of the setting changing display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display are turned off. As a result, in the change-permitted state, it is possible to know that the game is not proceeding by the notification from the function display unit 1400.

  Further, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, various winning prizes such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate unit 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning openings and gates are output by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, even though it is not the period in which the game should be played in the change permitted state. The warning effect A for notifying that the game ball B has entered the section is executed. This warning effect A is executed prior to the setting change notification and the main frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is to be executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification and the body frame opening notification.

  Further, in a normal state in which the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, but such a setting key is set to the ON state. In the case, the warning effects B and C for notifying that the setting key has been turned on illegally by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in the state where the design variation is normally performed, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, The warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where the design change is not normally performed, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Running C Further, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, at the time of executing the warning effects B and C, the effect being executed is stopped and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbols are changed. Note that the warning effects B and C perform the effects in the same manner, but the effects may be performed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not the symbols are being changed.

  In addition, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). This enables the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600 to be adjusted stepwise. That is, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the screen in steps. Specifically, by pressing and holding the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image indicating a five-step adjustment status depending on the time of pressing and holding, and a light amount). After displaying one of the gauge images), each time the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is further short-pressed, the volume and light amount are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2). ...), and the volume and light amount can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during the period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 during the change of the symbol is being executed, the effect operation unit 160 is in a standby state for being operated, so that the effect operation unit 160 is set. Even if it is operated, the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the performance member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is being performed. That is, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, while changing the state of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to be impossible (variable state A), the main body The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed. Such effect members are each capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. It is supposed that such confirmation and accurate positioning are performed so that the effect member waits at the initial position. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during the change.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, and the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is not performed, the fluctuation permission state or the confirmation display state is set. Since the main control side timer interrupt process is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 as described above, the function display unit is immediately displayed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It becomes a state (variable state) in which the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 1400 can be performed. However, in such a case, the state shifts to the fluctuable state without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, and therefore, for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the initial operation of the effect member, when the change pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern change, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the change pattern. It may not be possible, and the opportunity for operating the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the change permitting state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to perform the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (invariable state A In addition, since the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed, the initial operation of the effect members is completed when the movable state is changed to after the end of the change permission state. Is more likely to be. As a result, even after the change permission state is ended, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol change, without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member, The effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern, and the information obtained from the effect contents is not missed.

  However, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Therefore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the completion of the initial operation of the effect member in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the effect member is initially set. After the completion of the operation, the production using the production member can be executed. That is, the timing for turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member. In either case, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to change the symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and a predetermined screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display images. Then, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, like the change permission state, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600 or The output from the lamp and the speaker is performing the confirmation display notification for notifying that the setting value is being confirmed and displayed. As the notification during confirmation display, a voice that repeats "Confirmation is displayed", a message "Confirmation is being displayed!", And a lamp light emission in a color corresponding to the set values of 1 to 6 that have been set are executed. I have decided. The notification during confirmation display is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed prior to the body frame opening notification that is performed when the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, normally the main body frame open notification (such as the display of "the frame is open" or voice) is performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is given. It is supposed that the notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing. Note that the main frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification has priority over the main frame opening notification, and the main frame opening notification is given after the confirmation display notification ends. The form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, until the predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the variation of the symbol and the big hit game by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp and the speaker. The game start notification for notifying that the game can be started is executed.

  After the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the jackpot that is interrupted when the power is cut off is triggered by the state in which the special winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. Although it is possible to restart the game and operate the special winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, as shown in FIG. 156, when the big hit game is restarted, the image and the lamp of the effect display device 1600, By the output from the speaker, the jackpot game restart notification is executed to notify that the jackpot game which has been interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted and the jackpot opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operated. Before resuming the jackpot game, the jackpot game 2413 or shaking is waiting during execution of the jackpot game which is interrupted when the power is cut off by the output of the image, the lamp and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. A jackpot game standby notification may be executed to notify that the operation of the piece 2415 is on standby. As a result, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the game ball B to be launched before the jackpot game is restarted, and the jackpot opening 2007 or the second entrance 2008 can be played efficiently immediately after the jackpot game is restarted. Ball B can be entered.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, similar to the change permission state, in addition to the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker as the confirmation display notification described above, Notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator, an ordinary symbol indicator, an ordinary reserved indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special reserved number indicator, and a second special indicator. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirmation-in-progress display device including one LED for indicating that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LEDs of the confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 are turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to know that the game is not proceeding by the notification from the function display unit 1400.

  In the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, various winning prizes such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate unit 2003, even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning holes and gates are displayed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, even though it is not the period in which the game should be played in the confirmation display state. The warning effect A for notifying that the game ball B has entered the section is executed. This warning effect A is executed prior to the notification during confirmation display and the notification for opening the main frame. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is to be executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display notification and the main body frame opening notification.

  Further, in a normal state in which the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, but such a setting key is set to the ON state. In the case, the warning effects B and C for notifying that the setting key has been turned on illegally by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker are executed. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in the state where the design variation is normally performed, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, The warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where the design change is not normally performed, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Running C Further, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, at the time of executing the warning effects B and C, the effect being executed is stopped and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbols are changed. Note that the warning effects B and C perform the effects in the same manner, but the effects may be performed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not the symbols are being changed.

  In addition, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). This enables the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600 to be adjusted stepwise. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected and the volume output from the speaker can be detected, as in the change permitted state. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 in a stepwise manner. Specifically, by pressing and holding the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image indicating a five-step adjustment status depending on the time of pressing and holding, and a light amount). After displaying one of the gauge images), each time the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is further short-pressed, the volume and light amount are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2). ...), and the volume and light amount can be determined by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time. However, during the period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 during the change of the symbol is being executed, the effect operation unit 160 is in a standby state for being operated, so that the effect operation unit 160 is set. Even if it is operated, the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

  Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the performance member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (For example, the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is being performed. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, it is impossible to perform variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (unchangeable). While in the state A), the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed. Such effect members are members capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect members, each of the effect members is sequentially or simultaneously performed in a predetermined operation pattern. By performing the operation, it is possible to confirm whether the effect member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position, or to perform accurate alignment so that the effect member waits at the initial position. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during the change.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, and the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is not performed, the fluctuation permission state or the confirmation display state is set. Since the main control side timer interrupt process is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 as described above, the function display unit is immediately displayed after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It becomes a state (variable state) in which the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 1400 can be performed. However, in such a case, the state shifts to the fluctuable state without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, and therefore, for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the initial operation of the effect member, when the change pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern change, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the change pattern. It may not be possible, and the opportunity for operating the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to perform the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (invariable state A ), The initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is being performed. Therefore, when the movable state is changed after the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect members is completed. Is more likely to be. As a result, even after the confirmation display state is finished, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol change is transmitted, without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member, The effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern, and the information obtained from the effect contents is not missed.

  However, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Therefore, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the effect member is completed, the effect member is initialized. After the completion of the operation, the production using the production member can be executed. That is, the timing for turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member. In either case, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to change the symbol.

  Further, in the case where the body frame 4 and the game board 5 are respectively provided with effect members, at least the initial operation of the effect members installed in the game board 5 is executed in advance, and the effect members are installed in the body frame 4. You may make it delay the initial operation | movement of the produced member until "after the closing of the main body frame 4 at the timing t5." This is because the body frame 4 is opened during the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value, and the main body frame 4 is closed by the closing operation after the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is completed. An impact will be generated on the frame 4. For this reason, when the main body frame 4 is closed, there is a possibility that the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 may not operate normally or that the initial position may be displaced. By starting the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 after the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to cope with such a situation.

  In addition, after initializing each of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 sequentially or simultaneously, when the initial operation of each of the effect members is not normally completed (each effect member) If there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time by the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of, or if there is a performance member that is not detected at the initial position at the predetermined time, the re-initialization is performed. Even if there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after performing the operation or retry operation), execute the effect using the effect member that was not completed normally during the pattern change. It is supposed to be restricted not to do it. Here, as described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, and when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is not performed, the pachinko machine is not displayed. Immediately after the power of the machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol display of the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be variably displayed (variable state), and the initial operation of the effect member is performed. . In this example, when the initial operation of the effect member in such a situation is not normally completed, the player feels an uncomfortable feeling that the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position during the special symbol variation display. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON, and the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed. If there is not, one of the effect members is detected at the initial position at a predetermined time after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (at the time when it is assumed that the initial operation of each effect member is completed and the player is positioned at the initial position). If not, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the output from the effect display device 1600 image, the lamp, and the speaker.

  On the other hand, when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation during the setting change of the setting value (change permitted state) or the confirmation display of the setting value (confirmation display state), the regular setting change or confirmation display In order to avoid obstruction of the work, even if the effect member is stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is suppressed. After the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the output of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker. Note that the initial position error notification is started after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is finished, but it is a specification to be started in advance when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation. May be. Further, at the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation, of the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp and the speaker, a notification that does not hinder the operation of the regular setting change or the confirmation display ( For example, the specification may be such that only the lamp) is executed first.

  As a modification example, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, The variable display of the symbols is made impossible, and the progress of the game is blocked, while the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are arranged. While the initial operation is performed, the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value may not be performed. In addition, when an operation section different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided, and the operation is turned on by the hall clerk, the operation section is turned off. , It is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols, and while the game progress is prevented after the hall clerk turns the operation ON, the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. It may be a period to be seen. Even in such a case, after the hall clerk has turned off the operation, even if the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the pattern change, the initial operation of the effect member is affected. Without being performed, the effect member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern, and the information obtained from the effect contents can be prevented from being missed.

  As described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the volume output from the speaker, the light amount output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to adjust. More specifically, when changing the setting of the set value or confirming the setting of the set value, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3. The wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed before the setting change process of step S37 or the set value confirmation display process of step S28 is started. In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs an initialization process for activating (booting) the system for controlling the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. When completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. As described above, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) can be detected, and the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted. Has become.

  Further, regarding the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600, the volume before the power is turned off when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3. The information regarding the light amount is not held, and the initial state (for example, the state in which the volume and the light amount have the median value) is returned. Therefore, the volume and the amount of light after the power is turned on change to a state different from the volume and the amount of light that were adjusted before the power was turned off.

  Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is special. It has moved to a variable state in which variable display of symbols can be performed. That is, before the player can start the game in the variable state, the volume output from the speaker, or the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 is output. It is possible to adjust the amount of light. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 after completion of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation is set. When it is transmitted, during the symbol change, the speaker outputs a sound (game sound) based on the information set in the effect, or emits light from a light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. However, if such an effect is started before the adjustment of the light amount and the sound volume, the sound volume and the light amount are output in the initial state, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this example, the player starts the game by allowing the volume and the light amount to be adjusted before the player can start the game in the variable state. Until then, the volume and the amount of light can be changed from the initial state, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the volume and the amount of light in the initial state after the game is started by the player.

  In this example, an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) (a volume gauge image that represents the adjustment status in five stages depending on the time of long-press). After displaying one of the light intensity gauge images), each time the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is further short-pressed, the volume and the light amount are adjusted stepwise (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2 ...), and by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time, it is possible to determine the volume and the light amount. Then, in the variable state, when the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and the light amount are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to change the volume and the amount of light when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, but a predetermined amount is output from the speaker. The change sound is not output. It is assumed that the hall manager is performing setting change of the set value or confirmation display of the set value in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall manager is emphasized rather than the need to output a change sound that notifies that the volume or the amount of light has been changed, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. In addition, when the production operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is operated, the light amount is changed, so that the changed light amount outputs light from a light emitting member such as a lamp or a screen of the production display device 1600. Since it is not an event that hinders the work of the hall manager, it is not prohibited even in the change permitted state or the confirmation display state.

  Further, in the present example, in the variable display state, when an operation for changing the volume or the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), at that point, the adjusted volume or light amount is output. Immediately reflected as you would. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume and the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), but at that time, The output is not reflected at the adjusted volume or light amount, but is reflected at the adjusted volume or light amount after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as will be described later in detail, a warning notification is given to the outside so that no one other than the hall manager commits an illegal act. Although the image is output from the effect display device 1600, which is being executed as such a warning notification, the lamp, and the speaker, it is impossible to set the adjusted volume and light amount, and the fixed volume and light amount are set. I am trying. As a result, in the change-permitted state and the confirmation display state, even if an operation for changing the volume and the light amount is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), it is difficult to notice the warning notification being executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem and prevent the fraud monitoring system from becoming weak.

  As described above, in the change-permitted state and the confirmation display state, warning notifications are executed to the outside so that no one other than the hall manager can commit fraud, but as will be described in detail later, change Even after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning notification can be extended and executed. When the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the volume of the sound volume is changed by using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) even while the extended warning notification is being performed. It is possible to perform an operation to change the light intensity, but at that point, it does not reflect to output with the adjusted volume or light intensity, and after the extended warning notification is finished, the adjusted volume or light intensity It is reflected as output in. In other words, the warning notification is extended and the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 that is being executed and the output from the speaker are set to a fixed volume and light quantity because the adjusted volume and light quantity cannot be set. . Accordingly, similarly to the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the sound volume and the volume are controlled by using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). Even if the operation for changing the light amount is performed, it is possible to prevent the situation in which it becomes difficult to notice the warning information that is being extended and it is possible to prevent the fraud monitoring system from becoming weak.

  In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the volume and the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are finished. , It is reflected so that it is output with the adjusted volume and light intensity.However, for some lamps of the multiple lamps, the volume and light intensity after adjustment are adjusted when the volume or light intensity is changed. It may be reflected so as to be output. For example, of the multiple lamps, the lamps used for warning notification are reflected at the adjusted volume and light level to maintain the fraud monitoring system when the volume or light level is changed. Alternatively, all or some of the lamps that are not used for alert notification may be reflected so that the adjusted volume or light amount is output when the operation for changing the volume or light amount is performed.

[13-4. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent acts are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection processing in step S112 described above. Specifically, by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 and changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, and monitors fraudulent activity with a magnet. The monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU so that the peripheral control MPU can perform the fraud-related error processing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activity such as entering various winning openings and gates (gates) provided, the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, A fraudulent act due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. Regarding monitoring of these misconducts, there are two cases: normal (when the setting of the setting value is not changed or confirmation display of the setting value is not displayed) and when the setting change of the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value is being displayed. Therefore, the mode of monitoring is different.

  In this example, as a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a place where magnetism has occurred (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or on the game board 5). One magnetic sensor capable of specifying whether the front of the game area 5a located on the front side) is provided. Then, normally, the magnetic sensor 2470 causes a magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur to the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It monitors whether it has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching) and monitors fraudulent acts such as those who try to change or confirm the setting of the setting value and also confirms whether the setting value of the front of the game area 5a It is monitored whether or not magnetism that should not originally occur (magnetism due to unauthorized access) occurs (whether the magnet approaches) to the area, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to the game board. We are monitoring illegal activities such as entering various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in 5. In addition, as a fraudulent act on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument is installed in an island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in a space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). , A magnet for indirectly operating the metal fraudulent device is charged, and the magnet and the metal fraudulent are manipulated through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or through an opening that destroys a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the device is operated to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Is output so that the hall clerk can understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed.

  Further, although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of the present example is composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and has a directivity with strong sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to a side surface on one side. It is possible to perform magnetic detection in the area and magnetic detection in the second magnetic detection area having a directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the side surface on the other side which is the opposite side. ing. It should be noted that "sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that each side surface is more sensitive in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emitted from the side surface of such a sensor body spread in the front-back direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Includes the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection area is on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and the like. It is possible to monitor a plurality of places such as main parts of the ball flow path, and the other magnetic detection region includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are included. It is possible to monitor the area provided with. With such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  Further, in the present example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. A sensor 3004 is provided. Then, only during the big hit game in normal time, the cheating is monitored using the vibration sensor 3005, and the cheating is not monitored using the vibration sensor 3005 except in the big hit game. In the big hit game, this is to distribute the game ball B, which is received in the special winning opening 2005 by the distribution piece 2415 and circulates inside, to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. When vibration is applied to the distribution piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the special winning opening 2005 to allow the game ball B to enter the second receiving opening 2008. , To prevent such fraud. That is, during the big hit game in normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 adds vibrations (vibrations due to unauthorized access) to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005, which should not occur. It monitors whether or not the game ball B has been hit, changes the course of the game ball B inside the special winning opening 2005, and monitors the illegal act such as entering the game ball B into the second entrance 2008.

  In the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, it is determined that fraudulent activity due to vibration is being performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005. Deciding. When it is determined that the fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005, the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer thus opened so that the hall clerk can understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed.

  In addition, the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is the same as the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed. . However, when a security signal is output because it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed, and when a security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, The notification mode when external notification is performed in the fraud-related error processing controlled by the control MPU is different. That is, when a security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed, the image from the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or a speaker is output in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act due to vibration. In contrast to the output notification, when a security signal is output because it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, the effect display is performed in a mode corresponding to the fraudulent act using the magnet. It is possible to distinguish which fraudulent act is being performed by being notified by the image of the device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

  Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during change of setting of setting value or confirmation display of setting value will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state during setting value setting change, and FIG. 158 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state during setting value confirmation display.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the illegal activity monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not executed. This is because in the change permitted state, an authorized worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 which operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for a fraudulent act using a magnet other than an authorized worker who changes the setting of. Also, when changing the setting of a set value, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular setting change work.

  Further, in the change permitted state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permitted state, an authorized worker who performs setting change of the set value operates the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 which operates as a function of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button, and the setting thereof. This is because there is no room for fraudulent acts due to vibration other than the authorized worker who makes the change. In addition, when changing the setting value, even if a legitimate worker who makes the setting change vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration, and Inhibition can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the power switch 630a is operated while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z to power on the pachinko machine 1, thereby setting the setting value. Although the state in which the change is possible (change permitted state) is reached, at the time when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, that is, when the change permitted state is started, the pachinko machine 1 uses the external terminal board 558. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. In addition to this, at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, at the time of ending the change permission state, the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 On the other hand, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. That is, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. This security signal is obtained when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input and it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being performed while the fraudulent act by the magnet is being monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470, or When a fraudulent activity due to vibration is monitored using the vibration sensor 3005, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, and it is determined that fraudulent activity due to vibration is being performed It is the same signal as the output signal. However, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraudulent activity monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraudulent activity monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are not performed. By outputting a security signal to the hall computer to warn the pachinko machine 1 of the monitoring through the hall computer even if such fraudulent activity monitoring is not being performed, the set value is properly set. It is possible to let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the settings have been changed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor, through the hall computer, that the person who commits an illegal act through the hall computer has not changed the setting value. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control MPU outputs the second security signal, and the second security signal indicates that the setting change of the set value is completed. It is possible to let the hall clerk grasp the information through the hall computer.

  The security signal may be output to the hall computer for a time recognizable by the hall computer, and the time from the timing t3 to the timing t3 ′ is short (for example, 1 second or less). It may be present or may be a long time (for example, 10 seconds or more). However, when the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output at the time when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, There is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a has not ended at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends. That is, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at the timing t4 before the arrival of the timing t3 'at which the first security signal output ends. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the first security signal output is not completed, the first security signal is output. After the output of the signal is finished, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). That is, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. As a result, even when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, even when the first security signal output is not completed, The security signal can be reliably output twice.

  In addition, as another example in the case where the above-described predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be performed. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the first security signal output is not finished, the security signal is newly added from that point. May be started (the timer for counting the signal output time is set again), and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output in a continuous manner. In this case, the security signal is output for a long period of time that exceeds the predetermined maximum output time (output time of the first security signal), and the set value is the same as when outputting the second security signal. It is possible to let the hall clerk know that the setting change has been completed through the output of the security signal for a long time. If it is not necessary to let the hall clerk know that the setting change has been completed using the output mode of the security signal due to the environment of the game hall, etc., based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch, etc. It may be possible to cancel without outputting the second security signal itself.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470 as in the change permission state. This is because in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value uses the magnet to misconduct. This is because there is no room to do. In addition, when performing confirmation display of the set value, even if an authorized worker who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as an illegal act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular confirmation display work.

  Further, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, similarly to the change permitting state, monitoring of the misconduct using the vibration sensor 3005 is not executed. This is because in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for a person other than the legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display to perform fraudulent acts due to vibration. Because there is no. In addition, when performing confirmation display of the set value, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and Inhibition can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the power switch 630a is operated to operate the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. Although the confirmation display can be performed (confirmation display state), the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened at the time when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state is started. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the side of the game hall. On the other hand, at the time of ending the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main computer for the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is compared. While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off to the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU does not output a security signal to the installed hall computer. That is, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice, while when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the security signal is set to 1 for the hall computer. It will be output only once. As a result, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, in a state in which the fraudulent activity monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the fraudulent activity monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. Yes, the security signal is output to the hall computer to warn the pachinko machine 1 of the monitoring through the hall computer, even if such fraudulent activity monitoring is not performed, and the legitimate setting is made. It is possible to let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the confirmation display of the value is being displayed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor, through the hall computer, that the person performing the cheating through the hall computer does not display the setting value confirmation display. At timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the main control MPU does not output the second security signal as in the change permitted state. It is possible to distinguish between the confirmation display and the confirmation display.

  When a security signal is output to the hall computer because it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. As an external notification in the error-related processing controlled by the MPU, the notification of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker is performed. When a security signal is output to the hall computer when confirming the settings (confirmation display state), do not send any information related to the monitoring result to the peripheral control MPU, and set the error related to the error controlled by the peripheral control MPU. As an external notification in the processing, all notifications are made by the output of the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. It is as in no. This also makes it possible to prevent the regular setting change and confirmation display work from being disturbed.

  As a modification example, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the setting is performed. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, but the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are not performed. You may do it. In addition, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns on the operation unit, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are provided. It may be a period in which the fraudulent activity is not monitored using. Even in such a case, when the pachinko machine 1 is inspected, even if an authorized worker approaches the magnet or applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1, it is detected as an illegal act due to the magnet or vibration. It is possible to prevent this from happening and prevent the hindrance of regular inspection work. In addition, at least at the start of the period in which the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, the security signal is output to the hall computer at the same time as the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. As a result, it is possible to warn the pachinko machine 1 of the monitoring through the hall computer and let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the inspection work is being performed properly.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by the magnet, a place where magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the game board). 5 is provided in front of the game area 5a located on the front side) is provided with one magnetic sensor, but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, for example, in front of the game board 5 Each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of magnetism in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located in front of the game area 5a in which it is located or on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, similar to the configuration of the one magnetic sensor 2470 described above, in a normal state, monitoring of a fraudulent activity is performed using a plurality of magnetic sensors, whereas a change permission state and a confirmation display state are executed. In the above case, it is possible not to execute the fraudulent activity monitoring by using a plurality of magnetic sensors. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, some magnetic sensors (for example, setting change) The fraudulent activity may be monitored using only the magnetic sensor provided around the board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a.

  Similarly, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors may be provided, for example, in addition to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005, the large winning opening located on the front side of the game board 5 Each of the vibration sensors may be able to detect the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the entrance other than 2005, or in the vicinity of the setting change board 13111 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, in a normal state, monitoring of fraudulent activity is performed using a plurality of vibration sensors (however, regarding the vibration sensor provided around the distribution piece 2415 inside the special winning opening 2005, In the change permission state and confirmation display state, it is possible not to monitor fraud using multiple vibration sensors, but in the change permission state and confirmation display state, The fraudulent activity may be monitored by using only some of the plurality of vibration sensors (for example, the vibration sensor provided around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a).

  In addition, a fraudulent activity due to a magnet or vibration may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission status or confirmation display status is finished (immediately after the fraudulent activity monitoring is started). There is concern that an unauthorized security monitoring system may be weakened because an important security signal cannot be output based on the detection of an action. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. That is, the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraud is delayed so that the second security signal output period in the change permitted state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state is delayed. Thus, it is possible to exemplify that the output timings of security signals based on the detection of fraudulent activities do not overlap. Specifically, after the modification permission state and the confirmation display state are finished, the monitoring of the fraudulent act is started immediately, but the second security signal output period in the change permission state and the first security signal in the confirmation display state. If a trigger (detection of fraudulent activity) of a new security signal occurs within the output period of, the output of the security signal output earlier is not discarded, but the output of the new security signal is not discarded. The output information of the new security signal may be stored and held until is completed, and the new security signal may be output with a delay from the original output time. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent activity is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. As another example, the fraud monitoring start time itself may be extended until the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state ends. May be Also by such an embodiment, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent activity is not discarded, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the fraud monitoring system is weakened.

[14. Command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (store a command as various commands at a predetermined timing as information regarding control of game effect and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1). (Private area, command buffer), and by sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side can also provide information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1. You can figure it out. However, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the information about the control of the game effect and the information about the state of the pachinko machine 1 are stored as various commands in the main control built-in RAM. Even if it is set in the predetermined storage area, only some commands are immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 while the change permission state or the confirmation display state is being executed, and the remaining commands are changed to the change permission state or the confirmation display state. After the completion, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, the command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 (A) is a time chart showing the command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is not performed), and FIG. [Fig. 4] is a time chart showing command transmission timing in the case of setting change of a set value and confirmation display of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In this example, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at least the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process is started, and the game ball B is displayed at various winning openings and the gate unit 2003. It is described that the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the respective balls when entering the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 159, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Then, in the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, the processes of steps S10 to S24 of the main control side power-on process are executed, as described in the [behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of power-on] described above. When ty arrives, it is determined which combination of the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, the preset setting value change permission condition is If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S37 and the setting is allowed. Further, in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the main control internal RAM of step S38. After initializing, the variable state is set. In addition, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a preset setting value display permission is given. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the set value confirmation display process of step S28 to enter the confirmation display state. Further, in the determination of step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the main control internal RAM of step S38. The variable state is set without initializing. The variable state means that, as described above, the main control side timer interrupt process (the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process of step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, thereby displaying the function. It is a state in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 1400.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU), the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Since the initialization process for starting (booting) is completed, after the timing ty, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (A), the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned on at the timing t3, and the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed assuming that the power is normally turned on. In this case, similarly, if the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing t3, the main control internal RAM in step S38 is initialized from the timing ty, and then the variable state is set. On the other hand, if the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing t3, the RAM with built-in main control in step S38 is changed from the timing ty to the fluctuating state. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information relating to control of the game effect and information relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control internal RAM, and those commands. Will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately.

  For example, when the main body frame 4 is open at the timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door open command that specifies that the main body frame 4 is open in the command buffer and opens the door. When the hour command is set, it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), so that the effect display device is provided during the period until the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The door opening notification for notifying that the body frame 4 is open is executed by the image of 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. As the notification at the time of opening the door, the voice that repeats "door opening", the message "door opening!", And the light emission of the lamp with a higher brightness than the normal time are executed. As described above, while the main body frame 4 is being opened, the hall manager can immediately recognize that the main body frame 4 is open by executing the door open notification to the outside. It is possible to strengthen the monitoring system so that no one other than the hall manager commits an illegal act during the opening of No. 4.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (B), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing t3 and the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the RWM is also performed at the timing t3. When the pressing operation portion of the clear button 633z is operated, the change permitting state in which the setting value can be changed is set from the timing ty, and the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z is performed at the timing t3. If the unit is not operated, a confirmation display state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed is started from the timing ty. In the change-permitted state, the change-permitted state ends at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and changes from the timing t4 after the initialization of the main control internal RAM in step S38. Enable it. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is ended at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and from the timing t4, the main control internal RAM in step S38 is changed without being initialized. Enable it.

  In the change permission state and the confirmation display state described above, the main control MPU sets information regarding the control of the game effect and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control internal RAM. The storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, a first storage area (first command buffer) and a second storage area (second command buffer) are used as a storage area (command buffer) of the main control internal RAM. When the command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is sent. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives without immediately transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the timing t4, the second command buffer is held. The command set to is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. . That is, at least in the change-permitted state and the confirmation display state, the command that needs to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set in the first command buffer, while in the second command buffer, the change-permitted state and the command-permitted state at the timing t4. A command that needs to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 after the confirmation display state is finished is set.

  In addition, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information regarding control of the game effect and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer, and then in the first command buffer. When the command is set, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, commands are set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer, but all the commands are set except the change permission state and the confirmation display state. The command is set only in the first command buffer so as to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. However, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not separated, and when a command is set in the command buffer that is not divided, the command is immediately It may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  First, in the change-permitted state and the confirmation display state, the commands set in the second command buffer include commands related to fraud monitoring, such as door opening commands that specify that the body frame 4 is open, and various winning openings. When the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, etc. or the gate portion 2003, the detection signal is input during the invalid period, but the detection itself (abnormal entry) ) There is a command at the time of abnormal entry to specify that there was. Specifically, the door open command is set in the second command buffer when the body frame 4 is open at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the second command is set. When the door opening command is set in the buffer, the door opening command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives, and at the timing t4. , The door open command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer when the game ball B is detected (abnormal entry) in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. If the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. At timing t4, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the timing t5 at which the main body frame 4 is closed arrives. Performs the door open notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is opened by the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. As the notification at the time of opening the door, the voice that repeats "door opening", the message "door opening!", And the light emission of the lamp with a higher brightness than the normal time are executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU receives the abnormal entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 are displayed for a predetermined period from the timing t4. Based on the output from the above, the abnormal entry time notification for notifying that there is an abnormal entry at various winning openings and the gate portion 2003 is executed. As the notification of abnormal ball entry, a voice that repeats "abnormal ball entry", a message display "Abnormal ball entry exists!", And lamp light emission with higher brightness than in normal times are executed. As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the main body frame 4 is open, and whether or not there is an abnormal ball entry in each of the various winning openings or the gate portion 2003, and the change permission state or the confirmation is performed. After the display state ends, by executing a door open notification and an abnormal ball notification to the outside, the main body frame 4 is opened, and various winning entrances and abnormal entrances to the gate portion 2003 occur. The hall manager can know that there was. It should be noted that, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to simultaneously perform the door open notification and the abnormal ball entry notification, but a notification that serious fraudulence is suspected (for example, during abnormal entry The notification) may be executed with priority.

  As described above, commands related to unauthorized monitoring such as door opening commands and abnormal prize winning commands are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, and the set commands are immediately set in the peripheral control board 1510. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off without transmission, and the command set in the second command buffer is stored at the timing t4. The information is transmitted to the control board 1510. This prevents the opening of the door and the notification of abnormal ball entry from being performed due to fraudulent detection not intended by the hall administrator when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the commands to be set in the first command buffer include a setting change command that specifies that the change permission state is started Examples include a setting confirmation command that identifies when it is time, a setting change completion command that identifies when the change permission state ends, and a setting value confirmation display completion command that identifies that the confirmation display state ends. . Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state, and the setting confirmation command is set at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state. , And set in the first command buffer, and immediately send any command to the peripheral control board 1510. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4 at the end of the change permission state, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is set at the timing t4 at the end of the confirmation display state. At this point, it is set in the first command buffer, and any commands are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. During the period, the alert notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of the command is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. . As a warning notification corresponding to the setting change command, the voice that repeats "Setting is being changed", the message "Setting is being changed!", And the lamp light emission in the color corresponding to the setting value being changed are executed. I am trying. In addition, as a warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, the voice "Setting confirmation" and the message "Setting confirmation!" Are displayed, and the lamp light emission in the color corresponding to the setting confirmation of the setting value (setting value) A light emission mode different from the light emission from the lamp in the corresponding color is executed during the setting change. As described above, in the change-permitted state and the confirmation display state, the hall manager knows that it is possible to change the setting of the set value and confirm and display the set value by executing the warning notification to the outside. It is possible to immediately grasp the situation, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that no one other than the hall manager commits an illegal act in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As described above, for commands related to settings such as the setting change command and the setting confirmation command, they are set in the first command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, and the set command is set. It is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if the main body frame 4 is open or there is an abnormal ball in the various winning openings or the gate portion 2003, the door opening notification is given until the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. It is not a normal fraud monitoring system because it delays the execution of the notification at the time of abnormal entry, but it is a situation where the command set in the second command buffer precedes the setting change command and the setting confirmation command. By sending a command (specific command for warning) related to the setting to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened so that no one other than the hall manager performs an illegal act even in the change permitted state and the confirmation display state. be able to.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU executes a warning notification corresponding to the type of command. In the change permitted state, the setting value can be changed, and compared with the confirmation display state, the monitoring system is especially designed to prevent unauthorized changes by the hall manager. However, by executing a warning notification corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not the monitoring system needs to be strengthened.

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door opening command or an abnormal ball entering command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, the peripheral control MPU executes a door opening notification or an abnormal ball entering notification. However, in these notifications, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "BeeBeeBee" is added to the sound from the speaker. It outputs (“door is open, bee bee, door is open, ...”) and is executed by the combination of “message + warning sound”. On the other hand, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the warning notification corresponding to the command type is executed. In the notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. However, regarding the sound output from the speaker, the warning sound is not output and only the sound is executed. ing. As a result, when changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, even if a warning effect corresponding to the type of command is executed, it is directed to the outside as compared with the notification when the door is opened or when the abnormal ball is entered. Appeal can be suppressed, and hindrance to regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. Regarding transmission timing of game information command]
In the above-described embodiment, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, after performing the set value confirmation display process of step S28, the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to the various information is incorporated in the main control. By setting in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the RAM and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side also grasps information about the game before the power is cut off. be able to. Thereby, after the confirmation display state, the current game state, the variable display of the special symbol suspended when the power is cut off, the number of holdings stored when the power is cut off, and the like, the peripheral control board 1510. By grasping the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU restores the image produced by the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, and, for example, the variation of the decorative pattern that is interrupted when the power is cut off. The display can be restarted or the display of the number of holdings stored when the power is turned off can be restarted.

  Regarding this point, regarding the game information command, the second command buffer does not appear at the end of the confirmation display state (at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) but at the start point of the confirmation display state (at the timing ty) When the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. However, at the timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when transmitting such game backup information as a game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control-side power-on process. Further, FIG. 161 (A) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). 161 (B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the set value is confirmed and displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  In this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, and the game backup information is transmitted as the game information command. When the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM with built-in main control or to change the setting of the set value, in step S38, the entire area of the RAM with built-in control is specified. Since the game backup information is lost except for the area, the game backup information is lost and the game backup information is not transmitted as a game information command.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the main control power-on process of this example, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. In the process of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read from the game backup information and a game information command corresponding to the various information is set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control internal RAM. There is. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that there is a setting value confirmation display processing is performed (step S28). That is, the process of step S32 is performed before the setting value confirmation display process of step S28, various information is read from the game backup information, and the game information command corresponding to the various information is sent to the predetermined storage area of the main control internal RAM. (Command buffer) is set. Further, when performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29 and the value of the checksum (sum value) in step S30 are The restart of the game will be delayed by the amount of time to determine whether or not it matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off). By performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 before performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, it is possible to shorten the time until the game is restarted after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28. Will be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (A), when the power is normally turned on, that is, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at the timing t3, the timing ty is set. From the point in time, the main control built-in RAM in step S38 is made variable without initialization. At timing ty, which is the start of such a variable state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control internal RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command. It will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU promptly restores the effect (the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of turning off the power at the timing ty which is the start time of the variable state. be able to.

  The peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty and, when the game information command is received from the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, a performance member (for example, a performance operation). The initial operation of the part 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) is being performed. That is, from the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Has been done. Such effect members are each capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. It is supposed that such confirmation and accurate positioning are performed so that the effect member waits at the initial position. As a result, even if the effect member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty which is the start of the variable state, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the effect member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the effect member waits at a position displaced from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the effect member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. Then, after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the variation of the symbol is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined variation during the symbol variation. At this timing, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (B), in the case of performing confirmation display of the set value, that is, at the timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If there is not, a confirmation display state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed is started from the timing ty. Then, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is ended at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and from the timing t4, the main control internal RAM in step S38 is changed without being initialized. Enable it. In such a case, at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer, and the game information command in the second command buffer. If the game information command is set to the second command buffer until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives without immediately transmitting the set game information command to the peripheral control board 1510. The information command is held, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t4. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effect (the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of turning off the power at the timing ty which is the start time of the variable state. it can.

  As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, Until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held, and at the timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is peripherally controlled. It is transmitted to the substrate 1510. This prevents the production (the image of the production display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker) at the time of turning off the power from being restored when confirming and displaying the set value, thereby hindering the regular work. Can be suppressed. Further, at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state, the game backup information has already been set in the second command buffer as a game information command, so in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. Even if noise occurs and the game backup information is destroyed, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the setting confirmation command thus set is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the production member (for example, the production operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is received. The initial operation of the part 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) is being performed. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Is being done. Such effect members are each capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position. It is supposed that such confirmation and accurate positioning are performed so that the effect member waits at the initial position. As a result, even if the effect member is at a position displaced from the initial position at the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the effect member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the effect member waits at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the effect member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the variation of the symbol is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined variation during the symbol variation. At this timing, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  As described above, after the confirmation display state ends at the timing t4, it is possible to transmit the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, while the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. The fluctuation pattern is not transmitted to the confirmation display state. Therefore, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the effect member does not operate due to the transmission of the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation, It is not possible to determine whether the production member is not operating due to a failure. In this respect, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the initial stage of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. By performing the operation, it is possible to inform the outside that "the effect member is in a normal state but not in the game", and it is possible to determine that the effect member is not a malfunction. In this example, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed, but the operation is performed to notify that the effect member is not in failure. For example, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, only the temporary operation of the effect member is performed separately from the initial operation, and after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends. The initial operation of the effect member may be performed. The temporary motion of the effect member may be different from the initial motion or may be the same motion as the initial motion.

  In addition, when changing the setting of the setting value, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state, and the set setting change command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Have been sent to. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 as when the setting confirmation command is received. The initial operation of the effect members (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) being performed is being performed. In this way, also in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, as with the confirmation display state, the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 or a plurality of production operation units 160 mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is used. By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it is possible to notify the outside that "the effect member is in a normal state but not in the game", and it is not a failure of the effect member. Can be determined.

[14-2. Regarding extension of warning notification after change permission status and confirmation display status have ended]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of the command is issued by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Although it is being executed, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing a case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As shown in FIG. 162, as described above in detail, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the start of the change permission state at timing ty, and the first command is set at the end of the confirmation display state at timing ty. A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change command and the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing ty until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. During the period, the alert notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker.

  Further, at the end of the change permission state at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and at the start of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the set value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. Then, any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the peripheral control MPU receives a predetermined time (for example, During the period until the timing t4 ′ after 30 seconds has elapsed, the warning notification being executed is continuously executed from the timing ty by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. There is. In other words, warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the timing is changed. The warning notification is extended and executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) which is a period from t4 to timing t4 ′. The extension of the warning information is ended by setting an extension ending condition of the warning information and satisfying the set extension ending condition. Specifically, when the warning notification extension period is ended within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer unit, and the timer unit measures the predetermined time. And ends when the time expires. Further, as another example, when the warning notification extension period ends with a predetermined number of voice notifications (for example, five message voice loops), the predetermined number of times is set in a specific count unit and the count is set. The unit may start counting a predetermined number of times and end when the number of times has expired.

  As described above, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but also the timing t4 ′ when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4. Until that time, the warning notification is extended and executed. For example, when the warning notification is executed only when the change permitted state or the confirmation display state is executed, a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty at the start of the change permitted state or the confirmation display state. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the time for executing the warning notification, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, is shortened. If the confirmation is displayed, the hall manager may not notice. In particular, when confirming and displaying the set value, it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value, so it is possible for anyone other than the hall administrator to illegally confirm and display the set value in a short time. The person may not notice. On the other hand, when the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permitted state or the confirmation display state ends, a short time (for example, 1 Even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in (about 2 seconds), the period from the timing t4 to the timing t4 ′ is secured as the time for executing the warning notification. For this reason, even if a person other than the hall administrator improperly changes the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value in a short time, the hall administrator can easily notice that the person other than the hall administrator commits an illegal act. The surveillance system can be strengthened so that there is no such problem.

  Further, as described in detail above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning corresponding to the type of the command is output by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Notification is running. As a warning notification corresponding to the setting change command, the voice that repeats "Setting is being changed", the message "Setting is being changed!", And the lamp light emission in the color corresponding to the setting value being changed are executed. I am trying. In addition, as a warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, the voice "Setting confirmation", the message "Setting confirmation!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the color corresponding to the setting value confirmation. I have decided. When the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the content of the warning notice message in the change permission state or the confirmation display state may be maintained. The message content may be different from the status and the confirmation display status. For example, in the alert notification after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the message contents other than the message contents in the change permission state or confirmation display state, such as "setting change completed" and "setting confirmation completed It may be configured to loop and output a message such as "Yes." As a result, in addition to the above-mentioned countermeasures against fraudulent acts, it is possible to make the hall manager easily notice the fact even when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is properly terminated. Further, when maintaining the content of the warning notification message in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at t4, which is the switching timing with the extension of the warning notification, temporary interruption of the notification does not occur. Good. For example, at least the voice output from the speaker of the warning notification executed in response to the command type in the change permission state or the confirmation display state is continuously output until the voice is completed so that it does not end midway. With respect to the sound in the warning notification to be extended as described above, it can be exemplified that the sound is continuously restarted from the beginning of the sound after the sound of the warning notification continuously output is completed.

  Further, regarding the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is notified when the door is opened or when an abnormal ball is entered. The warning sound such as "BeeBee" that is output as is not output, and is executed only by voice. Further, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, it is impossible to perform the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, though it is the unvariable state. On the other hand, after the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, is changed to the variable state in which the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be changed, For example, by transmitting a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effect sounds are output from the speaker. In this regard, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning sound is not output from the speaker as the warning notification, and thus a limited number is provided to output the sound. Situation where there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channel when allocating to the finitely provided channel in order to output various effect sounds. Can be avoided as much as possible.

  Further, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU causes the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) to open the door opening command or the abnormal ball entry at the timing t4. Although the hour command is received, the door is opened from the timing t4 ', which is the end of the warning notification extended and executed without executing the door opening notification or the abnormal entry notification at the timing t4. The time notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are executed. That is, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the extended warning notification is executed prior to the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification. As a result, even if a person other than the hall administrator improperly changes the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value in a short time, the hall administrator can prioritize and execute the extended warning notification. It is easy to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that no one other than the hall manager can commit fraud. Regarding the notification of suspected serious fraud (for example, notification of abnormal ball entry), the extended warning notification is being executed, not the timing t4 ′, which is the end of the extended warning notification. However, it may be executed at timing t4.

  Further, regarding the notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball is abnormally entered, not only the predetermined message contents are notified by the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as “beebee” is output from the speaker. Is output and is executed with a combination of "message + warning sound". The door open notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are continuously output during execution of the door open notification and the abnormal ball entry notification, but are configured to be output only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). May be However, in this example, since the notification at the time of opening the door and the notification at the time of abnormal entry are executed from the timing t4 ′ which is the end of the warning notification that is extended and executed, for example, the extension time of the warning notification (timing If the period from t4 to timing t4 ') is longer than or the same as the output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door opening notification or abnormal entry notification, if the door opening notification or abnormality is output. The notification when entering the ball will not be output. In view of the problem caused by the decrease of the notification frequency, when the extension time of the warning notification (the period from the timing t4 to the timing t4 ′) is longer than or the same as the output time of the warning sound (for example, 10 seconds) May be configured to output the door open notification or the abnormal ball entry notification only for the remaining time after the extension time of the warning notification in the output time of the door open notification or the abnormal ball entry notification. . Further, it may be configured to newly start the notification at the time of opening the door and the notification at the time of abnormal ball entry after the extension time of the warning notification.

  In addition, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the door opening notification is executed from the timing t4 ′ which is the end of the extended warning notification. When the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed arrives before the timing t4 ', the door open notification is not executed. That is, when the main body frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended warning notification, the door open notification is not executed. However, when the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification and the main body frame 4 is opened again before the timing t4 ′, the extended warning notification is ended and the door opening notification is given. Running. Normally, after changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, the main body frame 4 is only closed and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If the mysterious situation of opening the main body frame 4 again immediately after changing the setting or confirming the set value occurs, the door open notification consisting of a combination of "message + warning sound" is used as a warning notification. By giving priority to the execution, the hall manager can easily notice that the incomprehensible situation in which there is a suspicion of fraud occurs and the body frame 4 is open, and the situation in which the body frame 4 is open continues. The surveillance system can be strengthened so that there is no such problem.

  Further, as described in detail above, although the fraudulent activity is not monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the illegal activity is monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 (however, regarding the illegal activity monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005, , Only during the big hit game). Then, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, the fraudulent notification is executed as an external notice by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. At this time, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the injustice notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, with regard to fraudulent notifications such as magnets and vibrations that are suspected of being seriously fraudulent, priority can be given to extended warning notifications so that the hall manager can easily notice and anyone other than the hall manager can commit cheating. The surveillance system can be strengthened so as not to.

  Further, in the alert notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. However, for example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. As described above, in the configuration in which the warning notification is performed using a part of the plurality of notification members (the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the speaker), the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as a warning notification during extension, but when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to a magnet or vibration is being performed, it is output as a warning notification during extension. The illegitimate notification may be executed only by the image of the effect display device 1600 that does not exist (by the notification using only the unused notification members of the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of the fraudulent notification that is suspected to be fraudulent without stopping the extended warning notification. it can. Similarly, the door open notification and the abnormal prize notification are made only by the image of the effect display device 1600 which is not output as the warning information during the extension (only the unused notification members of the plurality of notification members are displayed. Depending on the used notification), the door open notification or the abnormal winning notification may be executed.

  Further, in this example, the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended, but the warning notification is extended and executed only after the confirmation display state is ended. It may be configured to. For example, in the case of changing the setting of the set value, the main control internal RAM is initialized after the end of the change permission state (cleared in step S38 except for a specific area among all areas of the main control internal RAM). However, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, and thus a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing t4. During the period until the timing t4 ′ arrives, not the extension of the warning notification but the RAM clear notification for notifying that there is a RAM clear is executed by the image from the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. May be As a result, after the end of the change permission state, the hall manager can recognize that the RAM has been cleared.

[14-3. Regarding the case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state and the confirmation display state have ended]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and a plurality of production operation units 160 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are displayed. Although the initial operation of the rotary ornament 3210) is performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a time chart showing a case where the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  As shown in FIG. 163, at the end of the change permission state at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and at the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the set value confirmation is performed in the first command buffer. A display completion command is set, and any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 by receiving the setting change completion command and the set value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. The initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 or the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) that has been started has started. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, without performing the initial operation of the effect member, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the effect member The initial operation of is performed.

  The above-described effect members include effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 as members that can move between the initial position and the operation position. In such an initial operation of the effect member, a return process for performing accurate alignment so that the effect member waits at the initial position and confirmation of whether the effect member normally operates from the initial position toward the operation position are performed. The confirmation process and the confirmation process are sequentially executed. For example, if the effect member is in operation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the effect member stops at a position deviated from the initial position, and even when the power is subsequently turned on, the effect member is initially set. It is out of position. In this regard, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, at the timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the returning process is performed even if the effect member is displaced from the initial position. By doing so, the effect member can be returned to the initial position, and if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the returning process for returning the effect member to the initial position can be repeated several times. It is possible to prevent the effect member from waiting at a position displaced from the initial position. Further, in the confirmation processing, after the effect member has moved from the initial position to the operation position, it is possible to check whether the effect member operates normally by operating so as to return from the operation position to the initial position again. In addition, if the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the returning process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not operate normally in the operation position or the initial position in the confirmation process, the effect member is abnormal. Is notified externally that the occurrence of Then, after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the variation of the symbol is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined variation during the symbol variation. At this timing, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

  Further, the effect member includes a light guide plate 3110 that can illuminate and decorate the first pattern and the second pattern by irradiating light. In such an initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, a confirmation process is performed to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally illuminated and decorated. That is, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to illuminate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to illuminate the second pattern are repeated several times. Then, it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally illuminated or decorated. Note that the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are performed in parallel from the timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. I have to. Then, after the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is completed, the effect using the light guide plate 3110 can be executed. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during the symbol variation is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the pattern variation is in progress. At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and decorated with the first pattern and the second pattern.

  As described above, in this example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, are set without performing the initial operation of the effect member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed. For example, in the change permitted state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, when the initial operation of the effect member is performed, the setting value setting change or the setting value At the same time as confirming whether the confirmation display is functioning normally, it is necessary to confirm whether the production member operates normally due to the initial operation of the production member, which is difficult for a person performing confirmation work in the factory to confirm. . However, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4, by performing the initial operation of the effect member, the set value is set in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. Only the setting change and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the change permitted state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, only the confirmation that the effect member normally operates by the initial operation of the effect member can be performed. Therefore, it is not necessary for the person performing the confirmation work in the factory to confirm at the same time, and therefore the certainty of confirmation can be increased.

  In the above description, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial operation of the effect member when it receives the setting change completion command or the set value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. However, in addition to the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command, the initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the effect member is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. At this time, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4, which is the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial operation command is set. And On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the set initial operation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation command set in the second command buffer is retained until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held at timing t4. May be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In such a case, while the initial operation command is set at the timing ty which is the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. It is possible to delay the initial operation of the effect member and perform the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

  Further, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but also the period until the timing t4 ′ when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed from the timing t4 When the warning notification is extended and executed, the warning notification extension time is set such that the time is longer than the time when the initial operation of the effect member is performed. In other words, the initial operation of the effect member performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended before the end of the warning notification extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. . As described above, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shifts to a variable state in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed, and the player plays the game. Although it becomes possible to perform the warning, during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, the notification is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, so that the external warning is increased. I am trying. Therefore, the period in which the warning is extended and executed is not a period in which the player hesitates to start the game and the player is about to start the game. In this respect, by ending the initial operation of the effect member during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, the warning notification that is extended and executed is ended, and at the time when the player attempts to start the game. , The initial operation of the effect member has already been completed. For this reason, after the warning notification extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member. , It is possible not to miss the information obtained from the effect contents. In addition, in order to promote that the player does not start the game during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, the content of the warning notification to be extended and executed is "Please wait a while before the game starts" etc. The game may be executed in a mode including a special message for urging the game standby.

  In addition, when performing the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, if the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the returning process is repeated several times, or the effect member is confirmed by the confirmation process. When the normal operation is not performed at the operation position or the initial position, an accessory abnormality caused by an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp, or a speaker is provided so as to externally notify that an error occurs in the effect member. Notification is running. At this time, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the accessory abnormality notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. As described above, by giving priority to the abnormal accessory notification over the extended warning notification, the hall manager can easily notice and can easily confirm whether the effect member normally operates.

  Further, in the alert notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. However, for example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. As described above, in the configuration in which the warning notification is performed using a part of the plurality of notification members (the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the speaker), the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, the warning is not being output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as a warning notification during extension, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect member, the effect is not output as a warning notification during extension. The accessory abnormality notification may be executed only by the image of the display device 1600 (by the notification using only the unused notification members of the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of the accessory abnormality notification without stopping the extended warning notification.

  Further, in this example, as the initial operation of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a return process for performing accurate alignment so that the effect member waits at the initial position, and the effect member operates from the initial position. Although the confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the operation is normally performed toward the position is executed in sequence, the return processing may be executed in advance in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. That is, from the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing ty, only the return process of the initial operation of the effect member is executed, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends at the timing t4, the effect member The confirmation processing may be executed in the initial operation of. Here, regarding the returning process, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one returning process, the returning process for returning the effect member to the initial position is repeated several times, so that a long time is required. May be. In this regard, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, by performing the restoration process in advance, even if the restoration process requires a long time, the change is performed. It does not affect the time until the confirmation process as the initial operation of the effect member is completed after the end of the permit state or the confirmation display state. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to complete the initial operation of the effect member relatively quickly, and thereafter perform the effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern.

  Further, in this example, at the time of timing ty, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is entered, after the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed. However, in the case of shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. That is, in the case of shifting to the change permission state, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed, while in the case of shifting to the confirmation display state, the timing is changed. The initial operation of the effect member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, unlike the change permission state, the setting value setting is not changed and only the setting value setting confirmation is performed. Therefore, the confirmation display state can be ended in a relatively short time. Is possible. In this regard, in the case of shifting to the confirmation display state, by performing the initial operation of the effect member in advance in the confirmation display state, the initial operation of the effect member is completed before the confirmation display state ends. Can be made. For this reason, after the confirmation display state ends, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern, and the initial operation of the effect member is completed while the confirmation display state is ended in a relatively short time. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult for the player to start the game because of not doing so.

[14-4. Modification of fraud monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by the magnet, the place where magnetism is generated (whether the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or not) is used. 5 is provided in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of 5) is provided with one magnetic sensor, but a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided, and the front side of the game board 5 is provided. Each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of magnetism in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located in front of the game area 5a or on the rear side of the game board 5. Then, in the change permitted state or the confirmation display state, a fraudulent act using only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor provided around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a) May be monitored. A modified example of the monitoring of fraudulence during the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a time chart showing a modified example of the monitoring state of misconduct during the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by the magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the occurrence of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, in a normal state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, normally, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a causes the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to have a magnetic field that should not be generated (due to unauthorized access). It monitors the occurrence of magnetism (whether the magnet is approaching) and monitors fraudulent acts such as those who try to change the setting or confirm the display, except for those who change the setting or confirm. Examples of the fraudulent act using the magnet on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 include, for example, a metal fraudulent instrument in an island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in a space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), A magnet for indirectly operating a metal fraudulent instrument is charged, and a magnet and a metal fraudulent instrument are inserted through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility or an opening that partially destroys the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the operation is performed to illegally access the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a, a fraud using a magnet for the area where the setting change substrate 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided. It is determined that is being done.

  Similarly, during normal operation, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, during normal operation, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors whether magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur has occurred (whether the magnet approaches) in the area in front of the game area 5a. Then, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to monitor illegal actions such as entering the various winning holes and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is input, it is determined that the fraud using the magnet is performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. are doing.

  In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by the magnet, two magnetic sensors, that is, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area magnetic sensor 2470b are provided. The sensors 2470a and 2470b may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and have a directivity with strong sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to one side surface. Magnetic detection in a magnetic detection area and magnetic detection in a second magnetic detection area having directivity with high sensitivity in a direction perpendicular to the side surface on the opposite side to the other side can be performed. It has become. It should be noted that "sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that each side surface is more sensitive in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of such a sensor body spread in the left-right direction or the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. , A wide range on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the special winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball passage). Location) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is configured such that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above spread in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and One magnetic detection area is arranged so as to include the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the area on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided can be monitored.

  As shown in FIG. 164, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the illegal operation is monitored for the predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a. On the other hand, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. This is because, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an authorized operator who performs the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a. However, there is no room for a person other than such an authorized worker to conduct a fraudulent act using a magnet, while the position on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is a position invisible to the authorized operator. This is because there is a possibility that a person other than such a legitimate worker may perform an illegal act using a magnet. In addition, when a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b may detect the generation of magnetism. While the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is more likely to detect the occurrence of magnetism, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a may detect the occurrence of magnetism as an illegal act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the change of the legitimate setting and the obstruction of the confirmation display work.

  Further, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the monitoring of the misconduct using the vibration sensor 3005 is not executed. This is because when an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value or confirms the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a moves to the pachinko machine. This is because the vibration may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 although it is provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, even if a legitimate worker who changes the setting of the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value vibrates, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting the occurrence of the vibration as a fraudulent act due to the vibration. It is possible to prevent the setting change and the confirmation display work from being hindered. In this example, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor the fraudulent activity only during the big hit game in the normal time, but like the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting the fraudulent activity by the magnet, the big hit game is being played. Not only in the fluctuating state, the vibration sensor 3005 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity. Then, even in the case of monitoring fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 in the fluctuable state or during the big hit game, the change permission state and the confirmation display state before the shift to the fluctuable state are performed. The monitoring of illegal activities using the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor magnetic fraud, while the vibration sensor 3005 is used. I am trying not to monitor the fraudulent activity related to vibration using.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a and the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided. However, only the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is provided and the front side of the game board 5 is provided. Only the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located at may be detected. In such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the two magnetic sensors described above, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state to detect the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It monitors fraudulent activity in certain areas. Further, as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided instead of one magnetic sensor, and by the plurality of magnetic sensors, the entire area in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 is set. You may make it monitor. For example, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball passage are provided. On the other hand, it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism so that the respective magnetic sensors of the plurality of magnetic sensors correspond to each other, and the illegal acts are monitored. With such a configuration, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used to cover the entire area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Watching for cheating. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, only some magnetic sensors of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used, and an important area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, It is also possible to monitor only fraudulent acts on the winning opening portions such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003 and the special winning opening 2005.

  Further, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, a predetermined area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected. It is determined that cheating is being performed. Further, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is magnetic at that point. When the magnetic field generation command that specifies that the occurrence of magnetic field has been detected is set in the second command buffer, and when the magnetic field generation command is set in the second command buffer, the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off comes. Until then, the magnetic field generation time command set in the second command buffer is held, and at the timing t4, the magnetic field generation time command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a magnetic field generation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, so that the peripheral control MPU receives images from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker for a predetermined period from the timing t4. Is output to notify the occurrence of magnetism to a predetermined area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1. As the notification of the occurrence of magnetism, a voice that repeats "magnetic detection abnormality", a message display "There is magnetic detection abnormality!", And lamp light emission with higher brightness than in normal times are executed. As described above, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the generation of magnetism is detected in the predetermined area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. , By executing the magnetic detection time notification to the outside, the hall manager knows that the main body frame 4 is open and that the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1. You can figure it out. It should be noted that after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to simultaneously execute the above-mentioned door opening notification and abnormal ball entering notification, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism. In such a case, it may be possible to give priority to the notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism, assuming that serious fraud is suspected.

  As described above, commands related to fraudulent monitoring such as the magnetic field generation command are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as in the above-mentioned door opening command and abnormal winning command. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives without immediately transmitting the set command to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the timing t4, The command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the occurrence of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting of the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value, the notification of the occurrence of magnetism is executed. This can be prevented, and the hindrance of regular work can be suppressed.

  In the above description, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the change permission state or the confirmation display state of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is not executed at that time without executing the notification at the time of the magnetism occurrence. Although the notification at the time of occurrence of magnetism is executed after the end, if the notification is such that it does not hinder the regular work, it may be executed in advance during the period of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. . For example, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) such as suppressing notification by a loud sound output from the speaker. ) Side delays the notification of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, whereas it does not output from the speaker but only displays an error on 7-segment provided on the payout control board 633. The simple notification on the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side can be executed in advance without delay.

  Further, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the fraudulent activity is monitored for the predetermined area on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 by using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, but only the confirmation display state, The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b may be used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in the confirmation display state, since it is possible to perform confirmation display of the set value by short-term work, it is less likely that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b will detect the occurrence of magnetism due to an authorized worker, While monitoring the fraudulent activity on the predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is strengthened by using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, in the change-permitted state, the setting value is changed by long-term work. , The gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is highly likely to detect the occurrence of magnetism due to a legitimate worker, and the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to place importance on the workability of the legitimate operator. The fraudulent activity may not be monitored for the predetermined area on the front side of the.

[15. About suggestion of setting value]
In the present embodiment, the variation display such as the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed in the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern determined using the predetermined variation pattern table, but as the variation effect, the current setting is performed. This makes it possible to execute suggestive productions that can suggest values. Then, regarding the suggestive effect, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variable display of the special symbol in the subsequent game (variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed every 100 times. It is possible to suggest the current set value. Specifically, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol) in the subsequent game is specified every 100 times. The variation pattern table is used, and the variation pattern for which the suggestive effect execution is set is determined from the specific variation pattern table. The transition of the variation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a modification of the first variation pattern setting process. Further, FIG. 166 is a table showing the transition of the fluctuation pattern table after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, FIG. 167 is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 168 is a pachinko machine. FIG. 169 is a variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the machine 1 is 500, and FIG. 169 is a specific example of the roulette effect as the suggested effect A2.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, in the first variation pattern setting process (and the second variation pattern setting process), if the processes of steps S2144 and S2145 are different from the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. I am making it. Specifically, when selecting the variation pattern table at the time of reach (when the reach is out of reach) in step S2144, in addition to the current game state, the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. The table is selected according to the number of fluctuations of. Similarly, in step S2145, when selecting the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, in addition to the current game state, according to the number of variations of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanying the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. You have selected a table. It should be noted that "powering on the pachinko machine 1 with operation of the RWM clear button 633z" means that the RWM clear button 633z is operated but the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the main control is performed without changing the setting. When the built-in RAM is only initialized (when the main control built-in RAM is only initialized, the setting value before power-off is maintained) and when the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are The case where the operation is being performed and the setting value is changed is included.

  In addition to the above, when selecting the variation pattern table according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z is changed, the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Depending on whether or not the initialization of the main control built-in RAM was performed without changing the setting, the number of changes in the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on was 500 times. The fluctuation pattern table selected at a certain time is different. In addition, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depends on whether the set value is 1 to 6. , The variation pattern table selected is different.

  After the "power-on of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z", the fluctuation of the special symbol after the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is used by using the fluctuation counter stored in the main control internal RAM. Know the number of times. That is, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the variation number counter is incremented by 1 (counted up) every time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and the pachinko accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on, the variation counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is not cleared. In addition, after "powering on the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by operation of the RWM clear button 633z", whether the setting value setting was changed when the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, or the main control built-in without changing the setting. Information on whether or not the RAM has only been initialized is also stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine is used as a fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (when the reach is out) and a fluctuation pattern table at the time of release. The variation pattern table A when the number of variations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, the variation pattern table B when it is 100 times, the variation pattern table A when it is 101 to 199 times, When it is 200 times, the fluctuation pattern table B, when it is 201 to 299 times, fluctuation pattern table A, when it is 300 times, fluctuation pattern table B, when it is 301 to 399 times, fluctuation pattern table A, 400 times Variation pattern table B when it is, and variation pattern table A when it is 401 to 499 times. 500 times the fluctuation pattern table C in accordance with the set value when it has been decided to select in order. As the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 3. The table C3, the variation pattern table C4 when the setting value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 when the setting value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 when the setting value is 6 are selected.

  A plurality of types of variation patterns are set in each of the variation pattern tables described above, and the variation display time of the special symbol and the effect display device 1600 executed within the variation time of the special symbol are set for each variation pattern. The variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative pattern in is set. In such a fluctuating effect, an effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is executed between the start and the stop of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol. Further, as the variation pattern tables, there are variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (when the reach is lost) and variation pattern tables A to C at the time of loss, and the variation patterns at the time of reach (when the reach is lost). In Tables A to C, a variation pattern for forming a reach and executing a reach effect in variable display of a decorative pattern is set, whereas in the variation pattern tables A to C, variation of a decorative pattern is set. A variation pattern that does not form a reach in the display is set. That is, whether or not a reach is formed in the variable pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (when the reach is released) and the variable pattern tables A to C when the reach is released in the variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not the reach production is executed). Whether or not), different fluctuation patterns are set. However, as the variation pattern table C at the time of reach (when the reach is lost), the variation pattern table C common to the variation pattern table C at the time of loss may be used. As will be described in detail later, when the variation pattern table C is selected, whether the lottery result is a win or not (reach effect, etc.) Since the suggestive effect A2 (roulette effect) is executed based on the change pattern without executing it, the common change pattern table C is set so as to determine the change pattern in which the execution of such suggestive effect A2 is set. Can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (A), in the variation pattern table A, variation patterns for which suggestive effect execution is not set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. That is, the variation pattern table A is a “variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value” that can be commonly used for any setting value, and in the game period using the variation pattern table A, the suggestive effect A1, A2 is never executed. Further, the game period using the variation pattern table A is set longer than the game periods using other variation pattern tables, thereby limiting the frequent occurrence of the suggestive effects A1, A2, etc. in the game progress process, and the suggestive effect. Raising the rarity of A1 and A2. Further, the variation pattern table A is provided as a table that can be used in common for any set value, and thereby it is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to the increase of the variation pattern table. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), in the variation pattern table B, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggested effect A1 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table B, compared with the plural kinds of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation pattern table A, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of each special symbol is added for 3 seconds is set, and in the added 3 seconds. , The suggestive effect A1 is executed. Then, in the suggestion effect A1, it is made to indicate whether the current set value is the high setting or the low setting, depending on the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times). However, the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggested effect A1 is set does not include the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light, which is the effect content of the suggested effect A1. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which execution of the suggested effect A1 is set, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is set to any one of 1 to 3 based on the current set value. When determining the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110, the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 increases as the current set value becomes higher. At the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. It is possible to know which of the set values 1 to 6 the value is. Accordingly, in the suggestive effect A1, when the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light is large, it can be expected that the current set value is high.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, the variation display of the decorative design is started, the production of whether the lottery result is a win or not is executed, and the variation of the decorative design is performed. Although the display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, the suggestive effect A1 is executed between the temporarily stopping and the variable display of the decorative pattern. As described above, since the suggested effect A1 is executed after the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is executed, the visual confirmation of the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win may be hindered. Absent.

  Note that the variation pattern table B is also a “variation pattern table that does not depend on the setting value” that can be commonly used for any setting value, as with the variation pattern table A. As a result, it is possible to suppress pressure on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to an increase in the variation pattern table.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the variation pattern table C, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggested effect A2 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, the variation pattern for which execution of the suggested effect A2 is set is a variation pattern not set in the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern table B, and instead of the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win. The suggestion effect A2 is set to be executed. Then, in the suggested effect A2, the roulette effect is executed, and the current setting depends on whether the result of the roulette effect is “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “set value 6”, or “?”. I try to suggest a value.

  As shown in FIG. 168, in the fluctuation pattern table C, as plural kinds of fluctuation patterns, fluctuation pattern 1 that is stopped at “even” as a result of roulette effect, fluctuation pattern that is stopped at “odd” 2, a variation pattern 3 for stopping at “high setting”, a variation pattern 4 for stopping at “setting value 6”, and a variation pattern 5 for stopping at “?” Are prepared. Specifically, since the current setting value is 1, the variation pattern 2 is set in the variation pattern table C1 so as to stop at "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table C2, since the current setting value is 2, fluctuation pattern 1 is set so as to stop at "even" as a result of the roulette effect. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table C3, since the current setting value is 3, the fluctuation pattern 2 is set so as to stop at "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table C4, since the current setting value is 4, fluctuation pattern 1 is set to stop at “even” as a result of the roulette effect, and fluctuation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3 is set. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table C5, since the current setting value is 5, fluctuation pattern 2 is set to stop at “odd number” as a result of roulette effect, and fluctuation pattern is set to stop at “high setting”. 3 is set. Further, since the current setting value is 6 in the variation pattern table C6, the variation pattern 1 is set to stop at "even" as a result of the roulette effect, and the variation pattern set to be stopped at "high setting". 3, the variation pattern 4 is set to stop at the "set value 6". In this way, since the suggestive effect A2 includes a mode in which set values such as “high setting” and “set value 6” are specifically shown, the suggestive effect A2 includes attention to the result of the roulette effect. In the suggestive effect A2, when the result of the roulette effect is “high setting” or “setting value 6”, the probability of winning the lottery result is high, so that the player can expect to play the game.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the variation display of the decorative design is started, the variation display of the decorative design is temporarily stopped, and then the variation display of the decorative design is displayed. Although it is stopped, from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the temporary stop, the variable display of the decorative design is produced without executing the production of whether or not the lottery result is a win. The roulette effect is executed as the suggested effect A2 in a state in which the display device 1600 is displayed small in the corner. In this way, since the suggestion effect A2 is executed in a situation where the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is not executed, whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern or the lottery result is a win or not The visual effect on the suggestive effect A2 is not hindered by the effect, and the attention level for the suggestive effect A2 can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, in the roulette effect, five-part roulette display of “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, “set value 6”, and “?” Appears on the effect display device 1600. , The lit part moves in the clockwise direction with the signal "Roulette effect start!" Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the movement of the lighting portion of the roulette display is slowly decelerated, and the result of the roulette effect based on the variation pattern (“even number”, “odd number”, “high setting”, “setting value 6”, The "?" Will stop the lighting part. At this time, when it is stopped at "even" as a result of the roulette effect based on the variation pattern, it is recognized that the current set value is 2, 4, or 6, and when stopped at "odd" Recognizes that the current setting value is any one of 1, 3, 5 and recognizes that the current setting value is any of 4 to 5 when stopped at "high setting". If it is stopped at "setting value 6", it is recognized that the current setting value is 6, and if it is stopped at "?", Which of the current setting values is 1 to 6? Can be recognized. Regarding the variation patterns 1 to 5, the variation time of the special symbol is different, and in the roulette effect executed within the variation time of the special symbol, the time until the result is stopped is different.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern table C is different from the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B according to the set value, and is referred to as a “variation pattern table depending on the set value”. As a result, the execution time of the suggestive effect A2 (roulette effect) can be varied according to the set value, and the degree of freedom in effect design that suggests the set value can be increased.

  As described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table B is selected each time the variation display of the special symbol in the subsequent game is performed 100 times. The suggestive effect A1 is executed based on the change pattern, and when the change display of the special symbol is performed 500 times, the suggestive effect A2 is executed based on the change pattern selected from the change pattern tables C1 to C6. . When the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, the fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C6 according to the setting value are used when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed 500 times. The suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 according to the set value. In this way, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, each time the variation display of the special symbol in the subsequent game is performed 100 times, the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 causes the current state. Since the setting value of is suggested, the game can be played with expectation until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings, when the reach is out of the fluctuation pattern table (when out of reach) As the respective fluctuation pattern tables, the fluctuation pattern table A when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 1 to 99 times, and the fluctuation pattern table B is 101 to 199 times when it is 100 times. , The variation pattern table A, 200 times the variation pattern table B, 201 to 299 times the variation pattern table A, 300 times the variation pattern table B, 301 to 399 times. When the fluctuation pattern table A is 400 times, when the fluctuation pattern table B is 401 to 499 times It is set to be selected in the order of the variation pattern table C0, when a change pattern table A, 500 times in a certain time.

  As described above, in the variation pattern table B, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggested effect A1 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Then, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated 1 to 3 times in the suggestive effect A1, the light from the LED 3121 first causes the light guide plate 3110 to move. While the pattern is made to emit light, after initializing the RAM with built-in main control without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestive effect A1, not the first pattern but the LED 3131 The light guide plate 3110 is caused to emit the second pattern once by light. Therefore, when the suggestive effect A1 is executed, whether the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depending on whether the light guide plate 3110 emits the first pattern or the second pattern. It is possible to know whether or not only the main control internal RAM has been initialized without changing the setting. That is, in the suggestive effect A1, when the second pattern is emitted from the light guide plate 3110, although information about the current set value cannot be grasped like the number of times the first pattern is emitted (1 to 3 times), It is possible to understand that there is no change in the set value before the power is cut off and the previous set value is maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the variation pattern table C, a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Of these, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the fluctuation pattern table C0 is selected, but the fluctuation pattern table C0 is not selected. The variation pattern 5 is set such that the roulette effect stops as "?" Regardless of which of the current setting values is 1 to 6. In this regard, after changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A2 does not stop with "?" As a result of the roulette effect, so that the result of the roulette effect is " It is possible to know that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. That is, in the suggestive effect A2, when the stop is "?" As a result of the roulette effect, information about the current setting value such as "even number", "odd number", "high setting", and "setting value 6" is displayed. Although it cannot be grasped, it can be grasped that the set value has not been changed since the power was turned off and the previous set value is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when the set value is confirmed and displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when the power is normally turned on (power is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a). Is to carry over the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at the time of power-off, and a fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the pachinko machine 1 was powered on with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z last time. I am going to choose. That is, at the time of power-off, the variation counter stored in the main control RAM is held (backed up), and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is Is continuously used without being cleared, and thereafter, each time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, 1 is added (counted up) to the fluctuation number counter. In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is not cleared because the fluctuation number counter is not cleared. When it is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 are not always executed. Therefore, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed other than when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. Somehow, you can get attention with hope.

  Further, for the fluctuation number counter, 1 is added (counted up) every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, but when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 reaches 500 times, The variation counter is cleared, and thereafter, each time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, 1 is added (count up). That is, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table A (1 to 99th) → B (100th) → A (101 to 199th) → B (200 To repeat A) (A201 to 299th) B (300th) A (301 to 399th) B (400th) A (401 to 499th) C1 to C6 (500th) On the other hand, when the main control RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table A (1 to 99 times) → B (100 times) → A (101 to 199 times) → B ( 200th)-> A (201-299th)-> B (300th)-> A (301-399th)-> B (400th)-> A (401-499th)-> C0 (500th) There is.

  In addition, even before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 reaches 500 times, if the lottery result is a win, the fluctuation number counter is cleared, and then again, the special symbol. Every time the variable display of 1 is performed, 1 is added (counted up). That is, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed when the lottery result is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times continuously. As a result, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggestion effect A1 or It can be expected that the suggestive effect A2 is executed.

  Further, as described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestive effect A1, the current light emission number (1 to 3 times) of the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 is used. In contrast to the case of notifying the information regarding the set value of No. 1, when the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the light guide plate 3110 is displayed on the light guide plate 3110 in the suggested effect A1. Although the second pattern is made to emit light, information about the current set value is not notified. Further, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the result of the roulette effect is “even”, “odd”, “high setting”, and “setting value 6” in the suggested effect A2. While the information about the current set value is notified by stopping at any of the following, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting, In the suggested effect A2, the result of the roulette effect is stopped at any one of “?”, And thus information about the current set value is not notified. For this reason, if the hall manager thinks that he does not want to notify the player of the information about the current set value when the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine is again activated. By turning on the power after turning off the power of the machine 1, and by only initializing the RAM with built-in main control without changing the setting when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, information about the current set value is given to the player. You can choose not to notify.

  Further, in the normal state (non-time saving state), the variation pattern tables A to C are used in the above-mentioned order each time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, whereas the time saving state is obtained after the lottery result is successful. In this case, the fluctuation pattern table in the time saving state is used as a table different from the fluctuation pattern tables A to C. In the variation pattern table at the time saving state, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than that at the normal state is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Then, even if the lottery result becomes a short time after winning, even if the number of changes of the special symbol after the start of the time saving state becomes a predetermined number, by selecting a specific change pattern table, A variation pattern for which execution of the suggestive effect is set is determined from a specific variation pattern table, and the suggestive effect is executed based on the variation pattern. At this time, for example, in the time saving state, by performing the suggestive effect more frequently than in the normal state, not only whether the lottery result is a win, but also whether or not the suggestive effect is executed is expected to be noticed. be able to. At the end of the time saving state, the variation counter is cleared, and thereafter, each time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, 1 is added (counted up).

  In addition, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when only the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, the fluctuation pattern table B or the fluctuation pattern table C is used, but the number of fluctuations of other special symbols is changed. Also in this case, a specific fluctuation pattern table may be used. For example, when the variation display of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is the first time, a specific variation pattern table may be used. In this way, by selecting a specific variation pattern table when the variation display of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is the first time, the execution of the suggestive effect is set from the specific variation pattern table. It is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern that is present and execute the suggestive effect based on the fluctuation pattern. In this regard, most of the setting change of the set value and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting are performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the hall is opened. By executing the suggestion effect at the first time of the variable display of the special symbol after the power of the machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to motivate the player to actively start the game immediately after the opening of the hall.

  Further, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, or when the main control RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the number of fluctuations is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 are executed using the change pattern table B and the change pattern table C. For example, by using the effect display device 1600, the number of changes in the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is added based on the number-of-changes counter (1 change → 2 changes → 3 changes → ... Incremental display) to notify, or the remaining number of fluctuation display of special symbols until suggestive effect A1 or suggestive effect A2 is executed Based on the subtraction may be or notification in the form of going to (and will reduce the fluctuation count display by the remaining 500 change → 499 change → 497 change → ··· and "-1"). Further, such notification is at a stage when the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, for example, the remaining number of the variable display of the special symbol until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed is 10 times. It may be executed from a different stage. As a result, the player can know whether or not the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, and information about the current set value can be obtained until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed. You can continue the game with expectations as expected.

  In addition, when the timing of execution of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, the execution of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is imminent as a different effect from the notification of the number of times the special symbol changes. You may make it perform the special omen effect to notify a person. For example, when the remaining number of the variable display of the special symbol until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed reaches 10, the effect display device 1600 is used to “set suggest in 10 more times!” By displaying the information and urging the player to continue the game, it is possible to continue the game with the expectation that the information regarding the current set value will be obtained. In addition, the notification of the number of times the special symbol changes is performed only when the setting value of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. In this case, the notification content may be reset to the initial state together with the initialization of the variation counter. As a result, there is no gap between the number of fluctuations notified to the player and the time when the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed using the change pattern table B or the change pattern table C, and the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A1 is given. It is possible to improve the reliability of the performance A2.

[15-1. Regarding the variation of the transition of the fluctuation pattern table when the main control RAM is initialized]
In the above-described embodiment, when only the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table at the time of the reach (when the reach is released) is not changed. As each of the variation pattern tables, a variation pattern table different from the case where the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is selected in order, and the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C0 is selected. In the suggestion effect A1 and the suggestion effect A2 when selecting, the information regarding the current setting value is not notified. As another embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is only initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without changing the settings, the pachinko machine 1 is set based on the already set values. No. 1 suggestion effect A1 when selecting a variation pattern from the variation pattern table B or variation pattern tables C1 to C6 by selecting the same variation pattern table in the order when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on. In the suggested effect A2, information about the current set value may be notified. The transition of the special fluctuation pattern table in the case where the main control internal RAM is only initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described below with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a table showing a modification of the transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 170, when only the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the set value that has already been set is referred to and the referred setting is made. Based on the values, the variation pattern table at the time of reach (when the reach is lost) and the variation pattern table at the time of loss are set. Specifically, as in the case where the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is used as a fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (when the reach is out) and a fluctuation pattern table when the time is out. After the power is turned on, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 to 99 times, the fluctuation pattern table A is 100 times, the fluctuation pattern table B is 101 to 199 times, and the fluctuation pattern table A is 200 times. , The fluctuation pattern table B is 201 to 299 times, the fluctuation pattern table A is 300 times, the fluctuation pattern table B is 301 to 399 times, and the fluctuation pattern table A is 400 times. When the fluctuation pattern table B is 401 to 499 times, the fluctuation pattern table A is 50 Is set to be selected in the variation pattern table C, the order of corresponding to the set value when a round. As the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 3. The table C3, the variation pattern table C4 when the setting value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 when the setting value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 when the setting value is 6 are selected.

  After the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control internal RAM is not initialized and the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Similarly, in the suggested effect A1 when the variation pattern table B is selected, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit the first pattern. That is, in the suggestion effect A1, it is suggested whether the current set value is the high setting or the low setting, depending on the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times). When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set, it is determined which of 1 to 3 times the light guide plate 3110 emits light based on the current set value. However, when determining the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110, it is determined that the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 increases as the current set value becomes higher. As a result, even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even after the main control internal RAM is only initialized without changing the setting of the set value, the suggestion production A1 is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. As with the case where the setting value is changed, the information about the current setting value can be grasped, and when the light guide plate 3110 emits a large number of times, it can be expected that the current setting value is high. .

  After the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control internal RAM is not initialized and the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Similarly, the variation pattern table C according to the set value is selected when the variation number of the special symbol after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 500 times. That is, as the variation pattern table C according to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the setting value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the setting value is 2, and the variation pattern table C when the setting value is 3. C3, the variation pattern table C4 when the setting value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 when the setting value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 when the setting value is 6. Then, in the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the roulette effect is executed as the suggested effect A2, and as a result of the roulette effect, the operation is stopped at any of "even", "odd", "high setting", and "set value 6". The variation patterns 1 to 4 are set, and in the suggestion effect A2, the current set value is suggested by the result of the roulette effect based on the variation pattern. As a result, even after the initialization of the main control internal RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in the suggestive performance A2, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. You can grasp the information about the current setting value as well as after changing the setting value, and when you stop at "high setting" or "setting value 6" as a result of roulette effect, the lottery result will be a win Since the probability is high, it is possible to play the game with expectations.

  As described above, when only the internal RAM for main control is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. As in the case of performing, every time the variation display of the special symbol in the subsequent game is performed 100 times, the suggestive effect A1 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, and the variation of the special symbol When the display is performed 500 times, since the suggestion effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, there is no effect difference in the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2. Therefore, depending on the execution of the suggested effect A1 or the suggested effect A2, whether the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or only the initialization of the main control internal RAM is performed without changing the setting value. I can't figure out what I did.

  In this modified example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting completion notification is executed by the output from the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker, and the setting value is set. You are informed that you have made changes. Similarly, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting of the set value, the image is output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The completion notification is executed to notify that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized. As a result, whether the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by executing the setting completion notification or the initialization completion notification, or whether the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. It is possible to understand whether or not the conversion has only been performed. In addition, as the notification of the completion of setting or the notification of the completion of initialization, for example, the initial display mode of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 (the initial symbol combination before the start of the first variation, etc.) It is possible to set a display mode different from that of the case where only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without being accompanied. These notifications are when the variation display of the special symbol is started after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off again to turn on the power (power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RWM clear button 633z). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value may be changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the setting of the main control internal RAM may be changed without changing the setting value. It becomes impossible to know whether or not only initialization was performed. As a result, the player is notified whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, or whether the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. If he / she does not want to do so, for example, the hall manager powers off the pachinko machine 1 again and powers it on (powering on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RWM clear button 633z). It is possible to arbitrarily create a state in which the initialization completion notification is not executed.

  Further, in the present modification, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value before power-off is maintained when only the initialization of the main control internal RAM is performed without changing the setting of the setting value. As for the variation counter, since the value before power-off is reset, when selecting the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation counter thereafter, start from the beginning (variation pattern table corresponding to the first variation). It will be. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value, the hall administrator maintains the same setting value as before power-off. Therefore, it is possible to reset only the variation counter, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggested effect A1 Information regarding the current set value can be notified by or the suggestion effect A2. On the other hand, in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and only the initialization of the main control internal RAM is performed without changing the setting of the setting value, the hall manager sets the same setting as before power-off. While maintaining the value, the fluctuation counter is reset, but when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is suggested. Information regarding the current set value is not notified by the effect A1 or the suggested effect A2. Therefore, while maintaining the same set value as before power-off, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times from the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, it is suggested. In order to notify the information about the current set value by the effect A1 or the suggested effect A2, the hall manager operates so as to change the setting of the set value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the same operation as before the power shutdown It is necessary to reset the setting value. In this respect, in this modification, it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is required without changing the setting of the set value. , "Resetting the same setting value as before power-off" can be saved.

  Also in this modified example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, at the stage when the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, as a different effect from the notification of the number of changes of the special symbol, the suggestive effect A1 or A special predictive presentation effect may be executed to inform the player that the suggestion presentation A2 is about to be performed. For example, when the remaining number of the variable display of the special symbol until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed reaches 10, the effect display device 1600 is used to “set suggest in 10 more times!” By displaying the information and urging the player to continue the game, it is possible to continue the game with the expectation that the information regarding the current set value will be obtained. In addition, the notification of the number of times the special symbol changes is performed only when the setting value of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. In that case, the notification content may be reset to the initial state. As a result, there is no gap between the number of fluctuations notified to the player and the time when the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed using the change pattern table B or the change pattern table C, and the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A1 is given. It is possible to improve the reliability of the performance A2.

[15-2. Regarding Suggestive Rendering B that is executed at a different timing from Suggestive Rendering A1 and Suggestive Rendering A2]
In the above-described embodiment, the case where the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2 is executed in accordance with the passage of the change time of the decorative symbol in the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 has been described. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect B capable of suggesting the current set value regardless of the elapse of the variation time of the decorative symbol at a different timing from the execution of the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2. Execution of such suggestive effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 167.

  First, regarding the suggestive effect B, when the handle 111 that is not operated is operated in a situation where there is no operation instruction of the handle 111, a lottery of whether or not to execute the suggestive effect B is performed with a predetermined probability. ing. Specifically, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, the fact that the detection signal is input is passed via the main control board 1310. It is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery as to whether or not the suggestive effect B is to be executed with a predetermined probability (in this embodiment, a lottery for winning 1/50). This lottery is set so as to win at least a higher probability than the jackpot lottery, and by making it appear frequently, it is possible to easily experience the suggestion production B for a plurality of players, and to suggest it to one player. Experience B is experienced multiple times to improve motivation to continue playing. Then, in the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect B, when the execution of the suggestive effect B is determined (when the prize is won), one of a plurality of kinds of suggestive patterns is selected according to the current set value. The suggestion pattern is determined, and the suggestion effect B is executed based on the determined suggestion pattern. Further, in the suggestive effect B, the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4, regardless of which suggestive pattern. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed and displayed), the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to hold information about the current setting value and to know which of the setting values 1 to 6 the current setting value is. However, as described in detail above, the current setting value is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command even when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command. Also makes it possible to know which of the set values 1 to 6 the current set value is based on the command. As a result, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, when the execution of the suggestion effect B is determined (in the case of winning), one of the suggestion patterns of a plurality of kinds of suggestion patterns is determined according to the current set value. be able to.

  More specifically, in the suggestive effect B, as the sound from the speaker, “may be set value 1”, “may be set value 2”, “may be set value 3”, “may be set value 4”, “may be set value 5”, The current set value is suggested depending on which of the "set value 6" is output. Further, when outputting "may be set value 1" as sound from the speaker, a lamp provided in the body frame 4 is made to emit light once, and when outputting "may be set value 2", it is provided in the body frame 4. When the lamp is made to emit light twice at a predetermined interval and the "setting value of 3" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is made to emit three times at the predetermined interval and the setting value of 4 is output at the main body. When the lamp provided on the frame 4 is made to emit light four times at a predetermined interval and "a set value of 5" is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is made to make a light 5 times at a predetermined interval and "a set value of 6". When outputting, the lamp provided on the body frame 4 is made to emit light six times at a predetermined interval so that the lamp provided on the body frame 4 is made to emit light at a predetermined interval. Further, for example, with respect to "may the set value 6", it is possible to output when the current set value is not 6, that is, any one of 1 to 5, and in the suggestion effect B, "may be the set value 6". Even if "" is output, the current setting value may not be 6 in some cases. In addition, in suggestive effect B, other than these, it is suggested that the current set value is “even” of 2, 4, and 6, or that it is “odd” of 1, 3, and 5. You may make it suggest that it is "high setting" of 4-6.

  Further, the suggestive effect B can be executed regardless of whether or not it is within a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2. I have to. As shown in FIG. 167 (A), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A is executed, the execution of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is not set, so that such a change pattern is set. Within the variation time of the special symbol (variation time of the decorative symbol) based on it, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect B. However, in the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect B for which the execution condition is satisfied first is still being executed, the execution condition for the new suggestion effect B is not satisfied, and the duplicate execution of the suggestion effect B is prohibited ( Limit). Specifically, during execution of the suggested effect B, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111, a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, and the fact that the detection signal is input is the main control board. Even if it is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the suggestive effect B is being executed, and does not perform a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect B. Is prohibited (restricted).

  As described above, the suggestive effect B of the present embodiment is executed by combining the sound from the speaker and the light emission of the lamp provided in the main body frame 4, and after the sound from the speaker ends. Also when the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 continue to emit light at predetermined intervals (for example, even after the sound of "may be set value 6" is output, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 are made to emit light at predetermined intervals. When sound continues to be output from the speaker even if the processing remains, or after the light emission of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has ended (for example, the sound "may be set value 1" has not been output). (When the process of causing the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 to emit light is completed). Therefore, as a target period for which it is determined that the suggestive effect B is being executed, the output period of the sound from the speaker and the long period of the light emission period of the lamp provided in the main body frame 4 are associated with each other. . As a result, as the target period of the lottery prohibition in the suggested effect B, the duplicate execution of the suggested effect B is surely prohibited (restricted).

  Further, even under the above-mentioned prohibition, if the execution interval between the suggestive effect B executed first and the suggestive effect B executed later is short, the suggestive effect B before and after will be continuous, and, for example, the main frame There is a concern that the light emission of the lamps provided in 4 may be mixed and the player may erroneously recognize the suggested content. In the present embodiment, in consideration of these points, a predetermined limited extension period (for example, 5 seconds) is generated after the suggestion effect B is executed, and regardless of which execution pattern the suggestion effect B is executed, It is prohibited (restricted) so that the lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect B is not performed over a period in which the limit extension period is added to the execution period of the suggestive effect B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the suggestion contents by executing the suggestion effect B executed first and the suggestion effect B executed later in a mixed manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B is executed, the suggestion is made in the 3 seconds added to the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A. Since the execution of the effect A1 is set, the suggestion effect B is executed in the execution period of the suggestion effect A1 within the variation time of the special symbol (variation time of the decorative symbol) based on such a variation pattern. It is possible to execute the suggestive effect B except for the execution period of the suggestive effect A1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C is executed, almost all of the variation time of the special symbol (variation time of the decorative symbol) is used as the suggested effect A2. Since the execution of the roulette effect is set, it is prohibited to execute the suggestion effect B within the variation time of the special symbol (variation time of the decorative symbol) based on such variation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), when the variable display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern (variable display of the decorative symbol) is not performed, the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 may be executed. Since it does not exist, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B in a period in which such a variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol) is not performed.

  As described above, unlike the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2, the suggestive effect B suddenly suggests the current set value when the handle 111 is operated, so that the player should be surprised. You can Further, during the execution period of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2, the suggestive effect B is prohibited from being executed, and the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is prioritized over the suggestive effect B. It is possible to prevent the visual perception of the suggestive effect A2 from being hindered and to positively draw attention to the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2. In this respect, regarding the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2, it is preferable to make reliability of the suggestion higher than that of the suggestive effect B, for example, by eliminating the gust like the suggestive effect B.

  Further, as described above, the suggestive effect B is executed even within the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2. It is possible. In this regard, regarding the suggestive effect B, since the current setting value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation from being disturbed from being disturbed. it can. In addition, outside the variable production such as the variable display of the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol) is not performed, and the time is tedious, but the handle 111 Since there is a possibility that the suggestion effect B is suddenly executed when the is operated and the current set value is suggested, it is possible to generate the motivation to operate the handle 111 and start the game.

  In addition, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the handle 111 is operated after a predetermined condition such as closing the main body frame 4 is satisfied. , It is possible to execute the suggested effect B. However, when the operation of the handle 111 is continued before the predetermined condition is satisfied and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestive effect B may be executed even after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the operation of the handle 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is satisfied until after the predetermined condition is satisfied, in order to execute the suggestive effect B, the handle 111 is once operated after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is necessary to remove the hand from and operate the handle 111 again. Not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but also when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, when the main control RAM is initialized, the normal power-on (RWM) is performed. The same applies to the case where the power is turned on without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, in the present example, although the suggestion effect B can be executed when the handle 111 is operated, the suggestion of the current set value is notified when the suggestion effect B is executed by the player's arbitrary selection. It's possible not to. That is, when the player selects not to give the suggestion of the current set value, the current output is output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 at the timing when the suggestive effect B is executed. The setting value is not suggested. As a result, for a player who does not need a suggestion about the current set value, by choosing not to notify the suggestion, the suggestion about the current set value will not be confused, and the lottery result will be a hit. You can concentrate on the production of whether or not. It should be noted that it may be configured such that only a part of the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 in the suggestion effect B is not notified by the player's arbitrary selection. For example, it is provided in the main body frame 4. The notification may be given depending on the output from the lamp, but the notification may not be given depending on the output from the speaker. Further, regarding the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 executed in the change effect such as the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600, the suggestion of the current set value when the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 are executed. The player cannot arbitrarily make a selection so as not to notify.

  Further, as described above in detail, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the warning notification can be extended and executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker. In the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, a mode in which the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 are output when the suggestive effect B is executed when the handle 111 is operated, It may be configured to be different from the other period (after the end of the extended warning notification). For example, it may be configured such that only a part of the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the main body frame 4 in the suggestive effect B is not notified. For example, depending on the output from the lamp provided in the main body frame 4, Although the notification is given, the notification may be omitted depending on the output from the speaker. In this way, during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, priority is given to the warning notification over the suggestion production B, thereby preventing the recognition of the warning notification from being disturbed, and making it possible for a person other than the hall manager to perform the wrongdoing. It is possible to maintain a situation in which the surveillance system is strengthened so that nothing is done.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B when the handle 111 is operated. However, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the handle 111 is first set. The suggestive effect B executed when operated is configured such that the effect is different from the suggestive effect B executed when the handle 111 is operated the second time or later. For example, regarding the suggestive effect B executed when the handle 111 is first operated after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion B is suggested less than the second time, and the like. Is configured to be highly reliable. Further, when the handle 111 is operated, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B with a predetermined probability, but as the time elapses (the more the number of times the special symbol changes, the more it may be). The probability that the suggestion effect B is executed is reduced, and even if the handle 111 is operated, it is difficult to execute the suggestion effect B. In this respect, since the hall manager often performs the setting change of the set value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on before the opening of the hall, let's operate the handle 111 to start the game immediately after the opening of the hall. Can motivate you to. Not only when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but also when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, when the main control RAM is initialized, the normal power-on (RWM) is performed. The same applies to the case where the power is turned on without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

  Further, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B when the handle 111 is operated, but instead of operating the handle 111, the suggestive effect B is executed when the effect operation unit 160 is operated. It may be configured to be possible. When the effect operation unit 160 is used as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect B, for example, the effect operation unit 160 is also used as an opportunity to execute the suggestion effect A1 or the suggestion effect A2, and the effect operation unit 160 is operated. At times, the suggestive effect B may be executed, and the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 may be started. Further, as an opportunity to execute the suggestive effect B, instead of operating the handle 111, after changing the setting of the set value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after performing confirmation display of the set value, the main control is performed. It may be after the RAM is initialized and after the power is normally turned on.) First, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 (the entrance for participating in the lottery for winning or not) When entering a ball, entering a ball entrance that does not participate in a lottery such as winning a general prize slot 2001, when a specific date and time is reached by using a real-time clock IC, and so on. May be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to generate motivation to obtain information regarding the set value by the suggested effect B at the timing when the suggested effect B may be executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 as the game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progress of the game, the main of FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. The main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 115, which can be electrically connected to a test harness as a wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting the output signal to a test device that tests the pachinko machine 1. It is ready to be prepared.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by the test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x which is the surface side of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector is mounted. 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y which is the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

  In this way, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine tested by a specific testing institution, and the pachinko machine 1 is a gaming hall. Even when it is produced as a mass production machine to be shipped to, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is not formed as an empty area on the front surface side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310 can be increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 ′ of FIG. 113 (a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . These plural electronic components are of the ZIP type main control MPU (indicated as part number “MIC1” in the figure) included in the lead type of FIG. 113A as lead type electronic components, and of the surface mounting type. As an electronic component, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of FIG. 113 (a) and the main control board 1310 ′ are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x ′ of the main control board 1310 ′.

  The main control board 1310 'has a parts list area 1310xb' of FIG. 113 (a) as an information area. In the parts list area 1310xb ', information corresponding to the identifier of the surface mount type electronic part can be written. The information written in the parts list area 1310xb 'may include the name of the manufacturer of the surface mount type electronic part (including the abbreviation and symbol), the part number of the surface mount type electronic part, and the like.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), in the parts list area 1310xb ', a parts list of electronic parts configured such that part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are arranged. Is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the part arrangement area 1310xa '. Is printed in white (or black). A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as being consecutive. . With this delimiter, the part number and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) can be distinguished and identified. In addition to the product number (number published in the catalog), the manufacturer name (including abbreviation and symbol) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing.

  As described above, even when it is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310 ′, information corresponding to the identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) Is displayed in the parts list area 1310xb 'provided in the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface mount type electronic component can be surely visually recognized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 111 as a game control board which can control the progress of the game, and The control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 as a sealing board box having a sealing means.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of vent holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 115 as holes having a shape smaller than the shape of the surface mount type electronic parts among the plurality of electronic parts. Has been.

  As described above, since the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of vent holes 1301z having a smaller shape than the shape of the surface-mounting type electronic component, the surface-mounting type electronic component may be tampered with by any unauthorized means. Even if an attempt is made to remove the electronic component from the main control board 1310 and replace it with an unauthorized electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the vent hole 1301z which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control substrate box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the winning probability control circuit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as the setting device. ing. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of a jackpot determination value indicating that a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol). Big hit symbol determination table that stipulates the ratio of determination values, small hit determination table that stipulates the ratio of small hit determination values that indicate that you have won a small hit, percentage of determination values for the determination of small hit symbols The small hit symbol determination table to be used, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation time to the normal time is specified), or is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.) can be selected. . The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted and is rotated, and can switch the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. The setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in (for example, a position in which the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction). In this state, the setting key cylinder can be turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation can be performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. ing.

  The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different boards and electrically connected to each other.

  In this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are mounted on different boards, respectively, so that the force generated by the external operation of the setting key switch 1311a is reduced. Since the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted can be prevented from being easily transmitted to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted, the main control MPU 1310a is mounted by the force associated with the external operation to the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to contribute to preventing the main control board 1310 from being bent. Therefore, it can contribute to preventing the deflection of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 on which the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 is mounted as the winning probability control circuit is a surface mount component that is an SMD type electronic component. 71 is a surface mountable component mountable substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change substrate 1311 of FIG. 71 is mounted as a setting device. The setting change substrate 1311 of FIG. 71 is a lead type electronic component. The insertion mounting component mounting board can mount only the insertion mounting component. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a surface mountable component mountable board on which surface mount components (SMD type) can be mounted, and the setting change on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is performed. The board 1311 may be an insert mounting component mounting board capable of mounting only the insert mounting component (SMD type). This makes it possible to reduce the peeling load of the wiring pattern and the land pattern in the solder portion where the insertion mounting component (lead type) is soldered to the solder surface of the substrate, as compared with the surface mounting component (SMD type). Therefore, it is possible to make the solder portion resistant to peeling.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as the surface mountable component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as the insert mountable component mount board are transparent boards. Each case is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by the caulking portion 1303 shown in FIG. 115 with its exterior as a sealing device. The main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a surface mountable component mounting board is provided with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a connector electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 as a winning probability control circuit. In addition, a connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a of FIG. 71 as a setting device on the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as an insertion mounting component mounting board. . The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the caulking portion 1303 can accommodate the main control board 1310, which is a surface mountable component mountable board, and the setting change board 1311, which is an insert mountable board. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 which is a surface mountable component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 which is an insert mountable component mount board.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as the connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as the surface mountable component mountable board, and the insertion mounting component. As a mounting board, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as a connector provided on the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is electrically connected by a connector connection provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing the misalignment of the fitting axis. Has been done. Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector having a floating mechanism. The special connector equipped with this floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in. By moving a predetermined distance range in the direction perpendicular to the inserting and pushing direction (for example, the vertical direction), it is possible to absorb an error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs during pushing.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as the game control board, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is provided as the setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and can change the set value at which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. As the lead type electronic component, the setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 71 is provided.

  The lead-type setting key switch 1311a is one in which a setting key capable of changing the set value is inserted / removed. The setting change board 1311 may be bent as the setting key is inserted into and removed from the lead type setting key switch 1311a, while the main control board 1310 is not bent.

  As described above, since the lead type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311 which is separate from the main control board 1310, an operation of inserting and removing the setting key for changing the set value ( Even if the setting change board 1311 bends due to the operation, the main control board 1310 does not bend. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from being bent due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, which is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 of FIG. It has a front frame constructed. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 70 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which the setting key is inserted and is rotated, and can switch the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. At a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is vertically aligned), the setting key switch is set as the initial position. 1311a is turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. You can do it.

  The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5 on the pivotal support side of the front frame.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 includes a body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 which form a front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward around the left side in front view. Therefore, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the up-down direction when viewed from the front is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the up-down direction when viewed from the front side is the main body. It is the open side of the frame 4. That is, while the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame. Then, the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame.

  In this way, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivotal support side of the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5. If the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is to be altered in any way, the front frame has to be opened, and the illegal action may occur in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It becomes a prominent existence. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 is a cover body that is openably and closably pivotally supported on the open side opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a, which is covered by the back cover 640 of the main control unit 1300 and is provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and covered by the back cover 640. If the back cover 640 is not opened after the key is opened, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated. In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered by the back cover 640 which is pivotally supported on the open side, which is the opposite side of the front frame from the pivot side. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered with the back cover 640. After opening the front frame, the back cover 640 is opened. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless it is opened.

  Specifically, the outer frame 2 includes a body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 which form a front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward around the left side in front view. Therefore, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the up-down direction when viewed from the front is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the up-down direction when viewed from the front side is the main body. It is the open side of the frame 4. That is, while the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame. Then, the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame. Further, a back cover 640 that is openably and closably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. Further, the back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and a left side of the back cover 640 is paid out. Since the back cover mounting portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600 are mounted, the right side in front view is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side of the front cover, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. In other words, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 forming the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the rear cover opening side. Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion opening for inserting the setting key, and the insertion opening of this setting key cylinder is covered by the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 largely (about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Accordingly, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated, and the front cover 640 can be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. You have to open the frame. Therefore, if any unauthorized modification is made to the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The fraudulent activity can be conspicuous in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 112 (a) is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 of FIG. 112 (a) as an insertion mounting component (lead type electronic component) and the surface mounting component (surface mounting type electronic component) of FIG. The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 of a) can be mounted, and the area where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted is defined as a circuit non-formation area, and the SMD type electronic component (surface mounting) shown in FIG. In the area of the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the electronic component of the type), wiring patterns for transmitting control signals and through holes are not arranged at all.

  As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 that is an insertion mounting component and the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 that is a surface mounting component can be mounted in a mixed manner, and the surface mounting can be performed. The region where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a component, is mounted can be configured as a circuit non-formation region in which circuits such as wiring patterns and through holes are not formed. As a result, even if the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 that is a surface mount component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 that is a surface mount component does not include the circuit non-formation region. Since it is formed as described above, the circuit to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 which is a surface mount component can be visually observed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the surface-mounted components.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 can be used as a first operation unit that can receive a predetermined operation. By operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 as the second operation unit, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a setting changing unit capable of changing the set value at which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a notation or the like that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z as guide means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633.

  As described above, since the information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not get confused by the operation procedure. By providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 as separate bodies, crime prevention can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game using a game ball as a game medium, and a setting control unit relating to a preparatory setting for starting a game, and a game. 71 is provided with a main control board 1310 of FIG. 71, a setting change board 1311, and a payout control board 633 of FIG. The setting control unit includes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. It is composed of the determination in step S14 and the processing in step S16A in the closing process. The progress controller is composed of a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71, a main control side main process in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 118, a main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 120, and the like. .. The main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633 as the game control means are the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, the capacitor MC30 of FIGS. The setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71, a plurality of electronic components such as the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. Electronic components related to setting control of the RWM clear button 633z and the like of the payout control board 633 are separately provided on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 and the payout control board 633 of FIG.

  As described above, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic components related to the setting control, are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633. Can be increased. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game using a game ball as a game medium, and as a game control unit that performs control of game preparation and control of the game. There are 71 main control boards 1310. The control of the game is composed of the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 118, the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 120, and the like. The control of the game preparation is the first game preparation control, the determination of step S14 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 118, the process of step S16A, etc., and the step S216 of the setting change process of FIG. 121 as the second game preparation control. And the processing of step S218 and the like. The first game preparation control is the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 as the first operation unit (the above-described power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs)). When power is restored when power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. Is turned 60 degrees clockwise and is turned ON for the first time to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. As a "predetermined set value change permission condition", the RWM clear button is further added. When it is a condition that the pressing operation unit of the 633z is operated and the operation signal is input, the RW of the payout control board 633 of FIG. Clear button 633z to include. Probability be advantageous for the player based on the operation) is what may be a configurable state capable of changing the setting value set. The second game preparation control is switched to any one of a plurality of set values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3 as the second operation unit following the first game preparation control. Is something that can be done. The RWM clear button 633z is arranged on a payout control board 633, which is another board different from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged.

  In this way, the crime prevention can be enhanced by disposing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 on different boards. Therefore, crime prevention can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged are illustrated as separate board cases. Since the main control board box 1320 of 115 and the payout control board box 632 of FIG. 3 are respectively housed, the main control board box 1320 in which the setting change board 1311 in which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the RWM clear By separately providing the payout control board box 632 accommodating the payout control board 633 in which the button 633z is arranged, the crime prevention performance can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 and the payout control board box 632 of FIG. In order to modify the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633, which are housed in the board box 1320, and the payout control board 633, which are housed in the payout control board box 632. You can leave.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game arranged on the back surface side of the game board 5 of FIG. 70, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting change board 1311 to be arranged is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310, and the game board 5 is mounted on the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z of FIG. 3 is arranged. The frame side controls the payout arranged in the main body frame 4 of FIG. 4, and since it is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged is displayed. Placed on the back side of the game board 5 in a state of being housed in the main control board box 1320 as a crimping case together with the main control board 1310. In addition, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is placed can be placed on the main body frame 4 as the frame side while being housed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case. By arranging the game board 5 side and the RWM clear button 633z as the frame side separately on the main body frame 4 side, the crime prevention of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 of FIG. 4 is provided on the front side as an openable / closable door, and is housed in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 70 as a board on which electronic components are mounted. In the case of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 by operating the main control board 1310 and the first key (a regular metal key carried by a clerk such as a game hall clerk) , A case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3) as a first device, a cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 of FIG. 1 and a locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 of FIG. With the operation of the second key (setting key) different from the first key, it is possible to perform the second operation (when changing the setting value, when confirming the set value currently set). The signal line by the operation of the second key electrically becomes an electronic component Includes a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 to be housed together with the main control board 1310 to the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 70 as a second device to be continued, the. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities in a settable state (when changing a set value), and is also set in a checkable state of a current set value being set (set). This is the case when confirming the current setting value). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the casing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated.

  Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body that is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side that is N (neutral) of 24 V AC. Has been done. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal tubular shape of the setting key switch 1311a ( (Or rectangular) a pair of facing long through holes SLH1, which have a long slot shape along the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the housing can be inserted. The SLH 2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid earth (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is electrically insulated from the ground).

  As described above, since the metal cylindrical cylinder body that is the casing of the cylinder lock 127 provided on the front side of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal cylinder cylinder body is temporarily assumed. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invades, the invading noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed, and , The metal tubular (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated. Even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters a cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of metal, the intruding noise (electromagnetic noise) is attenuated by the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. That electronic Goods can be prevented giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310 is a board mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic components.

  In addition, the cylindrical metal cylinder body that is the casing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is a frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or N (neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While being electrically connected to the ground side, a metal tubular (or rectangular) casing that is a casing of the setting key switch 1311a supplies the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. It is insulated from being electrically connected to the ground side, which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC. As a result, the metal cylinder-shaped cylinder body is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the metal tubular (or rectangular) casing is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the pachinko machine 1. It can be in a state of being insulated without being electrically connected.

  Further, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 of the body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is replaced by the outer frame 2). (After being released from), a plurality of kinds of winning probabilities can be set by a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. (When changing the set value), it is possible to set the current set value that has been set to the checkable state (when checking the set value that has been set). Accordingly, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 of the body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is the outer frame). 2)), the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a, and the set value can be set (when the set value is changed) or the set value can be confirmed (set). (When confirming the current set value), the security of the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

[16. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 172 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 173 is a view on arrow B of FIG. 172, and FIG. 174 is a power supply board. 175 is silk printing (part 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of FIG. 175, and FIG. 175 is silk printing (part 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate will be described, and subsequently, a method of identifying electronic components having the same shape and confirmation of blown fuses will be described.

  As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown) that steps down the AC100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC24V game machine power supply voltage. When a plug of power supply wiring (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of AC24V which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of the island facility in the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (direct current + 35V, direct current + 12V, direct current + 5V and other direct current voltage) from the AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies the power supply board 630 to each internal board of the pachinko machine 1. are doing.

[16-1. Circuit configuration of power board]
As shown in FIG. 171, the circuit of the power board 630 mainly includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power destruction circuit 630g. Has been done.

  24V AC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply wire (not shown). AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), and fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal) and the type B fusing specified in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. Specifically, the AC24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1") is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and the AC24V line 2 is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. (Hereinafter, referred to as “AC24V2”) is input. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. When the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by the ON operation of the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. The supply is cut off, and the input-side terminal 1 and the output-side terminal 2 are electrically disconnected from each other, and the supply of the AC 24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

  In addition, while the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains ON, staff such as a game hall store clerk turn on the breaker in the game hall to operate the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breakers in the game hall.

[16-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and a choke coil L1. The output of the power switch 630a is provided. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. Varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that could not be reduced by capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC 24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. The earth connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the earth terminal ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 through a power earth wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

  The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power source line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC 24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC 24V. . The choke coil L1 is a component against common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power supply line connector DCN2 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit not supplied and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit not shown.

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[16-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

  The AC24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and also to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and also to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified into direct current by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 and are output respectively. The types of packages of the FET Q1, FET Q2, the Schottky barrier diode D1, and the Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to the heat radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 172). ing. The heat dissipation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Are output from the respective terminals and are input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct currents respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[16-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly passed through without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Are input respectively. Gate signals for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit are input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses the generation of harmonics by the switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Are output respectively. The types of packages of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the types of packages of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above), and heat radiation is performed. It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 172). The heat radiation fin HS2 is disposed in parallel with the above-described heat radiation fin HS1 by a predetermined distance dimension, and is soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. There is.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[16-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals of the electrolytic capacitors receive the direct currents having the power factor improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and at the same time, fuses FUSE3 (this embodiment). In the form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Then, the power is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as DC + 35V.

[16-1-5. Power supply circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply creation circuit 630f creates DC + 12V and DC + 5V from the input DC. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 from the power supply board 630, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to the pachinko machine 630. Supply to each substrate inside 1.

  The power generation circuit 630f controls the switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by performing the control of outputting the power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. Suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistaken for the power outlet of the AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than + 35V DC is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f uses the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal to reduce the common mode noise, and the power supply voltage has a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment). Then, it is set to about 50 V.), it becomes possible to output the gate signal for the power destruction circuit to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the power supply destruction circuit gate signal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destroys and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode and the power switch 630a is in the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g, By flowing all at once toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630.

[16-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end on the opposite side of the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the.

  The power supply destruction circuit 630g receives the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, and the FET Q5 operates to change the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. When a large current flows toward the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained. To be done. The FET Q5 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but the FET Q1 is the same. , Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions that are not in contact with the heat radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 arranged in parallel with each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. , The backsides of the packages of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are in a mutually parallel positional relationship. The FET Q5 is arranged between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2, and the back surface side of the package in the FET Q5 is fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 by FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and a Schottky barrier diode D1. Positions of D2, D9, and D10 that are perpendicular to each other with respect to the back surface of the package. It has become not at all fixed to the radiating fin HS1, HS2 (see Figure 172, and Figure 173). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 via the radiation fins HS1, HS2 so as not to be destroyed by the heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent). This is because it contributes to be destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power supply wiring is not inserted into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is higher than the game machine power supply voltage of AC24V. When plugged in, the power supply generation circuit 630f determines the magnitude of this power supply voltage to be a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the FET Q5 is controlled so as to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. When it is in the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short-circuit state in the power source destruction circuit 630g, and the power source generation circuit 630f outputs the current. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, and only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and the plug of the power supply wiring is commercialized. AC, which is the power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 00V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the gaming machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the gaming machine. In the state where the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g was destroyed by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 were replaced, and the plug of the power supply cord was inserted into the power outlet of AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Also, since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. In short mode of A large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the open state, causing a large current to flow through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown again. Becomes In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power cord is a pachinko island facility game machine. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V which is the power source voltage for the game, the game cannot be started.

[16-2. Identification method of electronic parts having the same shape]
Next, a method of identifying electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 and having the same shape will be described. As the electronic components having the same shape to be mounted on the power supply board 630, as described above, the FETs Q1 and Q2 of the rectifier circuit 630c and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 of the power factor correction circuit 630d and the Schottky. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, long Size: 20 mm transparent glass tube (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components of completely different types, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2. D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FET Q5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are the electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and having the same shape, the only electron which is destroyed. In order to make it easy to identify the parts, the silk screen printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has a characteristic different from the others.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. The line and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic parts are arranged are silk-printed on the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. Silk-printed TSLK1 to 4 and FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 172, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the heat radiation fins HS1, HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the silk-printed white outline on which the HS2 is arranged is connected to the white thick line portions of the silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8.

  On the other hand, for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. A silk print TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as ad1 and a white thick line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged, as silk printing. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 is performed. By visually observing the white slanted line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among the TSLKs 1 to 9, among electronic components of different types having the same shape, which electronic component is focused on in comparison with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. Accordingly, it is possible to very easily specify which of the different electronic components having the same shape is the electronic component to be destroyed.

  Further, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall to call the FET Q5 by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 shown as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so that the person in charge of the service center and the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall can easily communicate with each other. Become.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall on the FETQ5 by telephone, the person in charge of the clerk in the game hall, etc. is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 to be noted among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  In the above example, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, and the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diode are the same. Among the barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, the characteristic pattern silk printing is performed only within the outline of the FET Q5, and the outlines of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. Although the one in which silk printing is not performed is shown in the inside, the FETQ5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed is shown by the arrangement method. That is, since the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 arranged in parallel with each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, the radiation fins The back surfaces of the packages are in parallel with each other with respect to HS1 and HS2. On the other hand, the back surface side of the package of the FET Q5 is mutually opposite to the back surface of the package of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. It is located at a right angle to. Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 have the same shape, the FETQ5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed is the FETQ1, Since only Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are arranged at right angles, which of the different electronic parts having the same shape is the other electronic part? It is possible to identify whether the electronic component should be watched as compared with the component. Accordingly, it is possible to very easily specify which of the different electronic components having the same shape is the electronic component to be destroyed. The FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, is arranged only at right angles to the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. Even if the Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 becomes an employee such as a clerk in the game hall. When instructing the FETQ5 by telephone, by instructing to search for the package that is placed at right angle only, the staff such as the clerk in the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the FETQ5. It becomes easier for the person in charge of the game and the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to communicate with each other. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall on the FETQ5 by telephone, the person in charge of the clerk in the game hall, etc. is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 to be noted among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  In the above-mentioned example, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 which are electronic components having the same shape, the characteristic pattern silk printing is performed only within the outline of the FET Q5, and the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky are printed. The outlines of the barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are shown without silk printing, but the FET Q5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed is shown by the arrangement method. Therefore, for example, another method of indicating a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape by an arrangement method will be described. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape by a placement method. As a method of arranging a specific electronic component, for example, as shown in FIG. 176, when arranging FETs TQ1, TQ2, TQ3 as electronic components having the same shape on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. , TQ1 is arranged so that the heat dissipation plate mounting surface (rear surface of TQ1) of TQ1 is parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 in the vertical direction with respect to the power supply board 630 having a rectangular shape, TQ2 is arranged on the right side of TQ1 such that the heat dissipation plate mounting surface of TQ2 (rear surface of TQ2) is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and TQ3 is arranged on the right side of TQ2. The heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. It is allowed to place TQ3 diagonally. The heat dissipation plate mounting surface of TQ1 (rear surface of TQ1) and the heat dissipation plate mounting surface of TQ2 (rear surface of TQ2) are arranged in parallel to each other. The part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, which are FETs, are along the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ1, rear surface of TQ2, rear surface of TQ3) of each of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 when silk-screened. They may be arranged near TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, respectively (for example, the part number of TQ1 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1)). Then, the power supply board 630 is arranged in the vicinity of TQ1 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x, and the part number of TQ2 is the same as the part number of TQ2 along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2). It is arranged in the vicinity of TQ2 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 by rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, and the part number of TQ3 is the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (T 3 rear surface), the part number of TQ3 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), and counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. They may be rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) and arranged in the vicinity of TQ3), or may be arranged in the same direction in the vicinity of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, respectively. (The part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are all in the same direction. The part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are directed in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating counterclockwise at all. May be arranged in the vicinity of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, respectively, or the part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be rotated by 90 in the counterclockwise direction and the surface (mounting surface) 6 of the power supply board 630 may be rotated. Toward vertical 0x TQ1, TQ2, may be disposed in the vicinity respectively of TQ3). As described above, even if the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are electronic components having the same shape, the TQ3 is obliquely arranged with respect to the TQ1 and the TQ2. By using electronic components, it is possible to identify which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is an electronic component that should be watched as compared with other electronic components. This makes it possible to very easily specify which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is the specific electronic component. Further, since the TQ3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the TQ1 and the TQ2, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 plays the game by using the obliquely arranged TQ3 as a specific electronic component. When instructing a staff member such as a clerk in the hall about the FET TQ3 by telephone, the staff member such as a clerk in the gaming hall determines the position of the FET TQ3 by instructing to search for the FET that is diagonally arranged. Since the information can be accurately grasped, it becomes easy for the person in charge of the service center and the staff such as the clerk in the game hall to communicate with each other. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall by telephone to use the FET TQ3, the person in charge of the clerk in the game hall is the person in charge of the service center. According to the instruction of, the TQ3, which is the noteworthy FET, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy FET TQ3 can be distinguished from the FETs of the other electronic components TQ1 and TQ2. For the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline and the thick white line portion shown in FIG. 174 (a) are printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. For the FETs TQ1 and TQ2, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (a) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, while the FET 174 (b), a white outline shown in FIG. 174 (b), a plurality of white diagonal lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals in the outline, and a white outline indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged. Thick lines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing.

  Also, for the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (b), the white diagonal lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals within the outline, and the electronic components A thick white line indicating the arrangement direction may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, respectively. Since the white diagonal line ad1 shown in FIG. 174 (b) is a straight line inclined to the right by 45 degrees, the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (rear surface of TQ1) is the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. TQ1 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of, and the heat sink mounting surface of TQ2 (the rear surface of TQ2) is parallel to the right side of this TQ1 along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. TQ2 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) of TQ3 is counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 on the right side of TQ2. When the TQ3 is arranged diagonally by rotating it by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), the white slant line ad1 silk-printed with respect to TQ1 becomes a straight line inclined to the right by 45 degrees, and with respect to TQ2. Te shi Becomes linearly to click printed white shaded ad1 are is inclined 45 degrees to the right upward, white diagonal lines ad1 that is silk printing is the lateral direction line (horizontal line) with respect to TQ3. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk in the game hall by telephone on the TQ3 which is the FET, the staff such as the clerk in the game hall says "Silk printed. Please find the electronic component whose white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. ” It is possible to specify a certain TQ3. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the noteworthy FET TQ3 can be distinguished from the FETs of the other electronic components TQ1 and TQ2.

  Also, for the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline shown in FIG. 174 (b), white diagonal lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals within the outline, and the electronic component When a white thick line indicating the arrangement direction is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 by silk printing, the heat sink mounting surface of the TQ1 (rear surface of TQ1) is assumed to be the power supply board 630. The TQ1 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x, and the radiator plate mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is located on the right side of this TQ1 with respect to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The TQ2 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction, and the radiator plate mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) of the TQ3 is parallel to the right side of the TQ2 along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. When the TQ1, TQ2, and Tq3, which are FETs, are arranged parallel to each other in the up-down direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, the TQ1, TQ2, and TQ2 are arranged in parallel with each other. So that the white slant line ad1 silk-printed on both sides is a straight line inclined to the right by 45 degrees, while the white slant line ad1 silk-printed on TQ3 is a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. You may Even when electronic components of the same type having the same shape are arranged in parallel with each other in this way, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the staff such as the clerk in the game hall by FET to call. When instructing a certain TQ3, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall will ask the service center staff to find an electronic component whose silk-screened white diagonal line is a horizontal straight line (horizontal line). As instructed, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, it is possible to specify the noteworthy FET TQ3. Therefore, even when electronic components of the same type having the same shape are arranged in parallel to each other, among a plurality of electronic components, the noticeable FET TQ3 is replaced by the other electronic component FETs TQ1, It can be identified from TQ2.

  It should be noted that, in addition to TQ1, TQ2 and TQ3 which are FETs as a plurality of electronic components having the same shape, for example, a plurality of ICs having the same shape in which circuits such as an AND circuit, an OR circuit and a Schmitt trigger inverter circuit are respectively integrated. When arranging IC1, IC2, and IC3 on the substrate, the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 are arranged parallel to each other along the vertical direction of the substrate, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is a straight line in the left-right direction of the substrate. On the other hand, among the electronic components of the same type having the same shape, which electronic component is a specific electronic component is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction and arranged diagonally. It is very easy to identify if there is one. Further, since the IC3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the IC1 and the IC2, by making the obliquely arranged IC3 a specific electronic component, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 plays the game. When instructing the IC3 by telephone to a clerk such as a clerk in the hall, the clerk such as the clerk in the gaming hall can accurately grasp the position of the IC3 by instructing to search for the ICs arranged diagonally. Therefore, the person in charge of the service center can easily communicate with the staff such as the clerk of the game hall. Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as a clerk in the game hall to call IC3 by telephone, the clerk such as the clerk in the game hall is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the IC3, which is the IC of interest, from among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the board. Therefore, the IC1 and the IC2 can be distinguished from the IC3, which is the IC of note, among the plurality of electronic components, from the IC1 and the IC2 which are the ICs of the other electronic components. White outlines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate by silk printing for ICs IC1, IC2, and IC3, and white outlines for IC1 and IC2. On the other hand, for IC3, which is an IC, a white outline and a white diagonal line formed along the outer periphery of the outline are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate by silk printing, and the IC3 is printed. May be made to be able to inform that it is a specific electronic component. Further, the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 are arranged parallel to each other along the vertical direction of the substrate, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is directed at a predetermined angle α ( Although it is rotated diagonally by 45 degrees here and arranged diagonally, the longitudinal direction of the IC 3 may be arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate. In this case, the longitudinal direction of IC3 is perpendicular to the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic parts as described above, while the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic parts, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage AC100V is higher than the game machine power supply voltage AC24V. If it is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the fuse, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, so that one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Will melt down. In other words, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE2 and FUSE1, FUSE2 are destroyed and become an electronic component. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the destroyed electronic component among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 that are mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and have the same shape can be easily identified. It adopts the silk printing which has different characteristics from others.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V that is the commercial power supply voltage, is white as shown in FIG. As the outline of the above, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630.

  On the other hand, FIG. 175 (b) shows the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage. As described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed, and silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are solid-painted in white on the inner area of the white outline and the area around the support fittings, although support fittings (not shown) are soldered to the power supply board 630. The area ad2 is visible, and the area ad2, which is the area inside the white outline and which corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and the corresponding white solid area, is transparent. It can be reliably viewed through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape, white that is represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. By visually observing the solid-filled area ad2, it is possible to identify which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is an electronic component that should be watched in comparison with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is a trace in which the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage. Can be specified.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone to a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall, a solid white area represented as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2,3 having ad2, the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and thus the person in charge of the service center and the gaming hall It becomes easier to communicate with staff such as store staff.

  As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 by telephone to the person in charge of the game hall, such as the person in charge of the game hall, In accordance with the instruction of, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which should be noted, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from the other electronic component, the fuse FUSE3.

  Further, as described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are detachably attached to the support metal fittings (also referred to as fuse holders) soldered to the power supply board 630. When the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are blown, It can be exchanged. In the above example, a white diagonal line ad1 and a white solid region ad2, which are represented as characteristic patterns, are silk-printed on the inner region of the white outline and the region around the support fitting. However, as another example 1, as long as it is a region inside at least the white outline and corresponding to the transparent glass tube except for the periphery of the supporting metal, the region is silk-printed with a characteristic pattern. It suffices not to silk-print a characteristic pattern on the inside of the white outline and around the support fitting, or to fuse FUSE1, FUSE2 without silk-printing the outline of the support fitting. Only the outer shape of the area corresponding to the glass tube of FUSE 3 (not limited to the shape that matches the shape of the glass tube, but may be the area that partially overlaps the glass tube) may be silk-printed. For example, in an area corresponding to the glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, an elliptical outer shape line different from the normal outer shape line and silk-screen printing in which the inner area of the outer shape line is solidly white are applied, and the glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is formed. It may be possible to perform silk printing in which a normal rectangular outline and a region inside this outline are solidly painted in white in the corresponding area, and in this case, among the plurality of electronic components, depending on the outline shape of silk printing, The notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

  Further, in the above example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3, the characteristic pattern silk printing is performed only within the outline of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and the silk printing is not performed within the outline of the fuse FUSE3. However, as another example 2, of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 as the electronic components having the same shape to be mounted on the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, if it is easy to identify the destroyed electronic component. Silk printing may be performed within all the outlines of FUSE3. In this case, the shapes of the outlines of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 as the electronic parts to be destroyed are made different from the shapes of the outline of the fuse FUSE3, and the inside of the outlines is solid-printed in white with silk printing. May be.

  Further, in the above example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3, the characteristic pattern silk printing is performed only in the outline of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and the silk printing is not performed in the outline of the fuse FUSE3. However, only the outlines for arranging the respective support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are silk-printed, and among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3, the transparent glass of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 The fusing confirmation region formed in the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the tube may be used instead of silk printing. FIG. 177 shows examples (a) and (b) where it is difficult to use the fusing confirmation area, and examples (part 1) (c) and (d) where the fusing confirmation area can be used, and the fusing confirmation area can be used. Examples (part 2) are (e) and (f).

  As described above, when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet that is the commercial power supply voltage, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 blow the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 but not the fuse FUSE3. Therefore, for the fuse FUSE3 that does not blow if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is As shown in FIG. 177 (a), since the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse FUSE3 each have one fixed terminal and one connection terminal, a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered to the land pattern. With four through holes 630xs, and one wiring pattern 630xn in a region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, and around the four through holes 630xs and the wiring pattern 630xn. A foil stripping area is formed. Further, a board ground (GND) (hereinafter, also referred to as “solid land” in some cases) is formed on the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. An area of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a blowout confirmation area 630xc. Of the four through holes 630xs, the two through holes 630xs through which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. There is. When a dark color (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the dark color resist Silk-printed FSLK1 'is printed on the upper surface as a silk-printed outline having a white rectangular shape, which indicates the arrangement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. The reason for using this dark color resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material. This is because it is easier to confirm that the fuse has blown out if the contrast is different. In addition, the silk printing FSLK1 ′ as the silk printing which is the outer shape having a rectangular shape may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. It may surround a part of the outer shape, or may not show the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all, and may not be silk-printed at all. As described above, for the fuse FUSE3 that does not blow when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet that is the commercial power voltage, the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 and the corresponding surface of the power substrate 630 (mounted) The wiring pattern 630xn can be routed to the fusing confirmation area 630xc in the area of the surface 630x. The wiring pattern 630xn is not limited to one wiring pattern, and may be a plurality of wiring patterns. Even when the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is coated with a resist liquid of a bright color (eg, white) instead of a dark color (eg, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a dark color (for example, green or black) rectangular outer shape line indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is silk-printed on the light-colored resist as silk-printed FSLK1 ′. (This silk-printed FSLK1 ′ may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may enclose a part of the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. Alternatively, the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed. In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, silk is applied in a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the silk-screen printing of the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, an outline having a rectangular shape represented by a chain line of a bright color (for example, white) indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is silk-printed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply board 630. The silk-printed FSLK1 ′ is printed as (the silk-printed FSLK1 ′ may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3). It may be a part of it, or it may be one that does not show the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all and is not silk-printed at all.

  On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are blown when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, are provided on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630. As shown in FIG. 177 (c), the 630xp has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal on the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. Of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holder), two through holes 630xs1 having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted into the supporting metal fittings (fuse holder) at one end and soldered, and two supporting metal fittings (fuse holder) at the other end are provided. Two through-holes with a land pattern in which one terminal is inserted and soldered And a foil removal region 630xa1 having a rectangular shape so as to surround the two through holes 630xs1 and a foil removal region 630xa2 having a rectangular shape so as to surround the two through holes 630xs2. Has been formed. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. A region of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a blowout confirmation region 630xc, and a blowout confirmation region is provided between the foil removal region 630xa1 and the foil removal region 630xa2. 630xc is formed, and a solid ground is formed. The through hole 630xs1 in which the connection terminal is inserted in the two through holes 630xs1 and the through hole 630xs2 in which the connection terminal is inserted in the two through holes 630xs2 are the copper on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply board 630. Wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected on the foil surface. When a dark color (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the dark color resist Silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ are printed as silk-screened outlines having a white rectangular shape indicating the positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 on the top. The reason for using this dark color resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material. This is because it is easier to confirm that the fuse has blown out if the contrast is different. The silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ as the silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the above-described silk-printed FSLK1 ′, or may have different sizes. Good. The silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all, and may not be silk-printed at all. As described above, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that are blown when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the corresponding power supply substrate 630. Since the wiring pattern is not laid around in the fusing confirmation region 630xc of the front surface (mounting surface) 630x, the fusing confirmation region 630xc is not uneven due to the wiring pattern and the foil removal region around the wiring pattern. A flat surface can be formed without forming. This makes it easy to visually recognize the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by using the blowout confirmation area 630xc, which is a flat surface, as the background. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is broken. Modification (1) "may be described). Even when the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is coated with a resist liquid of a bright color (eg, white) instead of a dark color (eg, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline lines having a dark-colored rectangular shape showing the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are printed on the light-colored resist by silk-screen printing FSLK2 'and FSLK3' as silk-screen printing, respectively. (The silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Part of them may be respectively enclosed, or the outer shape of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modification (2) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area " There is a case to be described). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, silk is applied in a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the silk-screen printing of the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline line having a rectangular shape represented by a chain line of bright color (for example, white) indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ as silk-printed. Printed (the silk-printed FSLK2 ', FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. Part of the outer shape may be enclosed, or the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modification (3) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the board " There is a case to be mounting).

  In addition, in contrast to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that are blown when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is As shown in FIG. 177 (e), since the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 each have one fixed terminal and one connection terminal, a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered. There are formed four through holes 630xs having a land pattern and a foil removal region 630xa having a rectangular shape so as to surround the four through holes 630xs. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630. Of the foil removal area 630xa, the area of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is the fusing confirmation area 630xc. Of the four through holes 630xs, the two through holes 630xs through which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. There is. When a dark (for example, green or black) color resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. Silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' are printed on the resist as silk-printed outlines having a white rectangular shape indicating the positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. The reason for using this dark color resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material. This is because it is easier to confirm that the fuse has blown out if the contrast is different. The silk-printed FSLK2 ′ and FSLK3 ′ as the silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the above-described silk-printed FSLK1 ′, or may have different sizes. Good. The silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, or the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all, and may not be silk-printed at all. As described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are blown when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power source voltage, has the foil-removed region 630xa and the recessed portion. Of the foil removal area 630xa, since the wiring pattern is not drawn at all in the fusing confirmation area 630xc of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the fusing confirmation area With respect to 630xc, a flat surface can be formed without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil removal area around the wiring pattern. This makes it easy to visually recognize the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by using the blowout confirmation area 630xc, which is a flat surface, as the background. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is broken. Modification (4) "). Even when the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is coated with a resist liquid of a bright color (eg, white) instead of a dark color (eg, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline lines having a dark-colored rectangular shape showing the positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are printed on the light-colored resist as silk-printed silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3', respectively. (The silk-printed FSLK2 'and FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Part of them may be respectively enclosed, or the outer shape of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modification without wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area (5) " There is a case to be described). In addition, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (eg, green or yellow) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. May be silk-printed on. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the silk-screen printing of the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, the outline line having a rectangular shape represented by a chain line of a bright color (for example, white) indicating the arrangement position of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is silk-printed FSLK2 ′, FSLK3 ′ as silk-printed. Printed (the silk-printed FSLK2 ', FSLK3' may surround the outer shapes of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 respectively, or the support fittings (fuse holder) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may be enclosed. Part of the outer shape may be enclosed, or the outer shape of the support fittings (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modification (6) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the substrate " There is a case to be mounting).

  Further, in the above example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3, the characteristic pattern silk printing is performed only in the outline of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and the silk printing is not performed in the outline of the fuse FUSE3. However, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuse that is most easily blown may be indicated by the arrangement method. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing, of the three fuses, the fuse that is most easily blown by the arrangement method. As a method of arranging the fuses that are most easily blown, for example, as shown in FIG. 179, when the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, the power supply board 630 having a rectangular shape is arranged. On the other hand, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is directed to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The fuse F1 is arranged, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is along the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). The fuse F2 is arranged (in the left-right direction), and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is aligned with the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The predetermined angle α toward the clockwise direction (in this case, 45 degrees) is only rotated to place the fuse F3 diagonally. The fuses F1 and F2 are arranged at right angles to each other. The part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be arranged near the fuses F1, F2, and F3 along the longitudinal direction of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 when silk-printed. (For example, as for the part number of the fuse F1, the part number of the fuse F1 is rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 so as to face the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 in the vertical direction. The part number of the fuse F2 is arranged in the vicinity of F1, and the part number of the fuse F2 is in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 without rotating the part number of the fuse F2 in the counterclockwise direction along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2. Is arranged near the fuse F2, and the part number of the fuse F3 is counterclockwise along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3. By a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), and a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. They may be rotated and arranged in the vicinity of the fuse F3), or may be arranged in the vicinity of the fuses F1, F2, F3, respectively, in the same direction (the fuses F1, F2, F3 all have the same part number). Direction of the fuses F1, F2, F3 toward the left and right of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, F3 respectively. The fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be arranged by rotating the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 counterclockwise by 90 to move the fuses toward the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. F1, F2, may be disposed in the vicinity respectively of the F3). Thus, even if the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are electronic components having the same shape, the fuse F3 is obliquely arranged with respect to the fuses F1 and F2, and therefore the fuse F3 obliquely arranged. By using the fuse that is most easily blown, it is possible to identify which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is an electronic component that should be watched as compared with other electronic components. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is a trace in which the plug of the power cord is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified. Further, since the fuse F3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the fuses F1 and F2, the fuse F3 arranged obliquely is made to be the fuse that is most easily blown, and thus the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 When the person in charge of the game tells the fuse F3 by telephone to a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall, the clerk such as the clerk in the game hall positions the fuse F3 by instructing to search for a fuse that is diagonally arranged. Since it is possible to accurately grasp the information, it becomes easier for the person in charge of the service center and the staff such as the clerk in the game hall to communicate with each other. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 orders the fuse F3 by telephone to the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall, the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall is instructed by the person in charge of the service center. As described above, the fuse F3 to be noted can be specified from the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish the notable fuse F3 among the plurality of electronic components from the fuses F1 and F2 that are other electronic components. For the fuses F1 and F2, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (a) may be printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk printing (in this case, the above-mentioned case). Other examples 1 and 2 may be adopted.), And the wiring pattern 630xn may be routed without forming the fusing confirmation region shown in FIGS. 177 (a) and 177 (b). For the fuse F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. It may be printed, or the fusing confirmation region 630xc, which is a flat surface shown in FIGS. 177 (c) and (d) or FIGS. 177 (e) and (f), is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630. May be done.

  For the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed on the surface of the power supply substrate 630. It may be printed on (mounting surface) 630x. The longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is vertical to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630). And the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 along the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is directed to the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The fuse F2 is arranged, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. When the fuse F3 is obliquely arranged, the area ad2 which is silk-printed on the fuse F1 and which is solidly painted white is oriented 90 degrees in the vertical direction. Thus, the white solid area ad2 silk-printed on the fuse F2 is directed to 0 degree (zero degree) in the left-right direction, and the white solid area ad2 silk-printed on the fuse F3. Is turned 45 degrees. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk in the game hall by telephone to instruct the TQ3 that is the FET, the clerk such as the clerk in the game hall says "Silk printed. Please find the fuse F3 that should be noted among the multiple electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, as instructed by the person in charge of the service center, "Please find an electronic component whose white solid area faces 45 degrees." It is possible to identify. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish the notable fuse F3 among the plurality of electronic components from the fuses F1 and F2 that are other electronic components.

  For the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175 (b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed on the surface of the power supply substrate 630. When printed on the (mounting surface) 630x, the fuse F1 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. The fuse F2 is arranged on the right side of the fuse F2 so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is arranged on the right side of the fuse F2. When the fuse F3 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the 630, that is, the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are mutually connected to the power supply board 630. When arranged in parallel along the up-down direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x, the white solid area ad2 is entirely oriented 90 degrees in the up-down direction, and thus the white solid area ad2. It is difficult to identify the electronic component only by Therefore, in such a case, instead of the area ad2 that is solidly painted in white, a plurality of white diagonal lines ad1 'arranged at equal intervals in the outline may be silk-printed. In this case, for example, the white diagonal line ad1 ′ silk-printed on the fuses F1 and F2 is a straight line inclined to the right by 45 degrees, while the white diagonal line ad1 ′ silk-printed on the fuse F3 is white. The ad1 'may be a straight line (horizontal line) in the left-right direction. Even if electronic components of the same type having the same shape are arranged in parallel with each other, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the fuse F3 by calling a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall. When instructing, the staff such as the clerk at the game hall should follow the instruction of the service center staff, "Please find the electronic component where the white line with silk print is the horizontal straight line (horizontal line)". In addition, the fuse F3 to be noted can be specified among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, even if electronic components of the same type having the same shape are arranged in parallel with each other, the noteworthy fuse F3 among the plurality of electronic components is identified from the fuses F1 and F2 which are other electronic components. can do.

[16-3. Fuse blowout confirmation]
Next, a description will be given of the blowout confirmation of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 of the same type having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal). When the fuses are blown, the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes are broken. Soot adheres to the inside of a transparent glass tube. Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power source voltage, it will melt down. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described silk printing FSLK2, 3 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing for the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse wire (metal element) can be easily confirmed. ing. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tubes excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the white solid areas ad2 are represented as characteristic patterns. By visually observing the white solid area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is broken. be able to.

  As a result, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 with the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by mistakenly inserting it into a power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, and turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are traces. Of these, the fuse wire (metal element) housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes is broken and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. I argued, "Even if you insert the plug of the power supply into the power outlet, you cannot turn on the power, so it is an initial defect." , Its own work miss (wiring miss), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as the silk printing on the fuse FUSE3, as described above, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, the area of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk printing FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3 is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area (1), no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of the (metal element) is improved, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) is broken.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply substrate 630 is connected to the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has not only the function of relaying various signals but also the function of supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). A fuse FUSE (not shown) (diameter: 5 mm, length: 20 mm, transparent in the present embodiment) is shown on the interface board 635 as a trace that the plug of the power supply cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100 V which is the commercial power supply voltage. Only one glass tube (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal) and type B fusing specified in the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law are provided, and the silk shown in FIG. 175 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above. The print is printed on its mounting surface. A green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to the silk printing on the fuse FUSE (not shown). No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (that is, the solid glass corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) is filled. Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green register area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing, through the transparent glass tube, the area of the solid green resistor corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown). The visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element) is improved, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 is provided on one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630.

  The surface (mounting surface) of the interface board 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage Alternatively, the fusing confirmation area formed in the area may be used instead of silk printing. FIG. 178 is an example (No. 1) (a), (b) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used, and an example (No. 2) (c), (d) in which the fusing confirmation region can be used.

  A fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 (which may be simply referred to as a “not shown fuse” below) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power voltage. On the copper foil surface 635xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. Since there are two connection terminals, two through-holes each having a land pattern in which two terminals are inserted into one of the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown) Two terminals are inserted into the hole 635xs1 and the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) at the other end. Two through holes 635xs2 having a land pattern to be soldered together are formed, and a foil removal region 635xa1 having a rectangular shape so as to surround the two through holes 635xs1 and two through holes 635xs2 are formed. Thus, the foil removal region 635xa2 having a rectangular shape is formed. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635. A region of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is a blowout confirmation region 635xc, and a blowout confirmation region 635xc is provided between the foil removal region 635xa1 and the foil removal region 635xa2. Are formed, and the solid ground is formed. The through hole 635xs1 through which the connection terminal is inserted among the two through holes 635xs1 and the through hole 635xs2 through which the connection terminal is inserted among the two through holes 635xs2 are the copper on the back surface (solder surface) side of the interface board 635. Wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected on the foil surface. When a dark color (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the dark color resist A silk-printed IFSLK is printed as a silk-printed outline having a white rectangular shape, which indicates an arrangement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). The reason for using this dark color resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material. This is because it is easier to confirm that the fuse has blown out if the contrast is different. The silk-printed IFSLK as the silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk-printed FSLK1 ′ of the power supply board 630 described above, or may have a different size. Good. Further, this silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may enclose a part of the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. Alternatively, a fuse supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed. In this way, for a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which is blown when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, a transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is used. Since no wiring pattern is routed to the fusing confirmation area 635xc on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the corresponding interface board 635, a wiring pattern and a foil removal area around this wiring pattern are formed for this fusing confirmation area 635xc. It is possible to form a flat surface without forming any unevenness due to. Accordingly, by using the blowout confirmation area 635xc, which is a flat surface, as a background, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is broken ( This aspect may be referred to as "a modified example (1) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board"). Even when the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635 is coated with a bright color (eg, white) resist solution instead of a dark color (eg, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed IFSLK is printed as a silk-printed outline having a dark-colored rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) on this light-colored resist (this silk-printed IFSLK). May surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. The fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse is not shown at all, and may not be silk-printed at all (this embodiment is referred to as “a modified example (2) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the interface board”). May be listed). Further, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, silk is applied in a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the silk-screen printing of the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk-printed IFSLK is printed as silk-printed outlines having a rectangular shape represented by chain lines of a bright color (for example, white) indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may partially surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. However, the outer shape of the fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown is not shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all (this embodiment is referred to as “a modification example (3) in which the wiring pattern is not provided in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board. ) ”May be described).

  In addition, a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that blows when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “fuse not shown”). On the other hand, on the copper foil surface 635xp on the front surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), one fixed terminal is provided on the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown). 4 through holes 635xs having a land pattern in which a total of 4 terminals are inserted and soldered, and a foil removal region having a rectangular shape so as to surround the four through holes 635xs. And 635xa are formed. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635. A region of the front surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) in the foil removal region 635xa is a blowout confirmation region 635xc. Of the four through holes 635xs, the two through holes 635xs through which the connection terminals are inserted are connected by forming wiring patterns (not shown) on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) side of the interface board 635. There is. When a dark (eg, green or black) color resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. Silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the resist as a silk-printed outline having a white rectangular shape, which indicates the arrangement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). The reason for using this dark color resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse is generally silver compared to the color of the material. This is because it is easier to confirm that the fuse has blown out if the contrast is different. The silk-printed IFSLK as the silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk-printed FSLK1 ′ of the power supply board 630 described above, or may have a different size. Good. Further, this silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may enclose a part of the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. Alternatively, a fuse supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed. In this way, for the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which is blown when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, the foil removal region 635xa is formed and the recess is formed. Although formed, the wiring pattern is not drawn at all in the fusing confirmation region 635xc of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown). A flat surface can be formed in the fusing confirmation region 635xc without forming any unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil removal region around the wiring pattern. Accordingly, by using the blowout confirmation area 635xc, which is a flat surface, as a background, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is broken ( This aspect may be referred to as "a modified example (4) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board"). Even when the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635 is coated with a bright color (eg, white) resist solution instead of a dark color (eg, green or black). It is also possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, a silk-printed IFSLK is printed on the light-colored resist as a silk-printed outline having a dark-colored rectangular shape indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) (this silk-printed IFSLK). May surround the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown. No fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) external shape is not shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all (this embodiment is referred to as “a modified example (5) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the interface board”). May be listed). Further, after a resist liquid of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, silk is applied in a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. It may be printed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the fusing of the fuse by the contrast between the silk-screen printing of the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk-printed IFSLK is printed as silk-printed outline lines having a rectangular shape represented by chain lines of a bright color (for example, white) indicating an arrangement position of a fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround an outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may partially surround an external shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. However, the outer shape of the fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) is not shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all (this embodiment is referred to as “a modification example in which the wiring pattern is not provided in the fusing confirmation region of the interface board (6 ) ”May be described).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one substrate, which is the power substrate 630. Although various electronic components and the like were provided, it is possible to separately provide the two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminals DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply generation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , L3, L4, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 outputted from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, they are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630A. It

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a substrate such as a power supply substrate capable of creating various power sources required for a gaming machine based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014). -008221 publication (FIG. 2)). By the way, when a person in charge of the service center of the gaming machine manufacturer instructs a salesperson such as a clerk in the game hall to instruct specific electronic components of the board by telephone, it is mounted on the board as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. There is a problem in that it is difficult to identify a noteworthy electronic component from the plurality of electronic components.

  Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine including a substrate such as a power supply substrate that can generate various power supplies required for the game device based on an external power supply supplied from outside the game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014). -008221 publication (FIG. 2)). By the way, even if a person in charge of the service center of the game machine manufacturer instructs a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall by telephone to confirm whether or not the fuse wire of the fuse provided on the board is blown and cut. However, it is difficult to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums using game medals ( It is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel). Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into the key hole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise, so that the front door (front frame) 6002 is main body. The part (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the lock unit (not shown) to form a main body (box) 6004. It is used for locking and closing the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to the metal cylinder cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, the metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. A rotation transmission member (not shown) made of metal, which is inserted into the key hole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key, is provided. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is configured such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder 654 of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By forming the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) is transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated. You can If the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit are in contact with each other in the state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, metal The manufactured locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and the main body part (not shown) through a door frame metal ground wire. The box 6004 is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame gland on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (grounding) it to the island facility of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An open switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This opening switch detects opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electric signal by the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. However, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near the metal locking device and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An opening switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative portions are not plated with decoration at all, and some are decorated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter. Among the various decorative parts, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back sides are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit forming the front door 6002 via wiring not shown. (Various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring not shown, while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. Some are electrically connected). Thus, by transmitting the electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the board ground. Also, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into the decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. Through the main body (box) 6004 to the ground substrate provided inside, and from the ground substrate through the island equipment ground wire to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  It should be noted that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a charge eliminating unit at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002. An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a charge eliminating portion at a portion on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and other are the front and back surfaces. Some of them have decorative plating on their entire surface. Among various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on all front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit and electrical , The ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the island facility ground line, but the door frame metal ground line was used. The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the main body (box) 6004 without electrically connecting to the ground board. It may be hermetically connected to each other. The power board is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and almost no current flows, if an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , And has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply substrate to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply substrate by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006. The medal slot 6008, the bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this protrusion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and storage adjustment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the set value is mounted. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to the housing of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the portion (box) 6004. Further, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the above-mentioned setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) The setting display 1310g configured by a single device, the above-described setting change permission lamp 1310z, and the like may be mounted.

  The setting key switch 1311a has substantially the same configuration as the one provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above, and the setting key is inserted into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing thereof and is rotated. A setting key cylinder is stored. A surface (rear surface) opposite to the entire surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder in which a setting key insertion slot is provided, and the metal cylindrical ( Alternatively, a surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the casing (or a rectangular shape) is arranged substantially flush with a surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. When the setting key cylinder is housed in the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing, the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. Has become.

  The configurations (including other configurations (modifications)) of the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board box 1320, etc. are substantially the same as those provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. In addition to the above configuration, the description thereof is omitted because it has the same effect. However, as an example, an electromagnetic wave generated by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is charged and electrostatically discharged. Even if noise enters from the front surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) casing of the setting key switch 1311a or the setting key cylinder of the setting change board 1311, the surface of the setting change board 1311 ( In the copper planes on the mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface), the foil removal areas SINSx, SIN of the setting change substrate 1311 By forming y, the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 in which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. A pair of long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 facing each other having a long slot shape along with are electrically connected from the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. Since the set key switch 1311a is in an insulated state, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic charging of a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a and electrostatic discharge is generated, the setting key switch 1311a has a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing or It can be damped by the setting key cylinder. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic charging and electrostatic discharge of a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, has no influence on the board ground, and does not change the ground line transmitting the board ground. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  It should be noted that the setting key cylinder is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing and the setting key cylinder so that the setting key cylinder has a metallic (or rectangular) shape. ) The structure that is rotatable with respect to the housing is adopted, and the structure in which the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected and insulated from each other is also adopted. Good. Even with such a configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing, the electromagnetic wave noise is generated by the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. ) Is prevented from entering the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311 via the foil removing regions SINSx and SINSy. It is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. That is, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing from entering the setting change substrate 1311 to the substrate ground by the foil stripping regions SINSx and SINSy. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing on the side of the setting change board 1311, so that the electromagnetic wave noise can enter through the setting change board 1311. The progress of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the board, can be surely stopped from proceeding to the board ground, and the ground line transmitting the board ground (ground) is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided through the display window. You can see through. The three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a light-transmissive pattern band, in which a plurality of types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as pattern information, is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are drive-controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. Is visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310, as a game medium, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the variable display of the symbol information is started. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

  According to this slot machine 6000, a front door 6002 as a door that can be opened and closed is provided on the front side, and a main control board 1310 housed in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted and a first key (game hall). The first operation (when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004) can be performed by operating a regular metal key carried by an employee such as a store clerk. As a first device, a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a second key (setting key) other than the first key are operated to perform a second operation (setting value is set). The main control board box as the second device in which the signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic component while the change can be performed (when confirming the set value currently set). Thirteen 0 and a, a setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change substrate 1311 to be housed together with the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting a plurality of types of winning probabilities in a settable state (when changing a set value), and is also set in a checkable state of a current set value being set (set). This is the case when confirming the current setting value). The metal locking device provided on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the case of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground side and insulated.

  Specifically, the metal cylindrical cylinder body that is the casing of the metal locking device of the front door 6002 is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24V AC. Connected to. Further, by forming the foil removal regions SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal tubular shape of the setting key switch 1311a ( (Or rectangular) a pair of facing long through holes SLH1, which have a long slot shape along the vertical direction of the setting change substrate 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the housing can be inserted. The SLH 2 can be electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid earth (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. It is electrically insulated from the ground).

  As described above, since the housing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, noise (electromagnetic noise) is temporarily generated in the metal locking device. Even if it invades, the invading noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, is not changed, and the front door (front frame) Since the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of 6002 is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated, the metallic casing is temporarily assumed. Even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters a rectangular (or rectangular) casing, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered is attenuated by the metallic tubular (or rectangular) casing itself, so that electronic Parts are mounted It is possible to prevent giving the variation of the ground line in the main control board 1310, that is a substrate. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

  In addition, a metal cylindrical cylinder body that is a housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the slot machine 6000. While being electrically connected to the ground side which is N (neutral), the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) case which is the case of the setting key switch 1311a is a frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000. And, the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000 is not electrically connected and is insulated. As a result, the metal cylindrical cylinder body is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000. On the other hand, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) casing is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the ground side which is N (neutral) of 24 V AC supplied to the slot machine 6000. It can be in a state of being insulated without being electrically connected.

  In addition, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by a metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is a main body part (box) 6004). (After releasing from), a plurality of types of winning probabilities can be set by a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. (When changing the set value), it is possible to set the current set value that has been set to the checkable state (when checking the set value that has been set). Thus, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and the locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is the main body part (box)). If it is not after the release from 6004), the setting key switch 1311a is accessed to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the setting value can be set (when the setting value is changed) or the setting value can be confirmed (set). (When confirming the current set value), the security of the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

  In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls into the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The variable display of the symbol information is started based on this, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-providing state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as a game medium to the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame lower unit 120 Bulging part 123 Device placement part 130 Upper plate (reservoir plate)
131 Storage area 131a Front area 131b Side area 132 Bottom wall 133 Rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front peripheral wall 135 Supply port 136 Delivery port 137 Alignment part 138 Storage light emission decoration part (light emission decoration part)
138a LED
150 Door frame production device (production device)
1000 front constituent member 1100 game panel 1110 panel plate 1120 panel holder 1300 main control unit 1310 main control board 1500 peripheral control unit 1510 peripheral control board (production control means)
1511 peripheral control unit (production control means)
1512 production display control unit (production control means)
1600 production display device (production display means)
3000 back unit 3200 second back production unit (front decoration body)
3210 Rotating ornament (front ornament)
3228 Back second outer decorative body (front decorative body)
3229 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3230 Back second inner circumference decoration body (front decoration body)
3300 Back third rendering unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring ornament (movable ornament)
3312 First decorative body 3313 Second decorative body 3320 Back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 Lower unit 3331 Lower vertical ring ornament (movable ornament)
3332 First decorative body 3333 Second decorative body 3340 Back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left side ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 1st decoration body 3353 2nd decoration body 3360 Back 3rd left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right side ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 1st decoration body 3373 2nd decoration body 3380 Back 3rd right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

A game board where games using game balls are played on the front side,
A frame body to which the game board is detachably attached from the front,
A game machine provided with a rear side of the frame main body, and including a game ball supply section for receiving a game ball from outside the game machine and guiding the game ball to a downstream side,
The game ball supply unit,
A ball storage unit that receives game balls from the outside of the gaming machine,
While guiding the game sphere stored in the sphere storage part to the downstream side, a ball guide part formed with a discharge hole capable of dropping foreign matter,
An opaque portion provided above the sphere guiding portion and formed of an opaque member,
The sphere guiding portion has a visual recognition portion that allows the inner surface side of the sphere guiding portion to be visually recognized,
A game machine characterized in that, after the game board is detached, the visible portion is visible from the front of the game machine, and the opaque portion is visible through the visible portion.